Home

TrueGrid ® User`s Manual, Volume 1

1. after Clear All Prepend Insert Mode Insert Append Delete from to Figure 180 Movement of a Control Point TrueGrid Draw Movement of a Control Point Figure 181 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 189 Creating the Intersection of Two Surfaces The method used to intersect two surfaces requires an initial approximate intersection curve formed by a polygonal line You need to select a sequence of points that are near the intersection of the two surfaces More points are needed near greater curvature You will need about point every 120 degrees of curvature If the curve of intersection has a small amount of curvature you may only need to select a starting and ending point These points do not need to be at the intersection of the two surfaces just close enough that the projection algorithm will converge to the intersection of the surfaces The selection of points with this type of curve ion accept after Clear All
2. Insert Append Prepend M Insert Mode Delete from to Figure 182 Curve of Intersection creation is the same as in other curve creation types that use the Point List However the Z Buffer option is preferred because you can display just the two surfaces of intersection and easily pick off coordinates near their intersection The following pictures demonstrate the steps used to create the intersection of a polygon surface and a cylinder This example used the Prepend and Accept buttons to close the polygon line causing the refined curve to be closed as well Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 190 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual oo 77 m ui ETT Ig A ae ELL LAA H3 17717 LF SK WIS d zy cpu ON EGEL ee Figure 183 Step 1 Figure 184 Step 2 oS en gt p LTS F 7 L L ZZ E BELL LALLY LZ a EZ ra Y ze E LL i E D Z7 LIA AF Y SE Es ao ll 7 l7 ewe Figure 185 Step 3 Figure 186 Step 4 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 191 a 9
3. Set Editing Options How to Create a Face Set E remove Toggle Clear i A Selection Options Select Pick and Sets in the Environment Window NUIT Then in the Sets Window select the Faces option Pez Figure 92 EEN Beams Nodes Required to Select Shells 1 2 3 4 ETE Q Shells Move the mouse to the Physical Window Draw a curve around the faces you want to select while holding the Left Mouse Button Figure 93 Release the Left Mouse Button and the curve is automatically closed by a straight line segment between endpoints The Bricks Q Bricks Polygons Figure 92 Sets Window Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 135 enclosed area turns white and the selected faces are identified by crosses Figure 94 The selection is based on visible nodes so you can achieve various effects by setting different display modes Wire Hide or Fill TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 93 Selection Curve Figure 94 Face Set is Marked You can modify the active face set by adding removing and toggling faces Add Remove Toggle options After editing you can save the active set by typing its name and hitting the Save button A face can originate from a linear or quadratic she
4. block 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 17 i EE 15 13 17 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 17 NN SU sti 23 2 Cof X ajsd 1 W ro rrg 114444 N LN Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 303 rrgi remove a progression from display rrgi progression Example sdisp99294 block 1 5 13 17 T 13 5 25 ata lz L 513 17 CS ES m jp Figure 310 Outer Faces Removed strghl highlight region strghl region Remarks This has the same effect as selecting a region in the computational window It is useful when building a demonstration input file strghli highlight index progression strghl progression Remarks This has the same effect as selecting a progression in the computational window It is useful when building a demonstration input file Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 304 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Example block 3 578912345134 0 2345 6 amp 1 234512 2 4 e mesh definition strghli 1 3 0 4 5 2 3 0 4 573 4 c progression highlight cirghl clear highlighted selection clIrghl no arguments Figure311 highlighted progression Remarks Typing the F2 function key has the same effect as this command 10 Labels in the Picture labels specify type of label to be displayed labels option where the option can be any of off
5. c Mid plane beams in the orthogonal direction ibmi 1 4 3 4 2 5 1 1 2 j si 7 1 c Beams in the k direction kbmi 2 3 2 0 5 3 4 111 3i si 9 1 c Beams in the j direction jbmi 2 3 3 4 2 0 5 11 1 4 i si 31 1 C Special care is needed to avoid merging at the butterfly nseti 1 4 3 0 4 2 0 5 sl mate 1 endpart merge if Smrgrb eq 1 then nset s2 1 1576 1915 si nset sl 53 m si nset s2 53 s else nset s2 1 1576 1695 nset s3 1 1696 1915 si nset sl 53m si nset s2 53 s si nset s2 54 m si nset s3 54 s si nset s3 55 m si nset s1 55 s endif stp 001 c Merge the components Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 436 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 20 Diagnostics Commands mea choose a way to measure mesh quality mea region option where option can be volume to integrate the volume of each element avolume to integrate the absolute volume jacobian to compute the determinant of the Jacobian orthogon to measure deviations from orthogonality 90 degrees smallest for the smallest dimension of each element pointvol to calculate the volume with a one point integration formula aspect to calculate the aspect ratio for each element warp to measure the angle between opposite corners of each element face stiffn measure the stiffness find the condition number of the Jacobian Remarks A histogram is draw to s
6. E Figure 191 COEDG window This tool can simplify the procedure of building a composite curve and cut down on the time significantly To activate this feature go to the 3D Curves menu and click on the COEDG button Display the surfaces with the sdint off command so that the surface interior lines are not shown Then label the surface edges and choose Label under the Pick panel in the environment window The first step is to select the first surface edge Based on this selection the next likeliest surface edge in the picture will be highlighted If this is the next desired edge then the Yes button should Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 193 be clicked on Otherwise an alternative must be selected This process continues until all of the desired edges in the proper order have been selected If the likeliest next edge is always the desired next edge one can create such a composite curve very quickly simply by clicking on the Yes button for each component If a wrong edge is selected it can be deleted For example if the last edge selected was wrong not only will the wrong edge be appended but the next one will be highlighted for selection First click on the Delete button in the COEDG window Then move the mouse to the picture and select the appropriate edge by clicking on its label You may have to zoom or frame
7. Bricks Q Bricks Polygons Figure 89 Sets Window 134 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual belonging to the selected area are selected Three node shells can be selected with this option too 5 8 Bricks with this number of nodes belonging to the selected area are selected Mid Faces beams or shells with mid node belonging to the selected area are selected How to Create a Node Set Select Pick and Sets in the Environment Window The Nodes option is selected Figure 89 Move the mouse to the Physical Window Depress the Left Mouse Button and draw a curve around the nodes you want to select while continuing to hold the Left Mouse Button Release the Left Mouse Button and the curve is automatically closed by a straight line segment between endpoints The enclosed area turns white and the selected nodes are identified The selection is based on uecria pra visible nodes so you can change your selection by changing to a different display mode Wire Hide Fill The selected nodes are identified by squares Figure 91 TrueGrid Draw You can modify the set by adding removing and toggling nodes Figure 90 Selection Curve Add Remove Toggle options You can save the active set by typing its name in the Pe Set save window and hitting the Save button Save As
8. Set Editing Options Figure 99 Sets Window Polygons The selection is based on visible nodes so you can achieve various effects by setting different display modes Wire Hide Fill You can modify the polygon set by adding removing and toggling polygons Add Remove Toggle options Draw the picture in hide or fill Choose to select with 3 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 139 or 4 nodes If you use 1 or 2 nodes you may be selecting polygons that may not be visible This may be useful in some cases Then you may have to remove some polygons Use the 1 node selection mode and draw the picture in wire mode Click on the Remove button Then circle a single node from a polygon you want removed Be sure that this node is not connected to polygons you wish to keep There are many variations to this technique which you will develop as the need arises Figure 101 Polygons circled Figure 100 Selected Polygons Marked it is difficult to determine if you have made the correct selections One way to see if the selections are correct is to turn the polygon set into a surface Remove all interior polygons from surfaces using the sdint command and draw the surface in Wire graphics mode Alternatively use the mouse to rotate and as
9. c Global replication 3 times by rotation for grep 0 12 3 90 180 and 270 degrees c Cylinder part gt tube made from hexahedrons cylinder 1 6 1 3 5 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 1 10 2 4 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 360 0 20 c Definition of the orientation point in the default coordinate c system of the part in Cylindrical coordinates r eta z orpt 0 20 5 c Assignment of region 2 and type 1 s of slid interf sir 277 LS c Assignment of region 1 and type 1 s of slid interf sii 1 l s C Assignment of region 1 and type 1 s of slid interf sii 2 1l s lct 1 my 20 c Definition of the local transformation lrep 1 c Transformation 1 is applied merge labels size 3 c Scale the size of arrows rx 20 ry 20 rz 20 c Rotate mesh in window center c Center picture in window set tv disp c Set hide display option co si 1m c Display of master side of sliding interface 1 co si 1 s c Display of slave side of sliding interface 1 sinfo c sliding interface information Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 410 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual shtoso shell to solid interface shtoso region id info where info can be edge for shells only iba for solids only jba for solids only kba for solids only where b isthe number of nodes before the edge
10. Alternatively go to the Pick panel select either surface curve edge or BB Click the mouse button in the Show field and type the label of the geometric object Then click on the Show button or hit return in order to see that object highlighted Pick Pick Objects with a Lasso Surface Select the type of geometric object in the Pick panel Then with the Left Mouse Button in the A Physical Window click and drag to create the diagonal of a rectangular box The box will be Global SES overlaid in white When the Left Mouse Button Pick Node F5 F7 is released all objects ofthe selected type with some portion in the rectangular box will be Figure 69 Show button in the pick panel highlighted If only one object is selected its label will appear in the show field within the Environment Window If more than one is captured with the lasso then the word many will appear in the show field In the pictures that follow the surfaces are displayed by the Surfaces and Show All options from the Display List panel The Pick panel is activated and the option Surfaces is selected Then the mouse is moved into the Physical Window and a lasso is created Figure 70 The selected surfaces are highlighted black Figure 71 and th
11. The Delete button removes portions of the mesh This is one of the most important features because it is easy to define a multi partitioned block and then whittle it down to conform to the desired geometry The procedure is to select a region or index progress and click on the Delete button This feature is equivalent to using the de or dei command When you click on the Delete button the equivalent dei command is printed to the text window and the session file tsave This action is available in the Part Phase only In the following figures the mesh region was at first highlighted cyan in the Computational Window Figure 121 The highlighted mesh region is deleted by pressing the Delete button Figure 122 TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 121 Before Delete Figure 122 After Delete Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 156 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Attaching the Mesh to Objects pelete ECEN Figure 123 Attach Button The Attach button is equivalent to changing the initial coordinates of a region of the mesh These initial coordinates are used by the projection method to place the selected region of the mesh to the closest points on surfaces portions of the mesh can be projected to surfaces using the Project button It is necessary to have the mesh positioned close to surfaces before projection in order to get the expected results where
12. ae 22 x 7 ZA LT 2 ZZ 2 Se 2 e ZZ lt 2 LZ SSN SSS Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 154 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Move 3D Curve Control Points There are three types of 3D curves that can be generated interactively by selecting points with the mouse They are LP3 SPLINE and TWURF All three use the Point List window to form a table of control points To use the mouse to interactively modify the coordinates of one of these control points first select one of the control points This can be done in three ways 1 click on the row corresponding to the control point to be modified 2 move the mouse close to the control point in the picture and click the F5 key 3 use the arrow keys to scroll the focus of the curser to the desired control point In the Move Pts Panel click on the Point List button under Apply to This button is normally grey indicating that it cannot be used It turns black and white when you are using the Point List window indicating it is an option You can now move the selected control point with all the options under Constrain to as described above Be sure to save this modified curve before you close the Point List window This will produce a curd command in the session tsave file Move a Point in a Polygon Surface Polygon surfaces are sometimes irregular having been extracted fro
13. 200005 43 PEDE odiis audio Lei de ust oe ath qd Dos 21 24 workstation o oo ooo 70 HYE iat awe eagles wears ATAR 238 I equations usais 2 25 9 e ada 289 ESUffIX 0r sx E A 97 128 ECONOMIA wie aah A 33 I index 30 44 51 84 97 100 246 TAGE A als see kale des toa Ld 21 WMO deo IN 46 IBM PT 21 24 417 Utt oues oes Ioab freto tone eS 20 workstation sae ede 70 A O ee aceon 420 IDZOle o 24 4 GoAsUAL TA 97 ZO ad aah ee 107 TC OM ts ada a ala 72 WES ce ein etek de 20 23 62 142 441 example dana ia 65 UE e a ener 37 61 WMO A 20 IGES surfaces cusa do hs 167 A ende Reb tetur PR es 441 lg sfile doa A 142 lgespd uod bi o 441 A E SES eit 359 A x Oa A 360 A O dee Cea teta 216 example 1233 s vasi te Fonte eer 216 hierarchy cioe ee za 198 208 Tinh Seg or arse a dee SE e RUE IS 216 example 4 3 8423 nad 216 Include Gus Cs EA Deo 58 command Savin didis astu 299 Index Bar al zen rote Der pin 84 Index bars 51 97 107 128 142 detail Rotas obser 98 ZONE edad 97 107 Index progression 48 96 127 128 attachimp des psa ied roe 157 GIGA a ter SA og MEE AA 177 dla op dace mes 156 movement esses 148 PUE 25 poda as one cora NEA 177 selection geometrical 97 LAICOS usos san Sue sta roba tutta La 33 HIStOTY S rest fpa Rees 295 LIS Tis Jott iato dedo af dte ded Weare ded 34 SION 22 den cesi A 127 INGEN 45s ani od acia 21 INGRID epith
14. 222 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Initial mesh Vertex initialized to intersection Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 223 When an edge of the mesh is attached to a 3D curve and projected to a surface the nodes of the edge will retain the shape of the 3D curve projected to that surface The 3D curve does not need to be on the surface or even close to the surface For example sd 1 csps 2 2 1111 001003100 1 00 1 00 100 1000100 curd 1 csp3 00 569 992 568 534 726 656 e329 515 669 581 330 651 G11 257 5647 block 1 6 11 1 11 1 1 5 9 1 9 6 curs 2112211 sfi 1 sdl 0 0 0 1 Ro H 65 1 0 C p 3D curve off of a surface Attach and project When an edge of the mesh is projected to one surface a plane is constructed that is approximately perpendicular to the surface This is done by averaging the normals of the surface at the two end points of the edge Then the edge is placed on the intersection of this plane and the surface However when an edge is attached to a 3D curve and projected to one surface the edge is not forced to be on this additional planer surface When an edge is attached to a 3D curve with the end ofthe edge projected
15. 279 Iplan Sfi option 276 Island transition 00 401 ot aset d rta 407 ISE AA te A E 407 Italicized Synta 25 4 eera en et ees 56 J equations dias CesexttvEe s 289 A Pawnee d Bakes 33 J index AAA 30 44 51 84 97 100 A A 21 INO AA EOS 46 Jacobian a ea ok ie tate hss 437 JOM 5 ictus a Nego OT te og dg 424 IDEO 20er a Ah dos 20 ABER or shes Sacco d b HRS od 425 Jd Mise eee Sid ase le at M eiae d 357 Joint A O Etech E 357 Joint replication 443 445 M oet o ote gero utate Bre ofer d 357 E 445 icc E E A 443 K equations enana 289 K caoordiidte 2 22 de te 0 33 K index 30 44 51 84 97 100 TO e oct o se d ota Are 46 ICD deest oT MENS EOD nae ee 429 M O A UU RES 20 o MUERE EPI 432 Key Control J amp co v ze 178 Control B 173 178 Control D 178 Control E 177 178 Control F 173 178 Control Praia d rex 178 Control Q cce ES 177 178 Conttel Lo ursa es eod rte tatus 178 Control V 173 178 Control X 176 178 Control Z 172 177 178 Eter x ERES 175 176 Els 97 99 105 177 217 219 ET GL ad ets Meo oo tied ean iod 178 A pes 97 99 105 177 ritus dvds aie tasa 177 Dru cetus are eae b ate 177 F5 97 128 130 148 150 155 177 181 Era 97 128 130 178 ETC 115 126 129 178 ES ett is 115 178 212 LS MR vr 126 178 S
16. 38 number display 115 e seo ov read 61 72 Part BOOM 142 Part plidSe ds ccc Cee t tee T eto dec 64 Partition 84 129 156 A qum ET US 199 WISP podus yet ma a heres 200 MES cues cr deeds et 34 Partmode example 244 E 271 Patcli 5e none Succ CEU eyed 198 272 279 attaching i a ea ena 157 158 hierarchy A 198 208 PD ocv 31 38 149 162 164 198 210 attaching cake ge ew een a 157 158 example etd ey owe Mars 66 211 hierarchy ys a e 198 208 Spit rs ALE 203 TNO O RS 21 projection ur cds pi 272 POS ada 38 198 211 attaching oid vex eg stare 157 158 EXAmple ar le xd 212 hierarchy ccce Ras 198 208 Periodic mesh o2 er e y ets 394 Permissions x45 eos Cr cre EE RR 26 Perspective iux so eue a tua dus 88 94 109 Perturbation 3 422 wee yon EE TEES 41 Phys agua EL eun e Dates dde 111 Phys D ftont conss bet nah ed Ces 111 Physical mesh socia a 22 30 Physical window 72 88 Pick 3D Curve da een tees 141 block boundary 124 141 b tt e oai IR eoe acean 115 by label ias aec AO ay 124 141 coordinates 130 157 CURVE atta ele eroe 124 141 BdSe cervice i Rata ids 141 DOG ii iras RD a 127 panel esos Mess ing 124 212 partial coordinates 129 point by projection 126 point by Z buffer 127 CULO Lees ONES EA 130 e eae Vae eue OE 133 surface 0 0 124 141 surface EEE iia 124 141 VEER II E gid
17. 115 126 163 169 179 QUI VEL 1p salt 126 directional 15s oer 277 CAE ern casts wih tain ica AE 276 GIPDD 225 38 Recta Iba reco Vetter 39 O 235 ignored by tf 232 ill defined sedas te BAe s 275 Interpolation 234 method 38 39 198 IUE us A EAS EAS 169 multiple 1 uses a ees 23 multiple surfaces 236 pre positioning vertices 208 relax sa ctas boc 248 250 spheriedlucs tase tete Eo Mr 2T SUITACE ceo vu 126 163 surface edge e uq ciae dios a 126 three surfaces con de eezs 165 two surfaces 165 167 Projection method 148 157 attaching us so de eae 158 O Lu ees 19 O e E 20 Prompt ssa Tiras tektu Ens Gta ere 77 174 Dues ee Ge tte E cae 177 A O 133 A Se een Eee aed 31 441 NPHI aaa 385 PUN Gerace eed VU ORTI 386 SPONE dee eis a DR RMa a EEE 389 Ptol APM esie O A Wes 385 IP Vs A E ue eel x Da 155 Os a renanta Aa wee 31 46 198 218 example cob cb Seded doa 219 hierarchy iod ya es Roe 198 208 Q Bricks button 117 134 Q Shells button 116 134 Quadralaterial shell element 20 Quadratic equations ia os 289 Quadrilateral rita vore 8 20 Quality mesh ita RA 42 Quality Meshes 04 42 Quit Button 20000 rt 133 182 Quitting out of dialogue box 177 Sean ee eaten te e ee ree 88 89 113 114 O tam tar d vn MEA 111 S Ts ca area er rare WM Ned 179 Raadi 2 60
18. 280 Curve Button io cess ua Condes 142 Curve Point button 116 Curve rotated project ee oo otc user i 273 276 UE cadena da tp ne D du DE 37 Cuurd THEO ou Lee od EE 20 Osea es dug acia esset nb eed Reed 369 OD eas IN bene dios 205 QVI dotate nt ae 369 ODE Ed aucta anaes Ets 205 CE Rad Medo a m bas oe ke s 371 ODE ae tn pu d ed oaa 205 A A 371 Opies e E E 205 Cy Sd option rc 280 Cy ST option aia ete A 273 Cy Sfi option qeria du 276 CVCORSY E ou gt epo Mio he y a es 439 initialization ewes ea aes 209 Cylinder als 34 38 45 149 280 Beans 64 aad satis eke p 417 E 440 equations rn a a 287 Example auc os tas 211 287 frame of reference 439 Hierarchy eis vcr des 198 208 initialization aive rg 209 MSP veces eat DeL RISE 200 MO sce eoe za 20 63 Mseg ob ossa te csi 203 OPPI o rcu ace ad S ac URS 206 PU 31 45 234 431 part and Lin 1222 eres ix 239 pick points 45 x9 43 Conca 126 project airada 273 276 UNO ind does 171 298 Cylindrical Coordinate System ro EET EE 45 Cylindrical Coordinates 148 Des OR 88 90 113 114 A take 111 A gti Sita ty Ss D ee es 79 Dab s ceste S ghisa i 143 405 o o eee a I Su URN NA 142 example tersa Pesce d 120 Did SES Oei a ead 79 Dads desc o e Qu SC Ne e ROC Ie ides 80 Dailogue BOX lt lt 9e done RR bx 72 D m pP 143 pj c PD PR 461 DET dissed co the Geene tees wee 143 164 example eis eve ur Ed 121 DATE a gee a Pant ue
19. 28 Left Mouse Button 88 108 113 114 124 126 135 174 Len memory s oe ea set RSS rate 60 OV a ees 441 a A da Da RS autein t CO 441 A pif uad d ettet edo ifii 442 License Manager 25 26 69 License Manager Manual 24 25 TACEMSING 115 y voe bya PRENDE NUNT 24 authorization 25 Lighting ind Seduce eat eb heut 109 Limits equations exse Ges RS 290 O eg 62 numeric values 63 parameters he Eee 176 LI ue iei Sb eh 31 33 42 198 239 example 4 cu ad tics 241 260 hitetareHy dv Eee ms Ges 198 208 A Ph e iba eie d 239 TO S4 cive Rant eee ta reta 21 47 invoked by hyr 239 linear interpolation 239 247 6 coe ee qaia dore Ru RS 252 la T 41 dd uccisi d er Adis 78 length Lo ed ase var Pate ep 62 Line thickness setting 86 Linear Interpolation 239 241 247 IB MERE ide DLE se 31 198 247 IBSDEU AAA 200 LINUX dvi arios 21 25 26 57 20 list end With cxi a 63 Lists of numbers in dialogue box 174 A A die Sure d 343 Lmi reso D pa 443 LO od iie Tuae eua HEN 29 332 343 curve 115 307 313 317 319 321 339 343 nodal 307 308 314 338 341 nodal fe o o 338 nodal fcc o o 340 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 490 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual nodal CC1 340
20. Some of the commands affected by the orpt command are pr pri si sii fl fli cv evi cvt evti rb rbi re rei sfb sfbi n ndl bulc fset fseti bb trbb and ndli Once you issue an orpt command your choice of orientation will apply to all subsequent surfaces shells and other such oriented objects When you are dealing with several different oriented objects you will probably have to issue more than one orpt command Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 205 Your choice of orientation is interpreted in terms of the part s local coordinate system after any projections For example if the part is generated in cylindrical coordinates using the cylinder command then the command orpt 5 90 1 defines an orientation point at radius 5 angle of 90 degrees and height of 1 in cylindrical coordinates Ifthe part had a cylindrical face with radius 1 and with the z axis forming the axis of symmetry the normal vectors associated with this surface would point outwards For some objects and some choices of the orientation point the orpt command may be ambiguous A simple example is a spherical surface and a point outside the sphere the normal direction towards the point is outward for the half of the sphere nearest the point and inward for the half of the sphere farthest from the point You should avoid issuing such an ambiguous command For a surface th
21. 94 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual reso change display resolution reso width where width is the width in pixels of the square picture Remarks TrueGrid s device independent hidden line algorithm involves an internal computational picture whose resolution should correspond to the required detail in the picture The Hide graphics button in the environment window and the disp command use the device independent hidden line algorithm to draw the picture on the screen and optionally to a postscript file using the postscript command The picture is always square and the default resolution is 512x512 pixels Increasing the resolution requires more memory and more calculations For example if you tripled the pixel width by a command like reso 1536 then the new 1536x1536 picture would have nine times as many pixels So TrueGrid would need nine times as much memory for it and most calculations involving the picture would take nine times as long The resolution should be used primarily when there are numerous lines that are so close in the picture that they cannot be distinguished However if the screen or the printer drawing postscript files cannot resolve the lines it is a waste of computer memory and time to increase the internal resolution Secondarily when one object is partially obscuring another a higher resolution will calculate the region of overlap more accurately within the width of a pixel There is another advantage of incr
22. Remarks Transformations The nodes at the interface of a trbb block boundary are moved to the master face and transformed when a transformation is specified after the initialization of the part and before any interpolations or projections These interface nodes are then frozen No other command can change the coordinates of the interface nodes in a trbb block boundary interface After the part is completed and Figure 360 Near symmetric topology either a new part is initialized or the endpart command is issued then the first layer of elements at the interface are rearranged to form the transition so that both sides of the interface match You will only be able to see the transition elements along the interface in the Merge phase The geometry of the block boundary interface is initially in the local coordinate system of the part In most cases no transformation is required Use the transform option to place the interface in the global coordinate system if it differs from the local coordinate system of the part When you are defining the slave side of an interface use the transformation option to indicate how to go from the coordinate system of the master interface part to the coordinate system of the slave interface part When it is used a transformation is needed for the master or the slave side but not both When a transformation is used on the slave side think of it as instructions on how to move the master side to the slave
23. The element MEASURE command has been improved There are new controls in merging nodes using node sets The projection method has been improved so that complex dependencies in the mesh are always calculated properly The mesh density can be scaled globally with one command The uniform smoothing UNIFM works for solids and faces and a new feature changes to the Neumann boundary condition There are numerous 3D curve and 3D surface additions Sets have been extended to include polygons for creating and manipulating polygon surfaces There is a new type of high accuracy algebraic surface defined by a table of points known as a Hermite parametric spline surface This new surface can be exported to am IGES file Trimmed IGES surfaces can now be interpolated to produce mid plane surfaces Many surfaces can be offset in a normal directions A block boundary interface can be defined using a set of coordinates The session file tsave from previous runs are protected from being over written The computational window has been improved A point can be transformed using the same transformations applied to replicate a part This can be useful when building a sequence of parametric parts Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved iv April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Documentation The following TrueGrid documents are available TrueGrid User s Manual Volumes and 2 The
24. block 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 q 2 22 2 2 q12122 1 3 Initial Positioning of Edges 3D curves and surface edges are used to control the shape of an edge of the mesh This is useful in a number of situations In some situations you may only have 3D curves that define the geometry If you attach the edges of the mesh to the 3D curves the faces will be automatically interpolated There is a good example of this in the discussion of the edge command below Note that in this example the face is not projected to the surface and yet the mesh has nearly the proper shape for the surface You can also use a different interpolation than the default to vary the result This is particularly useful when using a butterfly topology with surfaces with large variations in curvature 3D curves can be used to initialize the edges c Center curve curd 1 csp3 00 18 66 73 36 44 82 OP NSO 42 95 Lb ome c Pipe surface sd L pips l Los a E ad La c Interior offset surface to form interior 3D curves sd 2 pipe 1 06 0 09 3 06 7 09 1 c Contour curves extracted from surface2 curd 2 contour 2 1 1 2 0 1 curd 3 contour 2 1 28 2 0 28 curd 4 contour 2 1 55 2 0 55 curd 5 contour 2 1 82 2 0 82 intyp 2 c Use higher quality interpolation c Pipe part using butterfly topology block 1 3 7 9 1 3 7 9 1 51 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights
25. ese cece ARTE cee CAC ARAS AAI ZITTI HZ AAA EAE Attach with smoothing When a 3D curve or surface edge has extreme curvature or is not smooth it may be impossible for a sequence of nodes to be distributed along that curve equally spaced or by any other nodal distribution you might select The best way to avoid this is to break the edge into smaller regions so that an intermediate vertex can be placed precisely at the point where there is large curvature or where the curve is not smooth The following is an example of a curve that does not allow equal spacing of nodes curd 1 1p3 6 51 1 22 74 6 53 1 18 69 6 55 1 24 58 6 55 1 24 57 6 57 1 26 39 6 60 1 25 12 6 60 1 25 13 6 57 1 26 39 6 55 1 24 57 6 55 1 24 58 6 53 1 18 69 6 51 1 22 74 block 1 4 1 1 11 6 6 5 1 2 75 75 curs 2 1 12 12 pb 2 1 1 2 1 1 xyz 6 51 1 22 74 pb 2 1 2 2 1 2 xyz 6 51 1 22 74 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 227 Too much curvature for equally spaced nodes cur distribute edge nodes along a 3D curve cur region curve where curve is the number of a 3D curve Remarks An edge of the mesh can be placed onto a 3D curve before any faces are interpolated or projected to surfaces The placement of an edge onto a 3D curve is done after all other
26. ibmi generate beams in the i direction by index progression ibmi progression in j _in_k material orientation cross section option where 7 in j is the number of columns of beam elements in the j direction 7 in k is the number of columns of beam elements in the k direction material is the material number orientation is the option of orientation of the cross section axis j second axis orientation in the j direction k second axis orientation in the k direction sd surface t second axis orientation in the normal to the surface v xn yn zn second axis orientation by the vector none cross section is the cross section definition number assigned with bsd option can be reverse the order of the nodes is the reverse of the default Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 420 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual si sid_ vold volume lump inertia cablcid system_ cabarea area caboff offset csarea area sharea area inertia iss itt irr thickness roffl x soffl y toffl z roff2 x soff2 y toff2 z Idr1 Ids1 ldt1 Irr1 Irs1 Irti Idr2 Ids2 Idt2 Irr2 Irs2 Irt2 Idr3 Ids3 1dt3 Irr3 Irs3 Sliding Interface Number volume of Discrete Beam lumped inertia local coordinate system id number defined by the Isys cable area cable offset cross section area shear area of cross section cross section moments of inertia thickness x component of offset vector for first end point y c
27. nodal fci 339 nodal fcs seere is Res 341 nodal CS1 342 Loads e A 314 316 338 Local approximation 40 Local Button 126 149 Local coordinate system MSP a 414 Local Coordinates 149 Lofted curve DIG ect xicas Comes hea 273 277 Log Expressions 289 log10 Expressions 289 Los Alamos National Lab 21 A ag EON TREE 116 150 155 Lp3 Curd option 179 VBLEO 5 iiaee Sob CE cd ima ode 20 Ep3 button arpaa eo eis tek es 179 METI eh coire metes qae ed 31 441 442 TCD eate dd 4 delete ri qoe s 443 DIE udo Sd eese ua deed TO 385 DIE Sus eter A REA OA 386 SPINE Lione sce de Rz ires 389 Ls dyna Bes 2 tig E EC UMS Gees 470 Lsii lrep ioe Geist pita RN Meh ECRIRE 443 LSYS escasa es ios 441 example 52 ong A NA 449 O ne ee 360 Ibit zog oder othe tS Bee 361 LA cart eae eet waste tay qa 12 A hi a hreag a eee gs bate 73 A dade ean Said a Maes 72 M ho p 461 example 2 aur t quis 217 Magnetic flux boundary conditions 374 375 378 382 Mai Mehu tanta 75 Manual Examples 22er menaced 24 License Manager 24 Output scoici a ee es s 24 TOOL AAA eed 24 USES oss sure dati e da necs 24 Map master to slave 393 398 Mapped mesh ccc as 279 Mapped method plane at Bate ag cubat aa 40 Mark aTe shad og eae ogee oe ante ded acl 7
28. Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 472 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Spline aan aeons 116 155 Twsurf 116 155 undo Vus od eco ear e EN ME 171 64 Bit Accuracy 04 69 70 Ml E rta E tte are 78 Abagstep constraints cec soeur edm ed 332 ABAQUS 2a ui amps Pana rica 332 load set number 352 ADD si Lose dox uie dua a a QA aga 405 ADOS ree e peeke t de eer ses 405 Abort undo s cua tessere 171 298 Abs Expressions Vi ea 289 Y 317 319 ATA Qe ie AA 319 PCC A E 319 Acceleration O aee E eo mt 317 Aa a 317 accc cylindrical 319 accci cylindrical 222 ies 319 ACEI a a ena RS 318 acces spherical 320 accsi spherical 321 MD ES 312 NICO A dude Remis 327 vaccc cylindrical 328 vaccci cylindrical 328 e A ad 327 vaccs spherical 329 vaccsi spherical 330 Accept button o ooooo 181 Pio Ee Se daa 318 ES PP 320 ACOSTA 321 JXGGULAOV str dades 69 70 32 Bit ene on tos tutte Rod dh 69 70 GA Dit cce Dd ee ON 69 70 Acos Expressions 289 Acted s eoa cocoa 171 294 297 decmd Pu e oss puma VS 297 UNO ed dates soda erba etes 298 Activate re acere Roe rere E 293 activation of commands 171 and update ros vete 207 Active in history table 294 T is dos stdug abiecit edo ri qr et 78 Add Du
29. Environment You use the mouse in this window to issue frequently issued commands such as rotation translation zoom displayed items attach project etc Computational This is where you view the computational mesh You can use the mouse to select regions and index progressions for use in commands Physical This is where you view the actual physical mesh You also can use the mouse to modify the mesh History This is an interactive command table that aids you in debugging the mesh It is available only in the part phase 2D Curves This window is used to display 2D curves It is activated by using the lv Ivi Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 72 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Dialogue Help Ive or lev commands When you click on a menu item in the main menu of the Text Menu window and then click on a command on the subsequent submenu a dialogue window sometimes referred to as a dialogue box is created You can also get a dialogue window for a command by typing dial cmd where cmd is the keyword for a command A help window is created whenever you request help on a command or a command category You can also type help cmd to get the help window for a command where cmd is the keyword for a command Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 73 TrueGrid s complete screen with Text Menu Computational Ph
30. Insert after Clear All Append Prepend AJ Insert Mode You can select points by using options from the Pick Panel For example select a surface curve or surface edge and click on the Projection button Each time you click in the physical window an point will be added to the table and the white curve drawn in the physical window will be extended to this new point Similar steps with the Z buffer Label or Node buttons in the Pick panel will add points to the table Delete from to The following picture represent gradual steps in i defining a polygonal curve The surface points Figure 163 Interactive Form for Polygon Input have to be labeled Then they are selected using the Label option in the Pick panel The Mouse Pointer is moved to the location of the new point and the Left Mouse Button is pressed The coordinates of the new point are inserted to the next location in the interactive form If you need a more detailed picture use the Zoom or Frame display options After finishing the input you have to save the curve by pressing the Save button Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 182 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual A A avd T 17
31. NOB ecce dua nn sea cae ke 327 MAC marta da fas 328 rs A hae ees OUI 328 o A e UR OPE eed AILES 327 ACCS RD REIS 329 NV ACCSI MP RETE Tr 330 O tie fet Ed 370 A ek Saas Rega ees 370 ISS sh SI O AOS 331 TOCAN ti daa 330 o croi s kia 478 Wes arit 330 Vel aduentu aie ue ae ae et uat tetas 331 TOLAHOTE 2 pick te gin Ce aguesa 330 VELOCI uc aspects v Daan 330 VOlOGls vx ud etie Lf eura e 313 boundary bv 316 boundary bvi 316 example cra iss dams 65 449 ID esa A IE ODER TR 212 initial ssas Soong akt ated ES 330 Initial Me aeq eua Nein ig hs 331 iita Vel eu ias at 331 prescribed fv 25s need end 313 prescribed fve 3 see 314 prescribed Ivol 432 cu er ens 315 prescribed TVlia 314 prescribed fys 15e eren 315 prescribed fvsi i c os eee ees 316 prescribed TUV ce reus 327 prescribed fvve scu decens 325 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 507 prescribed Va goa de 325 prescribed fvvi idas 324 prescribed fvvs rn 326 prescribed fvvsi eis baud a4 327 rotation aras dt lr 330 VE ZAR 331 Verbose sanenge ne 178 o eaten 026058 48d A hd dog fu e 58 Werte uero cre Ere a e rH eat 96 127 selection 98 105 o ies ors ea dos ater boe re 30 33 38 assign coordinates 208 attaching sores Canes hee ees 157 control point 251 movement oec S e ues 148 NOAHO dad sies vo
32. Picking Partial Coordinates lille 129 Pick Panel Picking an Edge Face or Block 00 0000 eee 130 Pick Panel Creating or Modifying Sets Using the Mouse 133 Display List Panel Determining What Objects are Drawn 141 Move Pts Panel Interactively Moving Regions ofthe Mesh 148 Deleting a Region of the Mesh ic CR Ce tede wae Pes 156 Attaching the Mesh to Objects iaa tote 3 E LAE 157 Projecting a Mesh Region toa Surface oooooooooocononcooo 165 Tie Undo Feature s vas Vu et Fa phos dU CH A Seton a Chu s 171 TrHheHistory BUON A Ce gae leu 171 The Resume Command 4 rre pa x RR d Rete deba s dte qd banca d 171 8 Dialogue BOXES ROO etur ete dE Des m t erede E Otis ia kenn 172 Option ISS AR are cede ma a e oda aed Ga rase Qu RR ae 173 Numbers Lists of Numbers and Text Strings 00000005 174 Parser and Fortran Interpreter 2 0 0 0 0 50 c ccc cee neces eh 175 Editing and Syntax Checking uu e RE AR EES RE CREE 176 Executing and Quitting Dialogue Boxes ooocooooocoocccrcnoo o 177 Quick Reference to Keyboard Functions 0 000 e cece eee 177 9 Interactive Construction of 3D Curves mera a Pere yeas 179 TIL Part Commands 2 4 243 Denke dE XIII ot AE AA oet d Sb eee 196 1 Geometry and Topology a vues cde e ROO bee ates sende xi Lo Oh esa ntu d 197 de delete a region of the Dares cose Fase A Eu 199 dei delete regions of the
33. ponn A 83 Rabb Ares ged Local UA ie oid a 143 405 R cd osos et ee a ack dts Red Rcs 142 Rd eo qae o e teo apre AMNES 84 Radial 290 Radiation boundary condition 378 boundary conditions 378 enclosure 379 380 Rainbow Sentinel ana 26 Rainsberger Robert 22 Raixs Ee onte id MURS Sub Rud 439 Rand Expressions 290 Rasdi ie bv ter Lb Un Meh dra m su 142 Ratio ino PEE EE E EE 399 402 Raxis TE aaa aoe quia ee ed 213 lire prc Pr 215 A e 378 Oda me up S cse 205 A ew pos icd ad Pox 143 404 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 498 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual O O 378 O E 205 O 142 Rods cedes n ape ded eds 142 Re Mase MAS ae tente i ates 379 ODE once UR e E m 205 REDIOIJGCL ed 41 2 temae aee aia 38 Reactivate sr a nap Merc eum d xe 43 Rebar 5 5 spar eic oa seca iue aad 420 embedded veia weba da 417 Rectangular block 37 Reduced index HCCAUVE dad eod dads 51 Reduced indices 34 36 45 ddd m Po vn PES 199 EHSEOLV ts stat Oh st 295 label cia er es oss 84 structure v pec LER 96 127 Reference grid aoo ed seco 4 ux yet 81 REFLEQS A hase i etatis 375 ir AAA se 376 SOISOEE a dedos s 3T REFLEQS Por 224 bie oA Ee RS 469 REFLEQS Pori 0 0 eee eee 470 REO aa aos 364 RUD quide s ur ed dece SN n V WIS 364 RECOM a e Eoo S duties 33 96 127 attaching 2
34. to j and the k index is constant Suppose that the face s boundary edges are already computed using the linear interpolation In order to compute the physical space coordinates x y z X 1 k of an interior node i j k the algorithm uses eight known boundary coordinates X inJmK X 1 J K XCinsd xo X ijmk XJK X Kk X 1 3 k and X i j k The interpolation of these eight points to X i j k is based on the interpolating parameters a and b In addition define d distance from X i j k to X i j k d distance from X imJmK to X 1 K d distance from X i j k to X 1 k e distance from X i j k to X ij k n distance from X 1 K to X 1 j k e distance from X 1 j k to X 1 k xJ m Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 242 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 255 Modified Bi Linear Definitions The most straightforward bi linear interpolation would be Xi jk 1 aY1 b XG j k al B XG ain gt K abX i j k T 1 a bX i J 1 a X i 2 K aX i J k a b X i j BX j K Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 243 X i mrjrk TX wd P E X L mri mek X i j m 21 mK Figure 256 Effective Boundary Coordinates This can be a problem when nodes are clustered toward the cor
35. where direction is i j or k and there is one d for each of the regions in the specified index direction Each d is a change in the number of nodes for the m th region Remarks This command is useful when the part is initially very coarse After the geometry and the projections are specified interactively then you can use this command to experiment with the number of nodes needed for the desired mesh This is a natural way to proceed since working in this way tends to Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 203 minimize the amount of required computations while the major structure of the mesh is being specified Do not use this command after using the update command or the equations x y z tl t2 or t3 It will not work Example Consider the following block command which was used to initialize the part shown in Figure 203 k gt Partitions in the Mesh block WW oo J N Se se There are 4 partitions in the z direction Figure 203 before mseq k gt Partitions in the Mesh If the following mseq command is used Em mseq k 2 0 1 4 then the regions in the k direction will be modified The first region will be increased by 2 elements The second region will be unaffected The third region will be reduced by 1 element and the last region will be increased by 4 elements This will have the same effe
36. where direction isi j ork flag is O for the first element or 1 for the last element and size is the first or last element size Remarks The absolute size of the first or last element is specified for nodes along an edge of the mesh The remainder of the nodes are distributed by arc length using a derived geometric progression like res so that the change in size of elements along the edge is smooth das absolute spacing of first and last element of an edge Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 285 das region direction gap gap where direction isi j ork gap is the size of the first element and gap is the size of the last element Remarks The absolute size of the first and last element is specified for nodes along an edge of the mesh The remainder of the nodes are distributed by arc length using a derived geometric progression like drs so that the change in size of elements along the edge is smooth The sum of the gaps must be less than or equal to the total arc length of the edge nds generalized nodal distributed along an edge nds region direction density where direction isi j or k and density is a density function number defined by ndd Remarks This command should be used to distribute nodes along a single edge or to identify several edges in the same direction where the reduced index partition between the edges are to be ignored The
37. 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 478 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual pick points ts A ek eS 126 Triad display iia 86 coordinates ooooooo o 129 148 assign to vertices 208 by Z buffer Loose gute are da 127 A tte IN 126 A o ets 115 178 SCLOMING ausus caseo bos s 149 surface Eon Lu ae eod dA 126 surface edge us osse vem aix 126 COOTER rond d tee e eta 212 213 Copying in text window middle mouse 77 Cos Expressions 289 Cosh Expressions 290 Courier font a pote ee Gk achat 56 Cp Sd option sorces ene ea X 280 Cp Sf option ali taa 273 Cp Sfi option AN 277 COST ODOR rt to se ees 273 GE STIL Option eu Debes rale lexus 2T Cross HAS erse ad a cher eee OS 153 Cross section electus crece qug xad 413 Cold oe e obe Sero 179 o LE 280 Crx Sf option iu oue eases 273 Crx Sfi option 4204 4 tu DRE ER 276 Cry Sd option sco ERE 280 Cry Sf option aui eee hd 273 Cry Sfi option o oo oooooo o 277 CET oa a eee ee A AES 280 Ciz Sf option d oec vn ae Rs 273 Crz Sfr option siii asa day as 237 Csca tC Kness A ca es 417 TE eue Gage ad et Be it alae tage we Sy 214 TA a A 215 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual S A e dt gee AREA 338 Csp3 Curd option 179 Cubic spline CUVE C 251 CUE dtu Rk a 31 198 228
38. 391 map to master 393 398 e e E ak Als Q4 rta Ada 87 Slice button SNCS a AE 86 Slicing Planes vs usc neice edere 178 Sliding interface display secret Aree ET EA 409 number and replication 443 445 TED AI e aco Ma c d b ws 435 BI gid un Deos tun sepatu i 408 BID Co e oct qu rre a an ae 409 NIGWING fii acie aO CO RA 408 piallest a 6 os crore mt 437 Smoothing anita dE Pep dada 21 across boundaries 235 cubic splines Lai 251 gllipH Larra ene NES 235 equipotential 247 THEO A Cs un AI E 21 nodal distribution 282 Thomas Middlecoff 258 ME AR 259 triple vertex EE HRS 239 UNO Msi 267 268 Smoothing constraint pita dls 470 Solid shell interface veo n 411 Sort History of ete aera aay oe 295 Sp Sd option oooooooooooo o 280 Sp Sf option vos uto tote Ret wes 273 Sp Sfi option up tue reae tes 276 Spacing Spd dialogue box ii a2 etes n SEHE ae ox tekst ae SUIV eener cea ta oce Pe adt deb eet Specifying Multiple Blocks Sphere project Spherical projection Spline cose cox hacen dean Grate 150 example Spline button Splint example hierarchy ioa de s 198 Split fe glo uu Face rete ace oi rh Split screen mode cerdos iS SPO heats divae tace Vet Fates d example hierarchy caseo gone 198 SU ducc pir ute i d pour Stillman Doug oou ez Stone walls node selection 366 npm Copyright
39. 393 attaching zie eu eoa to 157 158 CUTE x scd e Dat v UA 230 Ma sciet d 229 CUES 2 PA Cun LL it iR 230 POPE rcl ai 231 hierarchy oet ys 198 208 CUA einen xs 37 142 155 441 contour example 219 npo MMC 179 csp3 example sey x areata 219 example suo pie ed rime nd 65 interactive qi S ed aM ou 179 ITO a fa ese Ra ack Rar Rc a RON 20 Ip feet sog ton s 179 Sdedge d desi cts 160 180 193 SE aie anise qii Vra Va n Pate 180 193 se example 4 oos ptee re 220 ENSUE sd ea De ee tes 179 UI O VU 298 Ute hater Ia Erie de A 31 198 attaching liada 157 159 example ss Saku days EE 220 hierarchy as sce ese 198 208 imale i asta E r oeaaig t 230 A ha oa aru 31 198 229 attaching o oiov eoa oss 157 158 hierarchy asus saga Desh ded an 198 208 USAC AA teins aid ui 225 Current boundary conditions 375 UIS sa 31 198 230 attaching is vex veg 9 ene 157 158 Example LAS 221 hieratchys csv Pay fa es 198 208 VILO ir ecco S E DRE A ee 21 479 April 6 2006 Curs Curd option 232 Curser DIM ME E 176 in dialogue box 176 Ted Is anus es duit eu tls 176 Curser in dialogue box 115 Cursor in text window 77 Curtyp dttachinga ys hug oak Evento ds 159 Curvature ioe d eum aus e gre CRAS 41 ID CUVE S das 227 Curve UE a 37 A pec Rn 116 141 display numbers 305 importing stars pa o 3T lc RO NE PRECEDENT 296 rotated about axis
40. Apply default modified bi linear interpolation of faces 9 Project faces to specified surfaces sf ms ssf spp 10 Perform transfinite interpolation of specified faces tf 11 Apply equipotential relaxation of specified faces relax and esm 12 Apply Thomas Middlecoff elliptic solver for specified faces tme and unifm 13 Re interpolate and project edges and faces affected by 11 12 and 13 above 14 Apply specified tri linear interpolation of solid regions lin 15 Apply default modified tri linear interpolation of solid regions 16 Perform transfinite interpolation for specified solid regions tf 17 Apply equipotential relaxation for specified solid regions relax 18 Apply Thomas Middlecoff elliptic solver for specified solid regions tme 19 Apply uniform smoothing elliptic solver for specified solid regions unifm 20 Evaluate expressions x y z tl t2 t3 21 Apply block boundary interface master side bb OAAND tn tU Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 208 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual These vertex placement commands will be executed first When several of these commands are issued for the same vertex they are applied to the mesh in the order in which they are issued When you specify a region the values will affect all vertices within the region Only the specified coordinate components are assigned values or have an increment added to their values T
41. Inc All Rights Reserved 450 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fni progression failure_strain Remarks For details see the above description of fn 24 Output Commands epb element print block epb region Remarks This command is used with DYNA3D and LS DYNA It flags a region so that DYNA3D or LS DYNA will print information on the region more frequently npb nodal print block npb region Remarks This command is used with DYNA3D or LS DYNA It flags a region so that DYNA3D or LS DYNA will print information on the region more frequently supblk select regions to be combined in the block structured output supblk region Remarks Some fluids codes require multiple block data sometimes referred to as grids as opposed to unstructured element data You must specify a fluids output option before creating the first part if you want to write an output file for a fluids code requiring structured output Each grid within a part becomes a part in the database For example if the third part is broken into two grids that part becomes parts 3 and 4 You have control over how a block is decomposed into grids In particular any collection of blocks which can form a single logical block can be combined into one single grid Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 451 This can be important since it reduces the total number of interfaces and can reduce the run time for th
42. The Set Editing window is used for the interactive creation or modification of node face element and surface polygon sets Face sets consist of both brick faces and shells Element sets can consist of all types of elements Control Options Quit Quit the Sets Window Open Set Activate an existing Set When you open a set you load its contents into the set buffer It will be displayed as if you had just made selections using the mouse Nodes faces and element sets are named independently It is possible to have a set of each type with the same name For this reason be sure to select the type of object that you wish to operate on in the set window before you open a set Save As Save the Active Set After you select some objects to form a set or after you have modified the selections from a set that you have opened you must save Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 133 Selection Options Set Editing Options Nodes Faces Beams Shells Q Shells Bricks Q Bricks Polygons Add Remove Toggle it for your selections to become effective If you are modifying an element set then clicking on the Save button only saves or replaces the elements of the selected type Node sets will be modified Face sets will be modified Subset of Beam elements of an element set will be modified Subset of Linear Shell elements of an element set will be modified Su
43. The p cy and s options create a new node and assign the new nodes to an existing joint The p option defines the node in Cartesian coordinates The cy specifies the coordinates in cylindrical coordinates and the s option in spherical coordinates The local node number is used with joints such as ej see page 895 where each node in the joint is numbered When the joint type is simply one where nodes share degrees of freedom dx dy dz rx ry and rz constraints in the jd command the local node numbers are just the indices into the list of nodes associated with the joint definition Up to 16 nodes can be constrained together in one joint definition Joint number increments work much like material number increments See page 443 for more information Example The joint number 1 is defined as a spherical joint At first Part 1 is created by the block command and the node with reduced indices 3 3 1 is assigned to joint 1 as local node 1 Then Part 2 is created and the node with reduced indices 1 1 1 is assigned to joint 1 as local node 2 Figure 338 The command file follows jd 1 sj pnit 6 c spherical joint is defined block 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 T 3 5 l 3 570 c Part 1 is defined jt 11n331 7j c node with reduced c indices 3 3 C is assigned to joint 1 c for local node 1 block 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 5 7 9 5 7 9205 c Part 2 is defined jt 12n111 c node with reduced c indices 1 1 1 c is assigned to joint 1 c for local node Z2 merge co jt 1
44. The partitions are also numbered along each of the bars The default is ON sdint toggle display of surface interior sdint on or sdint off Remarks Turning off the interior surface lines allows much more rapid redraws especially when combined with the wireframe mode draw Both the draw and fill graphics usually looks better with the interior lines turned off Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 84 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual set define various graphic options set option argument where option and argument can be any of pcolor part red green blue to set the color of a part where red green and blue must be between 0 0 and 1 0 or negative to turn off mcolor red green blue to set the color of a material where red green and blue must be between 0 0 and 1 0 or negative to turn off scolor red green blue to set the color of a surface where red green and blue must be between 0 0 and 1 0 or negative to turn off allpcolr red green blue resets the part color of all parts allscolr red green blue resets the surface color of all surfaces ldir x direction y direction z direction id to set the lighting directions where id must be light source 1 or 2 Icor red green blue id to set the lighting color where red green and blue must be between 0 0 and 1 0 and where id must be light source 1 or 2 scol red green blue to set the specular color where red green and blue must be between
45. This is essentially the mapped mesh method It does not take advantage of most of the features of the projection method and is as inflexible as those who insist on using it Highlight a single face of the mesh with no deleted portions select a surface and click on the Attach button ms sequence of surface projections Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 279 ms region index_direction surfaces where index_direction can be i j or k and surfaces can be specified in one of two ways In the first method each surface is specified separately first by a surface type followed by the appropriate parameters See the Surface Dictionary for details on these surfaces and their parameterization The surface types can be one of sd sp cy plan pr er cone cn2p ts cr crx cry crz cp numbered surface definition sphere cylinder plane paraboloid parabola revolved about an axis ellipsoid ellipse revolved about an axis cone cone defined by 2 points torus planar curve rotated about an axis planar curve rotated about the x axis planar curve rotated about the y axis planar curve rotated about the z axis surface formed by extending a planar curve infinitely along the third dimension xyplan start with a xy plane and transform it yzplan start with a yz plane and transform it zxplan start with a zx plane and transform it sds xcy ycy zcy
46. Workspace is also needed for geometry In particular IGES trimmed surfaces require a lot of memory A simple estimate is to double the size of the IGES file for the amount of memory needed by TrueGrid double it again for a 64 bit version of TrueGrid Font In the X Window System used by UNIX LINUX and OS x the font fontname option lets you choose the font with which TrueGrid will display text This option adheres to the X standard and passes this data to the windowing system Use the xIsfonts utility to get a list of fonts available on your machine It is best to choose a fixed width font that is not proportionally spaced It is safest to quote the font name to protect it from misinterpretation by the shell because many of the font names have special characters By default TrueGrid uses the 9x15 bold font if available and 9x15 otherwise You can change the default font with the TGFONT environment variable On a PC running WINDOWS you can specify the font by running TrueGrid from a Command Prompt window using the font option First the browser window to select on command input file will appear After you select a file or cancel the font browser will pop up so that you can select from the list of available fonts If you wish to change the default font run the TGControls window and click on Font Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 60 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Display The op
47. Zsca IC KHeSS a Rene LES a 417 JP enu eret f DU d rss 214 JEFES os er Ae e A ate Reta a 215 ZSO scale erie th eer nis eui IUE 93 Saler e a Ak 93 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 509
48. and bashrc for sh and bash of each TrueGrid user The Sentinel Rainbow Drivers are required for the license manager to run properly Without them the license manager will lock up the system requiring a manual powering down To check to see if the drivers are installed type Is dev rnbodrv If nothing is listed the drivers need to be installed Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 26 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual and root privileges will be required Note USB dongles are not supported for RedHat Linux 7 2 to 8 0 and parallel port driver are not available for RedHat Linux Enterprise 4 0 or SUSe These drivers are provided by Rainbow in rpm format so the RPM Package Manager is also needed This is already available in most Linux all RedHat Linux installations Different Rainbow drivers are needed depending on the version of RedHat or comparable Linux If you are not using RedHat or Suse you need to pick the kernel level which best matches the kernel levels below RedHat 7 2 to RedHat 8 0 Kernel version 2 4 7 to 2 4 18 tg23_RH8 ZIP RedHat 9 0 Kernel version 2 4 20 tg23_RH9 ZIP 32 bit RedHat Enterprise 4 0 and SUSe 9 3 Kernel version 2 6 5 to 2 6 11 tg23_EN4 ZIP 64 bit SUSe 9 3 Kernel version 2 6 11 tg23_SU9 ZIP Once the TrueGrid software is unpacked and the Rainbow drivers are installed run tgauth in the TrueGrid directory to turn on the authorization Inst
49. d is the perpendicular distance from the source for laser option dist is the perpendicular distribution function for the laser option The arrival time is always non negative If the laser option is selected and if the target is behind the laser then the amplitudes are set to zero It is also possible that the center of the pressure flux face is in front of the laser beam receiving a positive arrival time while some of the nodes of the pressure face are behind the laser receiving a zero amplitude If there are several arri commands issued for the same pressure face with the same load curve or load case number the one with the smallest arrival time will be used excluding arrivals due to the pressure flux face being behind a laser beam Ifno shock arrival is found for a pressure flux face then the pressure amplitudes specified by the pr pri fl fli efl and efli commands are left unchanged and the shock arrival time is set to zero Orientation of the normal vectors of the faces can be specified by the orpt command Example The mesh is defined by a structured block Figure 324 The load curve 1 is determined by points O O 1 1 Pressure with amplitude 10000 is assigned to the region 4 1 1 4 6 6 A point source of shock is defined by coordinates 15 13 13 The velocity of the shock is 1000 and time offset is 0 The amplitude of the shock decays with cube of the distance r from the shock source The angle of incidence option is used to calcul
50. savepart filename Remarks This command is used to save all data for a part so that a part can be modified at a later time However all of the machinery to do this is not yet completed The only feature available at this time is the ability to use a block boundary interface see getbb after the part has been saved using this command 22 Replication of Parts Coordinate transformations are used to translate scale and rotate an object in a local coordinate system to the global coordinate system A local coordinate system is a frame of reference chosen to define an object or component of the larger model A local coordinate system is almost always a matter of convenience The global coordinate system refers to the frame of reference used to create the complete model In many cases a component is duplicated many times Each duplicate component must be transformed or placed into its proper location within the global coordinate system For this reason the coordinate system transformation and the part duplication commands are closely coupled In all cases a coordinate transformation is composed of a sequence of basic operations Each basic operation is given by a keyword possibly followed by some parameters Each basic operation is performed in order from left to right This ordering of the basic operations is sometimes referred to as a product or composition of basic operations The composition of the basic operations is referred to as a coordin
51. the windows that are open the menu system and help packages A a RC Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 63 In the Control Phase only the text window is open There is no computational or physical mesh because this phase is nearly obsolete and no effort has been invested to improve it In the Part Phase all windows are open or available In the Merge Phase the computational window is no longer available All other windows are open or available TrueGrid changes the main menus and submenus when it transitions from one phase to another These changes reflect the fact that different commands are available in different phases Basic Interactive Session The following outline of an interactive session shows you some of the basic mesh generation tasks you might perform in each of the mesh generation phases This example is specific to DYNA3D and there are some features in this example which are unique to dynamic analysis or specific to DYNA3D This example can be easily adapted to form the input to most simulation codes It is assumed that you are familiar with the control of the graphics and the use of both the Computational window and the related use of the F1 F2 function keys In this example TrueGrid is started from a command line If you are running from a WINDOWS system start TrueGrid using one of the methods described above Remember to change
52. vertex will be smoothed as well The esmp command can be used to add additional force to the mesh lines If an interior face node is projected to several surfaces it will remain on the intersection of the surfaces For example if a node is required to be along the curve of intersection of two surfaces it will be smoothed while constrained along that curve Since boundary nodes are not moved the nodal distributions along these edges will be preserved Zoning due to the res drs as das or nds commands for interior edges will not be preserved Examples In the following example several methods are used to interpolate a single block part with all 6 shell faces projected to a sphere The 8 vertices and 12 edges are treated as interior to the interpolation except the default interpolation In particular notice the subtle differences at the vertices All examples start with the following block 31 1 313 1 31 f um 11 sd 1 sp 0 0 0 1 sfi 1 2 2 2 sd 1 center element edge length 0 041028529 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 236 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual relax 111226211222 6 1 111212 amp 121222 amp 1 111221 amp 112222 200 0001 1 Every node is relaxed Notice that the mesh lines hug the corner nodes the center node Relax behaves as though each vertex the result of three blo
53. 0 variable cylindrical velocity definition load curve 1 magnitude cos y 2 direction 1 0 0 00000 merge condition fv 1 c display of prescribed c velocity Figure 322 cylindrical variable velocity fvvs spherical variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities fvvs region load curve t amp expr p expr O expr expr where load curve 7 is a load curve number or zero amp expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the FORTRAN expression for the radial component 0 expr is the FORTRAN expression for the polar angular component Q expr is the FORTRAN expression for the component Remarks This command assigns velocities allowing for the amplitude factor and the spherical vector components to be calculated using a FORTRAN expression Each expression can reference the nodal coordinates X Y and Z and the nodal indices I J and K When the part is generated in cylindrical coordinates the X in an expression will refer to the radial coordinate of the node and Y in an expression will refer to the angular coordinate of the node Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 326 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fvvsi spherical variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities fvvsi progression load_curve_ amp_expr p expr expr expr where load_curve_ is a load curve number or zero amp_expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the F
54. 2 c DYNA3D beam cross section c definition 1 ibmi 1 5 311 j 1 c Index progression g l 5 73 Figure 371 beams by ibmi TrueGrid draw 1D elements Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 422 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual is turned into beams in the i direction Number of columns of elements in the j direction is 3 Number of rows of elements in the k direction is 1 The beam material number 1 The beam cross section axis is parallel with the j axis c The cross section number is 1 merge labels 1D c beams are labeled 000000000 TrueGrid draw 1D elements TrueGrid Display 1D elements Figure 372 1 in the j direction Figure 373 2 in the j direction If the number of elements in the j direction is changed to 1 then the middle i line in the j direction will be selected as a string of beams If the number of elements in the j direction is changed to 2 then the two end 1 lines in the j direction are selected as strings of beams Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 423 jbm generate beams in the j direction jbm region _in_i _in_k material orientation cross section option where _in_i _in_k material orientation i k is the number of columns of beam elements in the i direction is the number of columns of beam elements in the k direction is the mat
55. 455 Dode A teme denos 458 equations 4523 Cecex et ETE S 289 CXPICSSIONS c vier Coe Fara 175 Kk equations n da eon o d aed 289 expressions 004 175 equations sec ce Ted 289 EXPIESSIONS sia cidad 175 equations esas ecce io pana 289 progression notation 56 region notation 4 56 lt vertex gt notation 56 element Sel yate b Cr ed woes 454 equations uude as 288 PACS Sel US S eser to buf erae n 455 node s t veta p puedan ts 458 parameters asii d reed 175 E TE Ie Se ed icta xti 290 equations a ue rt erac 290 A worse dani eru idus 236 EXPTESSIONS s curse acp e id 63 Leld cas ghey Goce aes GONE 248 relax example ini ia 237 UNTI e Qoa a E 268 Ds ds Pd 36 ZINCUIVES is AA A a ct 22 GISPIBY a f ais 115 WINDOW A earn ages Sarak 72 32 Bit Accuracy oa soo a 69 70 SD CUEVES 22 ii UR RE 37 198 attach ye at as 219 attaching ess cce te rere 159 attaching to 157 Deas vasos d Lee eue deal sex 417 en cuu P 116 composite ue Sake eer du ri 116 constraint ana XE teta 222 229 A E CES 150 Initialization 228 interactive A ae det 179 interpolation 228 labeled points 115 labels if aac eh hha aries 115 Jr OPE 116 155 modify intersection 148 modify polygonal 148 modify spline 148 MUMDETS dit es 115 point numbering 115
56. 5 4 2 Figure 336 Domain for the variable pressure is defined by the dom command on the same region The variable pressure is defined by the pramp command on the domain The command file follows pr11254200 c pressure is assigned c to the region 112542 c by the null load curve 0 c with amplitude 0 dom 112 542 c region 112 5 42 C is defined as a domain c for varying pressure pramp 1000 x c variable pressure is c defined for faces c in the region 1125 42 c by expression 1000 x merge co pr 0 c display pressure for the c null load curve TrueGrid display pressure 0 at 3 870E 03 Figure 336 variable pressure by pramp Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 350 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 13 Boundary and Constraint Commands This chapter describes boundary and constraint commands in the Part Phase Here is a quick overview of the commands described in this section The b and bi commands assign constraints to nodes in a global coordinate system The jt command assigns a node to a numbered joint The il and ili commands identify a face of the mesh as an inlet for fluid flow The Ib and Ibi commands assign constraints to nodes in a local coordinate system The mpe command assigns constraints to a nodal set The namreg and namregi commands name a region and an index progression for the TASCFLOW output file The nr and nri commands assign a surface as a non re
57. 95 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 499 Resolution ssec 95 Rest button 96 112 R SLtOIG s co EE ais ex 88 95 151 DER Lou sup e aA A os PS hk 81 ZEND sa arse ii 88 Resume cuoi eR Rh reed 58 171 button o 28 171 Retr Key e 5a certe eben aeg 77 LS SEMEN RE Ry e 143 303 RE is ccs teased rae Ri ie Sape eo 143 303 RoD pdt oS ine os a oat oe aida tern ees 143 o 9 1245 ceste asics tete tae e MR 84 SA E A IA ES 143 A dede dus surdus mie Santee 143 Mis eo da ru oases cr 461 RMS tas ri tar i eto 143 Rotate teara es aue oM 72 88 button ve eee tos 112 150 MESH 2 os bene eee esta 151 PIE ad en 113 Rotate button ooooooo 111 ROTACION dete m aa es 330 CENTET cotes uve edm es 92 D MUT Iv 331 velotity cde eic amv ecce ds S 330 ROW 28 5 3048 didus a e d ceris 37 RB o taa vete tote ers ea 143 RDIG d nich ra eb SN NR 113 114 RP Sete Da e XP S QE E SERE 27 A ope RES Eas ES opted 143 RN ous A aru d acces 143 303 RIPE Leu ad daw d e rev ebd 143 304 Bust cr nh NR RN A 142 RSdS at quss ca 142 RUSIA 22e Ea E DD C REESE 179 Running TrueGrid 57 Boe anit E ERE 88 91 151 both A testatus un 111 IIX Use ub BT uet eee ar Ci 92 E A we ee er 439 rotate picture isa 113 AE AA E E E S utes 213 VES Ver du o uy E TRES 215 miad osea on x dre Aa 87 Rxy Dt poteat vi Pat
58. Ae hi 127 visible point 127 With lasso ora da e RR 126 Pick global coordinates 126 local coordinates 126 Picture Choosing the Type of 108 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 496 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Picture Controls 88 PES pr Aa 179 PIB SF Option Sada ies 273 Plan Aap ai dd 280 stone wall ui 367 symmetry constraint 352 symmetry w failure 367 Plan Sf option 273 Plan Sfi option 276 PU ATG pcos a aoi een gawk 280 pro ect 4562 td ete 273 276 stone wall ua 367 symmetry w failure 367 PHP arto PR 386 APM Lau odo and 385 A unt atid 389 O dM MAE 149 Point 3D CUVE Eros 126 attaching to 22i coe usd owed 157 display labels 305 SUL 3Ce coros atk Ao e ane PREIS 126 surface edge is payee Mace hs 126 Point List Button 150 Point List window 116 155 179 Point mass HPM ue osos eed de yack ee 385 PIDA ewe ase a 386 Poly Surf Button polygon surface 155 Poly Surface Button 150 Polygon Set 2e iod err este Pete 133 Polygon sets CICLO rec ecu Pisces his d 139 Polygon surface Modify oue tiie e LAS e is 148 polygon set wi ioo vet ez 133 Polygonal line 229 oho tec e PR eR 39 Polygons button o ooo o 134 POOL cese Geet per D des eke 80 82 d
59. All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 27 sudo usr sbin installer pkg SentinelDriver1 0 0 pkg target Library Extensions Sentinel kext Please note that you need administrative privileges to do this installation and will need to restart your machine before the drivers become available Once the TrueGrid software is unpacked and the Rainbow drivers are installed run tgauth in the TrueGrid directory to turn on the authorization There are two features of OSX which need to be addressed First you should run TrueGrid from an X11 window application X11 app rather than the Terminal application Terminal app Second most TrueGrid user perfer the window focus to follow the mouse rather than having to bring the window to the front to get focus To get your X windows to use the focus follows the mouse you need to type defaults write com apple x11 wm_ffm true in and Xterm or terminal to reset focus You will need to log out of the X11 session before it can take effect Learning TrueGrid Be sure to read the sections TrueGrid Basic Concepts and How TrueGrid Works These sections introduce you to the concepts and notations of TrueGrid Also work through the TrueGrid Tutorial manual This takes you step by step through the generation of a model After this tutorial you will have the fundamental skills needed to use TrueGrid Next read the section Running TrueGrid After reading this section
60. DEUS Oy tg m 377 example 2 ice iG TA 412 SED aura A 26 merged nodes 411 SE ded tied 31 37 42 97 128 198 273 enc PETER 412 EXAMPLE scared 66 SI Zeus chou dtt vis De AUS Cb da atta ae 408 hierarchy rd 198 208 example 4x ce tue e weeds 66 lordo Vs 21 OLDU 4 ed ette ae Dee d 205 HS eL ds cede E 281 sid projection saco e eeu RES ec 272 Dei Vows ug dox ade RA S RS 420 TE en ES tube freres 252 dialogue box 2415 5 ks rr hex 173 BIB oot t se art IN ed eR NER 365 example serrare eme RS d 65 ODD E oue eaa GERA T ETE 205 E eA 435 DIDI Ad 164 sive e Sura end odas 366 set identification constraints 352 ODIE 234 macte aer ted e Entra s 205 BL oue OU Ud doti A cura rs 408 BID od niece dust iia 31 97 128 165 198 276 with si and sil 389 IIS ash epe A late bn de 281 Sign projection yates oa a 272 Expressions 289 SG s Sinead du TAa SS 21 24 26 DID qa oot Po AS ARMIN 409 workstation o oooo o 69 OLDU cos d osx d ed ven 205 Shell Simple line drawing 108 2D 52 eset seat sia wages PME 37 Sin material orientation 413 Expressions lt se cae cats 289 normals 206 413 Sinh Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 502 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Expressions 290 IZ ce BR Geka uote foes 58 60 Skipped nodes TOD hes cS E Ene te edt os S ed 391 Slave block boundary
61. Figure 395 Material 3 Figure 396 Material 4 TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 397 Material 5 Figure 398 Material 6 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 464 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Example Material number 2 is assigned to the index progressions of the mesh It has a special meaning for the autodyn output option The assigned regions are blanked in this way gradually 399 and 400 401 represents the finished mesh of the fluid between 2 pipes The simplified command file follows autodyn c output option c Definition of the structured block mesh block 1 10 2071 5 9 1371 5 9 13 24 o ase J es G mti 1 2 0 3 4 1 20 3 4 2 c Assignment of material 2 to index progression c 1 2 0 3 4 1 2 0 3 4 gt deletion of corners of the c butterfly mesh mti 2 3 2 3 2 c Assignment of material 2 to index progression E 23 2 3 2 gt deletion of the core of the tube merge 5 A Figure 399 computational window Figure 400 computational window Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 465 TrueGrid display HITT aN FRA tte is ail RUE Nu Addn SSA MVSAP_ QA AAA Figure 401 mesh of the fluid between 2 pipes mtv material number assigned to a specified volume mtv il jl kl i2j2k2 volume_ mode default_material_ material pairs where il jl kl i2 j2 k2 regio
62. Inc All Rights Reserved 80 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual See also poor disp and tvv The picture will also be drawn to a postscript file if the postscript option is on This postscript feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics grid turn reference grid on or off grid on or grid off Remarks This overlays the picture with a reference grid or remove a reference grid from the picture By default the mesh picture has no reference grid When you issue a grid on command a reference grid is superimposed on the picture This grid is a box in the problem s global coordinate system Along three of the edges of the box are tic marks to indicate values of the global coordinates The tic marks are marked with integers But those integers are not the values of the coordinates Look in the lower left corner of the picture There you will find a scaling factor To get the value of a coordinate at a tic mark multiply this scaling factor by the integer next to the tic mark Also in the lower left corner of the picture near the scaling factor are numerical intervals for each of the three coordinate directions They tell you the location of the box in the global coordinate system The smallest box containing everything relevant is determined initially When objects are changed added or removed from the picture the frame of reference grid is not changed The reference grid box will change when you up
63. O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 338 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual s f f is a vector in Cartesian coordinates giving the direction of the load Remarks At each node in the region the load will have a direction given by the direction vector fx fy fz The loads will be concentrated at the nodes Some codes doing dynamic simulations will require a time dependent load curve used to ramp or vary the load with respect to time Use led or fled to create a numbered load curve This load curve must then be reference in the fe command The load can be turned off globally by assigning a constant zero to the load curve Some codes require a set id number so that all loads with the same set id number can be switched on or off globally In these cases assign a set id number instead of a load curve number No load curve definition is required in this case Other codes ignore this parameter so just use a zero Example A part is defined in Cartesian coordinates and the mesh is manipulated The same concentrated nodal load is assigned to the nodes of the regionl 1 4 4 4 4 Figure 328 The command file follows definition of the mesh TrueGrid display forces 4 123E 00 fc 11444401104 c concentrated load is assigned to nodes of region 114444 by null load curve 0 with amplitude 1 and direction 1 0 4 QO0Q0000 merge co fc 0 c display concentrated load c for the null load curve fc
64. O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 503 e e a E ME 408 jio o P 397 BiG cu x co Du ues a ve ae ee ee 304 Stable dd 304 SUD seei is dotar ai 75 SUN as 21 24 workstation ae 69 SUDDIK as ra as 451 flowint 406 407 Superposition in geometric selection 103 Surf Edge button 116 141 Surf Point button 116 Surfaces mirta Sree 23 37 40 198 attaching to ieee ed ei eun 157 DUTON 4 2 ede srt et us 116 141 composite 2 ox s dd e Od 40 convex boundary 220 definitions A teer 280 display numbers 305 or NM REN E 115 193 edge identifier 231 Edge numbering 115 edge attaching to 157 BIDS 5 edotti eka ACH SEA 39 62 interior display 84 intersection 38 40 272 273 intersection algorithm 39 intersection method 40 labeled edges yuanes 115 labeled points 115 labels aaepe noe 1 ott 115 listo d etes MM s AN 296 mapping i ds e oa co ico 40 modify polygons 148 Multiple 4 oec da n ed 212 A Pt edi trn 33 DUMDE S vou etos v tee Re aes 115 orientation uy ere de CE 205 overlapping 62 overlapping 39 Point numbering 115 polygons 5 A 133 project duas AS 273 e P E EE 272 Tatipe Hie naa teta atis 165 WOOO cesarea Pa S
65. Polygon Set Surface polygon sets are useful when using complex polygon surfaces Sometimes it is necessary for the projection method that a single surface be split into several surfaces This is true when there is a fold in the surfaces or when two portions of a single polygon surface meet orthogonally The splitting of a surface is done in two steps The first step is to create a surface polygon set The second step is to define a new polygon surface using the sd command and the polygon set Quit Select Pick and Sets in the Environment Window lopen set nn open Then in the Sets Window select the Shells option save as IR E Check the number of nodes needed in the selection rocess or select the Mid option If you choose 1 2 3 E 4 then a surface polygon will be selected only if that Remove Toggie Ciear number of its nodes are found within the lasso region Selection Options If you choose the Mid option then only those polygons Nodes with midpoints in the lasso region will be selected Faces Beams Nodes Required to Select Move the mouse to the Physical Window Draw a curve Shells 1 2 EB around the polygons you want to select while holding Q Shells the Left Mouse Button Release the Left Mouse Button Bricks and the curve is automatically closed by a straight line Q Bricks segment between endpoints The enclosed area turns white and the selected polygons are identified by crosses
66. Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 107 7 The Environment Window Draw Cent Rest ES Roth Picture Wire Fill Motion Move Zoom Pick Move Pts PERJA ETA Apply Action to Action Curve Remove Show A11 Point PEGI Show None BB Attach History Figure 49 Environment Window General The buttons in the Environment Window control frequently used graphics and interactive mesh operations Every function which can be invoked by a button in the Environment Window can also be invoked using the dialogue boxes through the menu system or by typing a command in the text window Only a fraction of the commands in the menu and dialogue system are available through the Environment Window All buttons in the Environment Window respond only to the Left Mouse Button Certain buttons may be inoperative at different times and the labels for these buttons appear broken and grayed out Choosing the Type of Picture Pictur
67. Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 217 pa assigns coordinate values to a vertex pa vertex coordinate_identifier coordinate where a vertex is ijk reduced indices where the format for the coordinate depends on the following coordinate_identifier x x_coordinate y y_coordinate Z z_coordinate xy x_coordinate y_coordinate XZ x_coordinate z_coordinate yz y_coordinate z_coordinate xyz x coordinate y coordinate z coordinate Remarks This command assigns a vertex coordinate values moves the vertex This command is like the pb command This command has a shorter argument list than the pb command and everything that this command does can be done with the pb command Example In this simple example a single element part is used to create a wedge element The vertex was selected using the mouse and the indices were printed using the F1 key block 1 2 1 2 1 2 0 2 0 250 2 pa 1 22 x2 pa 1 2 1x2 q assigns coordinates of one vertex to another q 1 _vertex 2 vertex where a vertex is ijk reduced indices Remarks This command assigns the coordinates of the second vertex to the first vertex Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 218 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Example This simple example creates a single wedge element by moving two vertices to collapse a face to an edge The vertices were selected using the mouse and the indices were printed using the F1 key
68. Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 310 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fdsi 3 4 2 4 0 140 0 c spherical fixed disp by index progression 3 4 2 4 null load curve magnitude 1 direction 4 0 0 qaaaqaqaa fdsi 2 3 2 3 0 1400 spherical fixed disp by index progression DA Bes null load curve magnitude 1 c direction 4 0 0 merge co fd 0 display of fixed displacement 0 Q QOO A frb prescribed nodal rotation frb region load_ amplitude options condition direction where options can be any of the following birth time death time offset offset offset where condition must be one of the following v velocities a accelerations d displacements dofv nodal dof velocities dofa nodal dof accelerations dofd nodal dof displacements where direction must be one of the following X about the x axis y about the y axis Z about the z axis V Xo Yo Zo about an arbitrary axis ex not about the x axis ey not about the y axis ez not about the z axis eV X Yo Zo not about an arbitrary axis Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 311 Remarks A condition can be a velocity acceleration displacement or a nodal rotation This is suited for Dyna3D velocities accelerations and nodal rotations and Lsdyna In these codes the selected nodes are prescribed this condition relative to an axis of rotation Use the frb option in the co m
69. Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 389 v x offset y offset z offset rx theta ry theta rz theta raxis angle x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn rxy ryz YZx tf origin x axis y axis where each of the arguments consist of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s ij label of a labeled point from a surface ftf 5st origin Ist x axis Ist y axis 2nd origin 2nd x axis 2nd y axis where each of the arguments consist of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s ij label of a labeled point from a surface inv invert the present transformation esca scale factor xsca scale factor ysca scale factor zsca scale factor normal delta offset the slave in the normal direction from the master Remarks A face edge or vertex can be saved to form the geometry of a subsequent face edge or vertex respectively This subsequent face edge or vertex referred to as the slave will be glued to the first face edge or vertex referred to as the master by using the same identification number in both uses of the bb command The nodes on the slave side are forced to have matchin
70. The intersection of tangent surfaces should be avoided because this alternative method is very slow to converge Figure 288 Fifi JEFA H4 STEIN E 77 7 EE id N LE ss 477 IP Initial Point TPIP Tangent Plane Intersection Point Projection onto 2 Surfaces Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 275 A similar scheme is used to project a vertex to the intersection of three surfaces The intersection of the three tangent planes is used S sfacs 3 as the approximate point of intersection If a node is projected to more than three differ ent surfaces then it will be moved to some average or midpoint LP T T sted UN ELT LT zi e N x Y Edge nodes are give special consideration if they are not attached to a 3D curve or a surface edge These nodes have an added constraint depending on the nodal distribution or spacing rule to be applied to that edge see the res drs as das and nds commands The default is for IP Initial Point nodes to be equally distributed along the edge TPT Tangent Plane Intersection Point When an edge is projected to a single surface and the curvature along the surface is not large then a plane is constructed through the edge s two end points which is approximately orthogonal to the surface Then the edge nodes are distributed along the intersection of the surface and this cutting
71. The triad is there to tell you where the global coordinates are The triad is in the picture unless you turn it off with triad off Once you have removed it you can put the triad back in the picture by issuing a command triad on tvv color and shaded display tvv no arguments Remarks A tvv display has colored filled polygons It also has two light sources with reflected light to add to the 3D effect You may find that it makes the mesh easier to visualize The same feature is available in the Environment window with the Fill and Draw buttons Some kinds of text labels from the condition and labels commands may not be available with tvv If you use the pop up menu right mouse button in the physical window to select the output to be postscript instead of the screen the picture will be saved in a postscript file called tgimage ps Be sure to return the output state back to the screen when you are finished with postscript so that you can continue viewing the mesh on the screen This postscript feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics See also disp poor and draw zclip remove front portion from physical picture zclip screen to object screen to slice where screen fo object is the distance from the screen to the object default 1 and Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 87 screen_to_slice is the distance from the scr
72. TrueGrid The tvv FILL button graphics option does not work with the postscript command Use the pop up window with the right mouse while the mouse is in the window to activate the raster postscript options This produces a large file by the name of tgimage ps While this is activated each redraw of the physical window will rewrite this file with the new picture Be sure to repeat this process to deactivate the writing of the tgimage ps file and redirect the graphics back to the screen Use the same pop up window to do this This postscript feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics raad remove all annotations from the physical picture raad no argument Remarks See the ad command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics Adobe Illustrator is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 83 rad remove an annotation from the physical picture rad annotation_ Remarks See the ad command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics rindex label reduced indices rindex option where option can be on off Remarks The computational window contains three index bars used heavily to select portions of the mesh They are now labeled so that one can easily identify the 1 j and k index bars
73. TrueGrid are automatically assigned an icon If one double clicks on a TrueGrid input file the WINDOWS system knows to run TrueGrid with the selected file as input Be sure that the proper working directory has been selected using TGControls if this input file refers to other files When TrueGrid is started a process window pops up This is a background window and can be ignored most of the time It s purpose is to display system errors if TrueGrid is unable to run If TrueGrid is executed without an input file the second window that pops up is a browser to aid in selecting an input file If no input file is needed click on the CANCEL button TrueGrid and some environment variables are automatically registered with the WINDOWS system When uninstalling TrueGrid be sure to use the proper tools so that the registry entries are removed 2 TrueGrid Windows The following windows are used throughout a TrueGrid session Text Menu This window has two subwindows one for text and one for menus You have the option to issue commands by typing in the text subwindow You also have the option to issue commands from a command dialogue box The mouse need not be in this window for its input line to be active In fact your typing will be entered into this window as long as the mouse is in any TrueGrid window other than a dialogue box The menu subwindow gives you convenient access to the on line help and to command dialogue boxes
74. XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 247 iterations is the maximum number of iterations to use min_change is an absolute error tolerance there will be no more iterations if in the last iteration no coordinate was moved by more than min_change in any zone weight is an interpolation weight factor the value 1 0 usually works Remarks The numerical method is an adaptation of one described by Alan M Winslow in his report Equipotential Zoning of Two Dimensional Meshes UCRL 7312 University of California The method treats the mesh lines as contours of the solution to a system of Laplace equations where the boundary nodes form boundary conditions By setting the command s arguments you can choose to iterate until the method converges or you can choose to do just a few iterations It is best to experiment with this command to get the desired results When a face of the mesh is specified then all interior face nodes are relaxed If a node is on the boundary or if it is next to a region that has been deleted see de it will not be relaxed It is best to project the face onto a surface before using this command Relaxed nodes will be constrained to the surfaces they are projected onto If an interior face node is projected to several surfaces it will remain on the intersection of the surfaces For example if a node is required to be along the curve of intersection of two surfaces it wil
75. a selection is made in all three index bars The region of the mesh being selected is then the result of the intersection of the selections made in all three index bars There is a one to one correspondence between index progressions and objects that can be selected in the computational window There are three index progression lists corresponding to the three index bars in the computational window An interval from one reduced index to another within an index progression corresponds to an interval selected along an index bar A negative reduced index in an index progression corresponds to a node selected on one of the index bars When a single region is selected it can be used in a command such as lin where a single region is required When more complex objects are selected in the computational window then an index progression is generated and can only be used with commands such as lini with the 1 suffix After selecting objects in the mesh the function key F1 is used to submit the selection If a dialogue box was activated then the selection will be directed to the dialogue box Otherwise it will be directed to the text window There are a number of rules and properties to keep in mind when using the computational window to generate an index progression 0 If nothing is selected then all of the index intervals along an index bar are implied 1 Points only selected in all 3 bars will produce vertices 2 2 index bars with only points
76. acts like a convex boundary condition The first picture below has no smoothing The edges of the center elements are measured in each example for comparison purposes Also compare the subtle differences near the concave boundaries center edge length 0 097988911 sd 1 sp 000 4 parameter r sqrt 3 block 1 11 D 12 22 0 23 33 1 11 0 12 22 1 0000000000000 4 dei 7 8 4 5 1 pa 8 11 xy r cos 36 Sr sin 36 pa 5 5 1 xy r cos 108 r sin 108 pa 1 5 1 xy r cos 180 r sin 180 pa 1 1 1 xy r cos 252 r sin 252 pa 5 1 1 xy r cos 324 r sin 324 pa 5 2 xy 1 0 pa 7 1 1 xy 10 pa 8 2 1 xy cos 72 sin 72 pa 5 4 1 xy cos 72 sin 72 pa 4 5 1 xy cos 144 sin 144 pa 2 5 1 xy cos 144 sin 144 pa 1 4 xy cos 216 sin 216 pa 1 2 xy cos 216 sin 216 Figure 281 No smoothing pa 2 1 1 xy cos 288 sin 288 pa 4 1 1 xy cos 288 sin 288 sfi 1 sd 1 bb 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 bb 4 4 2 bb 42 52 2 bb 7 7 2 2 bb 7 2 8 2 3 bb 4 4 5 4 35 bb 4 4 4 5 4 bb 2 4 2 5 4 bb 1 4 24 5 bb 1 2 2 2 55 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 269 Figure 282 Relax smoothing 22 3 amp 0 13254464 00001 1 200 This method is easy to use and produces more unif
77. all three bars If nothing is selected in an index bar it will be interpreted as selecting all segments in that bar This is the default referred to above The exception to this is that if nothing is selected in all three index bars there will be no highlights in the mesh although it is still interpreted as selecting the entire mesh Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 98 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Color table for graphical region selection As you select regions of the mesh they are highlighted Each type of selection has a different highlighting color selected edge boundary of selected deleted region Key bindings pertaining to highlighting and region selection Control P toggle on or off the continuous highlighting of slicing planes Control D clear the current highlighting F2 clear the current highlighting Control A print the progression or region to the command line or to a dialogue box Fl print the progression or region to the command line or to a dialogue box Examples of Index Bar selections From TrueGrid s Control Phase issue the command block 1 3 6 7 1 2 4 6 8 Ll 3 4 Ta LL e A A ue a 31 You have just created a block mesh with several partition points at reduced indices 1 1 2 3 4 TrueGrid is initially in the Control Phase From the Merge Phase you can get to the Control Phase by entering the control command From the Part Phase the endpart o
78. already in place The second step is an iterative process TrueGrid projects each node onto the required surfaces in the manner described above Then the nodes are all perturbed in order to satisfy the spacing requirement Since this perturbation may have moved some of the edge nodes off of the required surfaces the edges are again projected onto the required surfaces This process is repeated until all of the constraints are satisfied A special case exists when the edge is required to be on only one surface If the surface is not too curved then TrueGrid constructs a plane passing through the two end points of the edge and perpendicular to the surface The edge nodes are then constrained to fall along the intersection of these two surfaces Once the edges of the block mesh are in place then the faces of the block mesh are calculated Each face is bounded by four edges of the mesh The shape of the four edges are blended to form the initial shape ofthe face Each node ofthe face ofthe mesh is then projected from this initial position to the required surface After the six faces of the block mesh are calculated then the interior nodes are calculated by blending the shapes of the 6 bounding faces Command Hierarchy In TrueGrid s mesh generation algorithm each event occurs in a prescribed order You may issue commands in an arbitrary order First TrueGrid initializes the vertices Then it attaches vertices to the required curves and pr
79. an Edge of the Mesh to an Edge of a Surface TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Surface edges TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Surface edges Figure 132 Before Attach Figure 133 After Attach Figure 132 and Figure 133 show an attachment of an edge of the mesh blue to edge 1 4 grey of surface 1 The mesh edge was previously selected in the Computational Window see pg 111 and the surface edge was picked by Label in the Physical Window This type of attachment produces the edge command in the text window and the session file tsave This command treats all interior vertices of a multiple edge of the mesh as interior points making this option less flexible You may be tempted to use this command in the early stages of creating a mesh However if you should need to insert a partition insprt command at a later time the resulting new vertex will have no freedom to be moved along this edge If you think that you might insert a partition at a later time it is best to form a 3D curve from this edge using the sdedge option of the curd command and attach to the 3D curve Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 160 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Attaching a Mesh Edge to a Lassoed Block Boundary In this example an intra part master block boundary interface is selected with a lasso This form of attachment prints a bb command to the text window and T the session file tsave There are H many options to
80. an inlet wall for a wall with 0 velocity ufl amplitude for u flux by index progression vfl amplitude for v flux wfl amplitude for w flux tfl temperature for temperature flux spf species_ amplitude for species flux cb for obstruction Remarks See efe above Example efer h 2 1 24 pre EE les 2 This example selects faces of a block and assigns a pressure Its name is pr_2 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 355 fbe FLUENT boundary conditions fbe region type zone where type can be fbci interior wall pr_inlet pressure inlet inlet_ve inlet vent intake_f intake fan pr_outle pressure outlet exhaust _ exhaust fan outlet_v outlet vent symmetry per_shad periodic shadow pr far f pressure far field velocity velocity inlet periodic fan porous j porous jump radiator mass flo mass flow inlet interfac interface outflow axis FLUENT boundary conditions by index progression fbci progression type zone where type can be interior wall pr inlet pressure inlet inlet ve inlet vent intake f intake fan pr outle pressure outlet exhaust exhaust fan outlet v outlet vent symmetry per shad periodic shadow 356 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual pr_far_f pressure far field velocity velocity inlet periodic fan porous_j porous jump radia
81. and 1 index bar with only intervals will produce edges Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 50 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 3 Only intervals in all 3 bars will produce only volumes 4 Intervals and points in the same bar will produce faces and or volumes using the following algorithm a Start with the i index bar For every negative number treat the other 2 bars as though there were no negative numbers and produce all regions as a product of the intervals in those 2 bars Each region becomes a face where the i index is the absolute value of the i index in the progression Do this for each negative i index b Do the same for j index bar instead of 1 c Do the same for k index bar instead of j d Throw away all intervals in each of the 3 directions which have negative numbers Treat what remains if any as a selection of volumes i e products of intervals Examples Index progressions will be demonstrated using the following simple multi block part shown in Figure 19 The block part was created using the block command k index bar This block part has 6 partitions in the i direction 5 partitions in the j direction and 4 partitions in the k directions Figure 19 shows the orientation of the i j and k index bars in T d the computational window The i j and k i index bar 5 _ index bars are used for a selection of intervals Figure 19 Block Part C
82. and N in the computational space are mapped to 0 and 1 in relative arc length space respectively For each interior edge node i in computational space located at P in physical space the arc length IP P from P to P along the edge is calculated and node i is mapped to the position with a distance r P Pola P P from the previous node Map Boundary Relative Figure 264 Boundary Relative Arc Lengths The third step is to extend the second step s mappings to the interior nodes Consider a face node i in the computational space There are four corresponding edge nodes 7 0 i M 0 and Nj The coordinates of the edge nodes in relative arc length space 75 0 7 1 0 5 and 1 s are known The face node coordinates r s in relative arc length space satisfy Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 254 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual r 1 s ry sr s 1 7 s rs Interpolate The Relative Arc Lengths For Each Interior Node Of The Unit Square Figure 265 Domain interior nodes interpolated The fourth step is to map each surface node from relative arc length space to physical space Each interior node at a point r s is mapped to the physical space using the bilinear interpolation based on the eight relevant boundary nodes the four corner nodes and four edge nodes 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 7 0 7 1 0 5 1 5 If these
83. annotation_ Remarks Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 79 See the ad command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics dads display a list of annotations in the physical picture dads ist_annotation_ Remarks See the ad command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics display display with general hidden line algorithm display no arguments or disp no arguments Remarks This is slower than the other display algorithms but it is found on all machines and the picture is very nice The picture is a drawing of the mesh with hidden line removal The same feature is available in the Environment window with the Hide and Draw buttons See also draw poor and tvv The picture will also be drawn to a postscript file if the postscript option is on This postscript feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics draw display without hidden line draw no arguments Remarks The model will be displayed very fast but the picture will not be as nice as you can get with the other display algorithms The algorithm does not remove all hidden lines The same feature is available in the Environment window with the Wire and Draw buttons and the backplane removal turned off Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications
84. arrival for load curve with velocity 500 and time offset 0 from plane source with coord 15 13 13 and normal 1 0 0 angle of incidence option cosine is used c shock amplitude is decaying n0n0000000 with square of distance Figure 326 Plane Source c from shock source merge co pr 1 c display pressure for load curve 1 dist laser distribution function dist distribution_ type parameter_list where type and parameter_list can be gaus coefficient_1 coefficient_2 coefficient_3 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 336 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual table ist 2D points Remarks dist creates a laser scale function for the arri command This is functional when the laser option is selected There are two types of functions Gaussian and tabular The Gaussian has the form distance by 2c dist 2 c where a b and c are specified and distance is the variable d in Figure 327 The tabular form is a polygonal function Pairs of coordinates form a function where the first coordinate of each pair must be strictly monotonically increasing Example The load curve 1 is determined by points O 1 1 1 Pressure with amplitude 10000 is assigned totheregion1 1 1 1 2 2 A laser source of shock is defined by a point with coordinates TP s i TrueGrid display pressure 1 at 1 000E 04 4 5 5andadirection vector 1 0 O The P velocity of the shock is 500 and
85. at 1 O Shells Display labels for quadratic 7 or 8 node 2D shell plate or membrane elements in the picture Quadratic shell elements are numbered independent of other elements starting at 1 Bricks Display labels for linear 4 6 or 8 node 3D solid elements in the picture Linear brick elements are numbered independent of other elements starting at 1 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 116 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual O Bricks Display labels for quadratic 10 15 or 20 node 3D solid elements in the picture Quadratic brick elements are numbered independent of other elements starting at 1 Node Display labels for numbered nodes in the picture The node numbers reflect any merging of nodes Also refer to labels command see pg 305 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 117 type dasd labels sd disp i ENS i 3 SON DENIM EEE A A A T A ed TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 labeled Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserv ated by options Labels Surface Display List Surface Show All and Hide Draw from the Env ironment Window Alternatively you can Figure 62 was cre u o U H 4 3 u Ke 9 S d tH 9 a As n H a Ke d M o o 3 4 E NW Figure 62 Surfaces are 118 Figure 63
86. automatically moved all of the neighboring interior nodes upwards in order to satisfy the interpolation rules To repeat projections are a way to define the shape of a part by placing its face nodes onto surfaces The interior nodes are placed by interpolation By default TrueGrid places interior nodes with a linear interpolation method This is discussed in detail in the remarks on the lin command You can specify other interpolation algorithms if you prefer Figure 13 was made with the tf transfinite interpolation command Regions Indices and Reduced Indices When you define a mesh with TrueGrid you often refer to a region i e a set of nodes which form a rectangular set in the computational space A region may be a vertex edge face or volume of the mesh One of the major notational issues is how to specify a region We do not want to specify a region directly by giving the lower and upper limits for its i j and k indices This is because we may later want to change the number of nodes in the mesh If we specified regions in terms of the actual i j and k index values we couldn t change the number of nodes see the command mseq without carefully going through the entire mesh specification and changing index values in each of the many Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 33 places that refer to some region TrueGrid solves this problem by descri
87. bebe e 171 Surface Button o oooooo o 142 surfaces TUNIC Laa xm AR 23 A Hoare y dens 275 Surfaces button 2 curse cr md ed 66 BW uq b Chus E dC cone 366 OWL seas da tad 367 Byl arose mod tag a ae en m da 367 YD sa e d E des S halla UR np dp tu 367 Symmetry plane with failure node selection 367 SMA o ee as AS 56 Syntax checking da 176 Js iota capiet acted Sita erage Bares d 31 APH uote Pat a 385 eee eirca t Su aeq 291 domain Lee ch ale ate v Pena 288 hierarchy occ cals eerta 199 208 update iu eaa CE reso e d 207 jD5 rec 292 domain icd sse RSEN ARN 288 hierately xs oce Ges 199 208 Updates cds os haa S au daa 207 TEM Ce oque Rite E e MN M i mox 292 OMAN es oto do ore 288 hierarchy i i 2 cc 2 eoa 199 208 q sse eae arcs 207 Tan Expressions 289 Tangent A vio de ande tetas o 39 SUITACES hice ce Skies 165 225 Tangent plane ooooooooo o 274 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 504 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual projection 4 5 eins Ga ec SORES 275 Tangent plane tod a 39 Tanh Expressions o oooo o 290 A LP 380 example siu chose tate qos aate 449 TED us yatta sta HL Bae ON 381 Telephone a iut cepere bas 23 2p Temp DERE ED UE LN 381 Temperature boundary conditions 373 374 constant tes ot EASTER 380 constant tei 381 constant temp 381 initial tm Lon ds 382 ini
88. by selecting dots Try it For example Figure 35 shows how to select all six outer faces of the original rectangular box as well as an interior plane in the middle The Figure 35 is created by the hidden line removal option so it is similar to Figure 31 The difference is in the color of the selected region Figure 31 cyan Figure 35 yellow Figure 35 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 102 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 and Figure 39 show four different ways to choose exactly the same face region However they will be very different if you choose various other dots For example try the second dot of the vertical index bar Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 The way that selecting dots chooses blocks and faces is based upon the principle of superposition Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 103 For example Figure 39 can be viewed as the superposition of the Figure 40 and Figure 41 See the color table page 99 for the details of how the colors are chosen Figure 40 Figure 41 There is one very special exception to the principle of superposition that occurs when you choose edges You can choose any number of edges in one direction only by selecting dots only in two directions and segments only in the other direction Selected edges appear blue
89. by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 492 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Move Pts button 179 DANTE esos has Rl GES eek GAGA 362 MDI eB me RERO RA 384 o ey ee e oc Se aet 363 MDO quove put eU SACRO AA 361 NASTRAN oc veu PT e EET 332 Mpi diss dd scd s 384 SPC accusata e o aes at 352 WT cans Bede reek eng ae 280 Natural Derivatives 186 hierarchy AA 198 208 Ndd MI ds 33 34 198 203 MA A 286 equations 4L us ets 204 INGE 2 c ee AE a a 346 exti eu Es 204 OPE usd osse MEC EO 205 undo oor yet an aos e sae 171 NAIT A aaa UR cr aoa HAS 346 Update 3 52 derrita ds 204 207 ODE core Wer dtes t eps 205 NU roue on b eae An 461 NUS s sese eere ace NK 286 DD ebrei A ENDS 395 Command qr soe dures Rn 252 exatiple serete dv e Ph ia 66 CU vid esos due Eua yat ar ates 228 INARI uoce IAN de 362 edge projection 276 M oes ated odis ert ie cuni mat 462 Ms o 236 AMOO a eM MA 462 Dil A T tes etd ek 239 bb cea o ta a oe dcs 395 POLAK Sos oe ota de e RU 248 MOS etae eta wane WE 461 466 DE cca Et Ate RON S ree eas 252 Multi block dai er eS ia 20 TME nest ue E reo 259 Multiple Block Structured Parts 34 37 42 NE NASTRAN 197 PO Douala hen wei tenga tiq 352 Multiple regions 235 INGDNOLIe 1x eae exime CE Helen 25 CST o2 14 ste de Solet deoa ba 236 INCU to 94 1 oleo dedos e ota d De annie 263 i 2 tb sue LOC es ute E 248 INGU E euo e Ru e
90. c display of joint 1 TrueGrid display Spherical Joint Figure 338 cylindrical joint is in between 2 parts The same physical effect as in the previous Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 358 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual example cylindrical joint allows independent rotations and constrains displacements can be achieved by sharing translational degrees of freedom between the local nodes So the joint number 1 is defined as a joint with shared constraints At first Part 1 is created by the block command and the node with reduced indices 3 3 1 is assigned to joint 1 as local node 1 Then Part 2 is created and the node with reduced indices 1 1 1 is assigned to joint 1 as local node 2 Figure 338 The command file follows c joint with shared degrees of freedom c is defined qom 531 3 5205 c Part 1 is defined node with reduced indices 3 3 1 is assigned to joint 1 for local node 1 LS T7 0 5 7 90 c Part 2 is defined c node with reduced indices 1 1 1 is assigned c to joint 1 for local node 2 1 c display of joint 1 identifies an inlet for fluid flow jd 1 dx dy dz block 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 jt i l1 m 3 39 l1 E block 1 3 5 S 5 jt 1 Z m Ll merge co jt il il region Example The mesh is defined and shaped The il command specifies faces of elements fro
91. can cause distortion because the perspective will make it appear as though you eye had gotten closer or further away from the object In most cases the zoom is preferred This feature can be very useful when the range of the z coordinates are much smaller then the range of coordinates in the other directions zb zoom back zb zoom_factor Remarks Zoom backward by a scale factor This operation is performed on the coordinates after translations rotations scaling and perspective It has a similar effect that a zoom lens on a camera where the perspective will be unaffected by the zoom This is reversible by using the reciprocal of the zoom factor or by using the zf command with the same zoom factor zf zoom forward Zf zoom factor Remarks Zoom forward by a scale factor This operation is performed on the coordinates after translations rotations scaling and perspective Its effect is similar to that of a zoom lens on a camera where the perspective will be unaffected by the zoom This is reversible by using the reciprocal of the zoom factor or by using the zb command with the same zoom factor angle perspective angle angle angle where the angle is in degrees Remarks This command defines the perspective angle The default is about 17 degrees Set the angle to 0 for an orthogonal projection onto the screen The angle must be between 0 and 180 excluding 180 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved
92. can type dacd disp TrueGrid display Figure 105 Curves Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 146 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 106 was created by options Part Show All and Hide from the Environment Window Alternatively you can type dap disp EN AO Ty CPC ARES COSA TIT LLL 2272 TT 27 2 2 M N NN Mesh Figure 106 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 147 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Move Pts Panel Interactively Moving Regions of the Mesh The placement of portions of the mesh controls points of 3D curves and points on polygon surfaces is fast and intuitive using these methods It can also be less than precise However the projection method usually only requires that the mesh be positioned close to its final position The projection method makes it precise These methods of moving the mesh can be done initially before you indicate which faces of the mesh are to be projected to which surfaces Just as important you can use these methods to move the mesh after you have projected the faces to surfaces This allows you to make fine adjustments to the mesh while it remains constrained to the surfaces of projection To move portions of the mesh click on the i Draw Cent Rest P Both Comp Move Pts Button in the Environment Window so that th
93. case the node is projected onto all three surfaces The point of intersection of the three corresponding tangent planes is determined and the node is then moved two thirds of the way towards that point This is repeated until it converges to the intersection of the three surfaces When a node is projected onto only two surfaces there are only two points of projection and two tangent planes But TrueGrid finds the intersection just as described above except that in place of the third tangent plane TrueGrid uses the plane which passes through the node point and its two points of projection This method works because a tangent plane forms a local approximation to a surface This is an Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 40 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual example of a classic iterative Newton method When the surfaces have large curvature you should take care to initially locate the node close to the point of intersection An edge of the block mesh is a row of nodes between two neighboring vertices of the block mesh TrueGrid calculates edges of the mesh after placing all of the vertices onto the specified surfaces The edge nodes are usually placed onto 0 1 or 2 surfaces They can be equally spaced or distributed using a geometric progression TrueGrid does this in two steps First the nodes of the edge are distributed along the line connecting the end points of the edge the end points are
94. causes the Insert Mode to be checked Accept This button is used after Insert Append or Prepend and after having selected an associated point This button enters the coordinates ofthe selected point into the table If Confirm Selection has been checked then every point must be accepted using this button before its coordinates are entered into the Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 181 table Delete When this button is clicked the points in the table identified by the range of sequence numbers in the from and to fields will be deleted from the table If no numbers are indicated then the focal point is deleted from This field is the start of the range of sequence numbers of points to be deleted from the table when the Delete button is clicked to This field is the end of the range of sequence numbers of points to be deleted from the table when the Delete button is clicked If this field is left blank only one point will be deleted from the table Save This button is used to save the curve as a standard curve in the internal 3D curve database This also causes an equivalent curd command to be printed to the session file tsave Quit This causes the Point List window to disappear It does not clear the points in the table Create a Polygonal Curve Interactively confirm selection Accept Quit
95. commands usually the slave side should be deactivated and the corners of the regions initialized so that their proper association can be easily determined automatically Then re issue the bb command do not re activate the previous one Example cylinder 1 3 1 3 5 7 1 After pb 1 2 0 30 60 90 0 pb121131x1 5 pbs assign coordinates to vertices from a labeled point pbs region coordinates point_id where coordinates is one of x y Z Xy XZ yz or xyz and Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 211 point_id is a point identifier Remarks Before issuing this command you need to get a point identifier To view labeled surface or 3D curve points click on the appropriate button from the Labels panel in the environment window Then choose to Pick by Label click on a point s label and type the F8 function key to enter the label either into the dialogue box or the text window Or click on the Attach button By default the pbs command is substituted with the pb command before it is written to the tsave session file The default can be changed so that the pbs command is written to the tsave session file See the cooref command There is a special interaction that takes place when the intra part bb command is issued prior to this command being issued If two regions of the same part are glued together with the bb command then if one
96. curves Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 142 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual rg rgi darg arg argi rrg rrgi darged regions dm dms dam rm rms materials dp dps dap rp rps part dbb dbbs dabb rbb rbbs rabb block boundaries dlv divs rlv levels layers dgrp dgrps rgrp groups See the DISPLAY COMMANDS table for a summary of these commands Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 143 Figure 103 was created by options Surface Show All and Part Show All and Wire from the Environment Window sdint off was typed in the Text Window also available under the Graphics menu Alternatively you can type dasd dap draw Figure 103 Surfaces and Parts Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 144 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual ironment Window ated by options Surface Show All and Hide from the Env Figure 104 was cre Alternatively you can type dasd disp Pal rd Q n H we d A H y 9 3 uH EA in Hidden Line Picture rfaces Su Figure 104 ed Inc All Rights Reserv Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications 145 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 105 was created by options Curve Show All and Hide from the Environment Window Alternatively you
97. cylinder surface sd 1 cy 032100 c surface 1 definition cylinder sfi 1 4 1 sd 1 c mesh is projected onto cylinder jomi 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 i111 sd 1 1 c index progression c 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 ns is turned into beams in the j direction number of columns of elements in the i direction is 4 4 edges times 1 number of columns of elements in the k direction is 1 the beam material number is 1 the beam cross section axis is parallel with the normals of the surface 1 sd 1 the cross section number is 0000000 merge labels id c beams are labeled co or rst c local axes rst of elements are displayed TrueGrid draw 1D elements Figure 374 beams by jbmi Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 428 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual kbm kbm region _in_i _in_j material orientation cross_section option where generate beams in the k direction TrueGrid display element local rst axis Hini 4 inj material orientation is the number of columns of beam elements in the i direction is the number of columns of beam elements in the j direction is the material number is the option of orientation of the cross section axis j sd surface_ v xn yn zn none Figure 375 beams by jbmi second axis orientation in the i direction second axis orientation in the j direction second axis orientation in the norm
98. drag operation the vertex which is closest to the mouse will be selected automatically for the move When you select a region the first vertex you select with the left mouse button click or the F5 key the coordinates of that vertex are shown at the bottom of the Move Points Panel In a cylindrical part you can choose to see these coordinates in the local cylindrical or global Cartesian coordinates by Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 148 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual clicking on the Global or Local buttons The F7 key will print these coordinates as shown in the Move Points Panel When a region or progression is selected for movement the geometric center of mass is for a rigid body translation A simplified outline of the region or progression and the translation vector from the old to the new center of mass is shown in white as you move the mouse This rigid body translation requires a special definition for a cylinder part This rigid body translation is done in the local cylindrical coordinate system of the part and will appear in the Cartesian coordinate system as anything but a rigid body motion unless you are only moving the mesh in the z direction of the local cylindrical coordinate system A similar feature is available in the merge phase where only one node at a time can be moved In this case move the mouse close to a single node in the physical window and click the F5 key Movi
99. drs region direction ratio ratio where direction is one of i j or k ratio is a positive number and ratio is a positive number Remarks This should be used to distribute nodes along a single edge or to identify several edges in the same direction where the reduced index partition between the edges 1s to be ignored Two ratios are specified in this command The first ratio is the relation of the distances between nodes in the first half of the edge If is the distance from node i to node i 1 then 6 6 ratio In the second half of the edge the second ratio is Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 284 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 292 Nodal distribution with 2 control parameters If there is an odd number of nodes along the edge then the lengths of two middle intervals will be the same It is possible to require special zoning across several regions in more than one direction at atime It is also possible to over specify the zoning and the results can be unsatisfactory The transfinite interpolation over several regions usually produces the desired results by treating the zoning requirements as boundary conditions for the algebraic interpolation See also the as das res and nds commands This is used to create nodal clustering at both ends by making both ratios greater than 1 0 as absolute spacing of first or last element of an edge as region direction flag size
100. eset 2 32 2 eso eset 22 1 4 3 2 or eso eset 3 3 1 4 4 2 or eso merge labels elemset eso Figure 387 Element Set eso Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 454 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual eseti add remove elements to from a set of elements eseti progression operator set_name where set name is the name of the element set operator can be for initial assignment AND for intersection with element set OR for union with the element set for removal from the element set Remarks The initial assignment creates a face set If the face set with the same name already existed then it is deleted and recreated The intersect operator redefines a face set to be only those faces which are found to be both in the original set and among the selected faces Selected faces can be added by using the union operator This causes any selected faces to be included in a set if it is not already in that set The minus operator removes all faces in a set which are among the selected faces fset add remove faces to from a set of faces fset region operator set_name where set name is the name of the face set operator can be for initial assignment AND for intersection with face set OR for union with the face set for removal from the face set Remarks The initial assignment creates a face set If the face set with the same name already existed then it is deleted and recreated The intersect o
101. expr is the FORTRAN expression for the x component y expr is the FORTRAN expression for the y component Z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Remarks See vace for remarks The only difference is that regions are selected using index progressions vaccc cylindrical variable nodal prescribed boundary accelerations vacce region load curve ft amp_expr p expr G expr z expr where load curve 7 is a load curve number or zero amp expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the FORTRAN expression for the radial component 0 expr is the FORTRAN expression for the polar angular component Z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Remarks This command assigns accelerations allowing for the amplitude factor and the cylindrical vector components to be calculated using a FORTRAN expression Each expression can reference the nodal coordinates X Y and Z and the nodal indices I J and K When the part is generated in cylindrical coordinates the X in an expression will refer to the radial coordinate of the node and Y in an expression will refer to the angular coordinate of the node vaccci cylindrical variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations vaccci progression load curve t amp expr p expr O expr z expr where load curve f is a load curve number or zero amp expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the FORTRAN expression for the radial component G expr is the FOR
102. face The relax command invokes the iterative equipotential relaxation smoothing method This has almost the opposite effect of transfinite interpolation After many iterations all the elements tend to take on the same size except for elements near the boundary This elliptic method gently shifts only the interior nodes to form a smoother mesh on the interior This is done by solving the Laplace Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 42 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual differential equation along both sets of mesh contours ofa face The edge nodes form the boundary conditions for solving this system of differential equations Algebraic Methods In the last phase of the part generation TrueGrid evaluates all equations and modifies the mesh accordingly You use the dom command to specify the domain or region of the mesh affected by an equation Your equation will move each node within this domain In your expression you can use the nodal indices i j and k and the nodal coordinates x y and z When TrueGrid evaluates the expression it assigns the result to one of the node s coordinates For example x x j z 10 1 will move the x coordinate of each node by an amount that depends on the node s j index and z coordinate For more complicated systems of equations you can use the temporary variables t1 t2 and t3 This is a very powerful method for generating complex meshes But it is easy to
103. frame dt 112 113 LL O ater lef 371 372 A Gece eee d 108 heatflow 374 375 hides Bre eat Bache 108 interpolation 282 Label iba io is 141 LOC alias 2 o mE 360 labels 116 141 magnetic flux 374 375 MOVE 2 cee eee 112 114 temperature 373 374 DIS oh ie RIO 111 Boundary layer LESION dra Rass 128 141 TANG led gosh eee nee DT 261 REMOVE eod a ates 141 Boundary radiation 378 TESU ape Aequi ERN 112 Bounding face 005 41 rotate Nica id in 112 Bptol era re O 447 Shoe A A ie tat ick gi ae ati 141 NPM utro tu eet edd usd 385 Shoe NOB 45 4 eta ce wireless 141 Brick SAO eres eec d 141 material orientation 413 ai A 141 Bricks DULCE 00 is 141 face set ui is 136 WIG Ia take tud dae 108 labels al toe 115 A cs auras sees e ete 112 114 Bricks button 116 134 Bruta ee eae et dea 316 BSG end ene Oe pte hae as dit 413 417 IBV what ect obe sk Sand eA 316 dialogue BOX ii vc Rn 173 CAD sceau a etes Ner tin m s 62 IBI as boe ironia cust Petes 419 Cancel e eos ux arto da ede du usd 72 Bulc Capto cs ak tH tds ess 79 DEDU oe e neu o aec ro i 205 deuda oe ac RA E 78 Bulk fluid Cartesian Coordinates 148 ler PEE 368 CD ROM 1 edis Ease As 26 Bleus beca A 4 eine 369 Cent bUttoll Socr s esce deb P equ 112 Butterfly topology 197 219 COMETS heal Aun han Vet et dete teet 88 96 Button Center of rotat
104. in one direction but to be interpolated in another direction The slave block boundary interface is performed after the initialization of the part and before any interpolations or projections These nodes are then frozen No other command can change the coordinates of the slave nodes in a block boundary interface Things are a little more complicated if the slave side of the block boundary interface is in the same part as the master side but the results are the same This is known as an intra part block boundary interface The special restriction on the intra part block boundary is that care must be taken to do reasonable things This is not an iterative process so a complex dependency of the coupling of multiple pairs of faces using this command may not work Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 393 The geometry of the block boundary interface is initially in the local coordinate system of the part In most cases no transformation is required Use the transform option to place the interface in the global coordinate system if it differs from the local coordinate system of the part If you are creating the master side of the interface you may wish to transform the interface to the global system The simplified command file is bb 1 1 1 55 1 1 rz 20 ry 20 master block boundary definition rotated around z and y axes bb 1122221 slave block boundary definit
105. in the expressions The values of these variables are the averages of the corresponding coordinates and indices of the nodes that define the polygon See the remarks on cv Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 370 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual cvt convection thermal loads evt region coefficient temperature where coefficient film coefficient temperature temperature near convection Remarks First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation that is how to orient the outward normal vector This command is used to create convection thermal loads for ANSYS The first parameter is the film coefficient This is followed by the temperature near convection This command will create the EP cards for the ANSYS input file cvti convection thermal loads cvti progression coefficient temperature where coefficient film coefficient temperature temperature near convection Remarks See the remarks on cvt above fl prescribed boundary flux fl region load curve ft amplitude where load curve f a load curve number amplitude amplitude constant Remarks First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation that is how to orient the outward normal vector Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 371 fli prescribed boundary flux fli progression load_curve_ amplitude where load_curve_ a load cur
106. index bar Figure 31 shows which segments to select You should now see 2 blocks in the picture that are colored cyan TrueGrid uses this color to indicate that you have selected a block region of the mesh cyan is a mixture of green and blue at full intensity the opposite of red Figure 31 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 100 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual You also can select faces in the physical mesh they are plane sections in the computational mesh You can access any number of plane sections at once For example select the second dot on the lower index bar Figure 32 Once you do that the cyan colored segments will disappear and a yellow plane will appear TrueGrid uses yellow to indicate that you have selected a planar section of the computational mesh that is a face in the physical mesh Now select the third dot on the lower index bar TrueGrid will highlight another face the face on the opposite side of the cube Figure 33 Figure 32 Figure 33 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 101 Next deselect the second and third dots on the lower index bar and select the middle dot third dot on the vertical index bar Figure 34 Figure 34 You have just selected a plane that slices the original selected volume into two equal pieces You can select any number of planes
107. is prescribed to the elements of the region Figure 332 The command file follows block 15 9 133 15 9 13 15 9 T3 TrueGrid view momentum deposition elements l 5 9 Soe 1 5 9 13 Ll 5 9 IS c mesh definition dei 12 3 4 mdep 231444 150 120 130 0 c momentum deposition is C prescribed for the elements c of the region 2 31444 c with momentums 150 120 130 c and deposition time O0 merge co mdep c display of the elements c with prescribed deposition c of moment Figure 332 momentum deposition by mdep mom nodal moment about an axis mom region load curve moment direction where direction specifies the axis and can be any of x y or z Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 344 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks Nodal moment about one of the nodal axis in the global coordinate system Some codes doing dynamic simulations will require a time dependent load curve used to ramp or vary the moment with respect to time Use Ied or fled to create a numbered load curve This load curve must then be reference in the mom command The load can be turned off globally by assigning a constant zero to the load curve Some codes require a set id number so that all moments with the same set id number can be switched on or off globally In these cases assign a set id number instead of a load curve number No load curve definition is required in this case Other codes ignore this parameter s
108. is assigned c to region 411466 ES i c by load curve 1 c and amplitude 30000 arri 1 velo 500 toff 0 line 15 13 13 1 1 1 cosine decay 1 r2 shock arrival for load curve 1 with velocity 500 and time offset 0 from line source with coord 15 13 13 and 1 1 1 angle of incidence option cosine is used shock amplitude is decaying Figure 325 Line Source QOQ00000000 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 335 with square of distance c from shock source merge co pr 1 c display pressure for load curve 1 Example The mesh is defined by a structured block Figure 326 The load curve 1 is determined by points O O 1 1 Pressure with amplitude 10000 is assigned to the region 4 1 1 4 6 6 A plane source of shock is defined by coordinate 15 13 13 and normal vector 1 0 0 The velocity of the shock is 500 and time offset is 0 The amplitude of the shock decays with square of the distance r from the shock source The decay constant is 1 The angle of incidence option is used to calculate the amplitude in normal direction of the faces led 10011 c load curve 1 definition TrueGrid display pressure 1 at 1 000E 04 pr 4 1 1 4 6 6 1 10000 c pressure is assigned TO region 411466 source plane c by load curve 1 c and amplitude 10000 arri 1 velo 500 toff 0 plane 15 13 13 1 0 0 xn yn zn cosine decay 1 r2 shock
109. k indices are defined in a similar way These three indices are known as the full indices of a node Shape Of The Mesh A block structure simplifies the mesh generation problem by automatically filling in a block with the required hexahedron elements You need only specify the shape of the exterior faces of the block mesh These surfaces are specified using the sd command by importing surface geometry from a CAD CAM IGES file or from a polygon surface using the vpsd command Then each face of the block mesh can be projected to a surface using the sf command This deforms the initial block mesh to the required shape Alternatively you can generate a block mesh using three dimensional curves A block mesh has twelve edges and you can place some of these edges onto 3 D curves The shape of the curve can be defined using the curd command or by importing curves from a CAD CAM IGES file Then you can use the curs command to place an edge of the block onto the curve TrueGrid s prescribed Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 37 ordering will place edges of the mesh onto 3 D curves before any regions are projected onto surfaces Neither curve attachments nor surface projections may be required for a particular mesh The projection method is a collection of techniques used to place nodes of the mesh onto surfaces When a node of the mesh is projected onto a surface it is
110. lct TrueGrid display Figure 381 Three copies of a single part Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 444 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual grep global replication of a part grep ist local transform ft where transform s number of a transformation defined by the last get command for the current part Remarks Each transformation identified in the list of global transformations is applied to a duplicate of the current part The original part does not get added to the model by default However a sequence number of 0 in the grep transformation list means to include the original part without a transformation By default all replicates of the part will have the same material number But you can have the material numbers change by a constant for each global replicate of the part The material number of a replicate will be computed as original material number global material increment Single Brick Element Replicated To Form A Wall TrueGrid display sequence number of replicate The gmi command sets the local material increment Similarly you may increment sliding interface numbers with a local sliding interface increment set by the gsii command and you may increment joint numbers with a joint command increment set by the ine option of the jt command Up to 300 transformations can be listed in the grep command The most useful application of global replication is to d
111. lin 1 1 1322 The reduced indices of the region in the i direction start at 1 and end at 3 This is the entire range of the reduced index in the i direction Both the reduced j and k indices of the region span from 1 to Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 46 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 2 which is also their entire range The nodes on the exterior faces form the boundary data used to interpolate all of the interior nodes of the part The one interior face which forms the interface between the two blocks has all of its interior node interpolated as well A face is selected if the minimum and the maximum reduced indices in exactly one of the 1 j or k direction are the same number If the two reduced i indices are the same it is referred to as an i face Similarly if the reduced j or k indices are the same it is referred to as aj or k face respectively The following example of a k face interpolation causes the interior nodes of the face to be interpolated based on the coordinates of the exterior boundary edges of this face The interior edge between the two component faces where the reduced i index is 2 is included as interior nodes of this linear interpolation lin 1 11 32 1 If two pairs of reduced indices are have the same numbers then an edge is selected For example if the reduced j indices are the same and if the reduced k indices are the same while the reduced i indices are
112. m AA IET E MAE ALT Tah HAJALI TTH LT 13151313 TEMER ERA E3111 HH V US zi ZZ ET FR JLT Th Pelt TT fat Ma t i338 i Step 2 1 8 Figure 165 TZ ALLL TSH a3 AZ TAH VIS LA Sa fa e 81h ALLIT TAN Step 1 Figure 164 183 Step 4 Figure 167 April 6 2006 Step 3 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual Figure 166 Figure 168 How to Create a Spline Curve Interactively You can select points sometimes referred to as control points of a cubic spline curve by using options from the Pick Panel For example draw the picture in Hide or Fill graphics mode Then select the Z Buffer option in the Pick panel Each time you click on a point in the picture a point will be entered into the table and the white curve drawn in the physical window will be extended to this new point Similar steps with the Projection Label or Node buttons in the Pick panel will add points to the table The following pictures represent gradual steps in the definition of the cubic spline control points The Mouse Pointer is moved to the location of the new point and the Left Mouse Button is pressed The coordinates of the new point are y LA ID TIS P E 7 H3 EEE ZE UN I 117 wag p LLAZA way F Polygonal Curve Quit confirm selection Accept Option to Specify De
113. not the same then an i edge has been selected If the reduced j indices are not the same it is referred to as a j edge A k edge is defined in a similar manner For example lin 11 13 1 the i edge starting at the reduced i index of 1 and ranging to 3 The two end vertices form the endpoints of a linear sequence of nodes in the i direction The interior vertex with reduced i index of 2 is also treated as an interior node of interpolation Note that the lin command for linear interpolation is not useful except when applied to more than 1 block face or edge This is because the lin function is the default interpolation It is used as an example because it is one of the most basic functions Also note that the command lin21121 1 which selects a vertex has no meaning as a linear interpolation It is mentioned here for completeness When all three pairs of reduced indices are the same i e both reduced i indices are the same both reduced j indices are the same and both reduced k indices are the same a single vertex is selected 0 has a special meaning If you provide 0 as the minimum reduced index TrueGrid will use 1 If you provide 0 as the maximum reduced index TrueGrid will use the maximum reduced index in that direction This feature is most useful when you want a reduced index to range over all possible values in some direction Then you simply use 0 for both the minimum and the maximum reduced index Copyright O 19
114. not use the OpenGL library and is compliant with the X Windows system Both of these programs are 32 bit programs Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits of accuracy if you use the accuracy command Tgd is a 64 bit version which also runs without the OpenGL library and is X Windows compliant Both the address space and all floating point calculations are done in 64 bit mode When running the 64 bit version there is virtually an unlimited number of nodes and the accuracy can be increased to a maximum of about 11 digits with the use of the accuracy command COMPAQ amp DEC Alpha UNIX Workstation There are three versions of TrueGrid tg tex and tgd for the Alpha workstations running the DEC UNIX operating system Tg uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Tgx does not use the OpenGL library and is compliant with the X Windows system Both of these programs are 32 bit programs Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits of accuracy if you use the accuracy command Tgd is a 64 bit version which also runs without the OpenGL library and is X Windows compliant Both the address space and all floating point calculations are done in 64 bit mode When running the 64 b
115. offset_2 pox x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn x_offset_1 x_offset_2 poy x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn y_offset_1 y_offset_2 poz x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn z_offset_1 z_offset_2 Remarks Each reduced index face of the region in the specified direction is projected onto a corresponding surface in the sequence of surfaces This command is included for historical reasons The preferred command is sf and sfi Examples ms 1 1 1 456i cnsp 0 1 0 12 0 14 1 2 3 4 Four concentric spheres are used in this command They are all centered at the point 0 1 0 12 0 14 with radii of 1 2 3 and 4 The first i face in the specified region where i is a constant 1 j ranges from 1 to 5 and k ranges from 1 to 6 is projected onto the sphere of radius 1 The second i face where 1 is a constant 2 is projected onto the sphere of radius 2 In a similar fashion the faces where iis a constant 3 and 4 are projected onto the spheres of radius 3 and 4 respectively Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 281 6 Nodal Spacing Along Edges The commands in this section allow you to control the distribution of nodes along an edge in the mesh The nodes on the interior of a face are affected indirectly by these commands because the face nodes are interpolated based on the nodal distributions along its 4 bounding edges The interior nodes of a 3D block are also affected by the nodal distributions al
116. or further licensing information on TrueGrid Hardware Platforms TrueGrid is currently available on the following computers Silicon Graphics Inc workstations running UNIX SUN and SUN compatible workstations running UNIX BM workstations running UNIX COMPAQ DEC workstation running UNIX HP workstation running UNIX Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 24 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Intel PC compatible running WINDOWS or REDHAT SUSE LINUX AMD Opteron running SUSE APPLE POWER PC running OSX Call or write XYZ for details on hardware and software requirements 4 Getting Started The installation instructions describes step by step how to install and configure TrueGrid for your particular platform and environment These instructions are included in all distribution CDs Key points for each installation are included here for completeness Full details can be found in Install_UNIX txt or Install UNIX pdf for the UNIX operating systems Install WIN txt or Install WIN pdf for the WINDOWS operating systems Figure 4 Mesh of Surface of Dodecahedron Install LINUX txt or Install LINUX pdf for the REDHAT LINUX operating systems Install OSX txt or Install OSX pdf for the OSX operating systems If your machine is not authorized to run this version TrueGrid then the installation or registration program will request an authorization code from XYZ Scientific Ap
117. or disp an equivalent PostScript file depicting exactly what the screen display shows The file name will be constructed by putting a number at the end of the name given by the argument root file name Thereafter you can send the file to a PostScript printer or import it into a word processor or other program that accepts this file format To turn off PostScript output type postscript off PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 82 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The reso command changes the quality of the postscript picture Annotations can be added to the picture using ad and similar commands These PostScript files also adhere to the minimum requirements of the PostScript Document Structuring Conventions version 2 1 with additional features to support Adobe Illustrator As such they also fulfill the minimum requirements of Encapsulated PostScript version 2 0 But the PostScript files presently follow no more than the minimum requirements of Encapsulated PostScript Thus they have no preview image If you import a TrueGrid PostScript file into a word processor it will typically show a blank box on the screen But your document will print correctly on a PostScript printer The freeware GSview for the WINDOWS system is provided in the TrueGrid distribution This program can be used to add many types of preview images generated by
118. outer boundary of the composite surface so that you can attach the boundary of the mesh to the boundary of the composite surface This features makes it trivial to construct this composite curve The Edge List interactive dialogue is used to create this curve There are many features in the Point List dialogue that are common to the LP3 SPLINE and TWSURF functions table This table contains the list of control points selected for the various types of curves You can edit the coordinates in this table The rules for editing a number in the table are the same as in any dialogue box You must type the Enter key after you have modified or typed a coordinate with the keyboard for it to take affect If the Insert Mode is checked a table of coordinates can be pasted into this table using the mouse number of significant digits You can choose the number of digits displayed in the table Clear All for the coordinates in the table If the Point List dialogue was used previously it may be filled with the data of a preceding curve This button clears the table Confirm Selection You can choose to have each point accepted and entered into the table Insert Mode Insert only after clicking on the Accept button If this is not checked then a point selected in the picture will be immediately entered into the table This does not apply to points being entered into the table using the Insert Append and Prepend buttons When this is checke
119. part ou eco cedet bobo dts ee Deane d 199 insprt insert a partition into the existing part 199 mseq change the number of elements in the part 203 orpt set shell element normal orientation Les 205 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 10 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual update save the mesh s present state as the initial mesh 207 2 Initial Positioning of Vertices A db OG ORR RO URS 208 mb translates vertices e ecce e ees oye ate wy Pc E cate RES 209 mbi translates Vertice du sar E e Sat PEL esses 210 pb assigns coordinates to vertices 0 0 0 cece 210 pbs assign coordinates to vertices from a labeled point 211 cooref selects feature in the pbs command 04 213 tr transform a region ofthe mesh 02 00 0000 ee 213 tri transform regions of the mesh 0 000 e eee eee 214 ilin initial interpolation not a constraint 0 216 ilini initial interpolation not a constraint 0 216 ma translates vertex before interpolations or projections 217 pa assigns coordinate values toa vertex o o oo oooooooo o 218 q assigns coordinates of one vertex to another 218 3 Initial Positioning of Edges e qx rS weed E Bay nls ea as eta rM ems 219 cur distribute edge nodes along a 3D curve o oo oooo 228 curf distribute and f
120. plane so as to satisfy the nodal distribution or spacing rule Figure 289 Projection onto 3 Smooth Surfaces sfi project regions onto a surface by index progression sfi progression surface type surface parameters where surface type and surface parameters can be sd sd for a numbered surface definition sd command sds sd sd2 sdn to combine several numbered surfaces into one CN2P x y zo X y Zn 1 t rt for a conical surface cone x Yo Zo X y z r O for a conical surface CY Xp Yo Zo Xn Yn Zn radius for a cylindrical surface OF Xo Yg Zo Xy PE Fs for an ellipse revolved about an axis iplan a b c d for a plane defined by an implicit function plan x Yo Zo x y Zn for a planar surface pr x Yo Zo X Y Zn Y fjr trt fora parabola revolved about an axis Sp Xo Vo Zo radius for a spherical surface tS Xo Yo Zo X y Zn 11 ths for a torus crx line_ for a planar curve rotated about x axis Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 276 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual cry line_ for a planar curve rotated about y axis crz line_ for a planar curve rotated about z axis Cr Xo Yo Zo Xn y Z ine_ fora planar curve rotated about arbitrary axis cp Jine transform for a planar curve extended in the third dimension then transformed Remarks For more details and a full discussion of this command see the sf command spp spherical projection spp region direction x y Zo id wh
121. possible to deactivate a command in the command tables using the decmd command This will also cause the mesh to be re generated A command that was deactivated with the decmd commands can be activated with the actemd command Use the history table to determine the command sequence number This sequence number is the argument to the decmd command Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 297 This command has a side effect in the graphics Both the physical and computational graphics can only be re drawn after the mesh is re generated As usual the part is not actually re generated until a graphics command is issued undo deactivate the last active mesh command undo no arguments Remarks This command only deactivates mesh commands that operate on the part being generated It can be issued as many times as needed to step backward in the command sequence for the part being generated It has no effect on the graphics environment or the data base defined by commands such as curd for 3D curves or sd for surfaces It can only undo up to the block or cylinder command To undo the block or cylinder command issue the abort command The abort command can be issued anytime in the part phase The decmd accomplishes the same function A command that has been deactivated with the undo command can be reactivated using the actemd command This command has a graphical side effect Both
122. region edge k direction Example 6 more complicated selection of faces similar to Example 2 Figure 25 1 30 4 5 o 3 0 4 5 1 0 3 4 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 54 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Example 7 another more complicated selection of edges Figure 26 T 3 0 4 5 2 3 4 4 Figure 26 6 selected regions edges Example 8 selection of faces forming 4 intersecting planes similar to Example 3 Figure 27 1 6 1 35 1 3 4 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 55 7 Conventions The syntax for commands issued in batch mode are described in this manual were literals are highlighted in bold Symbols to be substituted are italicized Buttons in the GUI are bolded and italicized Each TrueGrid command is described by an entry like the following command summary description command arguments brief description of functionality with brief descriptions of what the arguments should be Three standard arguments are vertex is a node described by its reduced indices i j k region is a region described by the minimum and maximum reduced indices Lmin Jmin Knin lnaxJmax K nax progression is an index progression of the form i i Lin MINE DP x k k k P Remarks When present the Remarks section describes the command in even greater detail It may de
123. regions will not appear in the graphics merging phase or in any output dei delete regions of the part dei progression Remarks 66599 1 See the remarks on the previous command de In general an i after a command indicates that the command takes an index progression as its argument instead of a region insprt insert a partition into the existing part insprt sign type index _elements where sign can be 1 for a solid Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 199 1 for a shell type can be 1 for i partition to the left for i partition to the right for j partition to the left for j partition to the right for k partition to the left for k partition to the right index is the place to insert the partition reduced index and must be between 1 and the total number of reduced indices in the direction to be modified _elements must be positive and lower than the number of elements in the region SD Nn 4 WN Remarks This command allows you to interactively modify the block topology by adding a new partition The partition may be a regular partition or a shell partition Adding a regular partition results in the same block structure as would result from adding another positive number to the block blude or cylinder command Adding a shell partition is the same as adding a new negative number to the block or cylinder command You locate the ne
124. rotation In these circumstances a fast rotation can be invoked by holding the Shift key while rotating Figure 57 is created from Figure 52 by the Rotate option See also rx ry rz dpic rpic commands Framing a Picture The Frame option is a combination of zoom and translate Use the Frame option by pressing the Frame button and then by performing a click and drag operation using the Middle Mouse Button in the window containing the picture you wish to alter While the mouse button is down a rectangle outlines what is currently selected to be the new picture This new picture will be displayed when you release the Middle Mouse Button In order to cancel a Frame operation after you have depressed the Middle Mouse Button simply drag the cursor outside of the window and release the button Figure 58 is created by the Frame option from Figure 57 See also zb zf 1 r u d dpic rpic commands Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 113 Translating the Picture In order to translate the picture press the Move button with the Left Mouse Button Then perform a click and drag operation using the Middle Mouse Button in the window containing the picture that is to be translated A skeleton picture is dynamically redrawn while the translation is being performed Release the Middle Mouse Button when the picture is in the desired position A new picture is automatically displ
125. s tir dei timeas 407 Shell solid 252 zoe 411 Interior node 33 41 235 Interpolation 234 Interior of surface display 84 Interior projection 250 Interpolation 33 37 42 198 234 283 along curves 219 IDB A ed rise ror ane 391 A eae teta een 417 Bi lineatenu ose cueva a eats 241 A a 239 initial A 216 mitia iin da 217 O e ia 21 47 linear serioa an 239 241 247 modified linear 242 nodal distribution 282 parameter ca es 236 poor initialization 282 SUS MADE a dd 251 transitions 225 46 ack tae Ba eS 403 Interpreter Fortran 175 Interrupt said 28 58 59 171 o A DERE 294 USACE o 440 Intersection 2 SULPICES e date tan de aee d 190 TEO Se e ILLE A e pn de 20 of 3D curves ooa xs 222 of surfaces 38 165 167 273 275 Orthogonal plane 276 surface amp curves 222 tangent surfaces 165 Intp surface and Stp 415 Intra part BB 211 212 ju a i 236 example turna eee ae 271 O O 248 o ea rerba eye d 268 TANTEI os eb uU ust Deo EA ae te ae eta tus 404 Intyp TASTE dune 91 ALES ETSI REN 200 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 488 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Inv LA e Mn recette 440 jeep 214 Trine a hatin ANA AC Ls ec f Tu 215 Iplan Sf option
126. sign max min sqrt exp log log10 sin cos tan asin acos atan atan2 sinh cosh where angles are measured in degrees amp at the end of a line continues the line to the next uniform random number using the forms rand rand seed rand seed mean Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 349 normal random number in the forms norm norm seed norm seed mean norm seed mean sig where seed is the random number seed mean is the mean of the distribution and sig is the standard deviation from the mean Remarks Pressures are applied to the mesh using the x y z i j and k values from each node in the mesh The expression can also include the variable t1 t2 t3 and pramp The mesh arrays t1 t2 t3 and pramp can be used as temporary variables Use the dom command to select the region of the mesh to apply this function pramp can be assigned values many times using this command with the final array of values being used to assign pressure amplitudes The resulting pressure amplitudes are used only when the amplitudes in the pr or pri commands are zero The amplitude is calculated at the 4 corner node points of a face and then averaged to form the pressure amplitude at the center of the face Example A part is defined in Cartesian coordinates and the mesh is manipulated The pressure with zero amplitude is assigned to the faces of the region 1 1 2
127. ssfi project shell onto an interpolated surface by progression ssfi progression surface where surface is the number of a defined surface of type intp Remarks See the remarks on ssf above th thickness of shell th region thickness_of_shell Remarks The thickness of a shell in a region of the part is set using this command This command overrides the default thickness specified by the thic command Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 415 thi thickness of shell thi progression thickness_of_shell Remarks The thickness of a shell in a region of the part is set using this command This command overrides the default thickness specified by the thic command thic default shell thickness thic thickness TrueGrid view shell thickness Remarks This command sets the default thickness for shell elements The th thi ssf and ssfi commands over ride this thickness Example cylinder 1 1 4 7 1 4 7 104590123 thic 2 th 1 1 1 2 2 al i F hell thickn th 122133 3 igure 369 Shell thickness merge co thic Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 416 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 19 Beams Beam elements can be created in two basic ways The first method of beam element generation extracts the needed nodes from an existing shell of brick part This is only available within the block or cylinder
128. that set The add operator will always append selected nodes to a set This is used to create ordered node sets where duplicate nodes are allowed The minus operator removes all nodes in a set which are among the selected nodes Example TrueGrid Display Node Set fc The node set named FC is created 391 At first an index progression 4 isselected to form a node set name FC Then the nodes from 4 inner and 4 outer edges are subtracted from the node set FC o E S 9 9 95 i block 1 7 13 19 1 7 13 19 1 7 13 9os l 7 13 1932 7 TS 9s 7 l3 195 dei 23 2 3 nseti 4 FC Sk kG mm m HE nseti 1 0 4 4 FC nseti 1 0 4 4 FC nseti 2 3 2 0 3 4 FC nseti 2 0 3 2 3 4 FC merge Example TrueGrid Display Node Set The node set named pr is created At first an index progression 2 4 0 7 8 isselected AAA A E as a node set with name pr Then index psopsopseyssyszypsigarssys par progression 2 7 2 3 isaddedto form a union AA with previously defined node set pr 094108405 410741064102 block 1 1 3 57 9 11 13 15 17 1 3 LI E 4 485 484 480 5 7 9 Tacl 2 5 7 9 T1 13 15 477 476 3 2469 468 5AL 60 v9 17 AL 3o 79 qp M5 UA i0 67 466 3 62 pe 57 pe dei f 5 T3 3 4 js 454 51 50 447 uo as faz 39 pe p7 nseti 2 4 0 7 8 pr 13 52 49 48 M5 M4 Yr LAO 6 p5 pa nseti 2 7 2 3 or pr merge labels nodeset pr 923 93
129. the Neumann boundary conditions are applied to the interior nodes of the top and bottom faces Then only the interior is selected for smoothing neui 1 0 3 on neui 1 unifm 1 4 1 4 off 214336 amp 23i134362di113 2 3 300 01 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 265 Figure 277 Large end with Neumann Figure 278 Interior blocks with Neumann The angles in the middle blocks range from 62 9 to 119 4 degrees The improvement is about 12 degrees in worst case When you reach this level of refinement in the sense of improving the mesh quality there is usually a price to pay for mesh improvements Whenever there is curvature some part of the mesh has to absorb that curvature by having distorted angles At first improvements are made with wise choices for the topology This usually introduces irregular nodes where blocks meet This is where the compromises in mesh quality begin Then interpolation or smoothing methods are employed to diffuse the angular distortions in one manor or another By using the Neumann boundary conditions with the uniform smoothing on this mesh the angular distortions have been pushed to the outer blocks The angles in the outer blocks using uniform smoothing on the end faces range from 45 1 to 140 1 degrees The angles in the outer blocks using the Neumann condition on the end faces range from 45 to 140
130. the Projection button not the Project button Now move the mouse into the Physical Window and click with the Left Mouse Button The point on the selected surface or curve which is closest to the mouse is marked with the The Attach button can be used to assign coordinates of the point to a region of the mesh This action produces a pb command in the text window and the session file tsave Figure 138 and Figure 139 show an attachment of a mesh vertex red to the point on curve 1 This is done in the Part Phase TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Curves TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Curves Figure 138 Before Attach Figure 139 After Attach Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 163 Attaching a Node to a Node TrueGrid draw TrueGrid draw Figure 140 Before Attach Figure 141 After Attach Figure 140 and Figure 141 show an attachment of a node red of Part 2 green to node 1 11 of Part 1 purple Where the notation 1 11 means Part 1 and the global node number 11 This is done in the Part Phase Both parts are displayed by the dap command You can also attach a region of the mesh to a node usually a vertex in the same part This is useful when creating triangular shells or wedges and tetrahedron brick elements When you attach a vertex to a neighboring vertex in the part all of the nodes between the two vertices are assigned the same coordinates At this
131. the mesh you will be 5 selecting that edge As long as you keep the mouse button depressed you can continue to move the mouse and change your selection Both the highlighting in the mesh and the index bar selections are changed as you move the mouse 3 This selection process is completed by releasing the mouse 1 2 3 a L Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 106 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 1 i k 1 2 3 a L Figure 47 Block with click and drag Index Bar Zone a a 1 2 3 Figure 48 Index Bar Zone To select a block start at one corner of the block and click and drag to the opposing diagonal corner of the block and release the mouse These two methods can interfere with each other if the computational mesh is near an index bar because there is an area around the index bars which is relatively large that affects the index bar and not the computational mesh For this reason you can display the zone that is owned by the index bars using the ibzone command the default is on The picture of the computational mesh is clipped so that it never enters the index bar zone The index bar zone is kept relatively large so that one can be sloppy when making selections using the index bar It is worth while to spend some time spent practicing with the index bars Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights
132. time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where o 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the displacement The angle is in degrees Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 308 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks This is the same as fdc except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression This is the same as fd except that it applies to an index progression and uses cylindrical coordinates Example TrueGrid display displacements A mesh is defined in Cartesian coordinates Null load curve is referenced 0 Displacement in cylindrical coordinates is assigned by index progression The simplified command file follows block 1 5 1 5 1 TAO 2 52525 2 5505 c mesh definition fdci 2 1 0 1100 c cylindrical fixed disp assigned by 2 1 load curve 0 magnitude direction 1 0 0 nana merge EN Figure 313 cylindrical fixed displacement co fd 0 c display fixed displacement 0 fds spherical fixed displacement fds region load curve amplitude options p 0 where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where o 0 Q is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the direction o
133. to select vertices edges faces and blocks of the mesh This indirect reference to regions of the mesh adds complexity which is warranted because with this comes the ability to change the mesh density by adding or modifying just one command Either the block blude or cylinder command can be modified or the mseq command can be added to change the number of nodes within a block of the mesh The meshscal command at the beginning of the input can be used to scale the number of nodes in all parts Reduced Indices Most TrueGrid commands that refer to regions of the mesh use reduced indices With reduced indices you reference each partition in the i direction of the mesh by its sequence number in the first list of node numbers in the block blude or cylinder command The same referencing scheme Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 45 applies to the partitions in the j and k directions In order to identify a vertex i e a corner node of a block within the part you provide its three partition sequence numbers one in each direction These three numbers are the reduced indices of the vertex Notice that since you can only reference reduced indices it is important that you initially define these reduced indices to correspond with those features of the part which you may wish to manipulate Vertices and Regions A vertex is a node that can be selected using reduced indice
134. to support the LS DYNA ANSYS NASTRAN NE NASTRAN ABAQUS FLUENT and LLNL codes such as DYNA3D NIKE3D and TOPAZ3D The symmetry planes are handled correctly when nodes are found at the intersection of two or more symmetry planes The ACCURACY command now applies to the projection to all IGES geometry The transition block boundary TRBB has been extended to 2 way transitions The slave side of a TRBB region can have partitions anywhere The OpenGL standard is used to produce fast high quality color graphics on all platforms Color Fill graphics is available in the Part phase There is anew command to define functions The CYLINDER part can be given any frame of reference There is a new slice feature and display of multiple conditions in the graphics The physical and computational window can now move in sync Singular subfigures in IGES are now supported The READMESH command can read a FEM from IGES A new dialogue box WINDOWS only opens an IGES file using the browse feature in WINDOWS Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 iii Input strings can be 256 characters Parameters can be 16 characters long Many features that have limits now have larger limits There is now a User s Manual for the TG License Manager There is a new environment variable used to specify the ports used by TG when a firewall is used
135. to turn off labels display sd to display numbers of defined surfaces bb to display numbers of block boundaries crv to display numbers of defined 3D curves sdedge to display surface edge identification numbers sdpt to display labels of points on defined surfaces crvpt to display labels of points on defined 3D curves Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 305 11 Displacements Velocities and Accelerations These commands specify displacements velocities and accelerations usually for initial or boundary conditions In most of them the arguments take the form region load_curve amplitude x y z or progression load_curve amplitude x y z The condition is applied to the nodes of the given region or index progression The displacement velocity etc is applied in the direction given by the vector x y z which might be in Cartesian cylindrical or spherical coordinates For some simulation codes like DYNA3D the magnitude of the condition is the product of the amplitude and the current value of the load curve In this case the load curve is a time dependent function given by the load curve number load_curve In some other simulation codes such as ABAQUS the load curve number is associated with a step and in other simulation codes like NASTRAN the load curve number is associated with a load case or set id The latter 2 cases are referred to as load set identific
136. toggle When the H W button is pressed the Hide and Fill options produce very similar pictures both result in a color polygon fill picture with hidden surface removal The only difference is that the H W version has no perspective see the angle command The Wire option for hardware selects a line drawing usually with lighting See also draw disp set tv commands bracket with hole TrueGrid Draw Figure 51 Wire Picture Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 109 Hide Picture Figure 52 Fill Picture Figure 53 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 110 Selecting the Windows to be Redrawn Both Comp Figure 54 Phys Button The Phys Both and Comp button group Figure 54 determines which window s manually issued graphics commands will affect as well as what window s the Draw Cent and Rest buttons will redraw When more than one Physical Window is on the screen then only the Physical Window with focus will be redrawn When Both is selected the motion of the physical and computational mesh are coupled This is true for mouse driven motions using the Middle mouse button to Rotate Move Zoom or Frame This is also true for keyword driven motion commands such as rx ry rz u d l r zf and zb The Comp and Both buttons are grayed out i
137. was specified using the intyp command commands for all single faces split by the new partition and Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 200 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual for the single blocks split by the new partition If other than default interpolation was used for these faces and blocks then the new mesh will be identical This command offers a convenient way to add regions for boundary conditions or to add features to a mesh Features may be internal or a new mesh can be added to a part in this way There is a tremendous advantage in that the new vertices are automatically initialized in a reasonable way Thus you are spared the trouble of finding locations for such vertices Hundreds of blocks can be created this way by starting with only a handful of blocks Example Adding a Partition in the Middle of the Block 5 9137 1 2 3 Ae 1357 9 Eom Ue Mar deat Bole b SB 7 9 insprt 1 1 3 block 1 The new partition is inserted to the left of i index 3 i gt Partitions in the Mesh i gt Partitions in the Mesh I Mesh Line location Reference Partitio New Partition 2 Elements to the Left Reduced Indice 3 from the Ref Partition Li Figure 197 Block Mesh before insprt Figure 198 Block Mesh after insprt Example Adding a Partition at the Beginning of the Block block 1 5 9 135 1 2 2 4921 5 5 7 S71 3 5 770 7T 1 4 Zale 1 2 59 7 37 insprt 11 1 2 pb 1 1 1 1 4
138. was created by options Labels Surf Point Display List Surface Show All and Hide Draw from the Environment Window Alternatively you can type labels sdpt dasd disp n Y e e o A n u U tH 4 3 n Ke U amp Ral tH 0 A Ke e Y o 9 3 4 E Figure 63 Surface Points are labeled Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 119 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 64 was created by options Labels Curve Point and Display List Curve Show All from the Environment Window Alternatively you can type labels crvpt dacd TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Curve Points Figure 64 Curve Points Labels Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 120 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 65 was created by options Labels Part and Display List Part Show All from the Environment Window Alternatively you can type labels parts isp dap di gt EN ER SSS SS CPC AROS COSA LEED og tia LALLA 2 W y Hh Les SS CS Part Labels Figure 65 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 121 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual isp dap di gt Node Labels Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved Figure 66 Figure 66 was created by options Labels Node and Display List Part Show All
139. where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where p 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the acceleration The angle is in degrees Remarks This is the same as acce except that it applies to an index progression This is the same as acc except that it applies to an index progression and uses cylindrical coordinates Example cylinder 1 3 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 1 11 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 319 2 3 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 360 0 10 lcd 1011 1 accci 2 1 1 1 0 0 merge condition acc 1 c display accelerations TrueGrid display acceleration lat 1 000E 00 TrueGrid display acceleration lat 5 236E 02 Figure 317 radial acceleration Figure 318 acceleration in the angular direct aces spherical prescribed boundary acceleration aces region load_curve_ amplitude options p 0 where region must be a vertex edge or face load curve is a load curve number amplitude is an amplitude factor to be multiplied by the load curve where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where o 0 p is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the d
140. yellow Figure 84 and Figure 85 If the mouse is dragged to the opposite corner of a block then the whole block will be selected and highlighted in cyan Figure 86 and Figure 87 As long as the Left Mouse Button is depressed you can continue to drag the mouse and highlight objects in the mesh Release the Left Mouse Button only when the highlighted object is what you want The same thing can be accomplished by first selecting one vertex with the F5 key described above Then move the mouse close to the opposite corner of the desired region and hit the F6 key Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 130 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 80 Step 1 Move to a vertex TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 82 Step 3 Drag mouse Figure 83 Step 4 Release button Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 131 TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 84 Alternate Step 3 Drag mouse Figure 85 Step 4 Release button TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 86 Alternate Step 3 Drag mouse Figure 87 Step 4 Release button Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 132 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Pick Panel Creating or Modifying Sets Using the Mouse There are 3 ways to create a set While in the part phase or th
141. you click on EXIT or MAIN MENU Finally the help window s title bar displays the name of the sub menu under which the command is found Thus typing help cmd can be used to learn where the Figure 30 Help Window command cmd is found within the sub menus If all of the text does not fit into a given window then you can scroll up or down in the Text Window Help Window or Dialogue Boxes with the Page Up Page Down and arrow keys These windows also have up and down arrows on the screen for the text window these arrows appear only in scroll mode see page 77 A left mouse click on an arrow will scroll the window by a Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 76 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual page and a middle mouse click will scroll it by a line Text Window You can enter commands in the upper portion of the Text Menu window and TrueGrid will use it to display messages and prompts The text display has two modes normal mode and scroll mode Initially the window opens in normal mode In order to enable scroll mode move your mouse to the up arrow at the right side of the Text Menu Window The up arrow will turn green Click the Left Mouse Button to enable scroll mode You can disable scrolling thus returning to normal mode by either 1 pressing the Left Mouse Button while the mouse is in the text area or 2 hitting Return Enter key on an empty command line TrueG
142. you may select one or more items from an option list which is a kind of menu With the keyboard you type one or more numbers or sometimes arbitrary text strings Option Lists An option list is a part of a dialogue box that lets you choose items from a fixed list of alter natives The context determines what the options are and how many you may choose You choose an option consrrarnr Flac by left clicking the mouse on it You can deselect ons by clicking on the item again Type Of Node Selection VVVVN OOooooo There is a special case with a dialogue box that list options for different output options In particular the sid spd bsd and offset commands If the output option has been selected prior to using one of these dialogue boxes to make a selection only the options available to that output option will be displayed in the dialogue box Figure 160 Exclusive and non exclusive Type Of Node Selection Appearance VVVVV CONSTRAINT FLAG Each line of the option list begins with the red y Cons t marker gt for exclusive when you can choose only one item or 0 when you can choose any number of items oooooo The name of the option can be displayed by typing Control V in the dialogue window Typing Figure 161 command names shown Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applicat
143. you rotate you will only see the edges of the new surface If there are unexpected edges then you need to modify the polygon set and try again After editing you can save the active set by typing its name and hitting the Save button Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 140 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Display List Panel Determining pick pen aan Display List Labels What Objects are Drawn Apply Action to Action The objects displayed in the picture are ada snow Only controlled by what is found in the graphical display list This graphical display list lies within TrueGrid s internal database Point Region Show None BB Curve Part Remove Show All For example the Display List panel is used with the Pick panel and the mouse in the physical window to choose which surfaces 3D curves and block boundaries are shown in the physical window The procedure to follow is Figure 102 Display List Panel Step1 Choose the type of object in the pick panel 1 e Surface Curve surface Edge or BB to be selected using the mouse Step 2 Use the lasso 1 e the Left Mouse Button in the physical window to form a rectangular lasso and select the objects of the type selected Step 3 Choose the type of object on the
144. you will have an understanding of the general sequence of actions you and TrueGrid will perform to generate your mesh Expand this reading to include the rest of the Introduction and the chapter on the Graphical User Interface GUI Some advanced users prefer to type the commands in the text window or create a batch file but the GUI can be a tremendous aid for the new user Finally look at the documented examples which are provided in the Examples directory along with the distribution You can use any text editor to view these annotated files while you examine them on the screen Insert interrupt commands in order to pause execution at key locations and then click the Resume button in order to continue execution At this point you should be able to set up simple Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 28 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual models with TrueGrid and modify more complicated models set up by other people Using the Manual The manual is organized into seven 7 chapters This chapter the Introduction has basic information on TrueGrid as well as more advanced information that applies to TrueGrid as a whole The second chapter describes the Graphical User Interface which is as important to understand as the Introduction chapter The next four chapters serve as a command reference with complete descriptions of all of TrueGrid s commands and features The Part Commands chapter co
145. 0 0 and 1 0 scon constant to set the specular constant acon constant to set the ambient constant dcon constant to set the diffusion constant spow even positive integer to set the specular power tv disp for automatic redrawing like disp command tv draw for automatic redrawing like draw command tv poor for automatic redrawing like poor command same as draw tv none for no automatic redrawing grid color for reference grid color default blue marker color for condition markers from di command default red mesh color for mesh color default green rax color for r coordinate color default cyan sax color for s coordinate color default magenta tax color for t coordinate color default white where color can be one of white red green blue cyan magenta yellow thick thickness for line thickness where the line Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 85 thickness must between 0 0 and 10 0 points 72 points 1 inch A thickness of 0 0 represents the minimum line width available Remarks The set tv command has an effect when you issue a command that implicitly asks TrueGrid to redraw the picture When you enter a graphics command interactively TrueGrid will automatically redraw the picture just as if you had explicitly issued a drawing command The line thickness setting only affects PostScript output slice slice through the picture sli
146. 0 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 c mesh definition mbi gt 2 2 z 2 c move th dge 2 2 2 units in z direction lsys 1 rx atan2 2 10 c definition of local coordinate system 1 c rotated around x axis for angle atan2 2 10 Ibi 2 41 dy 1 4 c the faces of region 2 are constrained in dy c displacement in local coordinate system 1 merge mpc shared nodal multiple point constraints for a nodal set mpc node_set_name constraints where constraints can be any combination of dx for constrained displacement in the x direction dy for constrained displacement in the y direction dz for constrained displacement in the z direction rx for constrained rotations about the x axis Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 361 ry for constrained rotations about the y axis and rz for constrained rotations about the z axis Remarks The mpe command assigns constraints to be shared by a set of nodes This set of nodes is defined by the nset command The nodes in the set share a specified degree of freedom The first node is the master node for those codes requiring a master node Example block L3 ar bal mum EIOS S ped Be ae dado Breck L x od c definition of the mesh nset 21 1 3 1 4 narxs c definition of node set narxs c from nodes of region e2113 1 4 mpc narxs dy c multiple point constraint c in dy direct
147. 0001 Figure 365 Shell to Solid interface shtosoi shell to solid interface by progressions shtosoi progression id info where info can be edge for shells only iba for solids only jba for solids only kba for solids only where b isthe number of nodes before the edge a is the number of nodes after the edge Remarks See the remarks for the shtoso command Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 412 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 18 Element Cross Sections This section of the manual discusses those cross section properties that may be unique to each element and are considered local in nature since they cannot be defined globally for the entire model Shell element thickness can be set using the th thi and thic commands The ssf and ssfi generate variable thickness shells based on two bounding surfaces The outward normal direction can be defined using the n command The local material orientation of blocks of shells or solids can be aligned using the or command Angular rotation of the material coordinate system is limited to what is available through the global definition in the material definitions Beam element cross sections are defined globally using the bsd and bind command Some of the beam cross section properties can also be defined at the time the beam is generated using the ibm ibmi jbm jbmi kbm kbmi and bm commands In many cases element cross section properti
148. 06 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 96 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual By using your mouse you can highlight a portion of the physical or computational mesh and select that portion as input for a command The distinction between Regions and Index Progressions is noteworthy because some TrueGrid commands apply to Regions and others apply to Index Progressions Often a command comes in two versions one for Regions e g sf and the other for Progressions e g sfi An 1 at the end of a command name generally indicates that it is applied to Index Progressions There are actually four different techniques using the mouse to select a Region or Index Progression Each technique has its advantages It is best to become proficient in all four techniques so that you can easily select objects of the mesh You will need to do this many times in the process of creating a mesh The four methods are 1 Index bars 2 Click and drag in the computational window 3 Function keys F5 and F6 in the physical window 4 Pick Region and click and drag in the physical window This section of the manual discusses only the index bar and the click and drag method in the computational window See the section on selecting mesh objects in the physical window to learn about these additional methods The pictures in the following examples do not show a default feature found in the computational window This feature frames the region around the
149. 1 sd 2 sp 5 0 10 8 sd 3 sp5 0 105 3 pa block 1 3 Sfi 1 sd tr 1 1 12 Ef1 jely tmplt 1 1 12 2 mate 0 endpart Center of Projection block 1 11 1 11 1 16 3 3 3 3 3 6 NU WHE Figure 290 Rays of spherical projection Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 278 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual tr111222 ry 30 Sfi 2 sd 3 sfi 1 sd 2 spp 1 1 1222k 0001 tmplt create template used by spp tmplt region id where id is an integer identifier for reference Remarks The typical method of constructing a template is to build a shell part set the material to 0 so that the elements are not preserved in the data base and issue this command To be able to visualize the template later on also assign a bb to the template face and then display the bb The template is only useful with the spp command in later parts patch attaches a face to a 4 sided surface patch patch region surface_ Remarks A mesh face can be attached to a four sided surface using this command This is really a macro which attaches the four edges of a mesh face to the four sides of a surface and projects the face to the surface This command works only with a single four sided surface This command is intended for casual users of TrueGrid who insist on using TrueGrid the way they use other mesh generators one surface patch at a time
150. 1 6 11 1 6 1 0 999 2 01 009 sfi 1 2 1 sd 1 sti 2 3 l sd 2 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 225 Projection to two surfaces Wandering edge along intersection This problem is fixed when the edge in question is attached to a curve using the following commands curd 1 lp 1 0 curs 2 e w Ro No NP The best way to deal with tangent surfaces is to use the composite surface feature sds of the sd command Combine the surfaces and project the edge to the composite surface To be sure that the edge follows the approximate intersection of the two surfaces construct a 3D curve and attach the edge to this curve When an interior edge is attached to a 3D curve and is within a region to be smoothed with the relax unifm esm or tme commands the edge nodes are also smoothed and may move off of the 3D curve This gives you flexibility in creating special effects For example block 1 6 11 1 1 1 0 1 2 0 250 curd 1 1p3 120 81 4 01 210 8 6 01 0 0 curs 21 122 relax 1 1 1 32 140 25 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 226 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Saeco ees a SSERNN AE E SAT TII Z227 Pte REAA EBSERWN NM LLL 1331 1 11 17 BRECEE GIS Attach without smoothing
151. 198 to a surface ar Es 198 Constraints oy 4 stasis tte 99 Da arise edd ia Bate 41 Contact surfaces A O a aeo 408 Md A Rer Rot 409 Contact AL cin it eA 23 Control bas vs da ETE 61 e dpart oo disci a oben es 440 MO A A A 63 A pron ed irit 61 POTS eA ct uos MESA d 30 251 Control Key Functions 97 D E 97 99 178 Boc ad aab OR cs 173 178 Control Q cui oce Aner 177 Control iari tester i ess 178 Control V danza 178 CONTO aan Seba eos 178 IDs cepe dee ob C Rs 99 178 Boro ooa Sd Deer A 177 178 Eudora qd die 173 178 mouse button 71 Po eum bs 99 100 178 A te a E sata 76 178 Vide paa Panes 173 E AAN 176 ESE BRA ree emer 172 178 Control phase aoa castas wes 64 Control Points o oo oo oooo o 155 3D GUEVOS PE Riek or 179 Convection boundary conditions 369 370 a dd 369 OV E EN LN RAR 369 Md A Scd a CS 371 iS A e AES 371 VOV AAA ONES 370 WEVIG nci quie sot Es 370 Convection thermal load boundary conditions 371 Convergence SST os ordre avd CE d ee 236 projection soie reso morcs 157 o ae re a RS 248 O 258 UM nee ais tas 268 Convex boundary 244 249 269 GSID gti E carus 235 E 5A Ane cask attore ae etd d 269 TNS MP TD PUE EUROPE DRE 259 Cook William esses 21 Coordinate system l EUIS 394 equations eis scare te darte 287 global vs picture 87 Interpolation co eres 239 Local display 414 Copyright
152. 2 LO ist bic efe hito qo He mes 46 TSR as ied CLE 116 180 296 movement 25 5 9 ea es 148 nodal distribution 282 NOME ri ashe A TY 235 projection rien 41 selection 98 104 106 edge numbers display A A 305 ASIS deus UE eras eek uA 115 Edit dialogue DOK cyte cease ahs 176 Ea a f S E ARPES 383 PID sirae Bk ee sare ea tior AE ES 384 Electric flux Gls gant cgi eae Retina tee iad 383 ETE ir dnt ae tats 3 a 384 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 482 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Element CTOSS Section iss eis eee ee 413 labels 22 ei sue ea UTER 115 print block epb 451 Element SEL datado 133 COMMENT A teste Roa ares 460 delete o mes 453 MOI esee d 134 454 MUSE desc Pe Ra O ean SN A 280 Ellipsoid project separated 273 276 Elliptic method veria er ewe n 42 Elm TGS Lu ie E eats oe 438 MESURE 437 Elmoff MEA A Dr AER 438 Email ta a an 24 29 A Bes tin Gea yey eer Ces 62 75 Ending Your TrueGrid Session 62 Endpattous ce ES 440 EXAMPLE sos tasa erste ib Coe 66 TED Sey tpa E 63 updates initial mesh 207 Enter in dialogue box 176 Enter commands 0000 72 Enter Rey SR 77 Environment variable 26 TGHONIE 2552522 9825 RA bas 25 Environment Window 72 96 108 attach mesh o pss rion 157 display list us eb Ee AA 141 dynamic moving 112 liistoty o oer a
153. 2 427 426 1 PO 45 414 49 4 Figure 392 Node Set pr Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 459 nsetc attach a comment to a node set nsetc set_name text where set name is the name of the node set where fext a text comment Remarks It is necessary to specify a comment using nsetc for each node set to be written to ALE3D fsetc face set comment fsetc set name text where set name is the name of the face set where fext a text comment Remarks It is necessary to specify a comment using fsetc for each node set to be written to ALE3D esetc element set comment esetc set name text where set name is the name of the element set where fext a text comment Remarks It is necessary to specify a comment using esetc for each node set to be written to ALE3D nsetinfo report the node set names and number of nodes nsetinfo no arguments Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 460 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 26 Material Commands mate part default material number for each region mate material_ where material_ is the referenced material number Remarks This command assigns material number for the whole part as a default The material assignment can be overwritten by other commands mt mti for any combination of the regions of the part Example See the mti command m
154. 20 DID i che wee dd duce Trees 179 pipe example s daa 219 A tune Teele ee 179 TUNES ouo ce n3 oct ina 179 BUS roda 40 62 180 193 272 sds example oae exon 220 EIL bu iun s e ee Benno 273 Und 4 esed tet quede ves 298 Sd Sf option 1o o ba Es 273 Sd Sir option 22424 yere Rer he 276 Sdedge Curd option 160 Sdedge Curd option 180 IME sre ica 20 SUITE e cox Pec ae 84 115 140 144 CAE ir 193 231 p rrr 180 193 SO ODEIOR os bor tote a 272 Sds Sd option 40 62 274 THEO sa a ehe ed URDU 20 Sds Sf option 0 0 213 Sds Sfi option oo oo oooooo o 276 Se Curd option Loud be wide wai rales 180 Seed vo oss ae a us ades a Ad tn 290 Selection control point 177 multiple regions 235 hode is ba ee iaa 177 of Edbgs 4 Ore Rcs ios 53 of Faces una ai a cence 53 of Volumes sv ere eer 52 regions and progressions 72 97 177 Sentinel Rainbow uc in e gasta ro trs 26 Session files ooa uus 34 149 155 157 VEO 8 04 dur uet D Dti Dux Bet gu i t 20 SOL s out ccu uer MM Eee Pet Ee 85 TY oed ded al et e cts 431 SEL Editing eo ood er ce pA 133 add code stes EE 134 Deals ortu id d 134 Prieks uev Dato toes ratis 134 clear neu 134 Mid nenita oracio efecto da aaa d 135 INOdGS o idi E de 134 Open Set voe eoe as 133 polygons s sie RE 84 134 DEICKS ausser bane sg 134 Qeshiells hs e Sae hub Grates 134 Quit PNE RUPEE EN 133 Tet
155. 2006 TrueGrid Manual Interactive Move by Rotation Initial Mouse Position TTT CNET MAREA A A A LLL LLLLLLI LI LL IEEE T E Pt LLL LLLLI LI CSS SS Figure 108 View before Figure 109 Click and drag rotate Figure 110 Final rotate 1 Select a region progression or node of the mesh 2 Click on Rotate in the Move Pts Panel 3 Rotate the picture so that the desired rotation of the selected region or progression of the mesh will be parallel to the screen Frequently a rotation of this type is done in one of the coordinate planes and to do this click on the rest button Then type in a rotation such as rx 90 or ry 90 Setting the angle of perspective to zero angle 0 may also be helpful by getting an orthogonal projection of the mesh 4 With the left mouse button in the physical window click and hold the left mouse button down This establishes the center of rotation If this is not a good choice and if you wish to try again keep the mouse button depressed and move the mouse out of the physical window Then let go Figure 111 Rotate final view 5 Once you have chosen the appropriate center of rotation move the mouse away from the center of rotation The white skeleton of the mesh selection and the displacement vector will warp to the mouse position The further you move the mouse from the center of rotation the more control you will have in selecting the final
156. 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 271 Care must be taken to ensure that each ray radiating out through the template mesh actually intersects the surfaces of projection If this does not occur there will be warning messages that surfaces could not be intersected These warnings may seen cryptic but reflect the technique used to intersect a ray with a surface There is no direct way to see the template since it is from a previous part One trick is to create a bb of the template and display the bb Algorithm The algorithm to intersect the ray with a surface is done by forming two planes that intersect along the ray and then intersecting these two planes with the surface using the standard algorithm to intersect three surfaces All of the strengths and weaknesses of the projection method will be found in this feature The minimum face 1 j or k is used to determine the mapping between the template and the mesh being aligned with the template This is like the block boundary interface the bb command in that there are 8 ways that one face can logically be mapped to another The one that causes the least change from the initial position of the 4 corners is the one that is chosen If the mapping is automatically done incorrectly simple improve the initial coordinates ofthe corner vertices of the minimum face of the mesh so that the choice is obvious Example sd 1 sp 0 0 0
157. 21232 9 bb 2 1 2 3 2 2 10 bb 2 2 1 3 2 2 10 bb 3 2 2 4 3 2 11 bb 3 2 d SA il bb 2 3 2 3 4 2 12 bb2 3 So 2 l2 unifm 2 2133481222338 2123236322433 232343 ninit 0001 1 unifmi Uniform smoothing unifmi progression iterations min change weight where iterations is the maximum number of iterations to use min change is an absolute error tolerance there will be no more iterations if in the last iteration no coordinate was moved by more than min change in any zone weight is an interpolation weight factor the value 1 0 usually works Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 271 Remarks See the unifm command for remarks 5 Projection The commands in this section project a vertex edge or face of the mesh onto a surface When a region of the mesh is projected to a surface it will remain on that surface no matter what other operations are made in that region of the mesh It is a constraint on that portion of the mesh For example if an edge is projected twice once to each of two different surfaces the edge will be placed at the intersection of the two surfaces so that both constraints are satisfied When importing a CAD model sometimes each surface is carefully crafted to form a face of the mesh The patch command can be used to place the edges of the face of the mesh along the edges of the surface and to constrain the face to the surface However in m
158. 276 spp spherical projection Las eis ee ac epee LSet chavo eee 277 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 11 tmplt create template used by spp 0 c ee eee ene 279 patch attaches a face to a 4 sided surface patch 279 ms sequence of surface projections 00 0 e eee eee 280 6 Nodal Spacing Along Edges 90 42 c 4414 ER exe s dy yaaa 282 res relative spacing of nodes of an edge Lsu 283 drs relative spacing of nodes of an edge from both ends 284 as absolute spacing of first or last element of an edge 285 das absolute spacing of first and last element of anedge 286 nds generalized nodal distributed along an edge 286 ds EAE OS es teet AN RA A GU ING e Roe adea ae HUN Na ad 287 dom specify the region applied to x y z tl t2 and t3 288 x assign x coordinates by evaluating a function 288 y assign y coordinates by evaluating a function 291 z assign z coordinates by evaluating a function 291 tl assign a temporary mesh variable by evaluating a function 291 t2 assign a temporary mesh variable by evaluating a function 292 t3 assign a temporary mesh variable by evaluating a function 292 8 Edit Commands A Me PET A A ARS 292 history show the history table 01 ta 293 actcmd activate a mesh command previ
159. 2d Ears TroeGrid C een s ho vies itat ae ck up det da EU ood Rd 28 Using the Manual resto d gap 1o eta eben ede PONE dU ber td dust 29 Cietting EIelpus soto O ege dodo DER Sou c pu Mta 29 5 Lime Grid BASIC Co cepts 4 xoc e ARA UR Ge OG cC 30 Two ds or Mesh rea ut ed dE CEN dp ay DS Ted v a ah Pa aia 30 Making Parts and Merging them into a Model sseseesss 31 Regions Indices and Reduced Indices 0 0 00 ce cece eee eee 33 G How TrueGrid MOtkS a deu er SS Ro beo e edu i tee Ve 37 Topology OF Ehe Mesh v aet be OE ER EE ARE ele 31 Full indices a sli dd ariadna 37 Shape Of The Mess a old cr did 37 Part Initialization A A o dox Keg fede CR CR a Qu e ed 38 Projection Methods 5 aec S a hyn orici obe inn ee e be es 39 Advantages of the Projection Method o oooooooocooonooorocoo o 39 Surface Intersection Method 4 ose xceR ad COSA 40 Command Hierarchy sintio avosenuxtee Fe ence hu QR UR ROS EYE EROR AC vu URN 41 Multiple Block Structured Parts ii A e a dea 42 Quality Meshes 4 4 02024 9 9h Pal a ud P Eb a d rr e 42 Algebraic Methods 4 45e MI uy di Et es eti etus A her SERM es 43 Inte tio HEVILY E epe Ad eae cda Mao oot aan scu der i org e aa 43 Specifying Multiple Blocks 25 0 ated o HC C e Pcr erbe s 44 Initial Coordinates 1 249 vince sain A Ku dire Reha 44 Cylindrical Coordinate Systems nonon 0000s 45 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGr
160. 2i irri 157 Dutton zoo sexi eere e ga 128 ICANT M och ade bra ae Leah 177 default i Aver E AA Man UE E 148 d lete a at e decet 156 movement 6 148 NOMMON o ad eere x ed dude 56 EHE S xr eie dora eS ont 177 selection geometrical 97 selection graphical 97 128 Region button 130 141 150 Registration zoe Sed wate Behe 25 RCL pra oe ep REE 380 ODE Oa t aa ee i adas 205 Reissue commands 77 Relative arc length 254 Relax uri ed 31 42 198 235 247 3D Qutv s a Dee ii 226 delete example 152122233 250 example 237 249 261 270 hierarchy 12 uasa ween 198 208 nodal distribution 282 nu en EL 258 relaxation 247 267 271 283 about Dole ce dad a 250 Thomas Middlecoff 258 Relaxi siii omnes 31 198 250 Teo oes EA oh 258 Remarks c coro ee ol ad aoa 56 Remove Elements ars dar eta 203 Remove button 134 141 142 Replications globa ceci erm tux gea 442 JEN Ol A inte ded Kotuetnn d 442 local 52252 ede 441 442 445 Remi tana cee MI 34 ROS sos ced here 31 283 pM DLE 285 CUP td Qe RIS COSS T 228 edge projection 276 CSTE ze ccs est peg Ad 236 example qus sitos dero nodos y 284 TAY ooo M s p et 239 invoked by hyr 239 DS Saint tiec ago SPP a PRAES 239 A de edes a 248 lunae PEDE re 251 IDE eorum rt setae 252 jun cop 259 ROSO wind ise Shea whe darn t Poire dd
161. 3 degrees Although these differences in the outer blocks are not significant larger differences can be found in other circumstances and they can be significant Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 266 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual When the Neumann condition is applied to all nodes LJ on the exterior the quality of the interior blocks is hardly affected ranging from 66 6 to 119 5 degrees However the exterior blocks produce mixed results with angles from 45 2 to 149 2 degrees Also seen in the picture of the mesh the boundary changes in ways that may not be desirable This too demonstrates the principle that if you push on the mesh in one area to improve the quality it will affect the quality in other regions Figure 279 Neumann boundary everywhere neui Orthogonal boundary smoothing by index progression neui progression switch where switch can be ON to activate the Neumann or orthogonality condition OFF to deactivate the Neumann or orthogonality condition Remarks See the remarks for the neu command unifm Uniform smoothing unifm region amp region iterations min change weight where iterations is the maximum number of iterations to use min change is an absolute error tolerance there will be no more iterations if in the last iteration no coordinate was moved by more than min change in any zone weight is an interpolation weight factor the value 1 0 usu
162. 5 v sin u 1 v sd 2 function O 180 1 1 5 cos u 5 sin u v sd 3 function 0 180 0 1 5 v cos u 5 v sin u 1 v curd 1 se 1 2 se 2 2 se 3 2 se 3 3 se 3 4 se 2 4 se 1 4 se 1 3 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 220 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual block 1 21 curs 1 1 curs 2 curs curs 1 1 2 NENN sd 4 sds sfi l sd 4 das 1 1 1 2 1 2 k ee iz 3 Surfaces and bounding Curve 297 1 5 As Se Da Lidl Ll NN ES DAS My V nae Wit NERA Single block on composite surface Sometimes in tight spots none ofthe interpolation methods produce the desired effect If a partition is inserted using the insprt command and if a 3D curve is carefully formed the unruly new edge can be shaped with the 3D curve to give the desired effect This can be combined with smoothing and nodal distributions technique used in a final mesh quality improvement step Foe example sd 1sp000 5 sd 2 cy 2 2 00 0 sd 3 cy 220001 sd 4 cy 0 50 sd 5 cy 0 5 0 block 1 11 9 0 0 0 0 1 1 This is a common L 3 3 0 3 LILLE HEH HH Ho HHT A114 7 1 14 YN 774 14143 NS 2 211124 MANNS UNI NOOO A m RASS ame LI ESSERE Emm WSS prt SSS ROA NS QA lt Q Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Ap
163. 5 x 2 The new partition is inserted to the left of the reduced index 1 in the i direction The size of the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 201 partition is 2 elements The new region 1 1 1 1 4 5 is then moved by the pb command 2 units in the x direction Example Adding a Partition at the End of the Block i gt Partitions in the Mesh i gt Partitions in the Mesh MEM Partition New Partition Reduced Indice 1 Figure 199 Block mesh before insprt and pb Figure 200 Block mesh after insprt and pb block 15 913 1 2 3 4 Jo De og pou ge Ma Lt 2 1 3 5 7 9 insprt 1 2 4 2 pb 5111545x 10 The new partition is inserted to the right of the reduced index 4 in the i direction The size of the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 202 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual partition is 2 elements The newregion 5 1 1 5 4 5 is then moved by the pb command a distance of 10 units in the x direction Partitions in the Mesh i gt Partitions in the Mesh ips l New Partition S Reduced indices 2 Figure 201 Block mesh before insprt and pb Figure 202 Block mesh after insprt and pb mseq change the number of elements in the part Change the number of elements that was originally specified with the i j or k sequence in a block blude or cylinder command mseq direction d d d
164. 8 Master block boundary 391 Mafe P 461 P 395 example se nulio qd aree de 66 Material Ok src a 395 417 Anisotropic o oooooooo 414 coordinate system display 414 model eden eek RENI Uan 461 DUMDEE stan tho 461 orientation 413 414 orthotropic 04 413 Material number and replication 443 445 Max Expressions 289 Maximum reduced index 47 Maz ata 22 M as 31 38 198 209 example 15942659 2 3 4 66 210 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 491 THEO we FA Rak Pas ae e HR 21 MBBS hye uA ca v ee a AUS ERA 142 Mil ati scri ad RA 31 149 210 command tdt 198 EXAMPIS sau eo Pattee asd awa 210 NIdeps 53 genes at ad 343 MES ara AA as 437 MITO rr as dd 21 A ica UR dan area E ae aha anes 438 Mean ss did Reo et 290 Measure example al aa 67 A Caw etadieene se 438 Memory ond cate ks gees E ea te 60 Menu in dialogue box 173 main osa nare E CO o 75 oC r M 75 SUSE eee lr erau ede Ran 108 Merge as agrum dy 8 2 arate 29 31 59 61 COMCIGCHE os asta tee 164 endpart eee ere ui EN ht 440 example ori bbs 66 TH EO te EA ne re eec cadens 63 Parts 4e eds 31 305 A reni 61 109 A enera een dh eae 411 sliding interfaces 389 Werte pli se 53238 yere Seta ds 64 Mesh density Sains dani den rs 34 203 i
165. 9 Aspect tatio A cnn eve 437 Mesh quality 438 IASSOIDBIG dex RE mS E ae eS 29 Assign coordinates 210 218 Atan Expressions 289 Atan2 Expressions 290 AUCH ii 12 button 209 279 EdPB 5 eso O ea et a 219 labeled peint c vesti cts 211 PLOJEC S dt iia 222 Attach button 115 130 157 169 Attaching a ad 29 124 A Gourd ares DES 159 block boundary 161 in Z buffer y e tauri te durat 162 pica 161 EM fae Ced RN end 157 surface edge unirse ee s 160 to a labeled object 160 to a lassoed object 161 10 ADOS atea 164 toa DOIDU o cr oh DER Red 163 lO an edge oes esee pei Grad 232 z coordinate 159 Authorization cie yer era moved ein 25 TIES asd ee HN Sethe 25 Automatic drawing algorithm 86 Av il bility s a eoe Ras 24 A ASA T a kehrt 351 boundary constraint 351 353 example 4 cis acid 66 449 IB EET E TEEST 360 A c e 361 Backplane GER E es 80 DUOE A aye eR re 82 A beh ord eR 127 Backspace in dialogue box 176 Basic C ODncepts Sas ea as ted ad ds 30 Balcon ciuis du TO e M SE AD Gus 58 A aA R E 20 Batch execution 22 28 Batch file iii cid 59 171 BR socere arseniat 142 198 389 441 attaching 425 4939 24 04 90 157 158 attaching 10 5 cos eed nes 161 DU tie 116 141 coordinate SySteM 394 display numbers 305
166. 92 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 91 trans translate to new center of rotation trans x_center_of_rotation y_center_of_rotation z_center_of_rotation Remarks Translate to a new center of the picture and a new center of rotation if the fix option is not active fix freeze center of rotation freezes the center of rotation to the present center of the picture fix no arguments Remarks The center of rotation is used by the picture rotation commands rx ry and rz Normally they rotate about the center of the screen Thus if you translate the picture with respect to the screen you will also translate the center of rotation relative to the model This command freezes the center of rotation to a fixed location relative to the model See the remarks on rx page 91 The unfix command will restore the center of rotation to normal unfix return center of rotation to picture unfix no arguments Remarks See the remarks on fix page 92 scale scale all coordinates scale scaling_factor Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 92 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks Scale all coordinates This command is not cumulative It is the same as issuing the xscl ysel and zscl commands with the same scale factor Coordinates are scaled after translations and rotations and before perspective and zooming This can cause distortion becau
167. 92 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 47 Index Progressions Index progressions are a concise notation used to describe complex objects in the mesh An index progression consists of three lists of signed reduced indices an i list a j list and a k list with each list ending with a semi colon A simple example is when a region is converted to an index progression lini 1 3 1 2 1 2 This example selects a region by selecting the range in the reduced i index from 1 to 3 Both the reduced j and k index range from to 2 It is typical that a function like lin has two forms one used when a region is selected and the other used when an index progression is selected The index progression version of a command has the letter 1 at the end of the command Index progressions are useful when multiple regions are selected 0 is used to indicate the union of several regions For example lini 13 0 4 6 1 2 1 2 this command is the union of two regions It can be replaced by the two commands lin 1 1 1 3 lin 4 116 2 2 2 2 In fact any index progression can be converted to a set of regions When a 0 is used in more than one index progression list the equivalent list of regions is the product of selections in each index direction For example lini 1 3 0 4 6 1 2 05 7 1 2 is equivalent to lin 1 322 lin 4 622 lin 1 5 372 lin 4 5 6 7 2 Faces a
168. A 109 Ol iaee ni ache sada kes 364 a DPI 414 QUIPUL tae ined de e te 20 element set iaa 454 Output file sas dado 59 face Sel aM etas a orade 455 Option das horas ak yam eds 59 node Seb SAS ates ee als 458 Output Manual 24 29 Order of executing commands Over constrained MESA os a d si e Gk AA Arey bae 258 nodal distribution 282 TEAK 2 auctus ve OE RO d 249 Overlapping 2 cus ve Ex A 39 62 niti oos ode eee 268 prr 218 orientation example aede Tu 218 269 DEO O ane I pci 414 Padi e ae e ERU a eae R 81 material 413 414 ad Jeter rette 78 OLDUA S cocer EUER awe ere ES 205 Page Down Key esset RR pee 76 shelli dali tend aras 414 Page Up key icc saa ce a Pea de 76 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 495 Paraboloid PLO ECs add es quod os tesis 276 Parabola uto oque x CRA SIR 280 Paraboloid A rus 273 Parameterization Salt So eee ees 23 IET de anat AE 2 Parameters 00005 34 175 example d es 269 271 IS Sad doen aui due d 176 of execution of TrueGrid 58 props PP 176 Parametric lessen 23 149 PACS SelS sues t dara onsen 136 IDEO A oe eaten ete 20 O e Lande 133 PateniliestSn se exa e eM e 175 POtSet 2 e os seta Ra e MERECE SCR 175 Pata uses as a s 31 34 61 button 29 116 connecting multiple 389 EUA dE DAS 149 Initialization
169. Alternatively you can delete all ofthe control points by clicking on the Clear All button Figure 178 Deletion of a Control Point TrueGrid Draw In this example the second control point of curve 1 was selected and deleted from the Point List to create curve 2 Figure 179 Deletion of a Control Point Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 188 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Moving a Cubic Spline Control Point Choose the control point to be moved by selecting the control point to be the focal point This step is described above There are two methods to move the focal point Method 1 Select the Move Pts button of the Environment Window and then select the Point List option Now select one of the methods under the label Constrain to With the Left Mouse Button click and drag in the Physical Widow to move the control point to a new location Method 2 Turn off Insert mode Choose one of the Pick panel point selection options Projection Z buffer Label or Node Pick a point using this selected method In this example the second control point of curve is moved in the x and y direction into a new location to create curve 2 Quit O Confirm Selection Accept Option to Specify Derivatives
170. C ATC AA brine li a 207 Commands issuing in text window 711 Comment equations s dais accents 290 Common node ssus 42 COMP MEC 111 Comp button 722 css conocer IR ure Rud 111 COMPAQ oie do date hate da Denia s 24 workstation o oooooooo 69 Complex surfaces sun 39 Composite boundary A 180 boundary curve 220 QUE VES 9 cad be da uL Pedes 180 surface 40 180 193 220 226 Computational mesh 22 30 44 Computational window 72 84 88 96 Concave boundary 237 249 CMs o ced ate O 235 POLAK aves aoe aa de esu 237 249 MS Va des 259 Condition Sur e ptr sette 29 boundary c eter RW sees 352 Bl aco ascen Dale dide oe icit 409 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 477 LV Meee tree id meant 87 Conditions example socre c oe dv 67 Gu Mr A A a 280 project ra is 273 276 Cone Sd option o o o o 280 Gone ST OpHOH trainee 273 Cone Sfi option 276 Configuration 000 177 Confirm selection aida kaet 180 CONNECT parts icen eo Le REIR 389 CONSTA isos Cen REC ee 29 3D QUurV Ss su deo e reda 222 boundary 351 353 boundary local 360 movement 6 148 projection coo loa 165 Surface Ld cq eor dE 158 SUITACES Artie aR Nude ed 272 tO ACUIVE eee eee 198 A ees bre en
171. Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 474 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Mist teas 236 hierarchy sacs ev 198 199 208 initial coordinates 393 intra part sd ire 268 393 A me n E PE 20 TASTED CE 391 MEP nes 390 normal offset 390 e A 211 212 lA AA 248 dos mr 391 smoothing us cx xen 234 spherical projection 278 tB hera aves whe RAS du 399 BIZ cana cy ea pee reg es 406 Beam cross section 00 413 integration ssa Lune one has 413 BES ii hueco I 20 DUONG sa a 116 create 417 420 424 425 429 432 create sets o o o 137 cross sections 417 embedded 4 ue ieee dr MAM 417 I3Bels a 5 2 feats han ate DR 115 Mrge Liu ios ene dote 436 Beams Button 134 AA E dats AMEN 368 BH Pal AAR SHAseeh eer 2004 05 oa ss 369 BEP leo ceste etas etes Rat 353 constraints ua en 352 ID e ean e Id EN 360 MAA CREE 361 Bi linear Interpolation 241 Bnd asar asta c Ace 413 417 A rears br eR ER baa 179 A Ceteri sm 179 Blending the shapes 4 Block 34 35 38 44 45 51 96 99 128 BEANS a 417 boundary list 296 decendre a DL pM 199 deleti es s esca te N 199 EDODAE oq eoo ptu deb te 440 example 4 csse tex a ade tea 65 geometric selection 99 hierarchy A 198 208 Initial mesh s e eros 207 ISPIT
172. DOWS seseeeeeee ees 71 2 Ir eCrd WAT OWES ress netaan E arb ted ar Pena as rd dos rt b Rabe 12 a The Text Menu Window 04d qM NAAA ERA ES RE ved SERA S ah 75 Menu Window eros des O oot aane scale E aes Boa arg Ra dian 75 Text AV THOOW iod anco bir s Cg ecce aro T Ced qe ame a As TI A Graphics Commands eas vao Nes RI RH ex ER Ed ea Ea 78 ad define a numbered annotation 0 0 0 0 eee eee 78 aad add an annotation to the picture in the physical window 78 caption change or toggle caption 0 0c cece eee 79 daad display all annotations in the physical picture 79 dad display a single annotation in the physical picture 79 dads display a list of annotations in the physical picture 80 display display with general hidden line algorithm 80 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 8 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual draw display without hidden line o oo oooomomomoo o o 80 grid turn reference grid on or off rr ru S 81 pad position an annotation in the physical picture 81 poor poor man s hidden line removal oo ooooooooo o o 82 postscript activate PostScript output 0 cece eee eee eens 82 raad remove all annotations from the physical picture 83 rad remove an annotation from the physical picture 84 rindex label reduced andicesso s ia e
173. EXYY XXX o Q IIT BGB A B BgM A A O O OOOO gt N III T LTT TAN ROY EE OOO II AA 0 y 144440444440 S e SSA AAA E C SS 4400091909 E 2 5 em E y a 3 d y y u R E Figure 402 2D Spline Curve Figure 404 468 8 a M d y E K R E TrueGrid display E TERY AMY TEER RW ATTE BI PITIN Y AEST ECOS OOOO ESO SS 000000 TIT IT TAI REI ESA LL RRA RR RR PARAR RAR diu s N EN RESO MS SA SLDS DIDIER ENTENDER DIANA EEN III Sm S nw LLY Q OSANIK ARENY LANA TELS STORY WTA IY SOON TV ZH SS LAC Wt th NCC OS WY Elements with Material 2 Figure 407 Elements with Material 1 Figure 406 th porosity for REFLEQS 10n WI to specify the reg por por region type beta option where type can be for porosity applied to volumes for porosity applied to volumes with walls vw vt for porosity applied to volumes with walls and temperature for porosity at west faces of cells for porosity at south faces of cells for porosity at low faces of the cells W S amp L combined and low porosities gt for porosity of a volume core same as V ve South beta is the porosity between 0 and 1 including 0 followed by west option is the temperature only if type is vt Inc All Rights Reserved Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications 469 2006 April 6 TrueGrid Manual pori to specify the region with porosity for REFLEQ
174. F format The CD is always shipped with a hard copy of the appropriate agreement This agreement requires that you agree to honor XYZ Scientific Applications copyright ownership and authorization of TrueGrid in order to use TrueGrid Updates If you are licensed to run the latest version of TrueGrid you can get the latest updates and documentation on a CD from XYZ Scientific Applications Inc or its distributors These updates are also available on the web for down loading Please contact XYZ Scientific Applications Inc At 925 373 0628 for instructions on down loading from the web Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved vi April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Table of Contents Table OF Contents ees eet Cente LOA TEXAVBES queis d Oe ed Gees uie xS 7 L Introduction RS A E O Bee ae ee dead sd Renee ee 19 E A eO et ania e Cad Meee cuties 20 2 OVINA a is ata Ph ROE to oe qoo 21 3 oxvallabiBi chad rahe 4 mos A M unt 23 Getting Information on TrueGrid 01 keene 23 Getting a Demonstration Copy of TrueGrid 0 0 eee 24 Purchasing WMueGHa se Vai dt ed Panne ds 24 Hardware Platos E A desse a sr aide a 24 4 Getting Started ood A TIAS aoe Release Sol a era 25 Installation on UNIX s 6 24 ud ed Rub ete Reyes erbe e y bere 26 Installation on WINDOWS soii Ree Ade des 26 Installation on LINUX 54 Zas Treue nean a E QI EHU S CONI 26 Installation on OSA 4 cured aeq e eee aue dde eue cd e re s
175. Fl print a region or index progression selection F2 clear region or index progression selection F3 history window same as History button F4 save window configuration F5 select a vertex node or control point Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 177 F6 select second vertex of a region F7 print selected coordinates F8 print selected label F9 same as F8 F10 same as F10 Control A print a region or index progression selection Control B scroll Backwards by a line Control D clear region or index progression selection Control E Execute the dialogue box without quitting Control F scroll Forward by a line Control P toggle continuous slicing Planes on or off Control Q Quit the dialogue box without confirmation Control U delete text in bottom line of text window Control V Verbose mode in the dialogue box Control X delete the character below the curser in dialogue box Control Z execute the dialogue box and quit or recover dialogue box Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 178 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 9 Interactive Construction of 3D Curves A 3D curve is defined using the curd command Alternatively there are four curve types with interactive dialogues to help you construct a 3D curve These interactive dialogues have the advantage that you can use all of the interactive methods in selecting points and surface
176. From button o oooooooooo 182 Front View button 150 169 A A di tot 133 136 455 EXA a sa 456 ESC ad aa 460 ES 0 E 136 457 example g ea dne e cyte 457 jg art basa Ie Dace Abeta CELERE 373 Ftf LATA e d erat aloe a 439 LE pte as Pact PET 214 MM E act than A pod d 215 E holte tih E 373 Full indices 34 37 HIStory Le es eee ere es 295 example o sons ERA 264 Ey ance ea e ORC NEC ORC UR RUE 313 PVG ET 314 EVOL chee SES ad E ra 215 j qc PU ees 314 IP 315 VSL o ty uate weitere paces 316 EV s 49e dc ri a OEY 322 Py d ctun n Merc EIN RRP I ce 325 EVOL cack aga que OPES o GREC 325 PSU dani 324 NS A eh eua ae fe ced d lg 326 EL 604 dese E TES ous QOIS 327 ADS eh Saadeh E Re yl d res 39 62 Cl aga eC Peat tenant rng 441 Generating a New Picture 112 Geometric indexing 97 Geometric progression 41 node spacing 283 Geometric selection 97 Geometry of the mesh 29 Getbb SAVED cia as 441 Global isng bite wd is he 29 Global Button 126 149 Global Coordinates 149 Gluings SUDDIK 5223 a ES 451 Gmi TED 24 Mined S eda a Yoda e eis 445 Grab Texts ducas EO d ego ds RE TT Graphical User Interface O Nees GAR A n 20 Graphical user interface GUI TOO oe cep et Ta hes 60 Graphics COLO cs etg tci eu beh id 109 AO cuis dea em ttt iret 109 Tighitilig oe oe r
177. I L 5 975 2 Lil c sparse part Part 2 trbb 1313311 c Slave side 1 c definition merge Example Transition Island The transition in mesh density of this example is dependent upon the order of the parts Part 1 is inside the thickened square and Part 2 is outside the thickened square The mesh shown in 356 results from defining Part 1 first and Part 2 second The trbb command is used on each of the four shared edges The elements of the second part are modified to transition between the different mesh densities It would be an error to switch the order of parts because transitions in 2 directions are not allowed on the same block The command file follows 1 1 Q NON NO RNNNO C1 lock boundary 234 c b c definitions 1 c for Part 1 i3 13 1 12 14 0 10 12 14 0 c Part 2 definition dei 3 4 3 4 c region deletion trbb 3 3 trbb 3 4 trbb 4 3 trbb 3 3 c transition block boundary 123 4 for Part definitions 2 merge B 4 4 4 4 412 4135 3 1 TrueGrid Draw Pa Figure 356 transition in mesh density by trbb Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 401 Remarks Two Way Transitions 227777 AN LAS The second type of transition know as a two way t
178. N expression Each expression can reference the nodal coordinates X Y and Z and the nodal indices I J and K When the part is generated in cylindrical coordinates the X in an expression will refer to the radial coordinate of the node and Y in an expression will refer to the angular coordinate of the node Example For example the velocities are specified by the command fvv 1 1 1 2 2 2 0 abs x abs y tabs z cos z 10 sin z 10 0 This command sets the velocities for an entire block controlled by the load curve number 0 The amplitude is calculated from the absolute values of the three nodal coordinates The x and y components of the vector are trigonometric functions of the z coordinate of the node The z component of the vector is 0 block 33 TrueGrid display boundary velocity 1 3 finition 1 391 3 L 371 371 a sh de fvv 11122 20 abs x tabs y tabs z cos z 10 sin z 10 0 c variable prescribed c velocity for region cl fot 2 2 c null load curve merge co fv 0 c display of the velocity Figure 320 variable velocity prescribed Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 323 fvvi variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities fvvi progression load_curve_ amp_expr x expr y expr z expr where load_curve_ is a load curve number or zero amp_expr is the FORTRAN expression for the a
179. O m OU Sed ees 20 TsavedHe s ue Ea CA A RAN EA 59 21116 MERE RePEc 193 Dietary Coss obo tetur PRA e 294 ODpITOII ze tases re eic pne 59 DDS ch istud Va dats 213 usage vasi Eee nd Moe d 440 Tutorial manual 24 28 ha adds Satine Bon eBid dee cd 84 87 A ON 80 A CeesWS be Hee 82 Two way transition 402 WSU enw ies cede ahd eae ms 116 150 155 Twsurf Curd option 179 Twsurf button oooooooooo 179 Typing into which window 173 Us od t OT cd ON 113 114 DOTE coner ede a uada vado a 111 HOO msi S ates Bd tire 21 171 298 buttafi ceci etos tent 158 165 171 NTIS ouod Semet Cute eee Na equ Cx 92 o rlecd Ate qd tela te ded oa fact 92 p PD DN EAM EE EET 9 Unit cd ine eee tees 31 198 235 SE CUIVES a 226 example 220 237 262 264 269 271 example with amp 270 hierarchy c Gad eee 199 208 Neumann dior os ea 234 nodal distribution 282 orthogonality 234 UMPE oue e cC 31 198 Neumann i 24 34 3 3444 vd 234 orthogonality 234 Unifrm MO Zoe cuu ae ERA exa tust 2 UNIX iio teach heck Ata eth as 21 24 27 57 69 Up arrow in text window 71 Update scat a ates oaa tate e Rs 207 equations duds d eere 207 example ni varse DOC deeds 207 MSE Vues niei tos 204 207 User s Mantis tarta 24 A ed uu Ct I lata nc al UA 384 O A qd OR 439 IDE oe Lean VL D tinh 213 LET sce sant E gei ce RS 215
180. ORTRAN expression for the radial component 0 expr is the FORTRAN expression for the polar angular component Q expr is the FORTRAN expression for the d component Remarks See fvvs for remarks The only difference is that regions are selected using index progressions vacc variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations vace region load_curve_ amp_expr x expr y expr z expr where load_curve_ is a load curve number or zero amp_expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude X expr is the FORTRAN expression for the x component y expr is the FORTRAN expression for the y component Z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Remarks This command assigns accelerations allowing for the amplitude factor and the Cartesian vector components to be calculated using a FORTRAN expression Each expression can reference the nodal coordinates X Y and Z and the nodal indices I J and K When the part is generated in cylindrical coordinates the X in an expression will refer to the radial coordinate of the node and Y in an expression will refer to the angular coordinate of the node vacci variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations vacci progression load_curve_ amp_expr x expr y expr z expr where load_curve_ is a load curve number or zero amp_expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 327 X
181. RVES menu and SPLINE to get the Point List dialogue Select z buffer type of graphics using HIDE or FILL in the Environment window Then select DRA W in the Environment window to redraw the picture in the Physical window Select the PICK panel and Z BUFFER in the Environment window to pick control points from the picture Use the left mouse button to select points from the Physical window When complete select the Save button in the Point List dialogue fill in the curve number and Accept Then Quit the Point List dialogue Initialize a new part s geometry and topology by using the PARTS menu and BLOCK dialogue You are now in the Block Phase The Text Menu Computational Physical and Environment windows are displayed on your screen You are now in the Part phase Delete any unwanted regions from the block structure of the part using the MESH menu and DE or DET dialogue Alternatively select a region in the Computational window with the left mouse button and click on the DELETE button in the Environment window Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 65 Pre position the vertices of the mesh using the MESH menu and any of the dialogues PB MB MBI TR or TRI There are many other more convenient ways to move these control points of the mesh but are not appropriate for this short discussion Select regions of the mesh in the Computational window Project these regions of t
182. Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 219 pb 1 1441 xyz 18 66 73 pb 1 2 4 4 2 xyz sll 15 98 dei 1 2 0 3 4 12 0 3 4 c Attach all k edges to curves cure 12 11222 cure 2 2 2222 cure 2 2 2 2 cure 3 3 2 3 cure 3 2 3223 cure 4 2 4223 cure 4 3 4324 cure 3 3 3324 cure 3 4 3424 cure 2 4 2425 cure 2 3 23 2539 cure 1311325 Variable thickness tube c Project to the pipe surface sfi 1 4 1 4 sd 1 c Glue the corners together for smoothing bb 2 3 242 1 bb131232 1 bb 1 2 222 2 bb 2112 2 2 2 bb 3113 2 2 3 bb 321 4 2 2 3 bb 33143 2 4 bb 3313 4 2 4 c Smooth the exterior faces unifm 4 2 43264241342 amp 1 2 13262 17 3 1 2 30 0 T unifn212342 amp 122232 amp 3224321001 unifm 1 2 4318231341821 3 2 1 X00 Ly c Smooth the interior unifm 12 1432 amp 2 1 322 amp 23 3424001 If a surface boundary is convex and you want a face of the mesh to cover the entire surface than attach the edge of the mesh to the edge s of the surface A variation of this is when you form a composite surface with the sd command using the sds option Then form the composite boundary curve using the coedge command To shape the mesh attach the boundary edges of the mesh to the composite curve and project the face s of the mesh to the composite surface For example sd 1 function 0 180 01 5 v cos u
183. S por progression type beta option where type can be v for porosity applied to volumes vw for porosity applied to volumes with walls vt for porosity applied to volumes with walls and temperature Ww for porosity at west faces of cells for porosity at south faces of cells l for porosity at low faces of the cells ve for porosity of a volume core same as V W S amp L combined followed by west south and low porosities beta is the porosity between 0 and 1 including 0 option is the temperature only if type is vt se to define the ale smoothing constraints for LS DYNA3D se region direction where direction can be i J k Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 470 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual IV Index Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 471 POA a eae Wee t 25 26 ee Le dud i quis dq dec 77 290 equations eri e eed 3 290 lis sad O RN 34 63 PAU alin x exem o oi Sees 176 expressions 175 289 expressions 175 289 1 COMMENTS iras wer Tete 63 Comments sas alaba 63 Dos 6 dere made A a AA E 290 COMMENT cx ee Seen a ete 63 Comments dew pu os 63 equations 08 290 equations cuc ed oec eet 289 EXPIESSIONS 12152 condado 175 node set 1 3 rex Trade 458 element Set ar 454 equations nens 289 EXPTESSIONS EA 175 Tace Seb desde pen e Re
184. So far we have seen all the colors TrueGrid uses to show what you have selected In certain situations TrueGrid will use the one remaining color magenta to show what you have deleted Magenta is a mixture of red and blue the opposite of green In the example select index bar segments as shown in 104 Click on the Delete button command dei in the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 104 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual command line You have just deleted the selected region Try the same thing with a dialogue box Either issue dial dei from the text window or go to the Mesh submenu and select dei by left clicking the mouse Now press the F2 key to clear the current progression from the dialogue box Then select a region of the mesh as shown by the index bars in 104 105 Press the Fl key TrueGrid will copy your graphical selection into the dialogue box Issue the dei command by pressing the Exec Quit button at the bottom of the dialogue box Finally click on the Draw button to see the new object Next activate the history window One way to do this is by issuing the TrueGrid command history Middle click your mouse on either of the two lines Figure 43 that begin with progression This will highlight the regions that you just deleted The regions are no longer there but faces on their borders do still remain Now these faces are colored magenta TrueGrid uses magenta f
185. Sole ar mo le e D ERA Sie eunt t 368 bfi bulk fluid by index progression 00000 ce eee 369 cv boundary convection data a DR Ia 369 cvi boundary convection 0 00 ccc cece eens 369 vcv boundary convection with functional amplitudes 370 vevi boundary convection with functional amplitudes 370 cvt convection thermal loads aria 371 cvti convection thermal loads 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 371 fl prescribed boundary flux siria hes ERE ER 371 fli prescribed boundary flux 2 24 sisse a 372 vfl prescribed boundary flux with functional amplitude 372 vfli prescribed boundary flux with functional amplitude 372 ft prescribed temperature yy Ou ues qo Ve es A alias 373 fti prescribed temperature by progression 4 373 vft functional prescribed temperature 0000005 373 vfti functional prescribed temperature by progression 374 hfl specify flows and fluxes 2 oce xt ia da di 374 hfli specify flows and fluxes by index progression 375 inizone initial conditions for the REFLEQS option 375 inizonei initial conditions for the REFLEQS option by progression 376 setsor set REFLEQS source terms 0 0c cece eee eens 376 setsori set REFLEQS source terms by index progression 3T rb prescribed radiation boundary condition 378 rbi prescribed radiation boundary condition by progressi
186. TRAN expression for the polar angular component z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Remarks See vacce for remarks The only difference is that regions are selected using index progressions Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 328 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Example A mesh is defined in cylindrical coordinates TrueGrid display acceleration 0 at 6 000E 00 Cylindrical variable acceleration is prescribed for the outer surface of cylinder part by index progression The acceleration has linear magnitude depending on z 1 expression The simplified command file follows vaccci 2 0 zt l 1 0 0 c variable cylindrical accel c null load curve used 0 c magnitude z 1 c direction 1 0 0 merge condition acc 0 c display of acceleration Figure 323 variable cylindrical acceleration vaccs spherical variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations vaces region load_curve_ amp_expr p expr O expr expr where load_curve_ is a load curve number or zero amp_expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the FORTRAN expression for the radial component O expr is the FORTRAN expression for the polar angular component expr is the FORTRAN expression for the component Remarks This command assigns accelerations allowing for the amplitude factor and the spherical vector components to be calculated using a FORTRAN expression Each expression can re
187. There are numerous ways to position the nodes at the vertices of the block mesh At this point we introduce the cylinder command It is like the block command except the coordinates are interpreted as radius angle and z The arguments to the block and cylinder commands include the coordinates to the vertices of the block mesh In a simple mesh you may provide those arguments and do no more But there are several other ways by which you can control initialization The pb command will replaces coordinates of a region The mb command modifies the coordinates of a region The pbs command matches the coordinates of a region to a point on a surface or 3 D curve The tr command transforms the coordinates of a region All of these functions are invoked when you use the mouse to move the mesh You can use these commands to make corrections to the coordinates of the regions even after edges have been attached to curves or faces have been projected onto surfaces After you make corrections to the initial coordinates TrueGrid will automatically re attach edges onto curves and re project faces onto surfaces Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 38 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Projection Method More will be said about the surface intersection algorithms but this requires a more thorough discussion of the projection of a node onto a surface The ideal case is when the surface is smooth and has no boundaries Sup
188. TrueGrid User s Manual A Guide and a Reference by Robert Rainsberger VOLUME 1 Introduction Graphical User Interface and Parts Version 2 3 0 XYZ Scientific Applications Inc April 6 2006 Copyright 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All rights reserved TrueGrid the TrueGrid User s Manual and related products of XYZ Scientific Applications Inc are copyrighted and distributed under license agreements Under copyright laws they may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written approval from XYZ Scientific Applications Inc The license agreements further restrict use and redistribution XYZ Scientific Applications Inc makes no warranty regarding its products or their use and reserves the right to change its products without notice This manual is for informational purposes only and does not represent a commitment by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc XYZ Scientific Applications Inc accepts no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies in this document or any of its products TrueGrid is a registered trademark of XYZ Scientific Applications Inc Silicon Graphics and SGI are registered trademarks of Silicon Graphics Inc WINDOWS is a registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Unix is a registered trademark of The Open Group Abaqus is a registered trademark of Abaqus Inc Sun Microsystems is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc ANSYS TASCFlow AUTODyn
189. WANA See SEN LZ ES LL SL EX LZ A cy Z7 ZZ ZZ C2 S Z XZ LZ 7 LIZ C7 TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Surfaces TrueGrid Manual After Project Figure 144 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 Before Project Figure 143 166 Projecting Two Faces onto Two Surface This example shows consecutive steps in projecting faces of the mesh onto 2 surfaces As you can see from the pictures the two surfaces do not have a common boundary In some areas the surfaces do not meet and in other areas the surfaces pass through each other The surfaces imported from an IGES file are frequently ill defined in this way although this example is an exaggeration of what you might typically find in a model from a CAD system The projection method handles these inaccuracies in the geometry in the best possible way In this example the common edge of both projected faces forms the intersection between the pair of ill defined surfaces TrueGrid display Figure 145 Projected Mesh Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 167 TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Surfaces MOTA EHEH AN 47 A F CA LAHA LL TT AN VLDL AD LLL EA un Tif 7 P AR a Y eee te ee TE A ek es oe a e a ee a ON Soo MR o e SS e m Figure 146 Ste
190. Y H 3 Ne 9 le d H 9 a k A n H a HO od UN au 9 5 H vw s T Step 6 Figure 188 Step 5 Figure 187 Step 7 Figure 189 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 192 Interactive Composite Curve from Surface Edges This tool is meant to be used when there are many surfaces such as a large model from an IGES file Typically many surfaces are combine into one composite surface using the sd command with the sds option In order to cover these surfaces with a mesh it may be necessary to create a bounding 3D curve Then the edges of the mesh can be attached to this curve With the COEDG COmposite EDGe feature edges of the surfaces are selected in sequence to form a composite curve The same thing can be accomplished by using the se or sdedge option of the curd command many times The result of this interactive tool is a 3D composite curve which is recorded in the session file tsave using the curd command with the se option TrueGrid DRAW Defined Surface edges after Insert Delete from to 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 W
191. a 124 O o ahah teste ewes 336 Distribution nodes 282 Di a we nT a Wr eis 143 DIVS D a A ch AINE tg ae VL 143 A O ia a cael siue fra 143 MINS e a ads Wein eis 143 ME see d ute ad 461 Dndd HOS usa S dud atc vs a P ida 286 Dom b nee TREES 43 288 example iuis graye Rhus Pla 288 Pramp 3 eter stat outre ad 350 ebd Inc sd E 288 DOLO E 71 Dotted line JU aos tas nd Dia a Voge ere 78 Download nad 26 A 143 Du ate Rs 113 114 A dE eR TO 143 Draw barca EA ciu ido AR E AE ARE 80 button 100 105 109 A efe eaa 80 ODE 24 1250245 GST E eS 82 O risas fad 84 CVV cubat ta A ete Aes ete 87 Draw button 65 112 A AG MM E RS 80 IAW aiuta C duces 80 DOON zug sc de aa es ae 82 nude a 87 Drawing algorithm MUDA A 86 DES EE CIE 31 284 UE hs an Ge aa aei b a 228 dde ep ee eee eee 286 edge projection 276 ESE ono wena dU adag VADO 236 telak cob and ea a ee 248 TE Sed tite area bett d 252 TME urat Peut us dtu teta anas 259 DN eR ERE MR 142 A E EEE EE EAE 142 DYINAS3D i as a OG 332 Epb veu Eat mer eee et 451 IND Dara dra ee hee RG 451 EPT Oc ap amas da 381 Dynamats EXAMPLE vais Ab chats edi s deers 65 Dynamic Movement of the Picture 112 Dynaopts example irs bat S xe e RA was 64 Edge 31 33 41 96 127 198 231 attach dd bene LES d 219 attaching 157 158 160 PHOT cost tes oA Prada 141 hierarchy uis retos uta 198 208 INSOLE scout tpa teta 23
192. a eae sok 171 labels panel ioo hue 115 move points 148 new Dicta 112 picking objects ius 124 picture selection 108 project mesh 1024 e edule 165 resume vesc acea gts 171 ntloi oues du tae OA 171 window selection 111 Bp oae sd otis avi teatri tia 451 E qUattOns eost eee e tet tette 287 example aus ewe Ded aate 287 290 M ea E v 1 notet d 204 update osse d een 207 Equipotential relaxation 42 oy satis 280 Er Sf option o oooooo oo 273 Er Sfi option ooooooooo 276 Error Input s eeaeee eian RR TT SYSTEM des pai ade 72 ES e MU lA tetas ce 133 454 example cop dei faces Ped RES 454 BSelo a erae a ed Perce AIRES 460 BSGU Ido obese Neq id a OCEAN 455 ESU xoa d dere teer 2 198 235 3D CUIVES Quis em eG a uber s e Ry 226 ESP eame ta iau elis 238 example 237 238 262 270 hierarchy AN 198 208 TAO A ag a ea 21 ESMP desde remain Sareea ks 238 ESITE Led Nee o na REI Rc NEN OM 236 example esed Geo 238 262 etd USAR urs ans Wore aa Ba Sce ED 431 Exatnples sel dite tbe bus 28 Examples Manual 24 Exec button 175 177 DE icy Wate ae renee oc Paine MUS 177 Exec Quit button 105 172 175 IO 4 excedit oes ed nt eai da 177 Executable TOPLESS coude cos RO RES 71 TrueGrid 0 71 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manu
193. a is the number of nodes after the edge Remarks This command is used to define nodal constraints at the interface between shell and brick elements for LSDYNA Nodes from the shell side of the interface are not merged to the nodes in the corresponding fibers A vertex or an edge of a shell is selected and assigned an identification number An edge of a solid and its neighboring nodes are selected and identified by a number to form fibers The nodes forming a fiber are constrained to the appropriate node selected along the shell edge with a matching identification number These commands can be issued several times to select all of the nodes forming a set of fibers since the nodes forming the fibers may be in several parts Each valid shell edge node is assigned to the fiber which is closest with the same identification number Care should be taken so that a fiber is not used more than once LS DYNA expects that the nodes along a fiber are co linear You must take the correct actions to be sure this is the case A warning is issued if the nodes of a fiber are not co linear or if the shell edge node does not fall on the fiber Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 411 Example block 1 4 1 3 1 3 141313 shtoso 1122121301 block 1 4 1 1 3 14135 shtoso 11 12 11 1 edge block 1 4 1 3 1 3 14 1113 shtoso 1222221310 merge stp
194. a part Of course the let and lrep commands normally should appear within the scope of the same part However if several parts in sequence use the same local coordinate transformations you only need to define them in the first part and then use them Irep in each part Global coordinate transformations are similar to local transformations Define global transforma tions with get and use them to replicate a part with grep You also can combine global and local transformations within a part resulting in a product of the transformations Moreover you can use global transformations to define level transformations Level transformations are used to replicate parts much like local and global transformations But they are more complicated and flexible You may nest one set of level transformations within another or global or local transformations within level transformations Nesting means that all possible combinations of the specified transformations will be applied This lets you create a tremendous number of transformed copies of a part with only a few commands You define a set of level transformations with the lev command At that time you give it a number so that you may apply it anyplace thereafter The pslv and pplv commands define the scope of a level All of the level s transformations are applied to all parts in its scope Irep local replication of a part lrep ist local transform where list local transform st list of sequential n
195. a set of Poisson elliptic differential equations which is described in the following reference This relaxation method does a very good job of propagating an edge s distribution of nodes into the interior of the mesh It also tries to approximate an orthogonal mesh near the boundaries These commands are executed after all relax and relaxi commands are executed The tme and tmei commands are executed in the relative order that you specified them The interpolation weight factor amplifies iterations that solves the Poisson equation In most cases use 1 0 In each iteration a candidate coordinate is computed for each node It computes the node s new coordinate position by averaging this candidate with the old position The weight factor determines how much ofthe old position to use If the weight is 1 0 then the old position is not used atall When you make the weight smaller the candidate position becomes less important and the old position becomes more important in determining the node s new coordinate position Sometimes it is best to let this method iterate until it converges In other cases it is preferable to Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 258 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual iterate only a few steps to smooth the mesh but not alter its global features When the number of iterations is made small and the interpolation factor kept small the effect can be almost imperceptible It is best to e
196. acceleration 1 at 1 044E 00 Figure 316 acceleration by acc acci prescribed boundary acceleration acci progression load curve amplitude options f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where MoJo Jad is a vector in Cartesian coordinates giving the direction of the acceleration Remarks This is the same as acc except that it applies to an index progression Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 318 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual accc cylindrical prescribed boundary acceleration acec region load curve amplitude options p 0z where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where p 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the acceleration The angle is in degrees Remarks This is the same as acc except that the direction is in cylindrical coordinates accci cylindrical prescribed boundary acceleration accci progression load curve amplitude options p 0z where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor
197. ace symmetry plane define a wall define a conducting boundary define a generic inlet define a generic outlet specify a user defined 2D region specify a non conducting solid specify a conducting solid specify a porous solid specify a user defined 3D solid character string name no blanks up to 30 characters These regions include both 2D and 3D regions Any 2D region should be the outer boundary of a part or of a region specified using the supblk command Otherwise an error will result within CFX There are no restrictions for 3D regions If you assign the same name to different regions or to a region that is broken across blocks then these regions are assembled into one group of regions for CFX 406 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual flowinti create named regions for the CFX output file flowinti progression interface_type interface_name where interface_type can be press symmet wall cndbdy inlet outlet user2d solid solcon porous user3d interface_name Remarks to specify a pressure face to specify a symmetry plane to specify a define a wall to specify a define a conducting boundary to specify a define a generic inlet to specify a define a generic outlet to specify a user defined 2D region to specify a non conducting solid to specify a conducting solid to specify a porous solid or to specify a user define
198. acy if you use the accuracy command For the AMD Opteron there are two 64 bit versions TrueGrid ted and tgdx Ted is a 64 bit version which also runs without the OpenGL library and is X Windows compliant Tgdx does not use the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 70 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual OpenGL library Both the address space and all floating point calculations are done in 64 bit mode When running the 64 bit version there is virtually an unlimited number of nodes and the accuracy can be increased to a maximum of about 11 digits with the use of the accuracy command If you wish to run the license manager of a LINUX system you must obtain a TrueGrid hardware key dongle This version is developed and tested on various versions of REDHAT and SUSE LINUX TrueGrid has been installed and run on other LINUX systems but this is not recommended by XYZ Scientific Applications This manual documents TrueGrid s graphical user interface for a three button mouse TrueGrid sees the buttons of a two button mouse as the left button and the middle button of a three button mouse When this manual tells you to use the middle button of your mouse use the right button of a two button mouse If you have a two button mouse you can do a right button operation of a three button mouse by holding the Control key and clicking on the right button INTEL or AMD PC Running WINDOWS The executable cal
199. ad curve number amplitude amplitude expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions 15 Electric Condition Commands efl electric flux boundary condition efl region value_of_flux Remarks This command produces four node polygons with an assigned constant flux one polygon for each face within the region Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 383 efli electric flux boundary condition by index progression efli progression value_of_flux Remarks This command produces four node polygons with an assigned constant flux one polygon for each face within the regions given by the specified progression mp constant magnetic potential mp region potential mpi constant magnetic potential mpi progression potential v electrostatic potential boundary condition v region potential Remarks The specified nodal electrostatic potential is assigned for all nodes in the specified region vi electrostatic potential boundary condition vi progression potential Remarks The specified nodal electrostatic potential is assigned for all nodes in the specified index progression Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 384 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 16 Springs Dampers and Point Masses npm creates a node with a point mass npm m
200. ads iia ip 338 fci concentrated nodal loads 4 oer S eS E PE Or n RS 339 fcc cylindrical concentrated nodal loads ss 340 feci cylindrical concentrated nodal loads o 340 fos spherical concentrated nodal loads 341 fesi spherical concentrated nodal loads 342 11 linearly interpolate loads by arc length 343 mdep momentum deposition 0 0 cece eee ee 343 mom nodal moment about an axis 0 sees 344 momi nodal moment about an axis 0 eee eee eee eee 346 ndl nodal distributed load a eS 346 ndli nodal distributed load i nio dad iaa 346 pr pressure load daria a aa ens 348 pri pressure load by index progression ooo oooooomomo o 348 pramp pressure amplitudes from a FORTRAN like expression 349 13 Boundary and Constraint Commands 0 0 00 e cece eens 351 b global nodal displacement and rotation constraints 351 bi global nodal constraints by progression 353 cfc convective flow CF3D output boundary conditions 354 cfci CF3D output boundary conditions by progression 354 fbc FLUENT boundary conditions oo oooooooooooooo 356 fbci FLUENT boundary conditions by index progression 356 jt assign a node to a numbered joint 0 5 357 il identifies an inlet for fluid flow o oooooooo o 359 ili identifies an inlet f
201. aint about the y axis at first end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at first end point release the x translation constraint at last end point release the y translation constraint at last end point release the z translation constraint at last end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the y axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at last end point release the x translation constraint at intermediate point release the y translation constraint at intermediate point release the z translation constraint at intermediate point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at intermediate points release the rotation constraint about the y axis at intermediate points release the rotation constraint about the z axis at intermediate points orientation angle for the cross section Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 418 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual warpage nl n2 two nodes used to determine warpage in the beam geom option method of determining curvature where option can be 1 for center of curvature 2 for tangent of centroid arc 3 for bend radius 4 for arc angle Remarks This command is available only in the block or cylinder Part Phase This command generates an array of beam elements conforming to the geometry and nodes of a solid or shell regi
202. al April 6 2006 483 Execute line es Coe 58 Executing dialogue box 177 178 A a ous cas CRUS Es 178 EIE As ON ais diviso eb edet d det 62 button 62 75 76 menu button s socero e ERE Ste 75 Exit button rca ree Geechee 62 Exp Expressions 289 Expressions Fortran format 175 Extrusion PLOJECE ud Ue p 273 277 Fl Key 36 97 99 105 177 217 219 MO ote wets ae Glee o 64 FIO KEY e oath tied ec ed at 178 FEZ Key Hoere Si ese 97 99 105 177 COMA 4225 9 toco s 305 WIE iter ae ere T 64 PS Rey 2154 coped es ae tas 177 293 EE ca educ p Ai td erede 177 F5 Key 97 128 130 148 150 155 177 181 Po Key ae ssi eue ae 97 128 130 178 E e seti sss 115 126 129 178 FS Key TR 115 178 212 pU Key serennog mies Teteres 126 178 Ba cu etd fea ke adt ita AE 338 a e EU MPS GO 33 96 127 235 attaching ias 157 creates c le 135 A A 46 movement lesse 148 orientation set 136 PFOJECHON vedad 41 selection 98 106 Face Sd option A E E PALA SEA 20 Face Stee fk a yt he 133 comment e 460 delete rada iae 453 modify oos s 134 455 ho cT 38 Faces Button 0s ta 134 Faceset Sd option A o iuto ceo bia uice tote utate cann 20 El wena enol ds ea xA 338 FAX freag aap EA TOE OERA des 23 FOCA o A a a ee 356 POG eee oe dia lada 356 Bo nad e ec ae due vendendi 338 PO oe sut o ea E ce NC dod e 340 o AA reU ud usi 340 ECL oan
203. al to the surface second axis orientation by the vector cross_section is the cross section definition number assigned with bsd option can be reverse si sid_ vold volume lump inertia cablcid system_ cabarea area caboff offset csarea area sharea area inertia iss itt irr thickness roffl x soffl y the order of the nodes is the reverse of the default Sliding Interface Number volume of Discrete Beam lumped inertia local coordinate system id number defined by the Isys cable area cable offset cross section area shear area of cross section cross section moments of inertia thickness x component of offset vector for first end point y component of offset vector for first end point Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 429 toffl z roff2 x soff2 y toff2 z Idr1 Ids1 Idt1 Irr1 Irs1 Irti Idr2 Ids2 Idt2 Irr2 Irs2 Irt2 Idr3 Ids3 1dt3 Irr3 Irs3 Irt3 theta 0 warpage n n2 geom option z component of offset vector for first end point x component of offset vector for last end point y component of offset vector for last end point z component of offset vector for last end point release the x translation constraint at first end point release the y translation constraint at first end point release the z translation constraint at first end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at first end point release
204. allation on OSX This procedure uses the unzip utility to extract the TrueGrid files from the given archive file The files extracted will reside in the TrueGrid directory typically usr TrueGrid No effort is made to create this directory or set permissions on it Rather the user is responsible for this To create usr TrueGrid open a terminal or X window and change directory to usr cd usr Then create the TrueGrid directory sudo mkdir TrueGrid Make sure you have the owner and group ids set to what you want sudo chown lt owner name gt lt group name gt TrueGrid and the permissions set sudo chmod R a r TrueGrid The environment variable TGHOME must be set to this directory e g in csh and tcsh use setenv TGHOME ustr TrueGrid in sh and bash use set TGHOME usr TrueGrid export TGHOME usr TrueGrid The setting of the environment variable TGHOME should be put in the cshrc for csh and tesh and bashrc for sh and bash of each Truegrid user The Sentinel Rainbow Drivers required for the license manager to run properly To see if the Drivers are installed check to the existence of the Library Extensions Sentinel kext with a non empty Content subdirectory If the drivers are not installed you can do so with the Mac OSX installer in usr sbin Go to the RAINBOW subdirectory i e cd RAINBOW of your TrueGrid directory and type all on one line Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc
205. ally works Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 267 Remarks The numerical method is an adaptation of one described by Byung Il Jun in his report A Modified Equipotential Method for Grid Relaxation UCRL JC 138277 University of California The method treats curvature differently than the method used in the relax command producing a more uniform mesh The boundary nodes form boundary conditions for the solution to a set of elliptic differential equations By setting the command s arguments you can choose to iterate until the method converges or you can choose to do just a few iterations It is best to experiment with this command to get the desired results No holes are allowed in the interior A vertex edge or face may be formed from boundary nodes and still be considered as interior nodes for smoothing purposes This is the reason for the option of specifying multiple regions in this command Multiple faces or blocks can be specified using the amp between region specifications The regions must be either all faces or all blocks Disjoint regions can be smoothed together including the nodes at the interfaces If the boundary of one region is glued to the boundary of another region using the intra part bb command then the coincident nodes along the interface will also be smoothed If numerous regions meet at a single vertex which is completely surrounded by these re
206. always reflect the results of any merging Nodes are merged depending on the distance between them If a node lies within a tolerance distance of more than one other node then it is merged with the closest one When merging several nodes into one node the first defined node survives This can be overridden by the bptol command Nodes within a joint and across the two sides of a sliding surface are not merged When the first merging of nodes occurs a sliding interface table is calculated which is used in the merging process This table is written to the screen and to the save file and is intended as diagnostics The following is a sample of that table SLIDING INTERFACE SUMMARY Surf S node S lseg S qseg M node M lseg M qseg 105 84 0 468 418 0 2 232 0 52 468 418 0 3 221 0 0 390 304 0 4 221 0 0 390 304 0 5 158 0 0 20 88 0 6 158 30 30 20 88 0 7 204 102 0 204 02 0 8 232 0 52 90 52 0 9 101 8 18 6 132 0 0 101 8 18 6 132 0 1 548 120 120 3216 0 1056 2 133 84 0 161 132 0 3 133 84 0 6 132 0 4 308 240 0 3216 0 056 This table is organized by the sliding interface number on the right Columns 2 3 and 4 are datum pertaining to the slave side on the interface columns 5 6 and 7 to the master side Columns 2 and 5 S node and M node are node counts Columns 3 and 6 S 1seg and M 1seg are linear face counts and columns 4 and 7 S qseg and M qseg are quad
207. and CFX are a registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS Inc NASTRAN and PATRAN are a trademark and a registered trademark respectively of MacNeal Schwendler Corporation FLUENT and FIDAP are registered trademarks of Fluent Inc CFD ACE is a trademark of CFD Research Corporation Gridgen is a trademark of Pointwise Inc NASTRAN is a registered trademark of The National Aeronautics Space Administration LSDYNA is a trademark of Livermore Software Technology Corporation STARCD is a trademark of CD Adapco Group LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds HP is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company IBM is a registered trademark of the IBM Corporation SUN and SOLARIS are a trademark and registered trademarks respectively of the Sun Microsystems Inc SUSE is a trademark of Novell Inc Intel is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices Inc Some other product names appearing in this book may also be trademarks or registered trademarks of their trademark holders Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved ii April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Preface New Features Since the publishing of this manual for version 2 1 in December of 2001 there have been numerous new releases of TrueGrid plus this major release Below is a list highlighting the most significant improvements to TrueGrid since that publication Many improvements have been made
208. and it is defined in Cartesian coordinates with center in the local origin The concentrated load is specified in the cylindrical coordinates with a 1 in the radial direction It means that the forces will point towards the axis of the symmetry of the cylinder Figure 329 The command file follows Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 340 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual on definition of the mesh pes TrueGrid display forces 1 000E 00 fcci 1 0 1 100 c concentrated load is assigned to nodes of C e c index progression E cipi c by null load curve 0 c with amplitude c and direction 1 0 0 merge co fc 0 c display concentrated load c for null load curve Figure 329 concentrated load fcs spherical concentrated nodal loads fes region load curve amplitude o 0 where region must be a vertex edge or face load curve isa load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor o 0 is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the direction of the displacement The angles are in degrees Remarks This is the same as fc except that the direction is in spherical coordinates Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 341 fesi spherical concentrated nodal loads fesi progression load curve amplitude p 0 where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitu
209. and k you provide another three lists describing the part s initial position in the local physical coordinates x y and z For example the full version of the above block example is block Ll 3 5 Y 1 4 9 A T 21 OOM 0 3 Q7 100 100 2 100 8 eb Sig In this example each node with an i index of 1 is assigned an x coordinate of 0 Each node with i 3 will have x 1 each node with i 5 will have x 0 3 and each node with 177 will have x 0 7 Similarly each node with j 1 will be assigned y 100 4 will have y 100 2 j 9 will have y 100 8 k 1 will have z 1 and k 21 will have z 3 1 This creates 6 rectangular blocks which fit neatly together to form a larger rectangular block Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 44 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual More generally as the first three lists give the 1 j and k indices for the mesh partitions the second three lists give the initial values of the x y and z coordinates for these partitions Just as each number in the first three lists specify planes which form the partitioning of the computational mesh so do the second three lists define planes which form the initial position of the partitions in the physical mesh The x list has exactly one real number for every integer in the i list the y list has exactly one real number for every integer in the j list and the z list has exactly one real number for every integer in the k list Every pa
210. ap slave corners 3 4 1 2 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 6 means map slave corners 3 2 1 4 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 7 means map slave corners 4 1 2 3 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 8 means map slave corners 4 3 2 1 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively This method of choosing the proper mapping has the advantage that you do not need to take additional steps to initialize the four corners of the slave side to insure the proper mapping 4 Number of nodes When an edge of the slave side is mapped to an edge of the master side the number of nodes on both edges must be related either an exact match or the appropriate ratio for the type of transition elements which are to be generated Suppose the master edge has m nodes and the slave has n nodes Then the numbers m and n must be equal m 1 must divide n 1 or n 1 must divide m 1 Otherwise there will be an error If the number of nodes in the master edge is greater than the number of nodes in the slave edge then nodes in the master side are skipped using a stride If the number of nodes in the slave edge is greater than the number of nodes in the master edge then additional nodes are interpolated between the master nodes so that each node on the slave side is placed directly onto the master side of the block boundary interface This is done independently in both directions along the interface Therefore it is possible for the master nodes to have a stride
211. are displayed TrueGrid Display 1D elements TrueGrid draw element local rst axis Figure 376 beam rebar inside brick mesh Figure 377 beam rebar inside brick mesh kbmi generate beams in the k direction by index progression kbmi progression t in it in j material orientation cross section option where 4 ini is the number of columns of beam elements in the i direction 4H inj is the number of columns of beam elements in the j direction material is the material number orientation is the option of orientation of the cross section axis i second axis orientation in the i direction j second axis orientation in the j direction sd surface_ second axis orientation in the normal to the surface v xn yn zn second axis orientation by the vector none cross section is the cross section definition number assigned with bsd option can be reverse the order of the nodes is the reverse of the default si sid_ Sliding Interface Number vold volume volume of Discrete Beam lump inertia lumped inertia Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 432 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual cablcid system_ cabarea area caboff offset csarea area sharea area inertia iss itt irr thickness roffl x soffl y toffl z roff2 x soff2 y toff2 z Idr1 Ids1 ldt1 Irr1 Irs1 Irti Idr2 Ids2 Idt2 Irr2 Irs2 Irt2 Idr3 Ids3 1dt3 Irr3 Irs3 Irt3 local coordinate system id number defined by the Isys cab
212. arks Evaluates a FORTRAN like expression and assigns the result to a temporary variable for each node in the specified region see the dom command 8 Edit Commands TrueGrid s Command Hierarchy requires that it keep track of all the meshing commands that you have issued for the present part This is done by means of a table of all of the commands issued You have access to and can modify this table of commands You can highlight a region by selecting a command from this table You can deactivate any of these commands or reactivate them You can select a region in the mesh and see only those commands related to the region You can recover the command dialogue box so that you can modify the command an re issue it These features are useful in debugging the mesh history show the history table Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 292 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual history no arguments active 2 dei progression 2 3 13 0 4 6 active 3 dei progression 2 3 16 13 0 active 6 dei progression 12 12 05 6 active 7 pb region 121226 active 8 pb region 151256 active 9 mb region 231236 active 10 mb region 241246 active 12 sf region 115166 deactivated 14 s region 2 15266 active 16 sf region 116566 4 Figure 294 History window with commands associated with part of the mesh Remarks The primary function of the histo
213. around a hole relaxi Equipotential relaxation relaxi progression iterations min change weight where iterations is the maximum number of iterations to use min change is an absolute error tolerance there will be no more iterations if in the last iteration no coordinate was moved by more than min change in any zone weight is an interpolation weight factor the value 1 0 usually works Remarks relaxi and relax are related the usual way that a command for progressions is related to a command for regions You could replace one relaxi command with a number of relax commands by breaking the progression into a number of regions and applying relax separately to each ofthe regions When several faces or volumes are specified in one index progression then each face or volume is relaxed independently of the others See the discussion of relax on the preceding pages Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 250 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual splint Interpolate edges along cubic splines splint region direction derivative_flag derivatives where direction can be i j or k derivative_flag can be 00 to use a natural derivative at each endpoint 10 to specify derivatives at the minimum index endpoint s 01 to specify derivatives at the maximum index endpoint s 11 to specify derivatives at all endpoints derivatives consist of as many 3D vectors as required either none 1 or 2 Remarks The splint com
214. arpage n n2 two nodes used to determine warpage in the beam geom option method of determining curvature where option can be 1 for center of curvature 2 for tangent of centroid arc 3 for bend radius 4 for arc angle Remarks See ibm above Example The block part is defined at first Default material number 1 for the part is set by the mate command The beam cross section is defined by the bsd command for the ANSYS code The orpt command sets orientation of normals out from the center of the cylinder The jbmi command is used for generation of beams in the i direction from the index progression 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 There are 4 rows of elements generated in the i direction The number of columns of elements in the k direction is 1 Figure 374 The orientation of the beam cross section axis is determined as parallel to the normal of the surface 1 cylinder The beams are labeled by the labels 1D command in the Merge Phase The local axes of beam elements are displayed by the co or rst command Figure 375 The command file follows block 1 3 5 I 3 5315 3 DTS 520 c structured block part is defined faces only bsd 1 ban4 area 05 ixx 003 iyy 100 izz 100 height 3 width 2 theta 0 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 427 c ansys elastic beam cross section is defined orpt 0 3 2 C orientation of normals is defined from the center c of the
215. ary condition rb region load_curve amplitude load_curve amplitude where load curve amplitude load curve amplitude Remarks a load curve number amplitude constant a load curve number amplitude constant First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation that is how to orient the outward normal vector If a load curve number is specified as zero then the condition is constant in time rbi prescribed radiation boundary condition by progression rbi progression load curve amplitude load curve amplitude where load curve a load curve number amplitude amplitude constant load curve a load curve number amplitude amplitude constant Remarks See the remarks on rb above vrb prescribed radiation boundary w functional amplitudes vrb region load curve amplitude load curve amplitude where load curve a load curve number amplitude amplitude expression load curve a load curve number amplitude amplitude expression Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 378 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z i j and k and valid parameters in the expressions See the remarks on rb above vrbi prescribed radiation boundary by progression w functional amplitudes vrbi progression load_curve amplitude load_curve amplitude where load curve a load curve number amplitude amplitu
216. ase Brew athe EVE Sable rit dva dens 339 DCS Sneak ee Poi ota ox ned Potes 341 A Meiach Ud bra da ais d 342 E gue ux tuu en a oe c fett rd 306 A do a t Mos 310 FdE sodes o Ceo RO Us AERIS 308 PG 24 ont pU aes 308 O Miah EP einen 307 M Sty e Ris ales Se NC 309 Je A nea 310 Els nato dto qd Pacto 310 A A A Br eS 153 DUAL eo ae aes 109 OPON daa 89 pick by projection 126 pick point esa rs 127 dit ca a a f 84 Fill button e pA aO AR 65 POSISCHIPL css Dose fuc doe efe dus 83 VN y AR ets A fi eod 87 x aep DE 92 95 EX cades i y d ea eee aT IS 9 El aged eda audes ea 371 OUD Gent oe S isi teed ee 205 E or Stute uites 372 OPTE Case ae sme Dp S hee 205 Floating point 00 175 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 484 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Blowiitt 44 4 cose tae lorie red 406 PIO WIS ete Sah ee cd a 407 Fluid flow boundary conditions 374 375 Flux boundary conditions 371 372 A E ote ita Ed 371 TIE ba de chek II nae n taar ai 372 Te pe aes eoo A E AM A 449 example ae a 449 EM aan 451 jeune D 109 OME ier cid due EMG 58 60 Dames Seu su Deve obi en 58 Force ost ias eet vut 332 Fortran equations Las ed edes es 287 Fortran interpreter 23 175 Frame 22 ot eo et E 88 o 10223 sia chet uu 112 113 Frame button 111 Frame of reference 439 DID gino neice A eee 311 IPED O AA 312
217. aser beam cosine calculate angle of incidence cg maximum pressure cl minimum pressure decay decay option where Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 332 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual option must be constant for no decay r for decay distance r2 for decay distance 2 r3 for decay distance 3 exp exp for decay distance ep linear y intercept for y_interceptt decay distance Remarks Use the pr or pri command to initiate a pressure face Use the fl fli efl or efli commands to initiate a flux boundary face Amplitudes for fl fli efl or efli commands are the absolute value of the calculated value The load curve or load case number is used to associate this command with the appropriate pressure flux faces The origin of the shock can be a point Figure 324 infinite line Figure 325 infinite plane Figure 326 or a laser beam Figure 327 The shock arrival time is based on the distance between the center of the pressure flux face and the source of the shock The starting time and shock speed should be specified The cosine option calculates the angle of incidence All pressure flux faces have their amplitudes modified when the cosine option is selected The angle between the normal ofthe pressure flux face and the vector from each node of the pressure flux face to the source is calculated Then the pressure amplitude at the node is scaled by the cosine of the angle This is
218. asy to determine the regions within the part that are associated with a command in the history window Select the command in question and click on the Do Undo_Highlight button Alternatively position the mouse near the region or index progression of a command and click the middle mouse button the right mouse button for a two button mouse Instantly the index bars in the computational graphics window are changed to reflect the regions chosen for the command selected from the history window The corresponding regions in both the computational and physical graphics window are highlighted This region selection can then be modified and captured into either a dialogue box or in the text window The dialogue box that was used to issue a command can be recovered using the history window Click on the Dialog button Alternatively position the mouse near the command name and click the middle mouse button the right mouse button for a two button mouse The dialogue box will appear This can be repeated without quitting the previous dialogue box The active and deactivated commands are identified in the history window To deactivate a command in the history window click on the Act Deactivate button Alternatively move the mouse to the word active associated with the command which is to be deactivated and click the middle button right button for a two button mouse The deemd command to deactivate this command is automatically issued and recorded in the sessio
219. at is not curved too much you can avoid ambiguity by choosing another point A highly curved surface should be broken into several less curved surfaces Orientation Point Orientation Point El 2 Figure 205 orpt 909 Figure 206 orpt 9009 The shell element normals red arrows in 205 and 206 were created by the use of orpt 9 0 9 and orpt 9 0 9 respectively Here 9 0 9 are the coordinates of the orientation point Use the condition command to display these normal vectors condition n Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 206 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual update save the mesh s present state as the initial mesh update no arguments Remarks Each time update is issued within the generation of a block part the present state of the mesh is stored Any subsequent commands for this part are then applied to the stored mesh The stored mesh acts as the initial mesh The temporary variables t1 t2 and t3 are initialized to zero each time this command is issued This command is almost never needed and interferes with the Command Hierarchy Its usage is strongly discouraged and should only be used by experts It was implemented to permit successive projections When a new part is initialized it is as if the update command were issued In this case the initial mesh is the simple block mesh with the coordinates assigned by the block command Each time additional geometry or topology commands ar
220. ate the amplitude in normal direction of the faces TrueGrid display pressure 1 at 1 000E 04 source point x0 y0 z0 led 100 1 1 c load curve 1 definition pr4114661 10000 C pressure is assigned c to region 4 11 4 6 6 c by load curve Figure 324 Point Source Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 334 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual c and amplitude 10000 arri 1 velo 1000 toff 0 point 15 13 13 cosine decay 1 r3 shock arrival for load curve 1 with velocity 1000 and time offset 0 from point source with coord 15 13 13 angle of incidence option cosine is used shock amplitude is decaying with cube of distance c from shock source merge co pr 1 c display pressure for load curve 1 TOSARA Example The mesh is defined by a structured block Figure 325 The load curve 1 is determined by points O O 1 1 Pressure with amplitude 30000 is assigned to the region 4 1 1 4 6 6 A line source of shock is defined by coordinates 15 13 13 and 1 1 1 The velocity of the shock is 500 and time offset is 0 The amplitude of the shock decays with square of the distance r from the shock source The decay constant is 1 The angle of incidence option is used to calculate the amplitude in normal direction of the faces lcd 1001 Ls TrueGrid display pressure 1 at 1 000E 04 c load curve 1 definition xn yn zn pr 4 1 1 4 6 6 1 30000 source line c pressure
221. ate transformation It can be difficult to think of a complex transformation in three dimensions You can simplify this by thinking of the object already in the global coordinate system Then build the transformation one operation at a time until you have moved rotated and scaled it to the proper position and size You can use combinations of these transformations in many ways local coordinate transformations Ict global coordinate transformations get level transformations lev surface definitions sd 3D curve definitions curd IGES data iges igessd igespd nurbsd igescd local constraints Isys initial part transformations tr and block boundary interfaces bb trbb In all but the first three cases you use only one transformation thus you do not need the repe save and last operators The way the local Irep global grep and level pslv pplv replication commands are used is that you Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 44 begin by defining local Ict global get and level levet transformations respectively and then invoke them to replicate parts The simplest way to apply transformations and replications is locally let If the local commands solve your problem easily there is no need to learn how to use the others To define local coordinate transformations use the let command Then you may use the Irep command to specify replications of
222. ation numbers in the menus and dialogue boxes Displacements Velocities and Accelerations refer to the local coordinate system of a part so the directions and amplitudes of displacements velocities and accelerations do not change by replication of a part fd fixed displacement fd region load curve amplitude options f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where s f f is a vector in Cartesian coordinates giving the direction of the load Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 306 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks At each node in the region the displacement will have a direction given by the direction vector fx Jy 2 fdi fixed displacement by index progression fdi progression load curve amplitude options f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where oes is a vector in Cartesian coordinates giving the direction of the load Remarks This is the same as fd except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression Example TrueGrid display di
223. ations Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 353 cfc convective flow CF3D output boundary conditions cfc region id type parameters where the type and parameters can be fv vx vy vz for fixed velocity ft temperature for fixed temperature fsp species t amplitude for fixed species ol pressure for an outlet il vx vy vz for an inlet wall for a wall with 0 velocity ufl amplitude for u flux vfl amplitude for v flux wfl amplitude for w flux tfl temperature for temperature flux spf species _ amplitude for species flux cb for obstruction Remarks This command selects a region to apply any of the conditions associated with the CF3D command There is also a merge phase version of this command to be used with an arbitrary set of faces All conditions are applied to faces of linear brick elements Example cfc 11132 1 bndry 1 wall This example has a k face ofthe part across 2 regions in the i direction and across one region in the j direction and assigned the wall condition These faces are associated with bndry 1 cfci CF3D output boundary conditions by progression cfci progression id type parameters where the type and parameters can be fv vx vy vz for fixed velocity ft temperature for fixed temperature fsp species t amplitude for fixed species Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 354 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual ol pressure for an outlet il vx vy vz for
224. ayed Figure 59 is created by from Figure 58 by the Move option See also l r u d dpic rpic commands bracket with hole bracket with hol TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 59 Translated Picture Figure 60 Zoomed Picture Zooming the Picture To Zoom forward or backward press the Zoom button with the Left Mouse Button Then perform a click and drag operation using the Middle Mouse Button in the window containing the picture you wish to scale As the mouse is moved upward a new skeleton picture is drawn that is larger than the previous As the mouse is moved downward a skeleton picture is drawn that is smaller than the previous Release the mouse button to end the click and drag operation and to see the new picture If the mouse is moved the entire height of the picture the picture will be scaled by a factor of 10 Figure 60 is created from Figure 59 by the Zoom option zoom out which is down See also zb zf dpic rpic commands Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 114 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Labels Panel Labeling Objects Pick Move Pts Display List PASA Most objects such as parts surfaces 3D curves Beams Part Surface block boundaries surfaces edges surface points Sp ES Surf Edge curve points nodes linear bricks beams linear Q Shells Surf Poin
225. b_friction_scale viscous_friction_scale where the first pair of parameters must be specified in order to specify the second pair of parameters If the type is m then options can be fsf Coulomb_friction_scale viscous_friction_scale Example Figure 363 and Figure 364 were created by the use of the following command file Some normals TrueGrid display master slide surface 1 TrueGrid display slave slide surface 1 gt N NU j 7 SX PES AN LED SOS SS 2 AR OM TS pall num SL NES ES Cena Key LJ Lj Y v SES Z X y Figure 363 master side of interface Figure 364 slave side of interface Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 409 are displayed as circular arcs with arrows This is caused by the normals pointing almost orthogonally from the screen There is an angle parameter in the co command setting the range of such behavior You can modify it or totally disable it c Sliding Interface gt master side c Part definition gt shells block 1 3 5 7 9 1 1 3579 02468 9 02 4 6 8 c Definition of orientation point in Cartesian coord x y and z orpt 9 0 9 c Definition of the type of the sliding interface sid 1 sv C Assignment of region 1 and type 1 m of slid interf sii 1 1m c Definition of 3 global transformations around y axis get 3 ry 90 ry 180 ry 270 c for 90 180 and 270 degrees
226. ber of iterative smoothing steps that are applied It is possible to over constrain the mesh by applying different nodal distributions along two multiple edges that intersect Nodal distribution along edges are done sequentially not as a system of constraints that require a simultaneous solution As a consequence only one of the intersecting multiple edges will satisfy its nodal distribution constraint When poorly initialized meshes are projected across multiple regions with the added constraint imposed by nodal distributions if there is an angle along the initial composite edge smaller than 5 degrees then that part of the edge is ignored when the nodes are distributed along the edge It is assumed that in this case the initial shape should not be preserved Otherwise the initial shape of the composite edge was preserved Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 282 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual res relative spacing of nodes of an edge res region direction ratio where direction is one of i j or k and ratio is a positive number Remarks This command spaces the nodes of an edge of the mesh so that the ratios of the distances between them will be a constant The importance of res arises from the fact that all interpolation projection and relaxation methods depend on the nodes at the boundary of the region they affect By default edge nodes to are equally spaced That is equivalent to i
227. bing the computational space with two sets of indices at once full indices and reduced indices The indices are the coordinates in computational space and change if you refine the mesh without otherwise changing the shape The block cylinder and blude commands create a three dimension multi block structured rectangular mesh The numbering of the nodes in each direction is independent starting with 1 This produces a three dimensional array of nodes Each node in uniquely identified by the three indices i j and k For example block 1 5 1 6 1 7 creates a simple block mesh of 5 by 6 by 7 nodes in the i j and k directions respectively The semicolon terminates the i j and k index lists The block cylinder and blude commands are generalized so that a single part can have any number of connected blocks These parts usually contains more blocks than are needed for a particular problem This is because it is usually easier to define an array of blocks and delete some of them then it is to define each required block separately For example block 1 5 9 1 0 1 7 has 2 blocks in the i direction each with 4 elements between the nodes The block cylinder and blude commands are some of only a few commands that refers to the actual nodes in the mesh Once one of these commands creates a multi block part the subsequent commands refer to regions in the mesh by using the sequence number in the i j or k list of one of these commands These sequ
228. bout arbitrary axis cp line_ transform for a planar curve extended in the third dimension then transformed Remarks The most common way to use this command is with the sd option This requires that the surface first be defined with the sd command or imported from a CAD system using the iges command This command projects a portion of the mesh onto a surface This is the primary method for deforming the block mesh into the desired shape Typically the surface is defined with the sd command first This way it can be drawn in the picture Then the sd option of the sf command is used to project a face of the mesh to the surface The other options in the sf command are available in order to retain compatibility with INGRID As with all mesh generation commands they are entered into the table of commands to be executed to form the mesh However to actually see the results you must request a new picture This is an optimization feature that allows you to stack numerous commands before getting a picture of the mesh If you use more than one sf command to specify that one region be projected to more than one Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 273 surface then the multiple surfaces are interpreted in the and sense that you want the region to be projected to the intersection of all the surfaces But if you specify more than one surface with a single sf command as wi
229. bset of Quadratic Shell elements of an element set will be modified Subset of Linear Brick elements of an element set will be modified Subset of Quadratic Brick elements of an set will be modified Create a polygon set from polygon type surfaces These sets can be turned into new polygon surfaces Add selected items to the Active Set Remove selected items from the Active Set Change the status of the selected items The selected items belonging to the Active Set are removed from the Active Set The selected items not belonging to the Active Set are added do not clear the set selection before you close the set window then the next time you activate the set window the same objects will be in the set buffer so that you can continue your set operations from where Clear you left off Nodes Required to Select 1 Faces beams shells or bricks with one node belonging to the selected area are selected Faces beams shells or bricks with two nodes belonging to the selected area are selected Faces shells or bricks with three nodes belonging to the selected area are selected Faces shells or bricks with four nodes Clear the last selection If you Open Set Save As Set Editing Options Remove Toggle Selection Options Nodes Faces Beams Nodes Required to Select Shells Q Shells l
230. bsolute value mod al a2 al modulo a2 sign al a2 sign of a2 to the absolute value of al max al an choose the maximum from a list min al an choose the minimum from a list sqrt a square root exp a e to the power ofa log a natural logrithm log10 a logrithm base 10 sin a trigometric sine where a is in degrees cos a trigometric cosine where a is in degrees tan a trigometric tangent where a is in degrees asin a trigometric arc sine in degrees acos a trigometric arc cosine in degrees atan a trigometric arc tangent in degrees Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 289 atan2 al al trigometric arc tangent in degrees with both coordinates sinh a hyperbolic sine where a is in degrees cosh a hyperbolic cosine where a is in degrees tanh a hyperbolic tangent where a is in degrees Two additional random number functions are available Each has several optional arguments They are norm seed mean sig normal distribution rand seed mean uniform distribution with a range of 1 0 The seed initializes the random number generator once for each equation It defaults to 0 0 which has a different meaning on different systems The mean can also be set or it defaults to 0 0 The standard deviation defaults to 1 0 All calculations are done in floating point The angular arguments or values of the function
231. button oils esse e 76 multiple arcaicos 23 on command syntax 76 telephone number 23 29 Help window uu eec Immer 73 76 quitting out of 76 Hexahedral 24a ues 2t fur ms 20 Hexahedron element 20 37 quality mesh 272 EP 5 aot eI So ect pnm et 374 EDITI pita A CR PRIORES 375 Hidden line drawing resolution ds 95 Hidden line removal POOL binds 29 ede etd a anew ed 82 Hidden surface remove 108 Hide d osa quA UI epee ante es 153 button 95 109 ODUOIT zs e EE LER E Ness 89 pick by projection 126 PICK point 4 55044 ica 127 Hide button Au duode ee d eom Nd 65 CISD 264 nd ex Madea duree ums 80 Hierarchy command A 292 Highlighting A os d teer EES 22 36 Edge Face or Block 130 A 292 294 of object by label 124 of object by lasso 124 of regions in computational window Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 486 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Y 96 the nearest vertex 127 HISTO a ex A 177 293 Acted o diae aes o ded 297 and update vs tota ez 207 button 171 293 command 22 23 105 293 debug mesh s ebrio 127 DET d essere P 297 dialogue box 172 Hle ars Ghia dea erroe ans 59 TEO r n eae ee Leche 127 Table 3292 fee 171 273 window 72 105 172 History window
232. c All Rights Reserved 394 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual b1115511 master block boundary definition bb 1122221 slave block boundary 1 definition bb 1 1 122 1 1 mz 5 slave block boundary 2 definition translated in the z direction The normal operator will offset each node of the slave side in the normal direction from the Master boundary master side The simplified command file bb 1 1 15511 master block boundary definition bb 1 1 12 2 1 1 normal 1 2 mz 6 slave block boundary definition normal operator and translated in the z direction A part can be created simply to define a block boundary master interface The elements of a part will be not be added to the data base elements will be ignored if the material number for those elements is set to zero use mate mt or mti Figure 348 normal operator trbb slave transition block boundary interface trbb region interface options transform where interface is the interface number and where an option can be map m specifying the mapping between master and slave sw switch the directional interior topology from the default alt alternate the transition topology for symmetry where transform is a product from left to right of the following mx x_offset my y offset Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 395 mz z_offset v x offset y offset z offset rx theta ry
233. c All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 207 projection are used as the initial mesh to be projected onto the second surface 2 Initial Positioning of Vertices The commands in this section all assign coordinates to vertices These commands are automatically executed before all interpolation and projection commands These commands have one main purpose to position the vertices of the mesh prior to the projection to surfaces If no projections are used these commands serve only one purpose which is to set the boundary conditions for the interpolation In some cases these initialization commands are sufficient to produce the desired mesh Whatever the order in which commands are issued for a part they will be sorted according to the Command Hierarchy This order of execution is 1 Initialize There are three types of initialization i block and cylinder commands can contain initial coordinates of the vertices ii Slave side of bb and trbb initializes and freezes block interface nodes 111 pb mb pbs q tr and ilin commands initialize vertices 2 Apply specified interpolation of edges along 3D curves cur curf curs cure edge splint patch Project vertices to specified surfaces sf ms ssf spp Apply specified edge linear interpolations lin Apply default edge linear interpolations Project edges to specified surfaces sf ms ssf spp patch Apply specified bi linear interpolations of faces lin
234. ceabcd or slice off where the arguments define a slicing plane with global coordinates x y and z such that a x b y c z d 0 Remarks The slicing plane is transformed zoomed panned and rotated along with the geometry This slice only works in the merge phase with the fill graphics activated It does not yet work for hardware graphics OpenGL The SLICE button in the graphics menu activates a dialogue box and an intuitive interface for the use of this function One can choose to form a slicing plane from either a point and normal or by three points This is done by selecting points from the picture Then the slicing plane can be shown When the slice function is selected the slicing plane is removed from the picture triad turn triad on or off triad off or triad on Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 86 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks This removes the coordinate system triad from the picture The coordinate system triad is three little arrows representing the x y and z axes of the global coordinate system It appears in the lower right corner of the picture When you rotate the picture e g with the rx command you rotate it with respect to the x y or z axes of the picture s coordinate system The picture s coordinate system is fixed with respect to the screen and hence with respect to you Thus rotating the picture will rotate the global coordinates with respect to you
235. ces or edges in the case of shells of the master and slave side of the transition block boundary interface is explained below in the remarks for one way transitions and two way transitions Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 398 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks One Way Transitions This command forms a transition region to make a face of one part fit the face of another part The master side of the transition block boundary is formed using the bb command The number of elements on the master and slave side must be related If the part is formed of hexahedral elements then the transition will also be of all hexahedral elements There are two types of transitions In the first type known as a one way transition in one direction of the interface the number of elements must match In the other direction one side must have 2 or 3 times the number of elements as the opposite side of the interface Where the ratio is 2 both sides of the interface must have an even number of elements in their respective directions A better way to say this is to say that the ratio must be 4 2 Example One Way Transition TrueGrid display block 3 5e 4 921 lt 3 Sei 3 5 7 95 3 5 7 91 3 S71 3 5 7 9 C dense part Part 1 bb 1 1 1 51513 c Master side definition block 3 5 T OL SSL 3 5s SS T 95 52 171 95 C sparse part Part 2 trbb 81 amp 3 3 1s c Slave side 1 definit
236. cks meeting at one vertex where a concave interior boundary center element edge length 0 018319121 Figure 246 Relax smoothing unifm 111228 amp 211222 amp i Lu 2 230p 2 xw L2 Lh22 amp 111221 amp 112222 200 0001 1 Uniform smoothing is better than relax at these vertices center element edge length 0 029181886 esm 1 1 1 12 Figure 247 Uniform smoothing 26 2114 2 2 2 11121 261212226 1112214112222 200 0001 1 2 6 When the optimal values for the two control parameters are chosen the elliptic smoothing can produce the ideal mesh near these triple points in the mesh center element edge length 0 044212352 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 237 esmp Add source terms for elliptic smoothing esmp region flag type parameter s where flag can be first node as the source of attraction last node as the source of attraction where type and parameter s can be 0 1 1 amplitude 2 amplitude 3 amplitude 4 amplitude decay linear function amplitude 1 p cubic function amplitude 2 p 3 3 p 2 1 cosine function amplitude cosine p T 1 exponential function amplitude exp decay p where p is the relative distance from the point source Remarks Any edge in the region of elliptic smoothing esm command can be assigne
237. close means close enough that the projection algorithm converges There is a wide variety of mesh initialization functions and the appropriate initialization function is automatically selected by the Attach button The Attach button only functions when a region has been selected Index progressions are not allowed with this button The attach procedure takes three steps 1 select the region to be attached 2 select the object to be attached to 3 click on the attach button You may also need to make a coordinate selection in the Pick panel by activating or deactivating some of the coordinates before you click on the attach button You can attach a portion of the mesh to several types of geometric objects Clicking the Attach button will print a command to the text window and the session file tsave which performs the appropriate function such as the pb pbs curs edge patch cur cure curf and bb commands The command that is printed depends on the type of mesh object and the type of geometric objects The mesh object can be a vertex edge face or block any region In this context the geometric object can be a point a 3D curve a surface edge a surface a node of the mesh or a block boundary interface HELILE VU T NEC LIT Uy SSS E A Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 157 The order of attachments is impor
238. command The most important use of History is in debugging a part The History button does not produce a command in the text window or the session file tsave However functions within the History Window may produce the decmd and actemd commands in the session file tsave See the section on the History Window for more information The Resume Command Resume Figure 158 Resume Button When an interrupt is encountered in a batch file that TrueGrid is processing this button will become active Otherwise it will be inactive and grayed out This is designed to let you add commands interactively before resuming the execution of commands in the batch command file Pressing the Resume button causes TrueGrid to execute all commands between the current interrupt command in the batch file and the next interrupt command in the batch file or the end of the input file If you are having a problem with the mesh you can interrupt at different stages to test the mesh If you have an old batch file that you do not understand placing interrupts in the file will help you understand how the mesh is being constructed You can also use this feature to modify an existing mesh You can also use the mechanism to build demonstration models Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 171 8 Dialogue Boxes When you click on a command with the left mouse button in the me
239. ct as the single block k command ml Figure 204 after mseq Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 204 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual block carom ar 3 1 8 10 14 205 3o d ede SbF eon x95 orpt set shell element normal orientation orpt xyz to direct the positive normal direction towards a point Or orpt xyz to direct the positive normal direction away from a point Or orpt off to use the default choice of positive normal directions Or orpt flip to use the inverse of the default choice of positive normal directions where x isthe first Cartesian coordinate of the orientation point y isthe second Cartesian coordinate of the orientation point and Z is the third Cartesian coordinate of the orientation point Remarks The orpt command must be used prior to any command which depends on the orientation of surface or shell normals Subsequent use of orpt will not influence previously issued commands This command determines the positive direction of normals to any shell elements Some commands treat the two sides of an object differently For example pressure is positive when applied to one side of a face and negative when applied to the opposite side You can specify that the positive direction be towards a point or away from a point You can turn off prior orientation and revert back to the default algorithm You can also require that the inverse of the default be used
240. ction Also check the table of sliding interfaces in the merge phase after merging Make sure you agree with the stats 4 A dummy sliding interface is needed to avoid the merging of the i beams along the edges of the j faces with the merging edges from the k faces 5 Additional dummy sliding interfaces will be needed to avoid merging of beam nodes Without special care beam nodes will be merged as shown in 379 The interactive selection of nodes for a node set is very useful here It is not however parametric If you change the mesh size these sets must be selected again Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 434 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual c Set mrgrb to 0 if c Set mrgrb to 1 if c merged to para mrgrb 1 the rebar nodes should be merged together the vertical i beams should not be the beams forming circles c Pillar material dynamats 1 c Rebar dynamats dynamats dynamats sid sid sid sid 1 sid 1 sid 1 sid 1 sid sid sid sid sid sid sid sid sid sid sid material rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar rho 2300 e 6 205610 pr 0 2 3 rho 7850 beam elfom bs e 2 3 3 rho 7850 beam elfom bs e 2 4 3 rho 7850 beam elfom bs e 2 c 52 seperate strings of beams forming 21 numbe
241. ction of this edge to a single surface will be done in a special way to preserve the shape of the 3D curve as much as is possible To appreciate this feature one needs to be familiar with the way an edge is normally projected onto a surface with moderate curvature First the end nodes are projected to the surface Then a plane is constructed passing through the two end nodes and approximately orthogonal to the surface The edge nodes are then placed along the intersection of the surface and the plane to satisfy the appropriate relative spacing rule When an edge is initialized along a 3D curve the intersecting plane is not used The edge nodes are simply projected to the surface and carefully adjusted to satisfy the appropriate relative spacing rule Example block 1 6 11 1 3 1 5 12 0 5 0 curd 1 csp3 00 5 75 01 25 55 0 2 05 75 0 cur 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 iun MEN ul Part amp Curve before attachment Cur attachment curf distribute and freeze nodes along a 3D curve curf region curve where curve is the number of a 3D curve Remarks This command behaves as the cur command does except that the positions of the edge s nodes are frozen Projections interpolations and relaxations will not effect those nodes that are placed on curves using this command Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 229 cure distribute nodes along an entire 3D c
242. ctured meshes see the block and cylinder commands Each block is composed of solid hexahedral six sided elements and or structural quadrilateral shell and beam elements see the bm ibm jbm and kbm commands arranged in rows columns and layers In degenerate cases the solid elements are wedges or tetrahedrons as the case may be Shells can degenerate to triangles where the geometry requires Typically one creates a mesh using the block or cylinder part several times and with the requirement that these parts are connected This is easily done using the block boundary interface commands bb and trbb which will glue one block or cylinder to another These commands can also be used to form one mesh from two independently generated meshes TrueGrid can generate meshes that match your geometry using various surfaces and curves such as those defined by you from an extensive built in library see the sd and curd commands These surfaces and curves can be derived from experimental see the vpsd command and the Ip3 option of the curd command or computational data see the mesh face and faceset options of the sd command from CAD CAM programs via IGES files see the iges command or form drawings using algebraic forms most options of the sd curd and Id commands You can also combine surfaces see the sds option of the sd command and curves see the coedge or the sdedge option of the curd command The projection method will place the block struct
243. d rat 1 0 3 14159 7 54 0 Note that a semicolon must end the final parameter definition in any para command You can change the definition of a parameter and you may even include it in its own redefinition For example the following will first define cdat to be 0 05 and then redefine cdat to be 0 10 para cdat 0 05 para cdat 2 cd You are limited to 10000 parameter A parameter can have up to 16 significant characters Editing and Syntax Checking The data you enter into a dialogue box is checked for correctness You will not be allowed to enter more data than what is required If you type an opening square bracket only a valid Fortran like expression ending with a closing square bracket will be allowed If you signal that you have finished a line by typing the Enter key before you have entered a valid string the color of the cursor is changed to blue The cursor remains solid to indicate that more data is needed One of the easier ways to use a dialogue box is to first choose all the options you want if any for the command that you have selected and then to begin entering data After you are finished entering the data for one line type the Enter key The solid green cursor will automatically move to the next position where data must be entered In this way you can enter all your data without moving your hands from the keyboard If you want to change a string that you have already entered into the
244. d window and kill TrueGrid with Ctrl c CAD IGES Geometry Many users wish to use CAD Computer Aided Design geometry from ProE CATIA or SolidWorks to name a few This can be done through the IGES Initial Graphics Exchange System standard file format There are usually several forms of geometry that can be exported by these CAD systems Be sure to choose trimmed surfaces for use in TrueGrid The iges command is used to read in the IGES file Check either its on line or written documentation for the syntax and a list of the geometrical features which it supports There is also an example in the Examples Manual which demonstrates meshing IGES geometry Alternatively you can generate geometry within TrueGrid However TrueGrid does not match the feature rich geometric capabilities found in some of the large CAD systems mentioned above On the other hand CAD systems usually generate many surfaces that are far from ideal for meshing purposes These surfaces tend to have small gaps between them or overlap each other These problems are easily handled in TrueGrid The sd command with the easy to use sds option combines many surfaces into one without changing any shapes The projection method automatically handles gaps and overlaps There is no need to heal or fix the CAD geometry for TrueGrid use When building a mesh there is no distinction between CAD geometry and geometry created within TrueGrid Miscellaneous There is no limit
245. d Manual April 6 2006 57 appear in that window Use a Command Prompt window when running TrueGrid in nogui mode in WINDOWS on a PC There are two ways to enter commands into TrueGrid for execution interactive and batch The easiest thing to do is to enter commands interactively clicking on buttons or typing commands by not selecting a command input file If TrueGrid commands in a text file are to be executed then use batch input by including the option i cmd_fon the execute line where cmd fis the name of the text file This batch file can be also executed in TrueGrid by issuing the include command either from another batch file or interactively Alternatively when running in WINDOWS on a PC a folder of files will be displayed when TrueGrid is run Use the browser if the file you wish to run is not found in the default folder Click on the desired file and click on open Click on cancel if there is no command input file Run the utility TGControls to choose the default folder A single session with TrueGrid can be a combination of batch and interactive input The interrupt and resume commands can be used to switch TrueGrid between batch and interactive input To accomplish this insert interrupt commands into the command file before starting TrueGrid at the points where you want to switch from batch to interactive mode Then start this batch and interactive session with TrueGrid by selecting the command input file for execut
246. d any point selected in the picture will be added to the table The placement of this new point will be after the focal point in the picture indicated with a small white square in the picture which is also indicated with the green curser in the table If it is not checked than any selected point in the picture will replace the focal point The Insert button will create a new row in the table in which to enter the coordinates of your selection You can select a point from the picture either 180 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual before or after you click on this button You must click on Accept to have the coordinates entered into the table at this location This insertion will be made after the focal point in the table indicated with a small white square in the picture which is also indicated by the green curser in the table You can also choose the focal point and insertion by editing the sequence number into the field next to the word after and then typing the Enter key The new inserted point becomes the new focal point The insertion also causes the Insert Mode to be checked after The field next to this word is constantly maintaining the sequence number of the focal point in the table The focal point is the point enclosed by a small white square in the picture It is also indicated by a green curser in the table When a point is inserted it is after the
247. d 3D solid and to specify a character string name no blanks up to 30 characters These regions include both 2D and 3D regions Any 2D region should be the outer boundary of a part or of a region specified using the supblk command Otherwise an error will result within CFX There are no restrictions for 3D regions If you assign the same name to different regions or to a region that is broken across blocks then these regions are assembled into one group of regions for CFX iss save interface segments iss region issi save interface segments issi progression Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 407 si assign sliding interface to region si region sliding_ type options where sliding_ reference number for the interface type m for master and s for slave options this depends on the type If the type is s then the options can be normal_failure_stress_or_force shear_failure_stress_or_force exponent for normal force exponent for shear force fsf Coulomb friction scale viscous friction scale where the first pair of parameters must be specified in order to specify the second pair of parameters If the type is m then options can be fsf Coulomb friction scale viscous friction scale Remarks The fsf option is for LS DYNA The other options are for both LLNL DYNA3D and LS DYNA This command and its relative sii specify that faces in th
248. d Facts ed 56 Regions T eres xdi evo 46 A ek anoo dora 372 O r oa EEA 372 VID ais aaa AR 373 Vf ern e PETER IE 374 MIS Hie ons Satan ebook Aw eae MER 383 NGI A tag eg tua entes dmt 383 VE sorea taa iea Parca eal 384 View A A Wane EAE E 295 MOTUITIe ee eot ote n 33 437 MDSG s Shen aa d edet ce NA e e 37 142 V LO 24 eot reg eae ETE ed 20 WI podido Melee ee un EQ Ore ped s 378 VTOL Rae meruit itu caue dedu eu 379 VRE iei E aep Meus epa duae henna 382 AUFS Ad Ste ep Se ek c ee MH SD 382 A vob nr cs ACE E aa 383 Warning DD sq e RD o ead 391 EDD S e ea cede S rte ede m s 397 MLaIDIBE avis has Shoe cote A 437 We Silo A on ete than ey aedes enar Cur 24 Wedge sarne tden aet sauna Debe 20 element AA 164 Wedge clement oy yt Ra 20 Window 2D CULVES han day a hae s 72 and keystrokes 173 computational 72 96 dialoBUue vs couette 73 environment 72 108 Deli eee eID Ca eod ries 73 Til SLODy 44 a reap a ia aside aus e ae 72 MSDOS riecht dee 71 physical dead 72 redraw setting 111 iext menu ooo exu tw a Re 72 WINDOWS 21 24 26 57 71 WINDOWS Registry 72 Wire DUELO deena RN 108 109 OPON cose PR paure med lcd s 89 pick by projection 126 Wire button dp TE T 80 POOL 2 3 abu matur Cu cta loko 82 Working Directory 71 MEME aes e A a c eue 59 example ots cei qum ac i ots 67 WISE Scr hb orm otc e be RA 155 WWW Rte ed er
249. d da nes 84 sdint toggle display of surface interior ooooooooooooooo mo 84 set define various graphic options o oooooooooooommo ooo 85 slice slice through the picture 03d a dt aa 86 triad turn tiad on E Off A eb e abc e d dedo 86 tvv color and shaded display 0 00 00 cece cece eens 87 zclip remove front portion from physical picture 87 dy Picture COM OIG i ses A ee Mate tbt ud eae o Pe mta 88 l MOVE picture left sasu id rr hood Petia dent a4 aaa hod 89 r move picture right eus dx a EA RU oad CRW a 89 u Move picture UD A Bo ea 90 d MOVE pICtUIG dOWITL AA C C Ced Per A 90 rx rotate about the x aXIS iov RARAS A ORE 9 ry rotate about the v axis paa i o ERR aca a nh Fr e d n 9 rz rotate about the z A SLA ae e gh hase eae 91 trans translate to new center of rotation 0 000000 e ee 92 fix freeze center OF rotation 1 d ame bobo doa d esee ES 92 unfix return center of rotation to picture o oooooooooooo o 92 scale scale all coordinates A GR qe CR UA RS 92 xscl Bele X COOTGINGICS 2s oo Says ee hee ebat ae e bed 93 yscl Scale y cootdi ate 2 33 55 aed Hcr Ned re eR DRE EY EUER RS 93 zscl Scale P COOKCINALG os es e ick ag CRI E TROU BS Cae RS 93 zb Zoom Dakota 94 zf ZOOUY forward Lu means Su ete Nd ree t uod wet tin eA 94 angle perspective ANGE eie pesce eei Ad uch sana Pe ue tl ad 94 reso change display resolution 000 cece eee eee ee 95 restore return to original or
250. d from a node which is created separate from the mesh assigned a mass and then later attached to the mesh by a beam or spring This latter type of point mass is created using the npm command above The pm point mass is replicated along with the present part see Irep grep and pslv In order to assign a point mass to any node in the mesh such that it does not get replicated or transformed along with the present part use the pm command in the Merge Phase In order to create a new node and assign it a point mass such that it does not get replicated or transformed along with the present part then use the npm command in the Merge Phase spdp assigns a face to be half of a set of spring damper pairs spdp region spring damper_ M scale_factor options or spdp region spring damper_ S options where spring damper_ is the user defined set number MorS indicates Master or Slave scale_factor is a scaling factor for the set options can be dx to constrain spring in the x direction Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 386 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual dy to constrain spring in the y direction dz to constrain spring in the z direction rx to constrain spring about the x axis ry to constrain spring about the y axis rz to constrain spring about the z axis orop flag orientation option where flag can be 0 for spring damper acts along the axis 1 for deflection rotations are measured and
251. d into the table of commands for mesh commands executed immediately for database commands or executed and the picture redrawn for graphics commands The Exec button will be colored red until you move the mouse and the dialogue box will remain visible That way you can easily reuse or modify the data you entered and execute again If you want to execute the command in the dialogue box and then immediately destroy the dialogue box then left click on the Exec Quit button or type Control Z with the mouse in the dialogue box To quickly see the results of executing a mesh command a 3D curve definition or a surface definition from a dialogue box click the Middle Mouse Button on the Exec or Exec Quit button If you try to execute a dialogue box before entering all the data it needs it will not be executed The first incomplete line willed scrolled to the top and the prompt will be turned to blue At any time you can simply destroy the dialogue box All data in it is thrown away To do this left click your mouse on the Quit button and confirm by clicking on yes Notice that the cursor is automatically repositioned on the screen for you You may have to learn to move your mouse hand more slowly Alternatively type Control Q to quit without confirmation Quick Reference to Keyboard Functions These keyboard functions are explained in detail in other sections of this manual Some of them apply only when you have selected a dialogue box
252. d is used for input to DYNA3D LS DYNA and NIKE3D Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 381 tm initial temperature condition tm region temperature where temperature temperature constant tmi initial temperature condition by index progression tmi progression temperature where temperature temperature constant vtm initial temperature w functional temp vtm region temperature where temperature temperature expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z i j and k and valid parameters in the expressions vtmi initial temperature by index progression w functional temp vtmi progression temperature where temperature temperature expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 382 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual vhg volumetric heat generation vhg region load_curve_ amplitude where load_curve_ a load curve number amplitude amplitude constant vhgi volumetric heat generation by index progression vhgi progression load_curve_ amplitude where load_curve_ a load curve number amplitude amplitude constant vvhg volumetric heat generation w functional amplitude vvhg region load_curve_ amplitude where load_curve_ a lo
253. d slide the mouse up and down This causes the wire frame to be scaled When the mouse button is released the full picture is redrawn depending on the type of graphics selected Wire Hide or Fill Frame is a combination of Zoom and Move Select a new view of part of the picture by depressing the middle or left mouse button at one corner of the region and dragging the mouse to the opposite comer of the region A rubber band frame will be draw as this is done This will become the new region for the next automatic redraw of the picture once the middle mouse button is released To avoid the redraw move the mouse completely out of the picture before releasing the mouse button When the mouse button is released the selected portion of the picture is redrawn depending on the type of graphics selected Wire Hide or Fill l move picture left l distance where distance is in window units 1 0 means the full width of the window Remarks Move the picture to the left where 1 unit is the size of the screen A translation like this causes the center of rotation to be recalculated at the center of the screen and in the center of the z coordinate range of the object in the center of the picture unless the picture frame of reference was fixed Except for the calculation of the center of rotation this command is reversible by using a negative translation or the command r with the same translation r move picture right r distance where distance is
254. d sources A smoothly interpolated source will be superimposed on the source functions the right hand side of the elliptic P D E s being solved Examples sd 1 sp block 1 000 4 11 21 1 11 21 1 2 0 2 2 02 4 sfi esm 1 1 1 esmp 2 1 1 100 0001 1 2 6 esmp 2 2 esmp 1 2 esmp 2 2 2 310 217 2 WWW CO 0 endpart hyr hyr region Remarks Interpolate multiple regions as one region AHHA HERH NW De Figure 249 esmp applied to 4 edges Most people find that this command is not very useful It imposes too many constraints that later 238 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual cannot be switched off without disabling the all of them This command is like a macro converted it into a sequence of other commands What the other commands are depends on the type of region For a solid 3D region this command causes twelve res commands to require equal spacing of nodes along each of the twelve edges Then it causes six lin commands to require bi linear interpolation of the nodes in each of the six faces Finally it causes a lin command for tri linear interpolation of the interior nodes For a 2D region it causes four res commands to space nodes equally along each of the four edges and then a lin command to bi linearly interpolate the interior nodes lin Linear inte
255. dary repelling mesh lines The esm command along with the esmp command was designed to counter this effect When a face of the mesh is specified then all interior face nodes are relaxed If a node is on the boundary it will not be smoothed Smoothed nodes will be constrained to the surfaces they are projected onto Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 235 The weight factor is used to interpolate between the old nodal coordinates and the new within each iteration of the smoothing If it is set to 1 0 then the new value is used If it is set to a smaller number then a point is interpolated between the new and old coordinates of a node The interpolation parameter makes it possible to slow or speed up the convergence to the method In most cases 1 0 will be a satisfactory value Multiple faces can be specified using the amp between region specifications For example the three faces of a corner can be specified an i face a j face and a k face All of the nodes including the three interior edges and the corner node will be smoothed Disjoint faces can be smoothed together If the edge of one face is glued to the edge of another face using the intra part bb command then the coincident nodes along the glued edges edge will also be smoothed If three four or five faces are glued together or have common edges and share a common or glued vertex in the center that center
256. date it to the new dimensionality with the restore command Once you have created a reference grid with a grid on command you can remove it thus restoring the default by issuing a grid off command pad position an annotation in the physical picture pad annotation_ Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 81 Remarks This is followed by a mouse action in the interactive graphics mode or followed by the 2 screen coordinates See the ad command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics poor poor man s hidden line removal poor no argument Remarks The poor man s hidden line removal is a very simple method for reducing the number of mesh lines in the picture without the computation expense of removal all of the hidden lines This is done by removing all faces of the mesh that are facing away from the viewer You get the same results if you choose the Wire graphics option Draw in the Environment window and the backplane removal on default See also draw disp and tvv The picture will also be drawn to a postscript file if the postscript option is on This postscript feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics postscript activate PostScript output postscript root file name Remarks Once you issue this command every time a picture is drawn on the screen with draw poor
257. de Le eate mv ea 267 Mx example i a sete ERRA 265 Wet ue cet Sheed ewan at 439 Neumann condition TE rr ee ert ae ee LA e RNC 213 A Sesh a A tease re Set ey 263 Tithe hes ecu LE O EST 214 TOU Cure SET II ESSA 267 My Newton method 38 41 225 275 jDo lave Se PEE D 439 NIKE3D JD oues Mui dias goa Maye ade usb Pto 213 GEO 2 Ara a Reon eov educ 381 TID cc RA da 214 Nint Mz Expressions 289 Eet a oe ote sore E 439 Nodal loads 307 308 314 316 338 341 MP eke RN RV edd 213 Nodal rotation LUPIS aids Reve rete e Bardo ER a 214 bra oisi S e e Ny Set ER 311 DN E IM 413 A tari eee eer eres 312 OPA AS 205 Node orientation 414 attaching to 157 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 493 button 117 179 Create Set eek eh ak Me ede 135 distribUtlon eos o v 282 labels siete goes P od 115 merging sliding interface 408 movement lesse 148 BOTH DOR Set A E ERN 127 print block npb 451 rotation frb 312 selection bei e ease riu x as 95 Spacing doces diee betwen bends 283 Node Button 127 150 NOUO SEES ls dd dE EM 133 COMMENT o 2 vu deese mss 460 delete i oe zt moa ees 453 MIOS pol Sra idu wei Beard 460 modify 1 9S un gid tt etes s 134 458 Nodes Button o x er rax 134 TNOBUT sess gate A OR Ceo PUT 57 MAO 4 Zope A 20 Nonrefl
258. de expression load curve a load curve number amplitude amplitude expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions See the remarks on rb above re radiation enclosure re region emissivity_load_curve_ obstruction_flag or re region 0 temperature obstruction_flag where emissivity_load_curve load curve number temperature constant obstruction flag is yes to include surface obstruction calculations no to not include surface obstruction calculations Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 379 Remarks First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation that is how to orient the outward normal vector This command generates enclosure radiation data for TOPAZ3D Use the emissivity and rband commands to specify the emissivity and wavelength breakpoint tables associated with the enclosure radiation data For more details see the TOPAZ3D manual rei radiation enclosure by index progression rei progression emissivity_load_curve_ obstruction_flag or rei progression 0 temperature obstruction_flag where emissivity_load_curve load curve number temperature constant obstruction flag is yes to include surface obstruction calculations no not to include surface obstruction calculations Remarks First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation
259. de factor o 0 P is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the direction of the displacement The angles are in degrees Remarks This is the same as fes except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression This is the same as fc except that it applies to an index progression and uses spherical coordinates Example The part in this example has a cylindrical shape and it is defined in Cartesian coordinates with center in the local origin The concentrated load is specified in the spherical coordinates with a 1 in the radial direction It means that the forces will point towards the center of the spherical shape Figure 330 Command file follows aie definition of the mesh ses TrueGrid display forces 1 000E 00 fcsi 4 0 1 100 c concentrated load is assigned e c to nodes of c index progression c 4 e e e by null load curve 0 with amplitude 1 and direction 1 0 0 merge co fc 0 c display concentrated load c for null load curve Figure 330 concentrated load Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 342 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual ll linearly interpolate loads by arc length ll region load curve f f f amplitude js node amplitude node where load_curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude js node is the first amplitude for the interpolation amplitude node is the last amplitude for the interpolation ss f f is a vector in Carte
260. dialogue box left click your mouse on the place you want to change The cursor will move there Then you can edit the string Three editing actions are available 1 Type a character before the cursor position 2 Type a Backspace to delete the character just before the cursor 3 Type Control X to delete the character beneath the cursor If you type Enter while the cursor is in the middle of a string TrueGrid will behave like it does when the cursor is at the end of the string If there is a syntax error there will be a solid blue cursor where the error is Otherwise there will be a red cursor at the end of the string hollow if there is another line of the dialogue box that needs data Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 176 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Executing and Quitting Dialogue Boxes When you are finished entering all data in a dialogue box you can execute it by left clicking your mouse on the Exec execute button or by typing Control E with the mouse in the dialogue box This works only after you have provided all the required data that is when you have chosen an option from every option list that requires a choice and you have entered valid strings in every line of the dialogue box that needs them When you have entered all necessary strings every cursor in the dialogue box will be red When you left click on the Exec button of a valid dialogue box the command will be place
261. dinates would be modified using this method This modified bi linear interpolation method compensates for large differences between opposite edges of a face of the mesh In case the spacing rule is severe in both directions this modified method avoids interpolating inverted elements In milder circumstances this method produces a slightly more pleasing interpolated surface Figure 258 Modified Effective Boundary Coordinates Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 246 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual block 1 21 1 21 1 1 1 1 10 tr 1 1 121 1 xsc 5 3 TrueGrid draw res 11 12 2 1 j drs 1 1 1 2 2 1 i Led 2 2 The interpolation for the 3D solid case is the obvious generalization of this method Figure 259 Modified Bi Linear Interpolation lini Linear interpolation by index progression lini progression Remarks This computes the mesh in a progression by linear interpolation the default method Lini and lin are related the usual way that a command for progressions is related to a command for regions You could replace one lini command with a number of lin commands by breaking the progression into a number of regions and applying lin separately to each of the regions See the discussion of lin on the preceding pages relax Equipotential relaxation relax region amp region iterations min_change weight where Copyright 1992 2006 by
262. distribution is specified by using a previously defined nodal density function using the ndd command In order to display a nodal density function use the dndd command It is possible to require special zoning across several regions in more than one direction at a time It is also possible to over specify the zoning and the results can be unsatisfactory The transfinite interpolation over several regions usually produces the desired results by treating the zoning requirements as boundary conditions for the algebraic interpolation See also the as das res and drs commands Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 286 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 7 Equations You can use FORTRAN like equations to directly specify or modify the coordinates of nodes in a region of the mesh There are two keys to using these features First equations are applied to the mesh after everything has been initialized interpolated and projected This cannot be changed by changing the order of the commands Within the group of equations which you may issue the order is significant Secondly all calculations are done in the coordinate system of the part being generated This means that if the part was initialized using the cylinder command then the coordinates x y and z are the polar coordinates For example cylinder 1 1 291 1 71 1 0 360 0 2 x x 1 cos 12 y z 240 2 cos 4 k Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientif
263. done for each node of each pressure flux face When the laser beam is the source an additional damping factor is calculated This is based on the perpendicular distance of each node from the laser beam d Figure 327 There are two types of laser calculations Gaussian and tabular This laser scale function is defined with the dist command The decay option is also used to scale nodal pressure amplitudes by distance from the source of the shock r Figure 324 Figure 325 Figure 326 Figure 327 The function can be based on distance distance squared distance cubed exponential or linear The decay distance for a laser is the distance in the beam direction only Figure 327 The minimum and maximum pressure amplitude can be specified It causes cut off values which are out of range minimum and maximum If a minimum is not selected and the cosine is selected then the minimum defaults to zero The cosine decay laser minimum and maximum amplitude can be combined The point line plane and laser are mutually exclusive The resulting face value is given by Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 333 value amplitude x cos x decayfactor decay r x dampingfactor d dist where amplitude is the amplitude in the source O is the angle between the source vector and the normal vector of the face decay is an arbitrary constant r is the distance from the source
264. e J J boundary constraint is assigned to the nodes of the edge1 1 1 5 1 1 with constrained I displacement in x y and z The y and z constraints are assigned to the nodes of the region 1 5 1 5 5 1 The constrained displacement in the z direction is displayed Figure 337 The simplified command file follows block 1 3 5 7 135 7 c mesh defi dei 1 2 3 5 1 c deletion b 1 1 1 51 1 dx 1 dy 1 dz 1 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 352 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual boundary constraint is assigned to edge qd d d 5 dei with constrained dx dy and dz b 1 5155 1 dy 1 dz 1 boundary constraint is assigned to edge 5 1 55 1 with constrained dy c and dz merge co dz c display of dz c constraints qaaaqaaa FOSA bi global nodal constraints by progression bi progression options where options can be any number of the following dx init for x displacement dy init for y displacement dz init for z displacement rx init for rotation about the x axis ry init for rotation about the y axis rz init for rotation about the z axis where init is 0 to initialize to no constraint or 1 to constrain Remarks The list of constraints is associated with each node of the index progression See the remarks on b above Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applic
265. e LFP side piii H W Figure 50 Type of Picture Buttons There are three types of pictures available a simple line drawing Wire a hidden line drawing Hide and a colored polygon fill picture with hidden surface removal Fill A hardware graphics option H W is also available for machines supporting OpenGL To get the OpenGL hardware graphics option you must be running the OpenGL version of TrueGrid When a hardware option Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 108 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual is present both a line drawing and a polygon fill picture with hidden surface removal are available along with lighting fogging and many other hardware features In order to set the picture type press the Left Mouse Button on one of the default graphics option buttons Wire Hide or Fill Whenever TrueGrid generates a new picture the new picture will be of the chosen type After selecting a new picture type click on the Draw button to a new picture The Wire option sets the picture type to a line or wire drawing Figure 51 The Hide option is a line drawing with hidden lines removed Figure 52 The Fill option available only in the Merge Phase sets the picture type to a color polygon fill picture with lighting and hidden surface removal Figure 53 When hardware graphics is available with the use of the OpenGL version of TrueGrid then the hardware H W button is a
266. e inv invert the present transformation esca scale factor xsca scale factor ysca scale factor zsca scale factor Remarks This command is the same as multiple invocations of the tr command described above Example block 15 9 13 17 21 25 L 3 5 T7 L 355 000 3 x 0 2 4y 0 1 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 215 mx 5 mx 8 my 4 dei 2 3 2 3 9 9 O rz 20v 12 4 4 9 0 9 tri 2 55 Fz tri 3 rz tri 4 ry tri 5 ty tri 6 rz mx 22 my 4 tri 7 ry mx 27 my 2 splint 11 17 43 i 00 rz 20v 17 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 ilin initial interpolation not a constraint ilin region Remarks This interpolation command can be used to align interior vertices once boundary vertices have been moved to their initial positions This is a linear interpolation This command positions intermediate vertices It is only an initial interpolation After this command is issued the interior vertices of the region can be moved again No constraints are assigned to the interior vertices by this command Example block 1 135729 11 Lib To Xx 0 TS pe 9 V I1 Lo 4 59 ELS mbi55155nx2 mb 1 2 5 2 5 x 15 mb 1 2 2 fo 2 36 ub ilini 1 25 2 0 5 ilini 1 2 0 5 2 5 ilin 122155 pb133144x3 Interaction of several initializations ilini initia
267. e then you should know that it is the same file as just described After downloading the file you will need to add execute permissions Then you should execute it in the installation directory Installation on WINDOWS If you download from the Internet then you must double click on the file name icon for the self extracting archive file to un compress Then change directories click on the new folder On a distribution CD change directories or folder to WINDOWS Run SETUP EXE in order to install TrueGrid You can install TrueGrid in any directory or folder which does not have a space in its name or its path The default is C TrueGrid If you choose a directory other than the default you will need to set the environment variable TGHOME so that when TrueGrid is run it will know where the tgauth menu and dialogue files are located Installation on LINUX This installation uses the unzip utility to extract the TrueGrid files from the given archive file The files extracted will reside in the TrueGrid directory typically usr TrueGrid No effort is made to create this directory or set permissions on it Rather the user is responsible for this The environment variable TGHOME must be set to this directory e g in csh and tcsh use setenv TGHOME usr TrueGrid in sh and bash use set TGHOME usr TrueGrid export TGHOME usr TrueGrid The setting of the environment variable TGHOME should be put in the cshrc for csh and tesh
268. e 76 The point is picked by clicking the Left Mouse Button in the desired location on the screen The resulting x y z coordinates can be filled into the dialog box by pressing F7 or F9 The Z buffer algorithm selects the point where the mouse is located on the visible object If the mouse is clicked where there is no object then the x y z coordinates are extracted from the back plane Pick Panel Picking a Node There are three methods to select a node in the physical window The first method requires labeling the nodes in the Labels panel This is only possible in the merge phase The choose Label in the Pick panel When you click on a label of a node in the physical window you are selecting the associated node You can also click on the Node button in the Pick panel Then click on any node to select it Notice that the indices of the node in the part phase or the node number in the merge phase are shown in the Show field of the Pick panel Alternatively you can enter the indices of a node in the part phase or the node number in the merge phase and click on the Show button to select that node You can also select a node forming a block boundary interface showing in the picture by clicking on the node Pick Panel Picking a Vertex TrueGrid has two types of mesh objects that can be selected using the mouse These selected portions of the mesh can be used for various reasons For example you can select a region of the mesh and the
269. e Move Points Panel is Wire de visible This changes the function of the left ttt Move Zoom Frame mouse The Apply to list of options controls the type of object being moved Pick ETE Display List Labels The Constrain to list of options controls Apply to Constrain to the type of movement This term to Rotate constrain should not be confused with the A Screen Plane Bl M Poly Surface Screen Plane big idea of constraining the mesh to surfaces using the projection method In the SS present context Constrain to should be x Y Z xY XZ YZ interpreted to mean that the selected object Coordinates Options is to be allowed to move in a specific way ie and FD EUN for the present move only Any future moves on the same object will have no lingering constraints due to this move The default Apply to option in the Part Phase is Undo History a Region ofthe mesh The default Apply to option in the Merge Phase is a single Node of the mesh Delete Attach Project Figure 107 Move Points Panel in Screen Plane In the part phase any region or progression of the mesh can be repositioned with the mouse First select a region or progression from the computational window If you make no selection in the computational window then when you click the left mouse button for the click and
270. e Nea p ES 24 X Exampless Lodi vean ems 287 DUO ond eek aet eie eg 150 X unio Pr corr 69 X coordinate 0 eee 30 44 ee ee ee ba ere eee ee 288 domain ERE ETT T Gas 288 Mercurio aded x ew 199 208 Xsca TL BICKBeSS ooo pants toc a 417 TES ru cna Sr t a Ua eee 214 ELS omitir nta 215 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 508 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Cl PP 93 EXPIESSIONS Loi a eas 175 AY DUO a ee S 150 in dialogue box 176 XYZ Scientific Applications 24 XZ DUO qos is eeu a9 or ER ERE oe 150 eXpresslOHs 3 sua se d 175 AU DILE 4 oio sare S chee tote ao EN ee 150 in dialogue box 176 Y coordinate 00005 30 44 Y domain AE eles tak UE 288 hierarchy secco naan des 199 208 Ysca thickness io oa Le Aan ee 417 ih A A Ra dat 214 Wiis bi Aw Bae ee Cram DET 215 MSG leas ihe au exa ud eae Goria ale 93 SCAG pun bes Pd 93 ALA e A A 150 A Dutton A s om eens 150 Z buffer DEAPMIOS dota asa day ac 127 pick point eii ties 127 Z BUFFER button 65 179 Z coordinate 00 ee eee 30 44 EA AA eee 291 domain A Bir beet care heat d 288 hierarchy soe xa Y 199 208 1A AA A AES 88 94 113 114 A apta AN ES 111 BM csi eie IPS dx 88 94 113 114 DOLO Spa bak STA Ae bare 111 EB oae ta aru dtd eA aru tit 94 LOOM 4 aue sende eb n dose dels 72 88 DB ttofs 09 cero spere 112 114 Zoom button uode ld e ves DR oe as 111
271. e as tenn ios Gane na eed 22 compatibility 273 Initial Coordinates 198 208 Devotees Qoia Mal Varied i is 393 spherical projection 278 TED O dea Mi ur 398 Initial Coordinates 44 Initial mesh and update ar ce ane GA 207 Upditeusura ata casas 207 Initialize ID CULVES cita od 222 A O O t ice 219 Initialize vertices 38 41 44 115 157 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 487 222 212 IniZOBE Air Sod OE Bees 375 o oui oed onec a DORT YES 376 Inlet Vox Mute rane seb eee I b 359 IE cis eate sete etd ab Ei as 360 Input Ile oh ate Meg a eerste Ua dte 34 Input strings in dialogue box 174 Insert b tton enr easel aaa 180 A outs te p NE 180 Jnsprt asta due xeu tad 198 199 SIJ SUEVOS ele Ee tates 22 OG essa O ust enced 232 example god Mewes dt A 201 surface edge sv ey oda 160 undo 2 9 eder eror oS 171 Installation 44 594 ado 24 57 Installation directory 25 26 Installing TrueGrid 25 69 UNIX duro Duet e ND e all 26 Int Expressions 289 AA a tn oC SR 58 ID GEGE yh denise eee iem yis 175 Integration Beams ice puer due ERES 417 INTEL PO Lao A vane e ades 70 Interactive execution 22 Interactivity usus ida dada EE 43 Interface between parts ces 389 E dava d ac Go ded 407 TS SD Aou aues
272. e concept of index progressions was added to provide a concise and simple method for describing complex structures A limited projection method was added MAZE 2D curve generation capabilities were implemented as well as MAZE parts which simplified the modeling of many geometries Commands were added that made it easy for the user to generate descriptions of boundary conditions loads and material properties for several simulation codes on an individual basis INGRID was used as the starting point for the development of TrueGrid While TrueGrid incorporates almost all of INGRID s features TrueGrid s improvements and new features go far beyond INGRID s scope Only a small fraction about 2 5 of TrueGrid actually comes from the 1990 version of INGRID TrueGrid s graphical user interface and mesh visualization tools let you see results at every step of the generation process A command history feature was incorporated to let the user inspect commands as well as turn them on or off in order to see their ry LEK effects and debug the mesh Thus SSN a SS TrueGrid seamlessly mixes its interactive Figure 2 Mesh of Fixture Key mode with a batch mode This interface is designed to make it easy for you to see not only the physical mesh of x y z coordinates but also the simulation code s discrete computational mesh of 1 j k coordinates With TrueGrid you can define and transform the physical mesh by referring to either the
273. e edge that is attached to a surface edge internally this will be treated as two edge commands In other words the new intermediate vertex as a result of the insprt command will be independent TrueGrid DRAW Defined Surface edges Example AS NOAA AUN sd 1 function 0 90 45 45 cos u cost v sin u cos v sin v MA Ey 498 IOMA AAA block 1 16 1 11 1 ERA AA I3 CAMAS pb 2 2 122 pb 1 2 1 12 pb 1 1 1 1 1 1 xz 1 75 edge 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 edge 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 Figure 240 Initial Mesh Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 232 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual TrueGrid DRAW Defined Surface edges NINO SSA AAAS A kek SAL ER A LALA LALLA CONOS WALA LLL LALA Figure 241 Edge 1 of Surface 1 Figure 242 Edge 4 of Surface 1 e dge 111121 1 2 edge 12 1221 1 3 TrueGrid DRAW Defined Surface edges NN Ce NN HAE Figure 244 Edge 3 of Surface 1 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 233 4 Interpolation The commands in this section distribute interior nodes by interpolation based on the location of the boundary nodes Interior nodes are all of the nodes between the boundaries of the select region There are some exceptions 1 The relax command can smooth a region with holes in it where the nodes along the edge of the hole are treated as boundary nod
274. e edges are labeled The Pick panelis activated and the option Edges is selected Then the mouse is moved into the Physical Window and a lasso is created Figure 72 Figure 73 shows the resulting highlighted edges blue The described technique is good for extraction of the objects of interest Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 124 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual NS ae M BS SOK 5 AR 2 Figure 70 Lasso for Surfaces Figure 71 Highlighted Surfaces Figure 72 Lasso for Edges Figure 73 Highlighted Edges Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 125 Coordinate System of a Picked Point When a point is picked using the mouse in all of the various ways the coordinates are displayed at the bottom of the Pick panel They are usually in the global coordinate system When you are generating a part using the cylinder part command the coordinates can be in the global system or in the local coordinate system being used by the cylinder part You can choose by clicking on the Global or Local button in the Pick panel The local option is only available when creating a cylinder type part Pick Panel Picking a Point by Projection Pick Label F9 or A point can be picked with the mouse by pr
275. e fluids simulation code If you choose nothing then an algorithm will break the parts into grids for you The algorithm first finds an undeleted block and then groups blocks together with this block in order to form the largest possible single logical block These blocks are removed from consideration and the process is repeated There is no guarantee that this method will find the smallest number of logical blocks Use the supblk command to specify a collection of blocks to be treated as a single logical block Regions specified by the supblk cannot overlap The specified region must not contain any deleted region or the command is ignored Not every block need be part of some supbIk command Example TrueGrid exploded display block 1 10 20 1 5 9 13 L 5 9 13 supblk 11 2 3 4 3 c superblock applied t0 c region 112 3 4 3 c to create grid 1 and c grids 2 and 3 Figure 386 pipe with 3 grids Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 452 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 25 Sets Named sets in the Part Phase are useful tools in defining boundary conditions loads and materials and an alternative to named sets in the Merge Phase The delset command deletes a set The eset and eseti commands add remove elements to from a set of elements The fset and fseti commands add remove faces to from a set of faces The nset and nseti commands add remove nodes to from a set of nodes The nsetc fse
276. e issued followed by either the update endpart or graphics commands then the mesh is reinitialized to the stored state Only then are the geometry and topology commands all executed in the proper order Notice that this means that many useful commands such as mseq can not be used after issuing an update This command can be used after first projecting the initial mesh to a simple surface Then a second projection can be performed using the first projection as the initial mesh for the second projection This one case is the reason that this command was defined And it is still almost always better to achieve the same effect without utilizing this command Update is also a way to combine the projection of the mesh with the algebraic manipulation of the mesh First project the mesh to a surface After issuing an update command you can apply algebraic equations to the result of the projection See dom x y z tl t2 and t3 Any number of updates can be issued However commands in the history window will only go back as far as the last update command No commands before the last update can be deactivated or reactivated Example Sfi 1 4 1 4 sd I update Sfi 1 41 bes Sd 2 The four faces of the mesh specified in the sfi command are first projected to surface number 1 This mesh is then saved and treated as the initial state of the mesh Effectively results of the first Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications In
277. e merge phase you can use the nset command to create or modify a node set the fset command to create or modify a face set EE and the eset command to create or modify an element set The selections made in the part F9 or F7 Prints J E phase are parametric because they reference y edges faces and blocks of the mesh The mesh rupe de 77 ee densities or the geometry can be modified without effecting the set selections The selections made in the merge phase using these commands can also be parametric based on geometric objects Figure 88 Pick Sets In contrast this section discusses the use of the mouse to create or modify sets of nodes faces elements and surface polygons This is in contrast with the nset fset and eset commands because the selections made with a mouse are not parametric If the mesh is modified such as changing the mesh density the set selections made using the mouse must be scrapped and new selections made For completeness it should be mentioned that there is also a pset command for selecting surface polygons and available only in the merge phase In order to select a set first depress the Pick button of the Environment Window and select the Sets option Figure 88 The Set Editing window will appear This option is only available in the Merge Phase
278. e mesh are part of a sliding interface You can use these commands to assign a shell or brick face to a sliding interface definition In order to define the properties of the sliding interface first use the command sid Sid defines the properties of the sliding interface that you refer to in si and sii Surfaces from 3D solid brick elements have an obvious orientation pointing outward However this is notthe case with sliding interfaces on 2D shell surfaces You must provide information about how to orient them That is the purpose of the orpt command During the node merging process using using stp for example TrueGrid will not merge nodes on opposite sides of a sliding interface Use the merge phase command co with the si option to view the numbered sliding interfaces and their orientation Example An example is provided with the following command sii This command is the same as si except that multiple regions may be specified using a reduced index progression Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 408 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual sii assign sliding interfaces sii progression sliding_ type options where sliding_ sliding interface reference number type m for master and s for slave options this depends on the type If the type is s then options can be normal_failure_stress_or_force shear_failure_stress_or_force exponent_for_normal_force exponent_for_shear_force fsf Coulom
279. e noted that linear interpolation has no meaning when applied to vertices but is included here to complete the theme of this discussion If this command were issued it would cause an error Graphical Version of Index Progressions Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 49 The computational window is provider to make the selection of regions more intuitive Experienced users become very efficient using this graphical device A more complete description of the functions associated with the computational window can be found in the chapter on the graphical user interface This window displays a representation of all of the blocks forming the part A cube is used for each block Along the boundaries of this window are three index bars one for each of the i j and k reduced indices Each bar has a sequence of nodes corresponding to the 1 j and k indices found in the block blude or cylinder command One can select a region of the mesh by a click and drag motion with the mouse from one node of an index bar to the next When a selection of this type is made the bar within that region turns from green to red One can also select a partition of the mesh with a mouse click on one of the nodes of an index bar This selected node will then turn red Both types of index bar selections can be reversed by repeating the procedure Alternatively use the function key F2 Typically such
280. e solution to the underlying differential equations It is unlikely and not advisable to make this method converge because of the cost Example This example compares uniform smoothing on the end faces of a cylindrical topology to the Neumann boundary condition The unsmoothed mesh is generated from the following sd 1 cy 000001 3 sd 2 function 0 360 0 1 1 v 3 cos u v 2 5 cos u 1 17 3 sin u v 5 sin u A vt3 sd 3 plan 0 00 0 0 sd 4 plan 007 0 0 block 1 3 8 10 1 3 8 10 1 5 12 1 flies Xp 3 7 dei 1 2 0 3 4 12 0 3 4 por 1 EN e bs xg d Figure 274 Exterior mesh sfi 1 4 1 4 2 3 sd 2 sfi 1 sd 3 Sfi 3 sd 4 bb 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 bb 2 1 223 1 bb 3 1 32 3 2 bb 3 2 4232 bb 3 3 1 4 3 3 3 bb 331 3 4 3 3 bb 231243 4 bb 13123 3 4 When the two end faces and the interior are smoothed with the uniform smoothing the end faces are smoothed without regard to the shape of the interior Then the interior is smoothed unifm 123433 amp 233343 amp 21332310001 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 264 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual unifm 1 unifm 1 Hd N N N w w CO w E g Rh Figure 275 Large end smoothed Figure 276 Interior blocks The angles forming the elements in the middle blocks range from 50 9 to 127 3 degrees Alternatively
281. e that the gct has 1 transformation gc t 1 mz 10 grep O 1 Then the result is 8 replications 4 local times 2 global This is equivalent to let 7 rz 90 rz 180 rz270 mz 10 rz 90 mz 10 rz 180 mz 10 rz 270 mz 10 lrep 0 7 The replicated parts can only be viewed in the Merge Phase Example In this example a pole is conveniently built with the z axis the axis of symmetry This part is then positioned by rotation and translation ry 15 my 1 5 at first Then it is replicated two times by rotation rz 120 to form a tripod title poles using lct block 1 4 1 4 1 51 1 1 sfi 1 2 1 APF Gy 0 U c Outer faces of the m 5 40 c Block part definition O 1 1 sh are projected Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 443 c onto a cylinder given by a point on the axis c of rotation 0 0 0 vector of axis of rotation c 0 0 1 and radius r 1 lct 3 ry 15 my 1 5 last rz 120 last rz 120 c Definition of the local transformation c The pole is rotated by 15 degrees around the y axis c and moved in the y direction for 1 5 unit c ry 15 my 1 5 Then it is rotated 2 times around c the z axis rz 120 lrep 1 2 3 c The local replication of the part c is performed by invoking local transformations 1 c ry 15 my 1 5 2 rz 120 and 3 rz 120 merge c The results of replication are visible in the Merge Phase Poles using
282. e the output file is written TrueGrid will automatically correct for the renumbering in conditions which refer to node numbers such as pressure surfaces and sliding interfaces Example The input for this example is block 1 3 1 3 1 0 1 0 1 1 b1 1 1 1 2 T dx 1 dy 1 dz 13 b211221dy 1 lsys 1 rz 45 Ib 2 1 1 2 2 1 4 dx 1 te 2 252 1 VI S14 endpart block 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 0 1 1 fn 1 1 2 2 1 23456 lb 2 2 2 1 dy 1 velocity 123 234 345 te 2 1 11 2 2 2 1314 endpart block 1 1 3 1 3 2 0 1 1 2 fn 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 23456 endpart merge stp 001 dyna3d write Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 449 Before the output file is written there are 21 nodes They are shown below in black numbers Then additional coincident nodes are added and the element connectivity adjusted so that each shell element with failure nodes has it own independent nodes The additional nodes are in red The nodes within each the following sets will be tied together with a failure criterion 7 22 9 25 10 26 12 30 13 31 15 35 16 36 19 40 20 41 8 23 24 11 27 28 29 14 32 33 34 and 18 37 38 39 TrueGrid display of node numbers Figure 385 duplicate nodes automatically generated fni tied node sets with failure Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications
283. e y axis at first end point Irt1 release the rotation constraint about the z axis at first end 424 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual point Idr2 release the x translation constraint at last end point Ids2 release the y translation constraint at last end point Idt2 release the z translation constraint at last end point Irr2 release the rotation constraint about the x axis at last end point Irs2 release the rotation constraint about the y axis at last end point Irt2 release the rotation constraint about the z axis at last end point Idr3 release the x translation constraint at intermediate point Ids3 release the y translation constraint at intermediate point Idt3 release the z translation constraint at intermediate point Irr3 release the rotation constraint about the x axis at intermediate points Irs3 release the rotation constraint about the y axis at intermediate points Irt3 release the rotation constraint about the z axis at intermediate points theta 0 orientation angle for the cross section warpage nl n2 two nodes used to determine warpage in the beam geom option method of determining curvature where option can be 1 for center of curvature 2 for tangent of centroid arc 3 for bend radius 4 for arc angle Remarks See ibm jbmi generate beams in the j direction by index progression jbmi progression _in_i _in_k material o
284. easing the resolution when selecting nodes from the picture If the nodes are found at the same pixel the node selection becomes ambiguous By increasing the resolution the pixels become smaller separating the nodes so each can be selected with a separate mouse actions restore return to original or fixed view restore no arguments Remarks Return the orientation of the picture to the original default position corresponding to the screen coordinate system or in the case that the fix command was used to the saved fixed orientation This is useful when you get lost in the picture and need to start over This command also recalculates the smallest box that will contain all of the active parts surfaces curves and block boundaries in the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 95 picture This box is used to scale the picture in order to automatically view everything You can view the containing box by using the grid command When the fix option is active no calculations are made and all parameters controlling the picture are restored to those that were in effect when the picture frame of reference was fixed The Rest button in the environment window performs the same function center fit picture to the screen center no arguments Translate and scale such that all active objects fit into the picture Remarks The key difference with this command compared to
285. ecompose a problem into a two level hierarchy For example an easy way to model Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 445 a brick wall is to define a single part to represent a brick Then local coordinate transformations can make many copies of the brick to form a row of bricks Then global coordinate transformations can form copies of the row of bricks stacking each new row of bricks onto another to form the wall Examples grep 053 lrep 0 1 These two commands specify six copies of the present part They are 1 original part 2 local transformation number 1 applied to a copy 3 global transformation number 5 applied to a copy 4 local transformation number 1 applied to a copy and then global transformation number 5 is applied 5 global transformation number 3 applied to a copy 6 local transformation number 1 applied to a copy and then global transformation number 3 is applied This next example builds a row of bricks using local coordinate transformations Then the row is replicated to form a wall gct 12 mx 1 5 my 2 my 4 mx 1 5 my 6 my 8 mx 1 5 my 10 my 12 mx 1 5 my 14 my 16 mx 1 5 my 18 my 20 mx 1 5 my 22 my 24 block 1 2 1 2 1 2 0 2 8 0 1 8 0 4 8 lct 19 mx 3 P 9 lrep 0 2 grep 0 2 endpart repe 19 3452678 345678 9 Oy dale 125 23 Merging of Parts In the Merge Phase nodes that are close to one another a
286. ecorded in both the text window and the tsave session file when the mouse is used to move or attach regions see Move Pts or Attach Example p X block 13 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 After mbi 3 1 37 3 1 3205 mbi 1 10 4 IO a5 Se pb assigns coordinates to vertices pb region coordinate_identifier coordinates where the format for coordinates depends on the following coordinate_identifier x x_coordinate y y_coordinate Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 210 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Zz coordinate xy x coordinate y coordinate xz x coordinate z coordinate yz y coordinate z coordinate xyz x coordinate y coordinate z coordinate Remarks Set the specified coordinates of every node in the region This command is recorded in both the text window and the tsave session file when the mouse is used to move or attach regions see Move Pts or Attach There is a special interaction that takes place when the intra part bb command is issued prior to this command being issued If two regions of the same part are glued together with the bb command then if one side ofthe interface master or slave is moved with this command the other side is also moved with the same command Before pb A problem occurs if the automatic association between the master and slave side of this bb interface is not the desired association see the bb command then one ofthe bb
287. ect 93 iaa ded 70 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 494 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual MAC sorra it la 70 SUT ACES ii is 205 Opteron 4 iiu sania ees 71 Ont auc cats Oe cens 136 205 368 pado i ius o edly aN ihe na oe 82 DOMI oo uS co OD a end 419 POOLS e nod KR ep T dus 82 CVIS dua depu d a ds 371 postscript sai re ERU Tas 83 A s euro arts yaoi 374 taad baa cut tet Ro MM US 83 A ute ee eae Nae 346 tadh PIE 84 e O Reda 348 BOLD ais 69 RD erna bodas ode d eia tg 378 Slo aga O Ina crear Mn 86 HR arg aah Bete RE UNE 380 SUN a cedes ai doge a CU are RUN 69 SED cds sacle aa UR RII cg thc OS 365 TV UO find ten da roce ened 87 shell normal jou so ees 413 WINDOWS avion 71 O 408 Operating system requirements 24 with si and sii 389 Opteron esmero aon cr me S t e 21 orthogonal Option Iesse pedet eu eau xy 258 261 A 59 O A Dents Mesh nea te pl 234 displays a oet er ERES 61 A up MA ater tena 263 267 PU t oe gure een o ales 109 Neumann iu oe Res 234 PONE cogo ter Oeo Red 60 O acm ek 276 EIAS AS eed aseo Maxi en 109 WIEN oe da C ee 234 264 O rss 109 Orthogonality o oooo o 437 in dialogue box 173 Orthotropic EA Sr pean ev a ed d 60 material sd Conte Ce ss 413 DOE 1o e 3 xe te dedo ea tisk 60 OSX La dra noe ies reta det QD 25 57 output_file Loss ro ete et 59 Outlet tsave file ai a rod aC eS 59 I ocak alee ap RAW aia 363 WI ts
288. ecting boundaries ng p 363 BED ze Cua e dae imu t 363 Norm Expressions 290 Normal mode of text window 77 Normal offset A See 390 e A OS 396 Normal to surface AA rure d chat a 205 Normal vectors LR oM sed MM Tod A 413 OI Gade Aedes 413 ND Dated atte ES 451 NPM cosa sus dpa a A aq y ad 385 Din os eo eer b br TRU TS 386 SPINE pastos ease dette o M ares 389 NE spate ace Gest Qu LR dua ee ue I ur E 363 NEE rias alot ede a esto Stas hectic 363 Neta osa and ter su 133 458 exatiple ES 436 MPE A 362 INSEL asia eee eL 460 O ERU A eise rra fui en 458 Example Sesser aan ee totes 459 Nsetinfo ooooooooo o o 458 460 Numbers OT ILA S d een eae Leah op es 175 in dialogue box 174 minimum and maximum allowed Lt aeRO ate we AE 63 NURBS digo PET t 39 Nurbsd AA ee o RR EREN Des 441 Off A da At bati 116 Offset coordinates 209 210 dialogue box 173 A ste ut knee od ROSA 363 OUT eim thus tasa son iu Get ia I tates 364 One way transition 399 Open Curve button 195 Open Set Button 133 OpenGL aad aureo ento te d Red 78 ad uoi ex eR E CERT ca 78 Captors dotada 79 dadas dales 79 dad a i n ded 80 AD is bs 80 DEC Alpha cuu us Bi wide ses 69 display da mE EOS 80 Alp M PPP EE 81 H W button sese 109 hardware graphics 108 HP 1 6 cia i Me ete ere ae SR 70 IBM cy eeu iar RESET 70 LINUX ace cht f
289. ectively The complete mesh Figure 376 and the beam rebar with the beam axes orientation Figure 377 are displayed The simplified command file follows cylinder 1 3 5 1 19 1 3 5 7 1 2 3 0 360 1 3 5 7 c structured cylinder mesh definition jbmi 2 14 1v 100 1 c index progression 2 is turned into beams c in the j direction 4 circles c number of columns of elements in the i direction is 1 c number of columns of elements in the k direction is 4 c the beam material number is c the beam cross section axis is parallel c with the vector 1 0 0 in cylindrical coordinates c the cross section number is kbm 112 322118 1v 100 c region above is turned into beams c in the k direction 18 segments c number of columns of elements in the i direction is c number of columns of elements in the j direction is 18 c the beam material number is c the beam cross section axis is parallel c with the vector 1 0 0 in cylindrical coordinates c the cross section number is merge set tv disp c display of the whole mesh bricks beams labels 1d c labels of visible beams are displayed etd idl on 3dl off c display of beams is turned on c display of bricks is turned of Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 431 co or rst c beam axes
290. ectively and prepares a new row for data entry Now you can select a point in the picture in order to add a new control point If you have clicked on Prepend or Append button you must also click on accept In this example the second control point of curve 1 was selected as the focal point and a new control point was inserted after the second point to create curve 2 Any additional control points will continue to be added after this new one until a new focal point is selected Figure 177 Insertion of a Control Point Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 187 Deleting Cubic Spline Control Points Option to Specify Derivatives There are two ways to select control points in the Point List table for deletion Method 1 Before a control point can be Insert acres ERA deleted it must be selected as the focal point Append Prepend K Insert Mode The various methods are described above Delete from toj M Method 2 Enter the sequence numbers of the control points into the from and to fields next to the Delete button Click on the Delete button
291. ecuted in the Command Hierarchy Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 288 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual X y and z are interpreted within the part s coordinate system In cylindrical coordinates x y and z are the radius angle 0 and axial distance respectively The rest of these remarks describe the rules for the algebraic equation For each node in the specified region the variables i j and k are assigned the node s indices Any reference in the equation to the variables x y z t1 t2 or t3 refers to the value of the corresponding 3 dimensional arrays with the indices i j and k If one of these variables is on the left side of an sign its value will be changed just as in FORTRAN For quadratic elements the neighboring quadratic nodes i e those mid edge nodes belonging to the elements that are next to the boundary but just outside the domain of the region being modified by the FORTRAN equation will also be modified to maintain a smooth mesh The operands in the equation can be the coordinates x y or z the temporary variables t1 t2 or t3 the node indices i j and k integers and floating point numbers and parameters The operators are and either or for exponentiation Parentheses can be arbitrarily embedded These FORTRAN like algebraic equations support the following functions int a truncate a number nint a round off a number abs a a
292. edges in the case of COEDGE This includes picking points by Z Buffer by Projection by Node and by Label The selected points and the curve connecting them will be drawn in white in the physical window as it is being constructed Additionally points that have been selected can be modified using the Move Pts panel applied to the Point List not available for COEDGE The white curve in the physical window is changed as you move the point These interactive dialogues will generate a curd command which will appear in the session file tsave You can invoke one of these interactive dialogues from the 3D CURVE menu by clicking on LP3 SPLINE TWSURF forms a polygonal curve by selecting and moving points This produces the Ip3 option in the curd command when the curve is saved in the session file tsave This curve is not smooth and has limited applications It is most useful when you need to extract data from existing geometry or mesh The Point List interactive dialogue is used to create this curve forms a cubic spline curve using the mouse to select and move control points This produces the esp3 option of the curd command when the curve is saved in the session file tsave This is probably the most important 3D curve feature and should be learned by all users This feature produces smooth curves passing through a selection of control points that can be moved with the mouse It is most useful when you want to shape an interior edge of the
293. ee Rn dama 109 Graphics Commands 78 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 485 ndo coca eae 171 Grayed out io du tard oe ee ee 108 OEP A dg eA 31 441 445 EPs rara id 443 IDEE orna E e ee ae rene 385 PIN uie os A 386 SPINE iure cu e Rt our wading et 389 Greyed out qa a ed 111 155 Resume button 171 Gi ur reu e M Rue 81 96 Gsii BIOD at 445 CS VIS Wi ev Se Want aed d EV eS 83 GUI ecu ctut bide than Par E bees eke 57 THO A pe dA E 20 GUI graphical user interface 22 28 36 H W OpenGL crias 108 MWe DUN ON noo s oec o eS 109 dad aa dae cate ott By Rd 78 UD 2 oie a adas Treue 78 CPU RT AE 79 daad G gil Pes sepe leas ts 79 dad o eeen a Decet dob dove de 80 dads ded sv ecd Sn 80 display anced en atin naan 80 CLAW inxs E eee tsa anes 81 PAD cigar ele sa ant E 82 phase graphics 108 POOL sonoridad 82 postseript ts 83 ads a id 83 AY i NE 84 X ccce ud Sure nes 87 Halquist John 22 oec o eA 22 Hardware graphics OpenGL oes Ata 108 Hardware graphics option 108 Hardware key di 71 Hardware requirements 24 Heat flow boundary conditions 374 375 Heat generation ME AA iss a es dH Nata gl AM 383 O eoi bett eg 383 MODE Aon sir tutto tel Data ats 383 Help ads oros 63 72 73 76 button 75 76 175 BOLOTHE SE e Pa lf Cte iR 29 menu
294. ee faces share a vertex then the common vertex will be placed at the closest point of intersection of the three surfaces It is up to you to make sure that when one of these steps are taken that the surfaces involved actually intersect Otherwise the calculations to build the mesh will take longer you will receive warnings and you will probably not like the resulting mesh Intersecting tangent surfaces can also cause delays in the calculation There are more advanced methods to handle tangent surfaces It is not recommend that you project a face of the mesh onto more than one surface You cannot project a solid region to a surface Clicking on the Project button produces a sfi command in the text window and the session file tsave Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 165 Figure 143 and Figure 144 show projection of 4 face regions yellow onto a cylindrical surface red The mesh faces are first selected in the Computational Window Then the surface is picked Projecting Mesh Faces onto a Single Surface by label black and the Project button is pressed ZA SS SL SS WANA CASS SISI n o9 U WH Y 3 n Y 9 amp d bs 9 a 4 A n H A v H fn 10 9 3 H E SS ay CZ ZZL LY LALIT LL pe LILLI M TB LR AA LZ CRAL 277 avare C IX KA AACR AC S addi NN SSI AN CSRS SSIES REL pl Rw WSs S RP RSS SSS
295. een to the slicing plane default 0 Thereafter TrueGrid will not display anything between the screen and the slicing plane Both distances are measured in units where 1 is the length of the diagonal of the smallest box containing the object in the picture Remarks This command is a good way to look at the inside of your model slice off the front of it The units for the zclip command are based on the smallest box containing the object in the picture This box is computed only when you issue a restore command So if you add some thing to your model or otherwise change what is in the picture some of the new things may be inadvertently sliced out of the display even if the object and slicing distances have their default values of 1 and 0 If this is a problem you can simply issue another restore command Or you can translate and rotate the new object until you see what you want 5 Picture Controls These commands transform the picture on the screen Most often you will want to translate or rotate the picture or zoom your view of it in or out There are several commands which alter your view of a model L r u and d translate the model rx ry and rz rotate the model around the center of the picture zf and zb zoom forwards and backwards If you mess up the picture too much you can get the original picture with restore or center There are a number of other less used commands The mouse can also be used to control the picture These mou
296. em This new command is followed by a sequence of rigid body operators These are translations rotations and reflections As before the part cannot cross over the pole it can only go around it If the part must cross over the pole then the cylinder part is the wrong part Use the Cartesian block part This command can be issued anytime after a cylinder command Care is needed here because if other commands have already been issued they may behave differently when this command is issued This command can be issued any number of times to allow for experimentation It is not cumulative endpart complete the part and add it to the data base endpart no arguments Remarks This command can be used to complete a part and add it to the database This command is automatically generated when you issue a subsequent control merge block blude or cylinder command Once one of these commands is issued the part is considered complete and no additional modifications can be made to the part If it is necessary to make additional modifications to the part after one of these commands have been issued you must end the session change the name of the tsave file edit this file by inserting the interrupt command where additional commands are needed and run with this file as the command file Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 440 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual savepart save all part data in a parts data base
297. ence numbers are referred to as reduced indices In the example above a reduced i index can have a value of 1 2 or3 The reduced indices in the j and k directions can have a value of 1 or 2 The numbers in the 1 j and k lists of the block command subdivide the mesh These sub divisions are sometimes referred to as partitions of the mesh These reduced indices are essentially numbered parameters referencing back to the node numbers in the initial part command This is an important parametric feature ofthe block cylinder and blude commands To change the mesh density you need only change the lists in these commands All other commands that have been issued will be automatically adjusted There are two ways to make such a change issue the mseq command or end your TrueGrid session modify the session file and rerun the session file as a command input file Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 34 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Block with Faces PROJECTED onto Cylinders TrueGrid display When you first set up a part with the block command you give a value of an i j or k index for every i j or k reduced index that you will use For example the following code block 1 10 20 1 20 1 100 200 300 LIT 335 0 0 1 0 2 0 mu 210 0 12 5 REMAIN A e 0 210 1 201 804 Lue TER SN OS N Fi de Block with faces PROJECTED onto Cylinders TrueGrid display fines a par
298. enu and MERGE dialogue to enter the Merge Phase The Text Menu Physical and Environment windows are displayed Display a measure of the orthogonality of the mesh by using the DIAGNOSTIC menu and MEASURE dialogue Set the tolerance and merge coincident nodes by using the MERGING menu and STP Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual dialogue Display loads constraints and conditions using the GRAPHICS menu and CONDITIONS dialogue Write the input file for DYNA3D by using the OUTPUT menu and WRITE dialogue End your TrueGrid session by clicking on the EXIT button Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 67 II Graphical User Interface Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 68 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 1 TrueGrid on Various Systems In this section some of the differences in TrueGrid running on various systems are discussed The biggest differences are found in the installation and licensing procedures which are not discussed here see the TrueGrid Installation Instructions and the TrueGrid License Manager Manual SGI UNIX Workstation There are three versions of TrueGrid tg tex and tgd for the SGI workstations running the IRIX UNIX operating system Tg uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Tgx does
299. ere the direction can be i each i face of the region is a projection of the template i each j face of the region is a projection of the template k each k face of the region is a projection of the template id each i face of the region is a projection of the template jd each j face of the region is a projection of the template kd each k face of the region is a projection of the template where the source of projections for directions i j or k is at the point or the direction of projections for directions id jd or kd is a vector defined by Xo x component of projection Yo y component of projection Zi y component of projection where id refers to a template defined using the tmplt command Remarks A template see the tmplt command must be defined before using this command It is required that the template and the mesh being projected have the same number of nodes along each corresponding edge so that there is a one to one mapping between template and mesh An i face is a face where the i index is constant A j face and a k face are similar An i j or k face can be projected to a surface and constrained by this command Nodes of the face are placed on any projected surface and on the ray which passes through the corresponding node on the template If the i j or k direction was chosen then the ray originates at the specified center point If the id jd or kd direction was chosen then the ray direction is specified Copyright 1992
300. erface segments cas data Dade Sn roo ed 407 issi save interface segments fc eda Le RW dealer qms 407 si assign sliding interface to region oooooooooooooo o 408 sii assign sliding interfaces lees 409 shtoso shell to solid interface sace d EO RAE ORG 411 shtosoi shell to solid interface by progressions 412 18 Element Cross SECOS tai RETE eR RU RS Ed eS 413 n set orientation of normals on shells 413 Or orientation of element local coordinate axes 414 ssf project shell onto an interpolated surface 414 ssfi project shell onto an interpolated surface by progression 415 th thickness of shell 2e us Ao Re iine estu dd WR ai de 415 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 16 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual thi thickness of shell bbe eee RR 416 thic default shell thickness 253 nce e e re RR Roc RC ERR 416 VOSA Msp esae d Gas ee CI REN OE IR ee ai PUN IA SE be ue cd dd 417 ibm generate beams in the i direction 2 0 0 00 417 ibmi generate beams in the i direction by index progression 420 jbm generate beams in the j direction oooooooooooo o o 424 jbmi generate beams in the j direction by index progression 425 kbm generate beams in the k direction oooooooooooo o 429 kbmi generate beams in the k direction by index progression 432 20 Diagnos
301. erge phase command in the merge phase to display these conditions frbi prescribed nodal rotation by index progression frbi progression load_ amplitude options condition direction where options can be any of the following birth time death time offset offset offset where condition must be one of the following M velocities a accelerations d displacements dofv nodal dof velocities dofa nodal dof accelerations dofd nodal dof displacements where direction must be one of the following X about the x axis y about the y axis Z about the z axis V Xo Yo Zo about an arbitrary axis ex not about the x axis ey not about the y axis ez not about the z axis eV X Yo Zo not about an arbitrary axis Remarks A condition can be a velocity acceleration displacement or a nodal rotation This is suited for Dyna3D velocities accelerations and nodal rotations and Lsdyna In these codes the selected nodes are prescribed this condition relative to an axis of rotation Use the frb option in the co merge phase command in the merge phase to display these conditions Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 312 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fv prescribed velocities fv region load curve amplitude options f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time fo
302. erial number is the option of orientation of the cross section axis second axis orientation in the i direction second axis orientation in the k direction sd surface_ second axis orientation in the normal to the surface v xn yn none zn second axis orientation by the vector cross section is the cross section definition number assigned with bsd option can be reverse the order of the nodes is the reverse of the default si sid_ Sliding Interface Number vold volume volume of Discrete Beam lump inertia lumped inertia cablcid system_ local coordinate system id number defined by the Isys cabarea area cable area caboff offset cable offset csarea area CIOSS section area sharea area shear area of cross section inertia iss itt irr cross section moments of inertia thickness thickness roffl x x component of offset vector for first end point soffl y y component of offset vector for first end point toffl z z component of offset vector for first end point roff2 x x component of offset vector for last end point soff2 y y component of offset vector for last end point toff2 z z component of offset vector for last end point Idr1 release the x translation constraint at first end point Ids1 release the y translation constraint at first end point Idt1 release the z translation constraint at first end point Irri release the rotation constraint about the x axis at first end point Irs1 release the rotation constraint about th
303. es 2 The intra part block boundary bb command can glue two edges or faces together so that they will be considered by some of the smoothing commands as interior nodes 3 The unifm and unifmi commands can have a Neumann boundary condition neu and nuei commands which allows the nodes on the boundary to be smoothed along with the interior to produce near orthogonality near the boundaries The nodes will remain on any surfaces specified by the projection commands All of the iterative methods relax esm unifm and tme are solving elliptic differential equations to produce near orthogonality A node at the boundary is by default frozen to its initial position before smoothing This is known as the Dirichlet boundary condition for differential equations In the case of the uniform smoothing you can select some of the boundary nodes to be smoothed by allowing them to move along the surface s of projection until they form interior mesh lines that are nearly orthogonal to the boundary surface This is known as the Neumann boundary condition for differential equations An orthogonal mesh is ideal and is almost never realized except in the most trivial problems Take this into consideration when interpreting the results of any of the elliptic smoothing methods Whatever the order in which you give commands for a part they will be sorted according to the Command Hierarchy If several similar commands are issued they will be executed in the order
304. es allowing for the amplitude factor and the cylindrical vector components to be calculated using a FORTRAN expression Each expression can reference the nodal coordinates X Y and Z and the nodal indices I J and K When the part is generated in cylindrical coordinates the X in an expression will refer to the radial coordinate of the node and Y in an expression will refer to the angular coordinate of the node fvvci cylindrical variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities fvvci progression load curve t amp expr p expr amp expr z expr where load curve 7 is a load curve number or zero amp expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the FORTRAN expression for the radial component 0 expr is the FORTRAN expression for the polar angular component Z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Remarks See fvvc for remarks The only difference is that regions are selected using index progressions Example A mesh is defined in cylindrical coordinates Cylindrical variable velocity is prescribed for the outer surface of cylinder part by index progression The velocity has cosine magnitude depending on one half of angle 0 The simplified command file follows Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 325 TrueGrid display boundary velocity mesh definition led 10 11 1 c load curve 1 definition fvvci 2 1 cos y 2 1 0
305. es are defined globally along with the material properties In some cases the choices in the analysis options can affect the cross section properties The cross section properties available in the material and analysis options are highly dependent on the simulation code output option you select n set orientation of normals on shells n region Remarks The outward normal of shell elements is determines Default Outward Normal TrueGrid display shell normals by the order of the nodes defining the shell and the right hand rule The nodes can be reordered to switch the outward normal The default outward normal is in the direction of increasing 1 j or k index respectively If you are using an orthotropic material model you will want to specify the normal direction or surface orientation yourself The way to do it is first choose an orientation point with orpt Then issue this command to set the surface direction for every shell element in the region Example X block 1 2 1 2 1 2 0 1 0 1 O0 L sd 1 sp 0 0 0 1 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 413 sfi 1 2 1 2 1 2 sd 1 merge co n or orientation of element local coordinate axes or region r_axis_identifier s_axis_identifier where the identifiers must be uniquely i j or k Remarks This command is of importance if you are using an orthotropic or anisotropic materia
306. es 417 TAD m obsit uta e aus 417 TIG Slt desea Oa eoa visa 417 Thickness of lines ouem s 86 Thomas Middlecoff relaxation 258 MUNG a NA 79 caption 21 ea s odor URS 79 JEU ned ein nete A ea P beato REOR 382 TRI ui rad d essai vi re ds 31 198 258 BD cuyes Lucie phus aue e y 226 example 4 exse Deb ages aia 261 Hierarchy i22 dened es 199 208 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 505 inco said 21 nodal distribution 282 AAA aaah des 31 198 263 HIC diet ad eid d 258 TE s e nhe ere cr Pe PE RR A rs 382 Tale praze sred itri etum PAAR 279 examples cess sv weld mes 278 SBD 3 22893 479 4 a qeu EA 277 To button cece ha dS toate a ai 182 Toggle button pedi naga aaa 134 TOPAZ3D boundary conditions 369 374 A 378 RIS ede duy QR Ro 378 379 Do NT REED EIER RE 380 TopolOEV Xu argenti ocn cetus Penis 197 CMAN ta e 199 Topology of the mesh 96 127 TONUS 6526 0 Cae peed eso E 280 project Pis 273 276 Tp NPM svete we a ei ek aes 385 TP eod sebo 31 38 149 198 213 441 example 54 4 o9 aetna 66 214 278 hierarchy S C ice eda nee 198 208 Tracer particles TOD Satna qois a Ree ete es 368 LLOSA ME da 92 Transfinite interpolation 21 42 Transform o A ticket chee 213 214 Transformations block boundary 389 global ees A as 442 E A nie tec S 442 local coc sient 441 442 PED O ta 395 Tran
307. essure is assigned to the faces of the index progressions 1 02 3 1 0 4 and 1 Figure 335 The command file follows Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 348 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual definition of the mesh orpt 2 0 1 5 c definition of normals c the normals point toward c the point 2 01 5 Xd 1 0 2 3 1 0 4 0 2800 F pressure is assigned to the faces of the index progression pri Q00000 P Q00000 H L by the null load curve with amplitude 2800 pressure is assigned to the faces of the index progression TrueGrid display pressure 0 at 2 800E 03 gt i AS M Xu A N TA TRE 02 3 1 0 4 TS 1 0 2800 eee rire by the null load curve Figure 335 pressure by pri with amplitude 2800 merge co pr 0 c display of pressure for the null load curve pramp pressure amplitudes from a FORTRAN like expression pramp fortran_expression where the fortran_expression goes to the end of the record or is terminated by a semicolon where the mesh variables x y and z the pressure amplitude variable pramp the mesh indices i j and k and the temporary variables t1 t2 t3 can be used in the expression with the following options integers floating point and exponential numbers as operands parameters as operands Operators parentheses FORTRAN functions int nint abs mod
308. et initial offset xco x component x component of the orientation vector yco y component y component of the orientation vector and or Zco z component z component of the orientation vector This command creates or modifies a spring with the options in order to specify the direction of the spring and the material A node defining the end of the spring can be a vertex of the present part or 388 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual a point mass see npm and pm The spring command is usually invoked twice to generate a single spring once for each node of the spring This can be done across several parts or in the Merge Phase This spring is replicated along with the part see Irep grep and pslv Use the spd command to define the properties of the spring 17 Interfaces and Sliding Surfaces Objects can be created by which multiple parts will connect with one another These commands are very important when building complex multi part meshes The bb block boundary interface command defines an interface for parts which are not to move with respect to one another In most cases the region on each side of the interface must have the same number of nodes The trbb command defines slave transition block boundary interface and is used in combination with bb anytime that you wish the number of elements to change across an interface Use the inttr command to control the
309. f the displacement The angles are in degrees Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 309 Remarks This is the same as fd except that the direction is in spherical coordinates fdsi spherical fixed displacement fdsi progression load curve amplitude options p 0 where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where o 0 Q is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the direction of the displacement The angles are in degrees Remarks This is the same as fds except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression This is the same as fd except that it applies to an index progression and uses spherical coordinates TrueGrid display displacements Example A mesh is defined and projected onto the sphere in Cartesian coordinates Sphere is centered at the origin Null load curve is referenced 0 Displacement in spherical coordinates is assigned by index progressions 3 4 2 4 and2 3 2 3 Figure 314 The simplified command file follows block 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 2 WO Peo SL 0 1L 2707 c mesh definition projection of the mesh onto the sphere Figure 314 cylindrical fixed displacement Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ
310. f the bb command to transition the slave side to the master side Conditions and restrictions in the use of this command 1 The interface region must not have any holes 2 The first use of the bb command defines the master side of the interface This also means that there can be only one master side and possibly many slave sides of the interface 3 The coordinates of the corner nodes of the master side m1 m2 m3 m4 and of the slave side s1 s2 s3 s4 will be used to determine the best mapping from slave to master There are 8 possible ways that the slave side can be laid onto or mapped to the master side based on 4 rotations 0 90 180 and 270 degrees and 2 symmetries inversion no inversion The initial coordinates of the slave side determine the best mapping For all 8 mappings the distance from the master corners to the corresponding slave corners are calculated d1 d2 d3 d4 The mapping with the shortest sum of distances is used If there is no obvious choice the best selection is made and a warning message is issued If after visually inspecting the mesh in the part phase it is discovered that the wrong choice of mappings was made simply move the corners of the slave side of the interface to a better initial position This may get confusing so choose the corner vertices in the computational window Then choose the coordinates in the physical window and attach Choose the physical coordinates by displaying the appropriate master bl
311. f the mesh to a surface with the sf sfi patch ssf and ssfi commands gluing a region of the mesh to another part using the bb or trbb commands and placing an edge of the mesh permanently onto a 3D curve with the curf command Each time a mesh generation command is issued and the mesh redrawn the mesh is recalculated This is done because the set of surface projections are treated as a system of constraints that must be solved simultaneously One change in the list of constraints can have a global effect Since the constraints are satisfied simultaneously the order in which they are issued is of no consequence The order in which the mesh generation commands are applied to the mesh known as the Command Hierarchy is the key to understanding the projection method which is the heart of TrueGrid This order of execution is 1 Initialize There are three types of initialization i block and cylinder commands can contain initial coordinates of the vertices 11 Slave side of bb and trbb initializes and freezes block interface nodes 111 pb mb pbs q tr and ilin commands initialize vertices 2 Apply specified interpolation of edges along 3D curves cur curf curs cure edge splint patch Project vertices to specified surfaces sf ms ssf spp Apply specified edge linear interpolations lin Apply default edge linear interpolations Project edges to specified surfaces sf ms ssf spp patch Apply specified bi linear inte
312. ference the nodal coordinates X Y and Z and the nodal indices I J and K When the part is generated in cylindrical coordinates the X in an expression will refer to the radial coordinate of the node and Y in an expression will refer to the angular coordinate of the node Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 329 vaccsi prescribed nodal boundary accelerations spherical vaccsi progression load_curve_ amp_expr p expr expr expr where load_curve_ is a load curve number or zero amp_expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the FORTRAN expression for the radial component O expr is the FORTRAN expression for the polar angular component expr is the FORTRAN expression for the component Remarks See vaces for remarks The only difference is that regions are selected using index progressions rotation part initial rigid body rotation rotation x0 y0 z0 x rotation y_rotation z rotation where x0 y0 z0 is any point on the axis of rotation x rotation y rotation z rotation is the rotation vector in radians per unit time Remarks An initial rigid body rotation is assigned to the part This command will override any rotation or velocity commands issued in the Control Phase but just for this one part The ve or vei commands in the Part Phase can override this command for just a few regions of this part velocity part initial veloc
313. fic Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 248 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual solution In most cases 1 0 will be a satisfactory value The relax and relaxi commands are all executed are executed in their relative order Examples block 1 el 11 21 1 Oe 10 dh 2 2 pb 1 2 1 12 xy 3 22 1 69 pb 2 3 2 49 xy 2 50 1 2 pb 1 3 13 xy 596 3 93 relax 1 1 1 2 3 1 30 00001 1 This example shows that the relaxation can cross the initial region boundaries Notice that the mesh lines hug the concave boundaries and pull away from convex boundaries Figure 261 Relaxation with interior constraints after the tf and tfi commands These commands Figure 260 Simple Relaxation sd 1 cy 0 001004 sd 2 cy 0 4 00014 sd 3 plan 1 00100 sd 4 plan 1 00100 block 1 11 31 41 1 11 21 1 2 1 12 1014 Sfi 1 sd 1 sfi 2 3 2 1 sd 2 sfi 2 2 1 sd 3 sfi 3 2 1 sd 4 relax 11143 1 40 0001 1 res 4 4 3 3 0 95 res 1 1 3 J 05 95 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 249 maintained with relaxation sd 1 sp 2 5 sd 2 cy 2 5 block 1 11 2 e 2 dei 2 3 2 3 La g 3 Sfi 1 sfi 2 3 2 3 relax 1 1 1 4 The nodes that form the interior hole act like a boundary condition to the relaxation Figure 262 Relaxation
314. fixed view 0 00 0c cece eee eee 95 center fit picture to The Seteen ow oec e CE Oe ewe eh Pea 96 6 Computational W mde id bcc aite Sa e oen ee ne A A RS 96 Selecting Regions and Index Progressions with the Index Bars 97 Selecting a Region with Click and Drag in the Computational Window 105 EIndSx Bar Zone ox ortus Tola piu te NOR E a pd osea Gu at teo 107 7 The Environment Window vas AI sede bo IA ace 108 Choosing the Type of Picture 24D eee Res ee Eco y oe gen oa Ge 108 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 9 Selecting the Windows to be Redrawn 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 111 phys turn the Phys button on voi e un ee eee ee ese e Pe eS 111 both turn the Both button on q s oT peer wii aes aoe T eas 111 comp turn on the Comp button 0 0 111 Generating a New Picture 44 di e upra n 112 Dynamically Moving the Picture cs se e eee nee Ra OA ee eee Ra 112 Labels Panel Labeling ODEs icin ote cx dt Re end 115 Pick Panel Pick an Object 2 2225 dpe Ge Hone sania dalled nte d 124 Coordinate System of a Picked Point 20 0 0 cece cece eee 126 Pick Panel Picking a Point by Projection 00 0 cece eee 126 Pick Panel Pick a Point by Z buffer 0 0 0 0 eee eee 127 Pick Panel Picking a Nodes corr ADA ER 127 Pick Panel Picking a Vertex adas Fatt Gad a BETAS ead GRIS 127 Pick Panel
315. flecting boundary The ol and oli commands identify a face of the mesh as an outlet for fluid flow The reg command selects a region for the REFLEQS boundary condition The sfb and sfbi commands constrain face nodes using the tangent plane and normal to form a local coordinate system The sw and swi commands assign nodes that may impact a stone wall The syf and syfi assign faces of the mesh to a numbered symmetry plane with failure The trp command creates tracer particles for LS DYNA The efe command sets all conditions for the CF3D output option The fbe and fbci commands are used to define conditions for FLUENT Boundary and constraint properties that are independent of the regions and index progressions of a particular part can be found in the Global chapter b global nodal displacement and rotation constraints b region options where options can be any number of the following sid n for a set identification number dx init for x displacement dy init for y displacement dz init for z displacement rx init for rotation about the x axis ry init for rotation about the y axis rz init for rotation about the z axis where init is 0 to initialize to no constraint or 1 to constrain Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 351 Remarks This command adds constraints to nodes of a region in the global coordinate system Initially there are no constraints Each b command
316. focal point and the new point being inserted becomes the focal point There are several ways to choose the focal point Move the mouse close to a point in the picture and click on the F5 key Or click on the row in the table corresponding to the point you wish to focus on The up and down arrows in the keyboard will scroll through the points in the table to choose the focal point You cal also enter the sequence number of the point you wish to be focal Append This button will create a new row at the end of the table You can select a point from the picture either before or after you click on this button After selecting a point click on the Accept button to have the point added at the end of the table You can select the first point in the table using the F5 key with the mouse near this point in the picture Upon accepting this point you will close the curve The new inserted point becomes the new focal point The insertion also causes the Insert Mode to be checked Prepend This button will create a new row at the start of the table You can select a point from the picture either before or after you click on this button After selecting a point click on the Accept button to have the point added at the start of the table You can select the last point in the table using the F5 key with the mouse near this point in the picture Upon accepting this point you will close the curve The new inserted point becomes the new focal point The insertion also
317. for y displacement dz for z displacement rx for rotation about the x axis ry for rotation about the y axis or rz for rotation about the z axis followed by a value of 0 to initialize to no constraint or 1 to constrain Remarks First the normal to the mesh or surface which formed the mesh is constructed for each node This direction becomes the local z axis Use the orpt command to orient this direction This is sufficient for some problems so no flow direction is needed to construct a complete local coordinate system When a general purpose local coordinate system is needed to apply local boundary constraints then a second direction corresponding to the local x axis must be specified There are several options A mesh line can be used to select the direction or a vector can be specified If this command is used Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 365 several times for different regions that overlap the nodes in the overlapping region will be assigned two local system boundary constraints which may result in the node not being allowed to move or maybe not allowed in the simulation sfbi locally constrain face nodes by progression sfbi progression type flow_direction option_list where type can be mesh or surface flow_direction can be none if the constraints requires no flow direction i if the flow direction corresponds to the i direction j if
318. force moments applied along the following vector 2 for deflection rotations are measured and force moments applied along the projection of the spring damper onto the plane with the following normal prflg flag print flag where flag can be 0 for forces are printed in DEFORC file 1 for forces are not printed in DEFORC file ofsi offset initial offset xco x component x component of the orientation vector yco y component y component of the orientation vector and or Zco z component z component of the orientation vector Remarks A face can be either a master or slave side to this set of springs Then each node on the slave side is paired with a node on the master side to form a spring damper pair Use the spd command to define the properties of the spring damper The degrees of freedom to be coupled with the spring damper are specified for all of the nodes within the specified region spring create modify a spring spring spring 7 options where spring f is the number of the spring that you are creating and options can be sinc increment increment the spring number when replicating the part vlijk vertex of the part as the first node pmi pointmass_ point mass as the first node pmincl increment first point mass number when making part replications Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 387 Remarks dx1 constrain spring in the x direction at the firs
319. from the Environment Window Alternatively you can type labels nodes TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 122 Figure 67 was created by options Labels Brick and Display List Part Show All from the Environment Window Alternatively you can type labels 3d dap disp Figure 67 Brick Labels Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 123 Pick Panel Pick an Object Pick Label A object such as a surface curve surface edge or block boundary can be selected using the mouse to select for the Display List or to F9 or F7 Prints J project or attach a portion of the mesh In order to select an object referenced by a label first press one of the buttons described above to Pick Node E3 MEN display labels for the type of object in which you are interested Next select the Pick panel Figure 68 Pick Panel in the Environment Window and select the Pick Object by Label button Press the Left Mouse Button on a label in the picture and the object referenced by the label will be highlighted Pressing the Left Mouse Button on the same label again will turn off the highlighting pressing the Left Mouse Button on another label will turn off the highlighting for the first and highlight the second
320. fv fz bvi prescribed boundary surface velocities for NEKTON bvi progression fx fy fz Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 316 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual acc prescribed boundary acceleration acc region load curve amplitude options f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where ss f f is a vector in Cartesian coordinates giving the direction of the acceleration Remarks At each node in the region the acceleration will have a direction given by the direction vector fx Sy 2 Example Mesh and load curve 1 are defined Acceleration is assigned to the region The caption refers to the load_curve_ 1 with the maximum size of the vector 1 044E 00 The simplified command file follows block 1 5 1 5 1 3 1 5 1 5 1 3 c mesh definition led 100 1 1 c load curve 1 definition ace ld 222 2 de de 30k 1 c acceleration definition c for region 1122 22 c load curve c amplitude 1 c direction 3 0 1 merge set tv disp c hide mode co size 7 c size of arrow co acc 1 c display acceleration arrows Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 317 TrueGrid display
321. g coordinates with the corresponding nodes on the master side The nodes on both sides remain distinct A merge command in the merge phase such as the stp command is needed to merge each pair of nodes Any small tolerance will cause these node pairs to merge Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 390 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The region of the mesh first referenced by a block boundary interface with the bb command using a specific id becomes the master side of that interface The regions of the mesh in subsequent references to a block boundary with the same id become slaves This command has several related functions It establishes the geometry or shape of the mesh to be saved This same command is then used to retrieve the geometry When the master and slave faces have the same topology i e they have matching nodes then the slave side nodes are mapped one to one onto the master interface nodes When the slave side has a multiple the number of elements as the master side then the intermediate slave interface nodes are interpolated so that the slave side has the same shape as the master When the master side has a multiple the number of elements of the slave side the slave side interface nodes are mapped to the master side by skipping nodes on the master side so that the slave side has the same shape as the master This is also the case when the trbb command is used on the slave side instead o
322. gions and if these regions are all glued to each other at the interfaces with the bb command then that central vertex will be smoothed as well The weight factor is used to interpolate between the old nodal coordinates and the new within each iteration of the relaxation If it is set to 1 0 then the new value is used If it is set to a smaller number then a point is interpolated between the new and old coordinates of a node The interpolation parameter makes it possible to slow or speed up the convergence In most cases 1 0 will be a satisfactory value The unifm and unifmi commands are all executed after the tf and relax esm and tme commands The unifm and unifmi commands are executed in their relative order Examples This first example demonstrates the quality of smoothing within a cylindrical mesh This is a slice through the middle of a cylindrical mesh after the uniform smoothing block 1 11 1 11 1 6 11 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 268 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual pb 1 2 12 3 xy 0 0 pb 7 2 L 22 3 x U sd 1 cy 00 0 0011 sfi 2 sd 1 unifm 1 1 1 2 2 3 100 01 Inthe following example different methods are used to interpolate a symmetric mesh where 5 blocks meet at a vertex This demonstrates one of the subtle differences in the different methods The bb command is needed to glue them together With five blocks the center node
323. he product of the temperature derived from the temperature expression in this command and the amplitude of the load curve at the appropriate time in the simulation hfl specify flows and fluxes hfl region label rate where label can be any one of heat for heat flow flow for fluid flow amps for current or flux for magnetic flux rate constant Remarks First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation that is how to orient the outward normal vector Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 374 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual hfli specify flows and fluxes by index progression hfli region label rate where label can be any one of heat for heat flow flow for fluid flow amps for current or flux for magnetic flux rate constant Remarks First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation that is to orient the outward normal vector inizone initial conditions for the REFLEQS option inizone region var_name arr_name where var_name can be nvu fori velocity component nvv forj velocity component nvw for k velocity component nvpp for pressure correction nvk1 for kinetic energy of turbulence nvk2 for kinetic energy of turbulence nvdl for dissipation of turbulence energy nvd2 for dissipation of turbulence energy nyh for stagnation enthalpy nvrx for x direction composite radiation flux nvry for y direction composite radiation flux nvrz for
324. he default and is referred to as the Append Prepend jj Insert Mode natural derivatives Alternatively you can Delete from to choose the first derivatives at the start and or end control points Check either or both boxes for the derivatives Then enter the end derivatives following the rules for entering and modifying data in a dialogue box Be sure to type Enter to complete your entry for each component of the derivatives After finishing the input you have to save the MU created curve by pressing the Save button Figure 174 Control of End Derivatives The next picture shows the difference between the shapes of curve with natural derivatives curve 1 and curve with specified end derivatives curve 2 The end derivatives are vectors whose magnitude will have an effect on the shape of the curve TrueGrid DRAW Defined Curves Figure 175 Control of End Derivatives Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 186 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Inserting a Cubic Spline Control Point U confirm Selection Accept Quit Option to Specify Derivatives Before a new control point can be added its position
325. he mesh onto the surfaces using the MESH menu and SF or SFI dialogue Alternatively use the LABELS tab and the SURFACES button in the Environment window to label the surfaces in the picture Then select the PICK tab and the LABEL button so that you can pick a surface in the picture by its label Move the mouse into the Physical window and select the appropriate surface by clicking on its label Then use the PROJECT button in the Environment window to project the selected region of the mesh to the selected surface This latter method is the preferred method because it is more efficient This is repeated as needed to deform the mesh to the required shape Set the part s initial velocity if different from the default using the DIS VEL ACC menu and VELOCITY dialogue Set nodal constraints using the BOUNDARY menu and B or BI dialogue Assign faces or nodes to a numbered contact surface using the INTERFACE menu and ST or SIT dialogue Impose a pressure load controlled by a numbered load curve using the FORCE menu and PR or PRI dialogue Set the default material for all regions of the part by using the MATERIAL menu and the MATE dialogue Regions requiring a different material are set with the MT or MTI dialogue End the part by using the PARTS menu and ENDPART dialogue You are now in the Control Phase Only the Text Menu window is displayed Repeat the creation of a mesh part as often as needed Assemble and Verify 66 Use the MERGING m
326. he part which are to be smoothed when a unifm or unifmi command is issued The default is all boundary nodes are off When a unifm or unifmi smoothing command is are the set of nodes to receive the Neumann boundary condition is recorded The nodes to receive this condition in the execution ofthe unifm or unifmi command cannot be changed once the unifm or unifmi command is issued To change the nodes that are affected by the Neumann boundary condition deactivate the unifm or unifmi command use the neu or neui command to change the set of nodes to be affected and then reissue the unifm or unifmi command At this time the Neumann boundary condition is only affective when smoothing a 3D solid blocks Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 263 This allows a boundary node to float along the projected surfaces smoothing any nodal zoning or interpolation constraints This is a departure from the way most interpolation and smoothing commands operate because it will allow the boundary nodes to move These boundary nodes will be moved by the unifm or unifmi command to approximate an orthogonal boundary layer of elements It can only an approximate an orthogonal boundary layer for several reasons Most importantly from a theoretical point of view in most cases there does not exist a truly orthogonal mesh along the boundary Also this is an iterative method which slowly converges to th
327. he unspecified coordinate components keep their previous coordinates In a cylinder part the x y and z coordinates are interpreted as the radius angle and z coordinates respectively in the local coordinate system of the part see eycorsy command mb translates vertices mb region coordinate_identifier offset where the format for offset depends on the following coordinate_identifier x x offset y y offset Zz offset xy x offset y offset xz x offset z offset yz y offset z offset xyz x offset y offset z offset Remarks Add the offset to the coordinates of every node in the specified region This command is recorded in both the text window and the tsave session file when the mouse is used to move or attach regions see Move Pts or Attach Example block 1 3 5 7 L35 7 3 1 1 3 Before mb After mb Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 209 mbi translates vertices mbi progression coordinate_identifier offset where the format for offset depends on the following coordinate_identifier x x offset y y offset Zz offset xy x offset y offset xz x offset z offset yz y offset z offset xyz x offset y offset z offset Remarks This is the same as the mb command above only it takes an argument of a progression of reduced indices instead of a single region description This command is r
328. here interface_number is the block boundary interface number Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 404 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual abb add a block boundary to the picture abb interface_number where interface_number is the block boundary interface number dbbs display a set of block boundaries in the picture dbbs interface_list where interface_list is a list of block boundary interface numbers rbbs remove a set of block boundaries from the picture rbbs interface_list where interface_list is a set of block boundary interface numbers abbs add a set of block boundaries to the picture abbs interface_list where interface_number is a set of block boundary interface numbers dabb display all block boundaries dabbs rabb remove all block boundaries from the picture rabb Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 405 bbint block boundary interior mesh lines bbint switch where switch can be on off Remarks all interior mesh lines are shown default all interior mesh lines are not shown This option works for the wire hide and fill modes flowint create named regions for the CFX output file flowint region interface_type interface_name where interface_type can be one of press symmet wall cndbdy inlet outlet user2d solid solcon porous user3d interface_name Remarks pressure f
329. his is not possible at a point where the surface is not smooth In this case the tangent planes in the neighborhood of the point are averaged Advantages of the Projection Method There are important advantages to the projection method compared to the typical mesh generator using a mapping method Most importantly the surfaces do not have to meet perfectly for the projection method to work This means that if your geometry is coming from a CAD CAM system or a Solids Modeler the small gaps between the surfaces or the small overlaps do NOT need to be cleaned In figure 17 the two surfaces outlined in red do Li X A dr Pla yy A WW f eae Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 2 surfaces mapping projecting Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 39 not meet perfectly And yet the mesh projected to the two surfaces in figure 19 are unaffected by these imperfections On the contrary figure 18 shows the problems when using the standard mapped mesh technique The mapped meshes will overlap or have gaps wherever the surfaces overlap or have gaps Merging these nodes across these imperfections may be easy in this case but one can imagine worse cases where merging would be difficult Many mesh generators would not accept this flawed geometry Figure 19 demonstrates the need to combine surfaces The projection method makes this a triviality A composite surface
330. hit aS eben tae 113 Keyboard commands 108 Keystrokes for geometric selection 99 in dialogue box 177 into which window 173 Keywords se id tease wd dh 56 A NA 88 89 113 114 DOU i2 coda ce ela tiated 111 Label button 115 179 DEBE 3 eee rere ee a ree are 115 Label button 66 141 Labels ug o em 115 305 AA 423 427 431 cr eT PT 123 block boundary 141 button 115 116 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 489 QIVDE Vta 120 CURVE id Saa 141 MOLES 6s ou eor AA 122 overlapping ah dos es x ds 116 panel es tet vehit 115 212 PAT os phos ste Re ees 121 joe METEO EINE 178 So Scu Le een delaras pha a on 118 Sdedge and Edge 231 A nnn AGER 119 o 1e res ea wenn es 141 surface edge its 141 WV tink ganas a E de 87 Labels button loss ode rus 141 Laplace differential equation 42 Large curvature cios PERROS 41 II E Metin ei 124 Geometric objects 124 picking 92 us usa va 126 141 Sels iu cho LIRE Y cte Rusa 138 139 Lawrence Livermore National Lab 22 LANE aa RIA 37 E A O e da une ll 360 EXAMPLE ur os 449 EOL eert ara AL ario UA 360 Led example il erts org 65 A O O 441 E IST EIS 442 LV aruba tati has es 73 ld CIBO us vaa dope tuu BO tid 415 INTO A ee MH V M M 20 Learning TrueGrid
331. hose cases where the geometry remains unchanged or perhaps the topology of the polygon surface remains unchanged it is better that the symbol is saved for subsequent runs tr transform a region of the mesh tr region trans where a trans is a transform which is formed left to right from the following mx x offset my y offset mzz offset v x offset y offset z offset rx theta ry theta rz theta raxis angle x Yo Zo X Yn Zn rxy ryz YZx tf origin x axis y axis where each of the arguments consists of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s ij label of a labeled point from a surface Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 213 ftf Ist_origin Ist x axis Ist y axis 2nd origin 2nd x axis 2nd_y axis where each of the arguments consists of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz cy rho theta z sp rho theta phi pt c i pt s i j Cartesian coordinates cylindrical coordinates spherical coordinates label of a labeled point from a 3D curve label of a labeled point from a surface inv invert the present transformation esca scale factor xsca scale factor ysca scale factor zsca scale factor Remarks This command transforms a region of the mesh before interpolation
332. how the profile of the mesh according to the selected measure The abscissa is the measure and the ordinate is the number of elements when there is one measurement per element or element segments when there are several measurements per element The range of the measurement is written to the save file and it is displayed in the text window during an interactive session This measure cannot detect invalid elements because nodes have not yet been merged Only in the merge phase can you determine invalid elements with this command The volume option integrates the volume of a brick element using the tri linear shape function to interpolate the volume It is possible for the volume to be negative in some regions of the element in that case the net volume will not be realistic Shell elements are given thickness and the same method is then used to calculate the volume Ifthe shell element was not assigned a thickness then the default of 1 is used The avolume option has the advantage that it is not affected by negative volumes since the absolute volume is integrated Shells are given thickness as for the volume option above and then treated like a brick element The pointvolume option approximates the volume of an element using the Jacobian at a single point in the center of the element The shell elements are given thickness and treated the same as bricks see above Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved Tr
333. i concentrated nodal loads Figure 328 concentrated load fci progression load curve amplitude f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor and Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 339 s f f is a vector in Cartesian coordinates giving the direction of the load Remarks This is the same as fc except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression fcc cylindrical concentrated nodal loads fcc region load curve amplitude p 0z where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor p 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the displacement The angle is in degrees Remarks This is the same as fc except that the direction is in cylindrical coordinates fcci cylindrical concentrated nodal loads feci progression load curve amplitude p 0z where progression must be a set of vertices edges or faces load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor p 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the displacement The angle is in degrees Remarks This is the same as fcc except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression This is the same as fc except that it applies to an index progression and uses cylindrical coordinates Example The part in this example has a cylindrical shape
334. iagonal of an element A brick element has 12 diagonals along the faces and 2 interior diagonals A shell element has 2 diagonals If the largest diagonal is zero then the ratio is set to zero If the smallest diagonal is zero the ratio is set to a very large constant With the elm and elmoff commands you can see the locations in the mesh of the most interesting elements e g you can use measure to measure volume and then elm to highlight the biggest elements meai choose a way to measure mesh quality meai progression option where option can be volume to integrate the volume of each element avolume to integrate the absolute volume jacobian to compute the determinant of the Jacobian orthogon to measure deviations from orthogonality 90 degrees Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 438 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks smallest for the smallest dimension of each element pointvol to calculate the volume with a one point integration formula aspect to calculate the aspect ratio for each element warp to measure the angle between opposite corners of each element face stiffn measure the stiffness find the condition number of the Jacobian See mea for remarks 21 Parts Commands cycorsy frame of reference for cylinder part cycorsy trans where trans is a left to right product of the following basic operations mx x offset to translate in the x direction my y offset t
335. ial boundary condition 384 vi electrostatic potential boundary condition 384 16 Springs Dampers and Point Masses lslsleseeee een 385 npm creates a node with a point mass 385 pm point mass to a vertex of the present part 386 spdp assigns a face to be half of a set of spring damper pairs 386 spring create modify a spring vi arcada ented ince E nda 387 17 Interfaces and Sliding Surfaces 604 oi ode A te tea Rea 389 bb block boundary interface 0 0 eee eee 389 trbb slave transition block boundary interface 395 inttr trbb interpolation parameter 0 0 00 c eee eee o 404 dbb display a block boundary in the picture 404 rbb remove a block boundary from the picture 404 abb add a block boundary to the picture oooooo o 405 dbbs display a set of block boundaries in the picture 405 rbbs remove a set of block boundaries from the picture 405 abbs add a set of block boundaries to the picture 405 dabb display all block boundaries 00 0000 ea ee 405 rabb remove all block boundaries from the picture 405 bbint block boundary interior mesh lines o o oooo 406 flowint create named regions for the CFX output file 406 flowinti create named regions for the CFX output file 407 iss save int
336. ial is a multiple block structured mesh Some blocks can be removed to place holes in the mesh Then faces of the mesh are given shape By default nodes are equally spaced along edges Functions can be selected to control the distribution of nodes along edges of the mesh By default edges faces and interiors of blocks of the mesh are automatically interpolated Alternative interpolations of the interiors of faces and blocks can be selected You have the control you need with the minimum complexity Topology Of The Mesh TrueGrid generates block structured meshes consisting of hexahedron 3D solid elements aligned in rows columns and layers to form a block Each row has the same number of elements Likewise each column has the same number of elements and each layer has the same number of elements You can imagine a block mesh by slicing a rectangular block at regular intervals along each of the three coordinate axis This block mesh is the basic component in building complex meshes A part can consist of many blocks It is also possible to generate 2D shell elements 1D beam elements can also be generated by embedding them within the solid or shell elements Additionally the solids of shells can then be removed Full Indices Each node in a block mesh can be identified by three indices The first index referred to as the i index identifies the sequence number of the slice in the mesh along the first coordinate axis The second j and third
337. ic Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 287 dom specify the region applied to x y z tl t2 and t3 dom region Remarks This sets the reduced index region used by the commands x y z tl t2 and t3 when assigning the coordinates x y z and the temporary variables t1 t2 and t3 This region is initially set to the entire part When an equation is used to generate coordinates the equation is evaluated for each node within the specified region If a node has been deleted from the mesh then the equation is not evaluated for that node and no assignment is made Examples dom 111222 x 2 x The x coordinates are doubled in the region with reduced indices ranging in the i j and k direction from to 2 x assign x coordinates by evaluating a function x fortran expression where fortran_expression is an algebraic expression Remarks This command evaluates a FORTRAN like expression and assign the result to the x coordinate for each node in the specified region see the dom command These remarks apply to all the commands X y Z t1 t2 and t3 Spaces before or after the sign are optional These commands are applied in a region specified by the last dom command If no dom command has been issued they are applied to the entire part Equations are evaluated after initialization interpolation projection and smoothing of the mesh Equations are the last functions ex
338. ically entered into the Point List window for the LP3 SPLINE and TWSURF interactive 3D curves Selected labeled surface edges are automatically entered into the COEDGE interactive 3D curve Edge List window which builds composite 3D curves Surfaces curves block boundaries and parts can be selected by clicking on the labels manipulated using the Display List panel Labels are not allowed to overlap Sometimes you may need to zoom in to see a label appear on the desired object Rotating the picture may also help In the Part Phase the following buttons are active in the Labels panel the buttons that are grayed out are inactive Off Remove all labels from the picture Surface Display labels for surfaces in the picture Surf Point Display labels for points on surfaces in the picture Surf Edge Display labels for edges of surfaces in the picture Curve Display labels for 3D curves in the picture Curve Point Display labels for points on 3D curves in the picture Part Display labels for parts in the picture BB Display labels for block boundaries in the picture In the Merge Phase there are additional active buttons Beams Display labels for 1D beam bar or truss elements in the picture Beam elements are numbered independent of other elements starting at 1 Shells Display labels for linear 3 and 4 node 2D shell plate or membrane elements in the picture Linear shell elements are numbered independent of other elements starting
339. ich cannot be described by a single region description See the description of the computational window for selecting complex index progression Index progressions are mentioned in this section for completeness By using your mouse you can highlight a portion of the physical or computational mesh and select that portion as input for a command The distinction between Regions and Index Progressions is noteworthy because some TrueGrid commands apply to Regions and others apply to Index Progressions Often a command comes in two versions one for Regions e g sf and the other for Progressions e g sfi An i at the end of a command name generally indicates that it is applied to Index Progressions There are actually four different techniques using the mouse to select a Region or Index Progression Each technique has its advantages It is best to become proficient in all four techniques so that you can easily select objects of the mesh You will need to do this many times in the process of creating a mesh The four methods are 1 Index bars 2 Click and drag in the computational window 3 Function keys F5 and F6 in the physical window 4 Pick Region and click and drag in the physical window This section ofthe manual discusses only the last two methods which involve the physical window See the section on the computational window to learn how to select objects in the mesh from the computational window To highlight the Vertex which is close
340. id Manual April 6 2006 419 command A 1D sliding interface can be specified for each string of beams Only the first sliding interface is specified The remainder are assumed to follow in sequence Use sid command to define each sliding interface sid 1 rebar sid 2 rebar sid 3 rebar sid 4 rebar block 1 3 554 3571 3 5 1 3 5701 3155 L 3 5 ibm 1 33 33 2 2 1L 3 sm bd In the above example 4 rebar sliding interfaces are generated between 4 strings of beam elements and the corresponding brick elements respectively Since this 1s a sliding interface there are new nodes automatically generated for the beam elements so that the beams are not coupled to the solid elements except through the sliding interface Care should be taken not to merge these additional nodes out in the merge phase They automatically will not be merged with their equivalent solid element nodes with the same coordinates but they can be merged to other parts of the mesh Use dummy sliding interfaces to control the merging Many of the options are designed for a specific simulation code or for a specific beam type There is some overlap in that some ofthe options are used for several different types or simulation codes Because of this complexity you are advised to use the dialogue box to make your selection of options when using this command The options override the properties given by the bsd or bind commands See also bm bsd bind and orpt commands
341. id Manual April 6 2006 T Mesh Density Parameterization iex A PRESS Oa eet 45 Reduced Indices a ets aes ge a ene Raa eR ea tes 45 Viettices and REGIONS AAA Mut CE O aie usd a PR DS 46 Index Progressions e 5e od sna eb dete eee eu Oe ada As 48 Graphical Version of Index Progressions 020s eee eee eee eee 50 Examples 7a tos eed datu hse oad sind asd MAM Abu b otra Ma See went d 51 Te Conventions sse artis Mr TEE 56 8 Running MUEGHAS ou ioa td rta tada De 57 Execution Environment a let BAP lacey a Co cur d i 57 Two Modes and Two Input Channels 0 0 0 0 cece eee eens 57 Command Line wicks AS EA A EE E EA 58 Mesh Generation La AA ated AA DAR 61 TORINO dde as dal aa ed ls ees dsd 62 CAD IGES Geometry riada Cha eed sil dades 62 INSCCNANCONS ars Miia wa Raa pee ate a ala ON 62 A NI O Mesh deme ab ad 63 Basic Interactive Session vd ene VUL Uere dr RUE NN 64 II Graphical User Interface oir e ema e err aem peg ee x 68 1 TrueGrid on Various ISSSTE aa be ea 69 SGI UNIX Workstation 222 reste id Y edi d dean d o ced qo Lora es 69 COMPAQ amp DEC Alpha UNIX Workstation o ooooococoooooooooo 69 SUN UNIX Workstation sess oid ex oce ue Race eel CR RR Pee n RC 69 HP UNIX Workstation iced 2a erp DER ds uade Te wee we 70 IBM UNIX W rkstation a ks BA e hasce e edes 70 APPLE UNIX Workstation Smart ERI TENGO Cede hi 70 INTEL or AMD PC Running LINUX esseeeee ne 70 INTEL or AMD PC Running WIN
342. in the sequence of control points must be selected This is done by selecting one of the artos Y lear aii existing control points as the focal point Insertion lAppenal Prependl KJ insert Mode is made in sequence after the focal point There are fron to five methods to select the focal point Method 1 Scroll through the control points with the keyboard arrow keys The mouse must be in the Point List or Physical window As you scroll you will see a small box in the Physical Window move from one control point to another Oo 4 Q Ul F W NM H Method 2 Click on the row of the desired control Figure 176 Insertion of a Control Point point with the Left Mouse Button Method 3 Move the Mouse Pointer close to the control point in the picture and type the F5 function key Method 4 Enter the control point sequence number in the field after the Insert button Either type the Enter key or click on the Insert Button Method 5 Click on the Prepend or Append button which moves the focal point to the first or last wee id Praw position in the table resp
343. in to see the label After repairs are made continue as before A sequence of edges can be selected by type the first and last sequence numbers of the edges and them click on the Delete button You can click on one of the rows and then click the Delete button to delete that one edge You can also insert an edge by selected the edge that precedes the one to be inserted Then click on the label of the edge to be inserted If the automatic selection cannot determine the next curve or if there are no more edges to be selected it will not make a next likeliest choice Figure 192 Zoom in to get the correct edge ee E Closed Curve B 20 21 z2 3 Rl Figure 193 Save as curve 1 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 194 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual When all edges have been selected save the curve Click on the Save button Then fill in the curve number to be assigned to this curve In most cases to complete the saving of the curve click the Open Curve button If you wish for the two ends of the curve to meet click on the Close Curve button instead TrueGrid DRAW Defined Surface edges Figure 194 Composite curve Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved Tr
344. in window units 1 0 means the full width of the window Remarks Move the picture to the right where 1 unit is the size of the screen A translation like this causes the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 89 center of rotation to be recalculated at the center of the screen and in the center of the z coordinate range of the object in the enter of the picture unless the picture frame of reference was fixed Except for the calculation of the center of rotation this command is reversible by using a negative translation or the command with the same translation u move picture up u distance where distance is in window units 1 0 means the full height of the window Remarks Move the picture up where 1 unit is the size of the screen A translation like this causes the center of rotation to be recalculated at the center of the screen and in the center of the z coordinate range of the object in the center of the picture unless the picture frame of reference was fixed Except for the calculation of the center of rotation this command is reversible by using a negative translation or the command d with the same translation d move picture down d distance where distance is in window units 1 0 means the full height of the window Remarks Move the picture down where 1 unit is the size of the screen A translation like this causes the center of rotation to be recalcu
345. index bars This frame has been removed using the ibzone command Selecting Regions and Index Progressions with the Index Bars In the Computational Window you can use the mouse to select dots and or segments along the index bars The index bars are the 3 green lines formed from segments between dots with small half discs referred to as dots These three bars are associated with the three directions in the computational mesh and referred to as the 1 j and k index directions They are found in the top k index bar bottom i index bar and right j index bar side of the computational window Your selection will also appear as Regions of the computational and physical meshes This is how you can choose Regions and Index Progressions as arguments in commands Once you have finished graphically selecting a Region or Progression a Control A or F1 will copy it into a command s dialogue box when the mouse is over the dialogue box or text command line otherwise The Control D or F2 will clear all selections in the computational window To toggle a dot on or off along an index bar first click on the F2 function key and then left click Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 97 your mouse in the neighborhood of the dot You will have to experiment a bit in order to determine the exact neighborhood corresponding to each dot The color of the dot will change to red for
346. indrical coordinates fvs spherical prescribed velocities fvs region load curve amplitude options p 0 where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where p 0 Q is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the direction of the velocity The angles are in degrees Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 315 Remarks This is the same as fv except that the direction is in spherical coordinates fvsi spherical prescribed velocities by index progression fvsi progression load curve amplitude options p 0 where load curve is a load curve number amplitude is an amplitude factor to be multiplied by the load curve where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where o 0 Q is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the direction of the velocity The angles are in degrees Remarks This is the same as fvs except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression This is the same as fv except that it applies to an index progression and uses spherical coordinates bv prescribed boundary surface velocities for NEKTON bv region fx
347. inguished from the assignment of a mass to a vertex of the present part The latter can be done using the pm command In both cases the point mass is replicated or transformed along with the present part see Irep grep and pslv In order to create a new node and assign it a point mass such that it does not get replicated or transformed along with the present part then use the npm command in the Merge Phase In order to assign a point mass to any node in the mesh such that it does not get replicated or transformed along with the present part use the pm command in the Merge Phase Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 385 pm point mass to a vertex of the present part pn region node_mass options where node mass is the assigned mass and options can be mdx for no mass displacement in the x direction mdy for no mass displacement in the y direction mdz for no mass displacement in the z direction mrx for no mass rotations about the x axis mry for no mass rotations about the y axis mrz for no mass rotations about the z axis ixx mom to specify the moment of inertia about the x axis iyy mom to specify the moment of inertia about the y axis izz mom to specify the moment of inertia about the z axis pdamp alpha for the proportional damping factor ABAQUS and or cdamp raction for the fraction of critical damping ABAQUS Remarks This is distinguishe
348. initializations and has an effect similar to initialization The end vertices are moved to the closest points on the 3D curve The remainder of the nodes within the interior of the edge are then interpolated along the curve between the two end vertices The distribution of the nodes can be further controlled using the res drs as das or nds commands It is possible to define a closed 3D curve If this is done then there are two possible ways to interpolate a sequence of edge nodes between the two end vertices The shortest arc length path is chosen between the two end vertices Care is needed in distributing edge nodes along a 3D curve which has corners or sharp bends It may be impossible for the iterative method to position the nodes along the curve such that the distances between the nodes satisfy the spacing rules of the res drs as das and nds commands If this is the case then a warning message will be issued saying that the nodes may be distributed by arc length along the curve instead of by chord length between nodes The best solution to this problem is to add an intermediate partition in the block mesh and place it at the corner or sharp bend of the curve Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 228 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The positioning of an edge along a 3D curve is an initialization of the edge nodes These same edge nodes can then be projected to one or more surfaces The proje
349. interpolation within a trbb region The bbinfo command prints information about all of the master block boundary interfaces Use the following commands to control what block boundary interfaces appear in the picture dbb rbb abb dbbs rbbs abbs dabb rabb When specifying a sequence of interfaces type the first and last numbers only with a colon between them Use the sid command to define the properties of a sliding interface The si and sii commands are then used to associate regions of the mesh to either the master or slave side of the sliding interface When using shells for DYNA3D and LSDYNA be sure to use the orpt command to properly orient the faces Use the siinfo command to print a table of information about all of the sliding interfaces Also when merging nodes for the first time in the merge phase additional information will be printed in the text window about the sliding interfaces Sliding interfaces are not merged The flowint and flowinti commands create named regions for the CFX output file The iss and issi command creates saved interface segments for DYNA3D bb block boundary interface bb region interface options transform where interface is the interface number where an option can be map m specifying the mapping between master and slave where transform is a sequence of transformation operators consisting of a product from left to right of the following mx x offset my y offset mzz offset Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ
350. ion 92 Ataca cds 279 O pou ele dw md EE 354 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 476 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual flowint 406 407 Circle dil Qu thes re IA 78 Cj MAA AN 358 Clear All button Edge MA ade needs 180 Cle r Button dias a 134 Click and drag 97 98 105 128 Close Curve button 195 COM OTN MC TREE 305 Cn2p Sd option 273 Cn2p Sfi option tn da Set ok 276 Co UA GORE a RRA ok Lan 352 A o ares 352 dE ei coda qao t oy at 352 Obi tt a E e 312 OE ues ca d 2 See 414 427 432 TK Gd bith hose ie E MEA RS 352 IX eique uda od 332 TZ A to des bos d 352 Sb sette e te dg t 408 409 thickness 415 416 CDedB dd ata 193 PSO A ae qu ete ext 180 METANO e da a 179 CO rai As 116 example A 220 A AE 20 Color graphics aid ss 109 highlighting 99 100 in dialogue box 173 176 177 IOS y calla ti 98 100 104 SOI ta dd 86 Colum rad te eae pde RUE 37 Command activation and update 207 iS E 34 59 Hierarchy 41 207 234 292 293 MES OA pe eae 75 lile a it als 58 TCTs ota aio iat re eee tete 76 order of execution 208 234 Sequence ti ed 295 SIAR A O reo 76 Command file ias dioe ces 58 TOs Shs a Goce itii does aes 20 Command Hierarchy 198 272 equations ces sued diia a 288 Hit tenet eas eed 296 initialization 208 UP
351. ion l Figure 346 rotated master side of bb If you are using a transformation on the part to locate it in the global coordinate system use the same set of operates to transform the interface When you are defining the slave side of an interface use the transformation option to indicate how to go from the coordinate system of the master interface part to the coordinate system of the slave interface part When it is used a transformation is needed for the master or the slave side but never both When a transformation is used on the master side think of it as being saved in a location convenient for the slave side When a transformation is used on the slave side think of it as instructions on how to move the master side to the slave side If the master interface part and the slave interface part are both in the same local coordinate systems there is no need for a transformation SS SSA 2 22 DU 25 SS 2 Many slave sides can be mapped onto one master interface This usually means that each slave side bb command will include a transformation One part may use the same interface for several faces of the mesh with different transformations This is one way to create a section of a periodic mesh The simplified command file Figure 347 1 master and 2 slaves SS ss LA V AN Va Y SS gt EL E ARS Zl e NU Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications In
352. ion TrueGrid will execute commands from the command input file until it reaches one of the interrupts which causes TrueGrid to switch to receiving input interactively When TrueGrid is receiving input interactively you can issue the resume command click on the RESUME button or type resume to resume execution of the commands from the command input file The typical TrueGrid session is with interactive input and with the Graphical User Interface Command Line You can run TrueGrid from a window The syntax for WINDOWS is tg i cmd_f s rerun_f o output_f g nogui font The syntax for UNIX LINUX and OS x is tg i cmd_f s rerun_f o output_f g nogui len size font fontname display display The nogui option can also be gotten using nogui on the execute line Alternatively you can get the TrueGrid version with tg v Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 58 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Command Input File Using the option i cmd f causes TrueGrid to execute the commands found in the file named cmd f If there are no interrupt commands in the file then TrueGrid executes all of the commands in the file When the end of the file is reached TrueGrid switches the input to interactive If there is an interrupt command in the file then TrueGrid executes all commands prior to the first interrupt command and switches input to interactive If you do not invoke
353. ion c is assigned to nodes c of the node set narxs merge namreg name a region for the TASCFLOW output file namereg region name_of_region Remarks The TASCFLOW interface supports named regions These regions are specified using the namreg command You can also create a blocked region by assigning a material type 2 to the region using the mt command Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 362 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual namregi name regions for the TASCFLOW output file namregi progression name_of_region nr non reflecting boundary nr region nri non reflecting boundaries nri progression ol identifies a face of the mesh as an outlet for fluid flow ol region Example TrueGrid display outlets The mesh is defined and shaped The ol command specifies faces of elements from the Ny region1 1 1 2 2 1lasan outlet forthe fluid ENS flow Figure 340 The simplified command TUN file follows N SN cylinder AS y 6 1 3731 1571 470 360 1 7 IN c mesh definition SEN ol 11d 291 SSS c faces of region 11 12 2 1 c are defined as outlet merge co ol c display of outlet Figure 340 element faces defined as outlet Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 363 oli identifies faces of the mesh as an outlet for fluid flow oli progression Remarks See ol reg select a region for the REFLEQS b
354. ion merge Example 2 One Way Transitions You can gradually make a transition in Figure 353 transition in mesh density by trbb mesh density in two directions block 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 113 13 579 1 3 5 1 9 c dense part Part 1 bb 1 1151213 c Master side 1 definition block 1 3 5 7 91 3 5 13 31 35 7 9 5 2 1 1 5 9 C sparse part 1 Part 2 trbb 13153 31 c Slave side 1 definition bb 1 1151323 c Master side 2 definition Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 399 block 1 3 5 1 3 5 C sparse part 2 Part 3 trbb 1313332 7j TrueGrid display c Slave sid 3 5 l 5 Dd LO HTS 5 1 5 39 2 definition pnan Figure 354 transition in mesh density by trbb Example Transitions with Shells If the part is made of quadrilateral shell elements the transition elements will all be quadrilateral elements One side must have 2 or 3 times the number of elements as the other side Where the ratio is 2 both sides must have an even number of elements in their respective directions 4 2 TrueGrid Draw ALT LEE REE n Ratio 4 2 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved block 1 35 79 3352 alj l 35 7 OF 1 3 5 15 bb 1115111 c Master side 1 c definition block 400 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual T3 DL 3 52
355. ion of the position of the boundary nodes It is possible to select multiple 2D regions in the relax unifm and esm commands The unifm command does something similar for volume 3D regions smoothing across boundaries of disconnected blocks esm 2D elliptic smoothing esm region 4 region iterations min change weight p where iterations is the maximum number of iterations to use min_change is an absolute error tolerance there will be no more iterations if in the last iteration no coordinate was moved by more than min_change in any zone weight is an interpolation weight factor the value 1 0 usually works a coefficient controlling mesh density near singularities P exponential decay controlling mesh density near singularities Remarks This command is restricted to faces This smoothing feature gives you control of the weights used in the equations being solved This is done by choosing the density and decay factors It is best to experiment with small variations in these parameters starting with values close to a 2 and 7 6 This feature is useful when smoothing a section ofthe mesh where 3 or five blocks meet at a vertex In other methods such as relax the section of the mesh near an interior vertex formed by three blocks behave like a concave boundary with the mesh lines attracted to this triple vertex In contrast when five blocks meet at a vertex and are smoothed with the relax command the common vertex acts like a convex boun
356. ion or help on TrueGrid s capabilities including descriptions of its meshing and geometry methods graphical user interface and connections to simulation codes by calling 925 373 0628 or by faxing to 925 373 6326 or by writing to Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 23 XYZ Scientific Applications Inc 1324 Concannon Blvd Livermore CA 94550 or by e mailing to info truegrid com or by visiting our web site at Getting a Demonstration Copy of TrueGrid Currently we offer a TrueGrid demonstration program that will run on a Windows PC This program is available on our home page and shows you several example meshes which are generated using TrueGrid In addition a trial version of our software may be obtained by contacting our office using one of the above means This time limited trial includes our Tutorial User s Examples Output and License Manager manuals which will help you explore TrueGrid s powerful mesh generation method and its sophisticated graphical user interface as you generate sample meshes of your own Purchasing TrueGrid TrueGrid licenses can be purchased on a yearly basis or perpetual paid up Both include any upgrades during the year of purchase There is an additional cost to maintain TrueGrid beyond the first year for a perpetual license Call write or e mail XYZ Scientific Applications to get pricing
357. ion to the geometry of the part By removing small blocks from a big block you get the same result as from gluing together other little blocks but it is easier to cut away than to glue Next apply the sf command to project onto a surface each exposed face of the remaining blocks This is like molding the blocks into the shapes you need While shaping the surfaces you may also want to adjust the locations of a few vertices in order to get a very high quality mesh You can do all of these things interactively so it is very easy to check that each step of the process is going right When you make a multi block mesh each block is interpolated independently Sometimes you can get a smoother mesh by telling TrueGrid to interpolate across several blocks ignoring the partitions between them You can do this with the lin command Several adjacent faces of several blocks can be interpolated using this bi linear blending method as though they formed a single face of a single block Quality Meshes Often you may find that TrueGrid s optional interpolation and relaxation algorithms will give you a better quality mesh The transfinite interpolation command tf is one of the best methods of interpolation It is most useful when the bounding edges have large curvature and when geometric nodal distributions are extreme along the edges of the face Transfinite interpolation tries to enforce the same relative spacing along the mesh contours in the interior of a
358. ions Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 173 Control V a second time hides this list Usage To choose an option from an options list click the Left Mouse Button anywhere on the string following that option s red marker You will see that option s description turn from grey to yellow o coo He 5s If you are only permitted to make one choice from Cornet t an exclusive list then upon choosing an option all other options disappear from sight If you are permitted to make more than one list choice the remaining options will remain visible To deselect an option click the Left Mouse Button again on the yellow text description of that option This action will turn the string from yellow back to grey Type Of Node Selection gt Node Number CONSTRAINT FLAG 0 Co p ooo Figure 162 Selections in yellow Sometimes the type or quantity of data a command needs depends on the options you have chosen In these cases the dialogue box changes as you choose options You may have to enter numbers or choose options in places that did not exist when you first opened the dialogue box Experienced users generally find it easiest to make all their dialogue box mouse selections first and then they go back and enter the numerical and or character string data Numbers Lists of Numbers and Text Strings Dialogue boxes may also have a place for you to provide an inp
359. irection of the acceleration The angles are in degrees Remarks This is the same as acc except that the direction is in spherical coordinates Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 320 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual accsi spherical prescribed boundary acceleration accci progression load curve amplitude options p 0 where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where o 0 P is a vector in spherical coordinates giving the direction of the acceleration Remarks This is the same as aces except that it applies to an index progression This is the same as acc page 317 except that it applies to an index progression and uses spherical coordinates Example A mesh is defined in Cartesian coordinates Load curve 1 is defined Acceleration in cylindrical coordinates is assigned by index progression The simplified command file follows TrueGrid display acceleration lat 1 000E 00 block 1 5 1 5 1 3 i 29 5 2 50 0 mo quur du c mesh definition led 100 1 1 c load curve 1 definition accsi 2 11 100 c acceleration c load curve 1 amplitude 1 c direction in cyl coord c is 1 0 O merge co acc c display of acceleration 1 Figure 319 spherical accele
360. is simply a set of surfaces When a surface is projected to a composite surface its nodes are simply projected to each of the surfaces and then moved to the projection which is closest to the original position of each node No changes are made to the surfaces One simple command sd with the sds option is used in TrueGrid to form a composite surface Without the projection method and composite surfaces one would have to settle for meshing each surface separately which may form badly shaped elements like those in figure 18 A less obvious feature of the projection method is that a face of the mesh projected to a surface or a composite surface need not cover the entire area In fact it is more common for a face of the mesh to be projected so that it does not cover the entire area In contrast the mapped method requires that an entire surface be meshed In addition there must be 6 surfaces one for each face of a block and each surface must be meshed Essentially ifa mapped mesh method is used to create a block structured mesh the burden is placed on the creation of the geometry The projection method removes this burden making it possible to place any block structure onto any set of surfaces Surface Intersection Method The surface intersection algorithms require only a node s point of projection onto a surface and the tangent plane at that point The most important cases are when a node is projected onto three or two surfaces In the former
361. isplay noob S cae eee aed 80 diawW osse dure RE x 81 pu PP 87 Poorman s algorithm 80 Pop up Window 2 0005 83 POR ea tesserae at bteitadtus 469 POLL Sean e ecu DoD a Te uA 470 POoSISCEIDE 4 peri d Deoa td 82 SAS one APA AC Cate T rs 80 EB isses eem a EIU Rondo qa tt 81 CIS VICW x oer tiere te ata 83 line thickness vencidos 86 DOOP Soter s oce Deed 82 resolution iss ee es 95 tgimage ps qeu exa eode as 83 PI inca Speed aues putin arp ota 31 441 les ee A Le ary eee 280 348 Exatiple ster GN deh fone Ra aas 66 OIDE cu datu eee AS 205 Pr Sf Option uni anal 213 Pr Sfi option sich veu vow da 276 PLA mn 349 Prepend button aida ewe 181 Prescribed boundary 311 312 Pressure 22 52 8 eeu 332 348 PE its tae nae daa 348 PII A a ra E CS 348 PEA eth se eS Elan 348 E sd antes den 205 Program Size RN 71 progression notation o4 by bebe UEM AA 56 selection geometrical 97 PtOjJecl cca A 72 124 158 attach S cad EU uci as 224 button corde t eaea er qs 31 115 126 shell os ars 414 415 tangent surfaces 225 to l surface 0000009 rd 224 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 497 Project button 66 157 163 Projected node a o x ait 39 Projection 29 33 165 190 198 272 283 SD OUEVE iud ese ve a a 163 SD GUEVOS 1a 3 anh 4 rasis 276 algorithm os ss c AR 274 button
362. it version there is virtually an unlimited number of nodes and the accuracy can be increased to a maximum of about 11 digits with the use of the accuracy command SUN UNIX Workstation There are two versions of TrueGrid tg and tgx for the SUN workstations running the SOLARIS UNIX operating system Tg uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Tgx does not use the OpenGL library and is compliant with the X Windows system Both of these programs are 32 bit programs Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 69 of accuracy if you use the accuracy command HP UNIX Workstation There are two versions of TrueGrid tg and tgx for the HP workstations running the HP UNIX operating system Tg uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Tgx does not use the OpenGL library and is compliant with the X Windows system Both of these programs are 32 bit programs Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits of accuracy if you use the accuracy command IBM UNIX Workstation There are two versions of TrueGrid tg and tgx for the IBM workstations r
363. itional surfaces and curves in this phase You can also assign sets conditions constraints loads properties diagnostics transformations and replications to the part After issuing a command to end the part you can initialize another part re enter the Control Phase or enter the Merge Phase In the Merge Phase TrueGrid can merge the coincident nodes of different parts You can set the tolerances for this merging operation You can also display your complete model including surfaces curves parts diagnostics materials conditions loads and constraints It is in this phase that you direct TrueGrid to write the simulation code input file by issuing the write command Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 61 Termination To end your session you enter the end or exit command in the text window or left click the EXIT button in the Menu window There may be times when you launch some massive batch calculation within TrueGrid and then decide that you don t want it to complete The standard ways of killing a process on the PC and on UNIX LINUX platforms will work here as well On a UNIX LINUX or OS x machine you can identify the process id PID by using the ps 1 command and then you can kill that process On a PC running WINDOWS you can use Ctrl Alt Delete to bring up the Task Manager and halt TrueGrid You can also pop forward the background TrueGri
364. ity velocity v v v where v v v is the velocity vector Remarks An initial rigid velocity is assigned to all nodes of the part This command will override any rotation or velocity commands issued in the control phase but just for this one part The ve or vei commands in the Part Phase can override this command for just a few regions of this part Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 330 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual ve initial velocity in a region ve region option v v V where an option can be sid set id r for rotational conditions where v V V is the velocity vector Remarks An initial velocity is assigned to all nodes in the specified region This command will override any rotation or velocity commands issued in either the Control Phase or the Part Phase for the specified region Some simulation codes require that initial velocities be group togther and that is the purpose for the set id This command can also be used to set initial nodal rotations using the r option vei initial velocity by index progression vei progression option v v v where an option can be sid set id r for rotational conditions where v v v is the velocity vector Remarks For details see ve above Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 331 12 Force Pressure and Loads These commands specify f
365. ke advantage of this internal re ordering of the commands by first projecting a face of the mesh to a surface After inspecting the results you can re position a portion of the mesh with the mouse or menus It will be as if you had moved that portion of the mesh into position and then projected to the surface Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 272 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual sf project a region onto a surface sf region surface_type surface_parameters where surface_type and surface_parameters can be sd sd for a numbered or named surface definition sd command sds sd sd2 sdn to combine several numbered surfaces into one CN2P x Yo Zo X Y Zn 1 t rt for a conical surface cone x Yo Zo X y Z 1 O for a conical surface CY X Yo Zo Xn Yn Zn radius fora cylindrical surface er Xo Yo Zo Xn Yn Zn FT for an ellipse revolved about an axis iplan a b c d for a plane defined by an implicit function plan x Yo Zo x Yn Zn for a planar surface pl3 system x y z system x y z system x y z for aplanar surface pr Xo Yo Zo X Yn Zn Y fjr trt fora parabola revolved about an axis Sp Xo Yo Zo radius for a spherical surface tS Xo Yo Zo Xn Yn Zn ths for a torus crx line _ for a planar curve rotated about the x axis cry line _ for a planar curve rotated about the y axis crz line_ for a planar curve rotated about the z axis Cr Xo Yo Zo Xn Yn Z line _ fora planar curve rotated a
366. ks lin 1 2 1 3 2 Equal Spacing Along Two Edges PEACE CEUTA EE Figure 251 Interpolation Across 2 Regions res 12 1 32 1 1i 9 Relative Spacing Along Two Edges i JU Figure 252 Spacing Across 2 Regions When you specify a face ofthe mesh a modified bi linear interpolation positions the interior nodes ofthe face This interpolation is based on the positions ofthe nodes along the edges ofthe face The boundary edge nodes are not moved Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 240 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Example sdicy00000 1 block 1 11 21 1 11 21 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 90 pb 2 2 1 2 2 1 xy 0 2 0 6 sfi 1 0 3 sd 1 sfi 1 0 3 sd 1 lini 1 Upp 774 Y WN N E Y i 7 HT TT BEIA E ug 1 Figure 253 Four Independent Regions When you specify a solid region a modified tri linear interpolation positions the interior nodes of the region This interpolation is based on the positions of the nodes along the faces of the region These face nodes are not moved neither are the edge nodes of the region Algorithm Figure 254 Interpolated like a Single Region Linear interpolation can be applied along an edge between two end nodes a modified bi linear interpolation of a face of the mesh between four edges and a modified tri linear interpolation through a v
367. l be relaxed while constrained along that curve Since boundary nodes are not moved the nodal distributions along these edges will be preserved Zoning due to the res drs as das or nds commands for interior edges will not be preserved Multiple faces can be specified using the amp between region specifications For example the three faces of a corner can be specified an i face a j face and a k face All of the nodes including the three interior edges and the corner node will be relaxed Disjoint faces can be relaxed together If the edge of one face is glued to the edge of another face using the intra part BB command then the coincident nodes along the common edge will also be relaxed If three four or five faces are glued together and share a common node in the center that center node will be relaxed as well When a volume is relaxed no interior surface projections or edge node distributions are preserved As with face relaxations any node on the boundary or next to a region that was deleted see de will not be relaxed The weight factor is used to interpolate between the old nodal coordinates and the new within each iteration of the relaxation If it is set to 1 0 then the new value is used If it is set to a smaller number then a point is interpolated between the new and old coordinates of a node The interpolation parameter makes it possible to slow or speed up the convergence to the Laplace Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scienti
368. l interpolation not a constraint ilini progression Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 216 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks This interpolation command can be used to align interior vertices once end vertices have been moved to their initial positions This is a linear interpolation This command positions intermediate vertices It is only an initial interpolation After this command is issued the interior vertices of the region can be moved again No constraints are assigned to the interior vertices by this command ma translates vertex before interpolations or projections ma vertex coordinate_identifier offset where a vertex is ijk reduced indices where the format for o fset depends on the following coordinate_identifier x x offset y y offset Zz offset xy x offset y offset xz x offset z offset yz y offset z offset xyz x offset y offset z offset Remarks This command works just like the mb command applied to a single vertex This command has a shorter argument list but everything that this command does can be done with the mb command Example In this simple example a one element shell part is formed by moving one vertex to match the coordinates of another vertex The vertex was selected using the mouse and the indices were printed using the F1 key block 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 0 ma 2 1 1 y 1 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All
369. l model This command permutes the orientation of the r s and t material local coordinate axis within an element Shell elements are a special case If the shell element is on an i face for example then only the j and k indices can be permuted to switch the local coordinate system in the plane of the shell element This command will preserve the outward normal orientation of the shell element see n above Example Figure 367 Material orientation block 1 3 0 4 6 1 3 0 4 6 1 1304 6 1 30 4 6 4 sd 1 cy 0 3 501004 sfi 1 sd 1 or411521 j i or 2 5 Ita merge CO or rs ssf project shell onto an interpolated surface ssf region surface where surface is the number of a defined surface of type intp Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 414 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks The surface of projection must be of type intp a surface interpolated between two other defined surfaces Shell nodes are placed along this interpolated surface The shell thickness for each node of each shell is measured from the normal distance between the node and the two surfaces used to define the interpolated surface Example TrueGrid view shell thickness ld 1 ctbc 00 90 90 11 5 15 sd 1 crz 1 sd 2 sp 0001 1 sd 3 intp 2 1 5 block SS 5 L 3 3 1 3 101 1010 1 pb 2222222 1 25 ssfi 1 3 S371 23 merge co thic Figure 368 Variable A A thickness
370. l variable nodal prescribed boundary velocities 325 fvvci cylindrical variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities 323 fvvs spherical variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities 326 fvvsi spherical variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities 327 vacc variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations 327 vacci variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations 327 vaccc cylindrical variable nodal prescribed boundary accelerations 328 vaccci cylindrical variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations 328 vaccs spherical variable prescribed nodal boundary accelerations 329 vaccsi prescribed nodal boundary accelerations spherical 330 rotation part initial rigid body rotation 00 0 0 330 velocity part initi l velocity d aos aar Se ac t ac OC RCROR S 330 ve initial velocity in a region uo zar cas Ae CE a 331 vel initial velocity by index progression oooooooooooo o 331 12 Force Pressure and Loads ooooooooooooooo eee eee eens 332 arri modify pressure amplitudes and shock arrival time 332 dist laser distribution function os ste ve taw age eeaws 336 csf cross section forces for DYNA3D 00 0000 338 fa fixed nodal 168088 o 15 Re eno t om SR Re eoe d 338 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 13 fai fixed nodal TOLOSA a ERA SERA 338 fc concentrated nodal lo
371. lained in more detail below The first step in the transfinite interpolation algorithm is to position the edge nodes of the face of the mesh that is compute the mappings between computational space and physical space for the edges Edges may be interpolated the lin command and projected to surfaces the sf command with the spacing between nodes controlled using the res drs as das or nds commands An example will be used throughout this discussion It is generated using the following commands sd 1 sp 0 002 sd 2 cy 0 3 0 0 0 1 1 block 1 6 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sfi Sd 1 sfi 1 sd 2 res Lor L 1 21 3 1 5 pb 2 2 1 2 2 1 xyz 0 747134 0 793349 1 15470 tfi 1 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 252 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual In the next picture only the edges of the face are shown This is the initial condition for the transfinite Define The Edges A M Of The Face To Be interpolation Interpolated Figure 263 Boundary Edges Of A Face Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 253 The second step is to compute a mapping between computational space and relative arc length space for the edges Let the endpoints of an edge have indices of 0 and N in the computational space and P and P in the physical space These indices are actually coordinates in the computational space 0
372. lated at the center of the screen and in the center of the z coordinate range of the object in the center of the picture unless the picture frame of reference was fixed Except for the calculation of the center of rotation this command is reversible by using a negative translation or the command u with the same translation Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 90 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual rx rotate about the x axis rotates the picture about the screen s x axis rx 0 where 0 is the angle of the rotation in degrees Remarks This command rotates the picture on the screen That is it rotates the global coordinates with respect to the screen s coordinate axes The axes of the global coordinates are displayed in a corner of the screen Normally the center of the screen is the origin of the screen s coordinate axes hence the center of rotation But you can change the origin of the screen s axes by combining a fix command with translation commands like u d r andl The unfix command will restore the default location of the origin ry rotate about the y axis rotates the picture about the screen s y axis ry 0 where 0 is the angle of the rotation in degrees Remarks See the remarks on rx page 91 rz rotate about the z axis rotates the picture about the screen s z axis rz 0 where 0 is the angle of the rotation in degrees Remarks See the remarks on rx page 91 Copyright 19
373. lay all regions darg lt no arguments gt Figure 303 Add regions Example sdisp99294 block 15 13 17 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 17 1513 171 5 13 I7 1 5 13 17 sfi 2 3 2 3 2 3 sd 1 rgi 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 darg Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 301 gt YN SS wt AS LAS SL Figure 304 Region Selection Using rg Figure 305 All regions selected darged display all edges darged lt no arguments gt Example sdisp9994 block 15 13 17 1 5 13 1 1 5 L3 17171513 4 sfi 2 3 2 3 2 3 sd 1 darged N le O1 O1 wW CO N Figure 306 Region Edges Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 302 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual rg display a region rg region Example sdisp9 9294 block 15 13 17 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 17 1 5b 13 1771 5 13 1771 5 13 17 gt sfi 2 3 2 3 2 3 sd 1 rg 311344 rgi display a progression rgi progression Example sdisp9 994 block 15 13 17 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 17 15 13 17 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 17 sfi 2 3 2 3 2 3 sd 1 rgi 2 0 3 2 7 rrg remove a region from display rrg region Hy tint HT did D i Matt Hil Example v RINT HW NNN HEA AZ L7 277 sd 1 sp 9 9 9 ZA T EX CL me
374. layed It is not possible to display just a vertex but you can display just the edges or faces adjacent to a point In a complex part with many regions create several command files each containing a set of selection commands to display a subset of the mesh Then use the include command each time you wish to display that part of the mesh The alternative to using these commands is to select a part of the mesh with the mouse either by clicking and or click and drag actions on the index bars in the computational window or by the other equivalent methods Then select the Display List button in the environment window in order to reveal the Display List panel of options Click on the Region button on the left and choose the appropriate action on the right Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 299 arg add a region to the display arg region Example block 1 8 1 8 N 0 e rg 111122 arg 2 1222 Figure 300 Before ARG Figure 301 Add A Region argi add a progression to the display argi progression Example sdisp99294 block 1 5 13 17 1 5 13 T7 1 5 4 Sfi 2 3 2 2 39 sd 1 rg 311344 aa WW Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 300 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual argi 2 3 2 3 2 3 Figure 302 Before ARGI darg disp
375. le area cable offset cross section area shear area of cross section cross section moments of inertia thickness x component of offset vector for first end point y component of offset vector for first end point z component of offset vector for first end point x component of offset vector for last end point y component of offset vector for last end point z component of offset vector for last end point release the x translation constraint at first end point release the y translation constraint at first end point release the z translation constraint at first end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at first end point release the rotation constraint about the y axis at first end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at first end point release the x translation constraint at last end point release the y translation constraint at last end point release the z translation constraint at last end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the y axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at last end point release the x translation constraint at intermediate point release the y translation constraint at intermediate point release the z translation constraint at intermediate point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at intermediate points release the rotation constraint ab
376. lease the rotation constraint about the z axis at intermediate points theta 0 orientation angle for the cross section warpage nl n2 two nodes used to determine warpage in the beam geom option method of determining curvature where option can be 1 for center of curvature 2 for tangent of centroid arc 3 for bend radius 4 for arc angle Remarks This command is exactly like ibm except it specifies regions of the mesh using index progressions Example In this example the block part is defined first The default material number 1 for the part is set by the mate command The beam cross section is defined by the bsd command for the DYNA3D code The ibmi command is used for the generation of beams in the i direction from the index progression 1 5 The number of beams in the j direction means there are 3 columns of beam elements generated You can also create 1 or 2 columns Figure 372 and Figure 373 You can achieve the same effect via different index progressions Figure 372 and Figure 373 This capability is important when creating beam elements from 2 faces with common a edge It avoids duplicate beam elements on that edge The number of elements in the k direction is 1 Figure 371 The orientation of the beam cross section axis is the j La E JI IY 1 direction The beams are labeled by the labels 1D command in the Merge Phase Ld d E d E d block 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 1 13 5 7 eee oo ARERR RRR c block part faces bsd 1 sthi 1 tthi
377. led tg exe is a 32 bit version Tg exe uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits of accuracy if you use the accuracy command A TrueGrid hardware key dongle is available and recommended for perpetual paid up licenses of TrueGrid In order to preserve the same working environment on WINDOWS as on a UNIX or LINUX system it is necessary to have a working directory You must choose the working directory by running the TGControls program tgpref exe There are other options also available through this program such as the maximum program size and the number of buttons on the mouse Avoid the use of directory names containing a space This manual documents TrueGrid s graphical user interface for a three button mouse TrueGrid sees the buttons of a two button mouse as the left button and the middle button of a three button mouse When this manual tells you to use the middle button of your mouse use the right button of a two button mouse If you have a two button mouse you can do a right button operation of a three button mouse by holding the Control key and clicking on the right button Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 71 TrueGrid and many of the utilities associated with
378. left side of the Display List panel 1 e Surface Curve or BB Step 4 Choose the action to be taken i e Show All Show None Show Only or Remove Alternatively a single object can be selected using labels Steps 1 and 2 are changed above to Alternate Stepl Choose the type of object to be labeled in the Labels panel i e Surface Curve Surf Edge or BB Alternate Step 2 Click on the Label button in the Pick panel and select a surface in the physical window by clicking on the appropriate number in the picture The Display List panel can also be used with the mouse to choose which regions of the mesh are shown in both the physical and computational window The procedure is as follows Step 1 Select the region or progression in either the computational or physical window See other sections of this manual on the various methods of selecting a region or a progression Step 2 Select Region on the left side of the Display List Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 141 Step 3 Select the appropriate action on the right hand side of the Display List panel The left side of the Display List panel contains a list of all the possible objects that can be displayed The right side contains the possible actions to be taken Apply Action to Surface These are surfaces created using the sd command or imported as IGES with the iges or igesfile commands or imp
379. lick and drag operation you will notice that the coordinates of the new nodal position will be displayed as scrolling coordinates at the bottom of the Move Points Panel When you release the Left Mouse Button these new coordinates will be used to reposition the selected node using the pn command This command will be shown in the text window and in the session file tsave This type of move is always done in the global Cartesian coordinate system Any movement under way can be aborted by dragging the mouse out of the Physical Window and Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 149 releasing the Left Mouse Button Apply to options list Region Node Poly Surface Point List A region or progression of the mesh can be selected to be moved This is available only in the Part Phase A node of the mesh can be selected to be moved using the F5 key This is available only in the Merge Phase Points that form a polygon surfaces can be selected to be moved by using the F5 key Control points for various types of interactive 3D curves such as LP3 TWSURF SPLINE in the 3D CURVE menu can be selected to be moved using the F5 key Constrain to options list Rotate Screen Plane Front View X Y Z XY XZ XY Rotates the selected region as a rigid body about the line perpendicular to the screen where the mouse button was pressed in a click and drag motion A
380. ll or brick The orientation of the face can be controlled using the orpt command prior to saving the face set You can also use the fset and fseti commands in the Part Phase or the fset command in the Merge Phase to construct or modify a face set This is three different ways to construct face sets and when used together can be very powerful There are advantages and disadvantages to using the fset or fseti commands in the Part Phase verses using this interactive tool or the fset command in the Merge Phase The Part Phase gives you a structured parametric method for selecting a face set If the mesh density of the part is changed or if additional parts are added to the model the selection of the face set is unaffected However the Part Phase selection of faces is limited to those faces that form block regions Also when a part is duplicated so is the selection of the faces for a set If you use the Merge Phase features to select face sets you no longer have the parametric features If the size of the mesh changes then the numbering of faces changes and you must create a new list of faces Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 136 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual How to Create a Beam Element Set Select Pick and Sets in the Environment Window Quit Then in the Sets Window select the Beams option ose set I open Check the number of nodes needed in the selection RES A EE process With the lef
381. lly select a positive normal direction by default but it is best if you specify the positive direction by using the orpt command ndli nodal distributed load ndli progression load_curve amplitude where load_curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 346 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks This is the same as ndl except that it applies to an index progression After nodes are merged by the stp command the loads from merged nodes are added together Example A part is defined in Cartesian coordinates and the mesh is manipulated The direction of the normals is defined by the orpt command The nodal distributed load is assigned to the faces of the index progressions 1 0 2 3 1 0 4 and 1 Figure 334 Then the concentrated nodal loads are computed from the distributed nodal load for each node of the assigned index progressions The command file follows see definition of the mesh ses TrueGrid display forces 1 168E 03 orpt 2 0 1 5 c definition of direction C of every normal of face c the normals point out from c the point 2 0 1 5 ndli 1 0 2 3 1 0 4 0 2800 c distributed nodal load is assigned to the faces of the index progression 1 0 2 3 1 0 4 by the null load curve with amplitude 2800 QOQ0000 ndli 1 0 2800 c distributed nodal load is assigned Figure 334 nodal distributed load b
382. lso available on Personal Computers running all variations of Windows and LINUX This includes SUSE LINUX on the AMD Opteron and OSX on the APPLE 2 History of TrueGrid TrueGrid evolved from a line of mesh generators that started with the INGEN mesh generator INGEN was developed at Los Alamos National Laboratory in the late 1970 s by William Cook to generate meshes for finite element simulation codes INGEN is composed of surface and two dimensional region generators that use linear blending formulae developed by Coons INGEN uses the i j indexing scheme to number nodal points and to construct elements An important INGEN innovation is indirect indexing which provides a parameterized mesh capability This allows the mesh to be refined without altering all Figure 1 Mesh of Cockpit Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 21 of the input The INGRID mesh generator came next in the line INGRID development began at the University of Tennessee in 1979 and was initially based on INGEN Usage of INGEN had shown simple patterns of commands that were frequently used The next phase of INGRID development began at Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory Doug Stillman John Hallquist and Robert Rainsberger were contributors to INGRID The availability of supercomputers and the increased efficiency and capabilities of the simulation codes drove this development Th
383. ly algebraic and the shape of corner on the boundary is reflected through the mesh The elliptic methods tend to smooth the corner The relax and esm commands attempt to give uniform elements while the lin tfi and tme commands try to preserve the boundary nodal distribution throughout the interior Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 259 sdicy0001001 block 1 11 21 31 1 11 1 Q L1 2 3 5 5 1 pb 1 2 1 1 2 1 xyz 0 45 89 pb 22 122 xyz 87 51 86 pb 32132 xyz 2 3 44 9 pb 42142 xyz 3 4 91 41 pb 1 1 1 1 1 xyz 149 1 04 pb 2 1 2 RVZ 96 93 37 pb 3 13 xyz 2 1 47 88 pb 411 41 XYZ 2 12 95 23 sfi 1 sd splint 214211i 00 as 1 4 2 j 1 lin 1 1 4 2 Many boundary angles are an improvement using the tfi over the lin command However there is no advantage with tfi near a sharp corner Figure 269 Tfi over 3 blocks Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 260 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Figure 270 Relax over 3 blocks tme 1 1 1 4 2 1 100 00001 1 Tme is better at propagating the boundary nodal distribution It also concentrates the mesh near the corner where the boundary is concave The angles are generally better than relax because tme was designed to produce a nea
384. m real objects that are not smooth or easily measured Sometimes it is appropriate to modify such a surface by moving a node of the surface A node in this context is not a node in the mesh but a point that is used to form one or more polygons in a polygon surface To move such a node display the surface and click on the Poly Surface button Then move the mouse close to the node you wish to move and click on the F5 key This selects the node You are now ready to modify the coordinates of the selected node of the surface using any of the interactive moving functions described above This action will produce a pvpn command in the text window and the session tsave file Note that the selection was a node in a polygon surface not a vertex Part Phase or node Merge Phase in the mesh The Region or Node button must be pressed to return the F5 key function to selecting from the mesh instead of a node of a surface After changing a point in a polygon surface you may wish to save that surface using the wrsd command If you do and if you keep the session file to be rerun you should modify the session file so that you are getting the new surface not the one that requires modifications In this case you should also remove the pvpn command from the session file Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 155 Deleting a Region of the Mesh Figure 120 Delete Button
385. m the 2 2 2 2asaninlet for the fluid region1 1 flow Figure 339 The simplified command file follows cylinder 1 6 1 37 1 1551 4 0 360 1 7 c mesh definition il 11222 2 c faces of region 1 c are defined as inlet merge co il TrueGrid display inlets eS Y XP Ne LS mx SX VIVA SERA IANN L 0 Y d 5 X Wi A KZ D 225 A ZA y LN I Q Ly ET LTV LT PETI aH f V SNS SSN 3 A 2 KILL A NT SS RY DIR NAN DN Z X LOS AZ E A ANY As N NW SA SIA D Zz L342 Z SS NNN ORA AN SEC DS 2S A lt e e DPS COSS A 2 25 SN DAA LL LEE Et PELOS LAS ES XY NA A gt LA 24v 2 5 y y ya WI y 225 gt 12222 c display of inlet Figure 339 element faces with inlet Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 239 ili identifies an inlet for fluid flow by index progression ili progression Remarks This command behaves the same as the previous command over multiple regions See il Ib local nodal displacement and rotation constraints lb region system options where system is the name of a local coordinate system defined by Isys and options is a list of any of the following dx init for x displacement dy init for y displacement dz init for z displacement rx init for rotation abou
386. make a mistake in the algebra and produce a mesh that has no physical meaning So use this feature with great care Interactivity When you generate a mesh interactively every mesh generation command potentially requires TrueGrid to recalculate the whole mesh This is because the new command may have to be executed early in the mesh generation process i e in the command hierarchy affecting the execution of the other commands TrueGrid does not actually recalculate the mesh until you issue a new graphics command This way you can issue several new commands before TrueGrid recalculates the mesh greatly reducing the number of calculations How much time TrueGrid takes to recalculate the mesh can vary with the size and complexity of the mesh and the speed of the computer Y ou can look at the history table to review the mesh generation commands in TrueGrid s command tables You also can deactivate a command that you find in the history table This will also force TrueGrid to recalculate the mesh And if you reactivate a deactivated command then once again TrueGrid will have to recalculate the mesh Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 43 Specifying Multiple Blocks In order to make a standard part with multiple blocks you have to specify three lists of node numbers for the three computational indices i j and k Each list tells TrueGrid the nodal positio
387. mand is a shortcut command which turns block edges into cubic spline curves The control points for the curves are the vertices block corners There is no counterpart command for a block face which will turn the entire face into a cubic spline surface However this is nearly the case because spline interpolation can be applied in two or three directions simultaneously Instead of making 3D cubic spline curves and then placing edges along these curves this command creates the cubic spline curves on the fly using the vertices as control points and then places the mesh edges on these curves Changing a vertex will automatically change the shape of the spline curves Derivatives at the endpoints can be set or the natural spline can be used where the second derivatives are 0 at the endpoints There is no periodic feature for this command Be careful about using this command with the various spacing commands If you apply spline interpolation to an edge and then a command such as res relative spacing to the same edge then the intermediate vertices are forced to slide along the spline curve to satisfy the spacing rules This results in a situation where the vertices are no longer located at the control points of the spline In this case moving a vertex can have startling results since a small change in the location of a vertex from where it appears may actually result in a large change in the control points of the spline Therefore it is recomme
388. mands have been issued to generate a mesh material properties conditions options and element properties before the write command is issued Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 59 No Graphics Option The option g nogui causes TrueGrid to run without graphics displaying windows and menus Prompts for input appear in the window in which TrueGrid was run Workspace On UNIX LINUX and OS x systems the option len size allows you to specify the initial memory size in megabytes which TrueGrid will use The default is 20 which is sufficient for many problems TrueGrid will get additional memory if possible when the initial amount has been usedd On WINDOWS systems use the TGControls window to set the limit on memory for workspace You will have system limitations to consider It is advisable that you keep the amount of workspace plus the size of TrueGrid below the amount of RAM on your system or the performance will degrade If the number of nodes in your parts are relatively small compared to the total number of nodes in the model then you can expect to use about 120 bytes of workspace per node on a 32 bit version of TrueGrid twice that for a 64 bit version of TrueGrid If the parts are relatively large double the nodal workspace estimate About 2 megabytes are needed for graphics and will increase as the resolution see the reso command is increased
389. me name already existed then it is deleted and recreated The intersect operator redefines a node set to be only those nodes which are found to be both in the original set and among the selected nodes Selected nodes can be added by using the union operator This causes any selected nodes to be included in a set if it is not already in that set The add operator will always append selected nodes to a set This is used to create ordered node sets where duplicate nodes are allowed The minus operator removes all nodes in a set which are among the selected nodes See the next command nseti for an example nseti add remove nodes to from a set of nodes nseti progression operator set name where set name is the name of the node set operator can be for initial assignment AND for intersection with node set OR for union with the node set to append the selected nodes to the node set for removal from the node set Remarks The initial assignment creates a node set If the node set with the same name already existed then it is deleted and recreated The intersect operator redefines a node set to be only those nodes which are found to be both in the original set and among the selected nodes Selected nodes can be added by using the union operator This causes any selected nodes to be included in a set if it is not already Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 458 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual in
390. mesh First create the spline curve Then attach the edge of the mesh to the curve The Point List interactive dialogue is used to create this curve This Point List dialogue has the additional option to select the end derivatives forms the intersection curve of 2 surfaces with the mouse by selecting initial points for the intersection algorithm This produces the twsurf option of the curd command when saved in the session file tsave This has very little application because the projection method will project an edge of the mesh to the same intersection of two surfaces without the construction of this curve This feature is primarily used to construct surfaces from 3D curves see the rule3d crule3d r3dc pipe blend3 and blend4 options of the sd command The Point List interactive dialogue is used to create this curve This Point List dialogue has the additional fields to select the surface numbers of the surfaces being intersected Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 179 COEDGE forms a composition of smoothly connected edges of surfaces automatically This produces the sdedge se option of the curd command when saved to the session file tsave If you are importing IGES surface geometry that has been broken into many small surfaces you will typically want to build composite surfaces see the sds option of the sd command You may need a curve that forms the
391. mmand file from scratch you can use the semi colon liberally to be safe since any unneeded semi colons will be ignored All numbers must either be zero or else have magnitude approximately between 105 and 10 This is to prevent problems with underflow and overflow conditions If the number is to be interpreted as an integer then its magnitude must not exceed approximately 10 Typing help command for a TrueGrid command will not only open a help box explaining the syntax but the window s title will tell you which sub menu the command is under Typing dial command will open the dialog box for that command without having to click through the GUI Notice that this can be very helpful when you know the name of the command but do not know which sub menu it is located under Phases TrueGrid begins in the Control Phase When you issue the block cylinder or blude command it changes to the Part Phase An endpart or control command ends the present part and puts it back in the Control Phase A new block cylinder or blude command ends the present part and starts a new one The merge command ends the present part and puts it in the Merge Phase Once you enter the endpart control block cylinder blude or merge command you may not go back to the previous part to make changes TrueGrid s graphical user interface has several ways to show you which phase TrueGrid is in the prompt in the text window the title bar of the text window
392. modifies the constraints for the nodes of the region Thus several commands may set different constraints for the same node This has a cumulative effect For example you can remove degrees of freedom in the x direction for nodes of an edge of the mesh Then the constraint lists of all nodes along this edge are modified to reflect this constraint Then you could place a displacement constraint in the y direction on an adjoining edge of the mesh The corner node where these two edges meet would then be supported in both the x and y directions Several other commands can affect the constraints For example the plane command with the symm option for symmetry can add constraints if the symmetry plane is parallel to one of the coordinate planes In the Merge Phase different nodes may be merged into one The merged node inherits ALL of the constraints of the nodes which were merged into it To view the different constraints in the model use the condition command with the dx dy dz rx ry or rz options while in the Merge Phase Sid specifies a set identification number so that the nodal constraints are written to the NASTRAN and NE NASTRAN output using the SPC1 and SPCADD keywords For ABAQUS output the set identification number becomes the load set number used in abcload option of the abaqstep to associate the boundary condition with a step in the analysis Example TrueGrid display z displacement constraint The mesh is defined and manipulated Th
393. monstration program 24 Derivatives cubic spline a4 ice deka 186 DET da GRRE ah RM MA 143 DOS a oe ee eae E 143 Dial reuse cocoa os RO 63 73 105 172 Dialogue box 36 73 108 172 creating from menu 75 E ESU enese ianen Aa Na 126 FO Key reen ieun a Eaa 126 A e dte aE 294 Maximize on etes ad eu 173 mesh selection aida cana 97 o cnr end cinco Ree Wack 76 VELDOSS 2s ua e a 178 Directional projection 277 Dirichlet boundary 234 TCU ig ee ihn ch ran ae eae Whang ter 263 A Puntos due pa edad 322 Discontinuous 000005 39 DIE 96 punta A ah Cer ac CS 322 Dipi Xe civ Cia Ceo ape amet eue s 80 did de tee exea Edda 81 DOOE cune dut ts vet beati e i 82 resolution tas 95 O ea eae Con dot e eds 87 Displacement 212222 ed Dae 306 332 idi oie LL rm 306 nM m DS 308 Idol oes Beane Sass ante ed RA 308 fdi c ed eco oca e eR MS 307 fdg d sare T dub COENA 309 HOST sein hae Sas Soke Ek ax ees 310 Dl se ee ege eU NUES 311 312 EDI eias ex ia e A 312 Display hice oves n OU ES tl 58 61 80 block boundaries 389 block boundary 141 CUIVG oii as 141 in X Window System 61 O ah Oscars dre 141 OPONE 61 progression yaa aaa 141 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 481 TEO a Sew ES 141 Surface O 141 Display Item A O 295 Display List il tea hed id
394. moved to the point on the surface which is closest to the initial position of the node It may be necessary to project a node onto two surfaces simultaneously This is commonly the case for nodes along an edge of the block mesh TrueGrid automatically detects this condition and projects the node to the closest point on the intersection of the two specified surfaces In the extreme case a node can be projected onto three surfaces simultaneously This is commonly the case for the eight vertices or corners of the block mesh TrueGrid automatically detects this condition and finds the closest point of intersection of the three surfaces Let us look at this last case a bit more thoroughly In most cases the three surfaces intersect at a single point making it the obvious point of projection It is also possible for three surfaces to intersect at many points to intersect at an infinite number of points or to not intersect at all TrueGrid locates the point of projection with an iterative Newton method which produces a point that minimizes the sum of distances from the node to the surfaces This method works best when sections of the surfaces nearest the initial point are relatively flat As with most non linear problems the point of projection may only be a local minimum sum of distances not the true global solution For this reason you may need to position some key vertices of the mesh close to the desired intersections Part Initialization
395. mplitude X expr is the FORTRAN expression for the x component y expr is the FORTRAN expression for the y component Z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Remarks See fvv for remarks The only difference is that regions are selected using index progressions Example Mesh is defined in Cartesian coordinates Variable velocity is prescribed by index progression 2 1 with the variable amplitude sin atan2 y 2 x anddirectionO 1 0 The simplified command file follows block 1 10 1 10 1 c4 245245225530 c mesh definition TrueGrid display boundary velocity fvvi 2 XN ier 0 sin atan2 y 2 x 0 1 0 c variable velocity prescrib C by index progression gu Pes c null load curve 0 E e magnitude sin atan2 y 2 x direction 0 1 0 merge co fv 0 c display of the velocity Figure 321 variable velocity prescribed Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 324 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fvve cylindrical variable nodal prescribed boundary velocities fvve region load_curve_ amp_expr p expr expr z expr where load_curve_ is a load curve number or zero amp_expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude p expr is the FORTRAN expression for the radial component 0 expr is the FORTRAN expression for the polar angular component Z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Remarks This command assigns velociti
396. n of each partition between blocks In other words it gives the i j or k index for each boundary between blocks For example block 1357 149 121 creates a part with six blocks Each list starts with a 1 and ends with a semi colon The first list of integers above indicates that there are 7 nodes in the i direction in the computational mesh The integers 3 and 5 define two partitions at nodes 3 and 5 This means that there are three blocks in the i direction in the computational mesh where each block is two elements wide The second list creates two blocks The first block starts at node 1 and ends at node 4 in the j direction of the computational mesh The second block starts at node 4 and ends at node 9 There are no partitions in the k direction with 20 elements in the third direction in the computational mesh It is useful to think of the beginning and ending of the part in each of the three directions as terminal partitions To summarize this example is 3 blocks wide in the i direction 2 blocks wide in the j direction and 1 block wide in the k direction Initial Coordinates The block command creates a part in a local 3 dimensional Cartesian coordinate system These three coordinates are called x y and z In the block command and other commands you specify not only the computational mesh but also the corresponding physical data In the block command after the three lists describing the part in the computational indices 1 j
397. n tsave file Note that the mesh is not automatically changed in the picture You must issue a graphics command before TrueGrid builds a new mesh reflecting the deactivation of the command These last two features can be used together to effectively modify a mesh command First deactivate the command Then use the dialog button to create a dialogue box with all of its arguments specified Modify some of the arguments and re issue the command by clicking on the EXEC QUIT button In a similar fashion the deactivated command can be re activated Then the associated actemd command is automatically issued and recorded in the session tsave file The combination of these features can be very useful when examining an unfamiliar command input file Insert the interrupt command into this file where you wish to investigate Then run TrueGrid with this command file When it becomes interactive at the interrupt use the history window to investigate the different regions of the part Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 294 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The View menu is used to control the content and format of the information paal iis en l E in the history window The Display active Item submenu lists the items displayed active for each command The selection is ce 9 my made by toggling the check ma
398. n volume_ number of the volume definition used from the vd command mode where mode can be 2 for center of element in the volume 3 for one node in the volume 4 for half of the nodes in the volume 5 for all of the nodes in the volume default_material_ the default material number is the number materials are changed to if the original material number is not found in the list of pairs material_pairs each pair of material numbers consists of an original material number found in the volume followed by its new number Remarks The mtv command references a volume to select elements in the volume There are several types Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 466 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual of volumes They are a sphere an infinite cylinder a finite cylinder a rotated 2D curve and a surface with thickness Example The mesh is created by the block command 402 and 403 A 2D spline curve is defined by the Id command 404 A volume is created by the vd command 405 Material 2 is assigned to the elements within the volume by the mtv command 406 and 407 The command file follows Cc one ria block mesh definition block 1 21 1 21 1 21 0 2 02 0 2 C penat el is assigned to the part por Dorinvbden of the 2D curve WES La ld 1 csp2 0070 00 TD vb Ta 5 3 ee O E c Type of curve is 2D c spline with the natural Pam derivatives csp2 00 c The spli
399. n invoke the history window to see all of the commands applied to the selected region This coupling of the history and physical window is important when you have a complex problem with an error in your input The history window can be used to find the command s in error and to correct the error s The history window is you primary tool in debugging your mesh The two types of mesh objects are Regions and Index Progressions Please note that the ability to make these types of selections in the mesh are available only in the part phase because the block structure of the part or its topology is only known while in the part phase A Region is described by six numbers the minimum and maximum values for each of the three reduced indices reduced indices are described in the introduction Thus a region can be anything that is rectangular in computational space a vertex of the mesh an edge of the mesh a face of the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 127 mesh or a prism shaped volume or block in the mesh An Index Progression can be any part of the mesh that you can select with the mouse in the Computational Window An index progression might describe one region or many regions For example all six faces of a cube can be described by one index progression A complex index progression cannot be selected using the physical window A complex index progression is one wh
400. n the Merge Phase because there is no Computational Window available The following keyword commands in the Part phase will also toggle between these three options phys turn the Phys button on phys no arguments both turn the Both button on both no arguments comp turn on the Comp button comp no arguments Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 111 Generating a New Picture Draw Cent Rest Figure 55 Draw Buttons In order to draw a new picture press either the Draw Center or Restore button Press the Draw button to generate a new picture Press the Center button to center what is in the current picture This is a good way to fill the window with the current view Press the Restore button to generate a new picture in the original untransformed orientation This function applies only to the windows selected by the buttons in Figure 54 Dynamically Moving the Picture e eel EES EE Figure 56 Motion of Picture Buttons Interactive rotation translation zoom and framing outlining an area which is to become the displayed picture is available for both the Physical and Computational Windows using the Middle Mouse Button 56 Which action is performed depends on which of the Rotate Move Zoom or Frame buttons is depressed Only one button can be depressed at a time and the program i
401. n zn second axis orientation by the vector none cross_section is the cross section definition number assigned with bsd option can be reverse the order of the nodes is the reverse of the default si sid_ Sliding Interface Number vold volume volume of Discrete Beam lump inertia lumped inertia cablcid system_ local coordinate system id number defined by the Isys Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 417 cabarea area caboff offset csarea area sharea area inertia iss itt irr thickness roffl x soffl y toffl z roff2 x soff2 y toff2 z Idr1 Ids1 ldt1 Irr1 Irs1 Irti Idr2 Ids2 Idt2 Irr2 Irs2 Irt2 Idr3 Ids3 1dt3 Irr3 Irs3 Irt3 theta 0 cable area cable offset cross section area shear area of cross section cross section moments of inertia thickness Hughes Liu x component of offset vector for first end point y component of offset vector for first end point z component of offset vector for first end point x component of offset vector for last end point y component of offset vector for last end point z component of offset vector for last end point release the x translation constraint at first end point release the y translation constraint at first end point release the z translation constraint at first end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at first end point release the rotation constr
402. nd Smoothing gt Begin With An Arc Of A Circle Begin By Intersecting Two Surfaces VVVVVVNVNVNNNNN Figure 159 Dialogue Box You can use only one dialogue box at a time If you have a dialogue box open you cannot create another one Ifthere is a dialogue box open and you type dial command on the command line the old dialogue box will be destroyed Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 172 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual If not everything fits in the dialogue box you can scroll through it or maximize the window by clicking on the max min button in the upper right corner If you choose to maximize the dialogue box be sure to return it to its reduced size before quitting the window Otherwise the next dialogue box will appear by default to be maximized The red arrows in the window the arrow keys and the page up down keys work as described on page 76 Dialogue boxes also offer continuous scrolling press and hold down the Middle Mouse Button and move it up or down Your right mouse button will drag the contents of the dialogue box Release the mouse button when satisfied Another way to scroll through the dialogue box is to press Control B for backwards or Control F for forwards When your mouse is not in the text window your keystrokes will be entered into the dialogue You enter data into a dialogue box by using both the mouse and the keyboard With the mouse
403. nd k directions respectively Thus the index progression above is equivalent to the following 4 regions 3334 423534 4 5541 T 4 3 Example 2 is derived from Example 1 Figure 21 10 selected regions faces Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 52 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 1 3 0 4 5 2 3 0 4 5 3 4 In this example faces are selected by specifying the negative reduced indices This is equivalent to clicking on the corresponding nodes along the index bars at the ends of the selected interval Figure 21 This is also equivalent to selecting the following 10 regions 143154 12313 4 42343 4 44345 4 143344 133334 l 2 8332 4 443544 43353 4 42352 4 Example 3 In Example 3 edges are selected by specifying one interval and two negative reduced indices Figure 22 The interval in the i direction is from 1 to 2 The other two indices are j 2 and k 4 So there is one selected edge 122244 The next two examples demonstrate selection of the edge in the j and k direction respectively Example 4 the edge in the j direction Figure 23 12 2 4 The region notation of this edge is 112344 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 53 Example 5 an edge in the k direction Figure 24 l o25 3 4 The region notation of this edge is 112234 Figure 24 1 selected
404. nded that no spacing commands be used with splint until the desired shape has been achieved As a result of this limitation this command has only limited applicability Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 251 tf Transfinite interpolation tf region Remarks You can apply transfinite interpolation to a face or a block of the mesh Both the face and the block can cross partitions in the mesh However if interior edges or faces respectively have been projected to surfaces those projections will be ignored This method best preserves the relative spacing in the boundaries throughout the interior For best results in a 3D solid region apply the transfinite interpolation to the six exterior faces of a 3D solid region and the 3D solid region Algorithm This is the best algebraic mesh interpolation methods It is very sensitive to the shape of the boundary edges and the distribution of the nodes along the edges The boundary spacing is mapped to relative arc length spacing ranging from 0 0 to 1 0 Then it interpolates all interior coordinates in the relative arc length field Each node is projected to the boundaries in the relative arc length coordinates and uses that projection to get the projection of each node onto the actual boundaries Finally it uses the node s relative arc length coordinates to interpolate the actual projected boundary coordinates This is exp
405. ndent temperature boundary condition on the regions It is assumed that the temperature used by the appropriate simulation code will be the product of the temperature and the amplitude of the load curve at the appropriate time in the simulation vit functional prescribed temperature vft region load_curve_ temperature where load_curve_ a load curve number or 0 temperature temperature expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions This specifies a time dependent temperature boundary condition on the regions It is assumed that the temperature used by the appropriate simulation code will be the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 373 product of the temperature derived from the temperature expression in this command and the amplitude of the load curve at the appropriate time in the simulation vfti functional prescribed temperature by progression vfti progression load curve ft temperature where load curve amp a load curve number or 0 temperature temperature expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions This specifies a time dependent temperature boundary condition on the regions It is assumed that the temperature used by the appropriate simulation code will be t
406. ne is defined by the pairs of coordinates x z c of the control points The coordinates of the control points c are 0 0 1 5 1 5 1 1 1 5 and 0 2 lv c Display 2D curves c Definition of the volume number 1 for the assignment c of the material vdicr0o000011 c Volume is created by rotation c of the 2D curve around axis given by the local coordinate c origin 0 0 0 and the vector parallel to the axis c of rotation 0 0 1 The number of the 2D curve is 1 u 1 c Assignment of the material to the volume mtv 111222122 c The material is assigned to the region c111222 The volume definition number is 1 Mode of the c selection of the elements is Element Center Within Volume 2 c Material number 2 is assigned to the elements within the c volume merge dm 1 c Material 1 is displayed in the Merge Phase dm 2 c Material 2 is displayed in the Merge Phase Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 467 TrueGrid Manual Figure 405 Surface corresponding to the Volume Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 a y z g LESS Ax o LUL UCUL UEU BEES 33 y We E SOS SS x a A SRO IN E LS ITH TIO de Yi e Or 1 O f 1 4 S 3 bd Y 2 o Ea u v E ERRATA M B AL KX J 8 APR R AR TPAANAX
407. ners in both directions The example below uses this method which interpolates the interior nodes outside the convex boundary Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 244 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual TrueGrid draw Figure 257 Pathology Of Bi Linear Interpolation But TrueGrid does not do that when a middle distance d or e is less than an edge distance dm d m ore In these cases it scales down some of the last four terms of the above equation as follows Let c d d and if c lt 1 define Wry 1 0 0 a XG aige aX JR Xij pk and otherwise let Wi Xijn k In a similar fashion let c d d and if c lt 1 then define W A N a XG 7 04 aX JH Xip k and otherwise let W Xd Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 245 Next define similar equations for the i index Let c e e and if c 1 then define Wa A c db XG Fino bX i j k eX j k and otherwise let Win X j k 1 Last let c e e and if c lt 1 then define Wa 1 OQ 0 5 XG 7 bX i j k cX 1 j Kk and otherwise let W X ij k Ix Then the formula for the new coordinates of the interior node is A ijk 1 aY1 b X j k a 1 DXi nK abX i j k z 1 a bX i j k A W aW Q DW BW In the example above some of the effective boundary coor
408. ng it to a 3D curve The vertices of the selected edge are placed onto the closest points on the 3D curve Then the interior nodes of the edge are distributed along the 3D curve Figure 129 Before attachment The command generated by this action will be printed to the text window and to the session file tsave The curtyp command controls which type of the curve attachment is used when the attach button is depressed after a 3D curve has been selected The default is curs The curs command has the feature that if you select a multiple edge of the mesh each simple component edge will be placed onto the 3D curve independent of the others Figure 131 Cure attachment In contrast if the curtyp is set to cure the resulting attachment will place the end vertices of the edge of the mesh to the end points of the 3D curve instead of the closest point on the 3D curve Vertices are attached to points see the other forms of this attach function before edges are attached to 3D curves regardless the order in which these commands are generated This gives you the option to move the vertices on the edge into a better position after you have attached the edge to the 3D curve Also see the commands cur curs cure and curf for a complete discussion on attaching an edge to a 3D curve Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 159 Attaching
409. ng nodes in the merge phase should be reserved for special cases because if in the future you make any changes to the mesh and rerun the session file such as changing the mesh density then the pn command which is automatically generated when you move a specific node must be scrapped and redone Now select the type of move operation you wish to perform listed below from the list of options found on the right hand side of the panel The region progression or node which you have selected is moved by a click and drag operation with the Left Mouse Button in the Physical Window In the part phase as you move the mouse in the physical window during this click and drag operation you will notice that the displacement vector for the center of mass of the region center of mass of the progression or vertex will be displayed as scrolling coordinates at the bottom of the Move Points Panel When you release the Left Mouse Button the displacement vector at that point is used to modify the mesh by issuing a pb mbi or tr command containing this displacement This command will be printed in the text window and the session file tsave The displacement is done in the coordinate system of the part In the block part the displacement is in Cartesian coordinates In the cylinder part the displacement is done in the selected cylindrical coordinate system see the cycorsy command In the merge phase as you move the mouse in the physical window during this c
410. nitialization 157 parttigfs cuu eerte ts 45 quality 2 oue ce Cae eas 437 Mesh Sd option VBLEO 44 Pu zuo see SHE rue 20 Mesh Parameterization 45 Mesh quality anu iia ete ros RE 221 Avolume option 437 Jacobian option 438 Orthogonal option 438 Pointvolume option 437 Smallest option 438 Volume option 437 Mid DUO ea da re tec 135 Middle Mouse Button 88 112 114 177 MOTION uos e eof d aite d 111 Min Expressions 289 Minimum reduced index 47 Mod Expressions 289 Modify mesh ous de chav ea chaos 23 Modify mesh command 294 Moms ce arg Wa P ao bp tu dd 344 Moments MOM A e 344 TOP Ie da EA 346 Momentum deposition A Shut RR Pul DES HR 343 Momi deos docte b p e tote 346 Mouse left button 71 77 98 105 middle button 71 middle mouse Ju right button 71 83 three buttons 71 two buttons lusus 71 MOVE nta nidos uda eS 88 SD CUVE cede tee estate des 155 button 24 od ue dasa teeth tea en 112 114 by constraint 154 front VIEW os sean hake era es 153 polygon surface 155 Ot doe ed d eH 157 Regions ofthe Mesh 148 screen plane a oe um ete erre in 152 Move Dutton cr ivan 111 Mov Pts 4 icem hif br 3 area 209 Copyright O 1992 2006
411. nitiates with the Rotate option selected The action is performed by pressing the Middle Mouse Button in the window whose picture is to be altered dragging the mouse to some new location while the Middle Mouse Button remains pressed and then releasing the button Note If you find yourself with the Middle Mouse Button down for the Frame function and you change your mind simply move the cursor out of the current window before releasing the button This will result in no Frame change being performed When applying the Rotate Move or Zoom function the center mouse button continues to work when dragged outside the Physical or Computational Window Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 112 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Rotating the Picture In order to rotate the picture press the Rotate button with the Left Mouse Button Then perform a click and drag operation using the Middle Mouse Button on the window containing the picture that bracket with hole bracket with hole TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 57 Rotated Picture Figure 58 Frame Zoomed Picture is to be rotated A skeleton picture will dynamically track the mouse motion as the mouse is moved across the screen When the mouse button is released a new picture is automatically displayed The object is rotated relative to the physical length defined by the click and drag operation When you have zoomed in a lot this may be a very slow
412. nodes map to coordinates Xo Xo X10 X Xio X Xos and X in physical space then r s will be mapped to X where TS X Ur Xo Xis 0 5 0 7 X oq rX 7 X4 s 07 DAS Xa X Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 255 Eight Boundary Points Are Used To Pi Interpolate An Interior Node Figure 266 Interpolation From Eight Boundary Points Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 256 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The result in the example is Nodes Are Selected On The Surface To Have The Same Relative Arc Length As The Corresponding Nodes In The Unit Square Figure 267 Interpolated Face In some cases the transformation from physical space to relative arc length space can be many to one that is there might be interior folding of the face from the relative arc length field In this case the mesh is relaxed or smoothed a little to avoid the fold A face can be transfinitely interpolated and projected onto a surface Since the edges ofthe face are projected to the surface first conforming to the relative spacing rules invoked the transfinitely interpolated face from these edges may conform closely to the shape of the projection surface In this case the properties of the transfinite interpolation will be preserved after each node has been moved the short distance to the actual p
413. nove coe Ge eis 134 SAVE AS da ust cene deles ede aae 133 Shi EC NEU re a ai 134 toggle il o d 134 Set identification ci acer eae 352 Sets add 07 re s eee arse 134 Beni ee msor petente tati 134 Brick Speer ae oan RI eeu 134 create beams 137 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 501 create face oo o 135 orientation 414 create node 135 outward normal 413 create polygon ccce us 139 solid interface 411 create shells 138 thickness 413 416 element A eter Hess 133 Shells face cicer ed 133 134 bUttOn asic id reete tese ee 116 PACES nc nme uei ore 134 create Sets ooooo 138 d si ent epit eben ips 134 TICS oo hdd alien ud eoe d 136 MOUS as LC Ina n 133 TAB SIS eost E ttr fee 115 plyg sarine aie AS 133 PAN CIE aa ex diari on ees 164 quadratic brick 134 Shells Button sora 134 quadratic shell 134 Shift Rey 6 osten o dab cr ree d 113 remove from 134 SHOW Lax Seder ee G es le ace Tus 124 127 shell tina abras 134 Show All button 141 142 surface polygon 134 Show Button cosas dada 127 Sets Button Show None button 141 142 polygon redi crop ete e UE 133 Show Only button 141 142 A A a RO COR uckA 376 SItosO duce wr A Gore a ce RUE Bue 411
414. ntific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 262 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual tmei Thomas Middlecoff relaxation by index progression tmei progression iterations min_change weight where iterations is the maximum number of iterations to use min_change is an absolute error tolerance there will be no more iterations if in the last iteration no coordinate was moved by more than min_change in any zone weight is an interpolation weight factor use 1 0 if you don t need this feature Remarks tmei and tme are related the usual way that a command for progressions is related to a command for regions You could replace one tmei command with a number of tme commands by breaking the progression into a number of regions and applying tme separately to each of the regions When faces or volumes are specified in one index progression then each face or volume is relaxed independently of the others See the discussion of tme on the preceding pages neu Orthogonal boundary smoothing neu region switch where switch can be ON to activate the Neumann or orthogonality condition OFF to deactivate the Neumann or orthogonality condition Remarks This command identifies the regions ofthe mesh where the unifm or unifmi commands will satisfy the Neumann or orthogonality boundary condition instead of the Dirichlet condition This command must be issued before issuing the unifm and unifmi commands This command accumulates a set of boundary nodes in t
415. nus below the text window a dialogue bow or window will appear This window contains the options and prompts for arguments for the selected command After you select options and fill in the necessary arguments click on the EXEC QUIT button to issue the command You can also set up a command issue it without quitting the dialogue box edit a few command arguments and then reissue the command There are four ways to create a dialogue box 1 Select a command by left clicking your mouse in a submenu 2 On the command line of the text menu window enter dial command The word dial must appear immediately after the prompt 3 Select a command from the history window All options will be filled in according to the parameters in the selected command 4 Highlight a command and all of its arguments from the text window or from any other window containing text and type Control Z All options will be filled in according to the parameters in the highlighted command 3D curve definition number Select the First Segment Type Begin With An IGES Curve Begin With An Edge Of A Surface Begin With A 3D Polygonal Curve Begin With A Surface Contour Begin With a 3D Cubic Spline Begin With a B Spline Curve Begin With NURBS Curve Begin With A 2D Curve Begin With An Interpolated Curve Begin With Surface Curve Points Begin With A Parameterized Function Curve Begin By Projecting A 3D Curve To A Surface Begin By Projecting A Curve To Surface A
416. o just use a zero Example A part is defined in Cartesian coordinates and the mesh is manipulated The nodal moment is assigned to the nodes of the region2 2 1 2 3 2 Figure 333 The command file follows definition of the mesh Pineeedd disBlap mom 22 12 3 2 0 153 z c nodal moment is c assigned c to nodes of c region c 221232 c by null load curve 0 c with amplitude 153 c around z axis merge co mom O z c display nodal moment c for null load curve c around z axis Figure 333 nodal moment Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 345 momi nodal moment about an axis momi progression load_curve moment direction where load_curve is a load curve number or zero moment magnitude of the moment direction specifies the axis of the moment and can be any of x y z Remarks The same as for mom command ndl nodal distributed load ndl region load_curve amplitude where load_curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor Remarks This command specifies a load to be distributed on a surface If the load curve argument is 0 that means there is no load curve TrueGrid will convert the pressure to nodal loads by multiplying the pressure by the surface area around each node The direction of the force is set to the direction of the normal to the face of the mesh at each node TrueGrid will natura
417. o move an F9 or F7 Prints KJ C edge of the mesh so that all nodes along the edge are given y the same x and y coordinates leaving the z coordinate of pick Node F5 p7 BEEN 10ca1 each node unaltered This can be done in the Pick panel by A e R5 clicking the check in the box next to the Z If you click in Figure 79 Z coordinate inactive the box again then the check will reappear Each coordinate can be made active or inactive independently of the other coordinates Whenever the F7 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 129 key is used only the checked coordinates will be printed When the Attach button is clicked only the checked coordinates of a point are used to make an attach The inactive coordinates have no affect on attaching to a curve or surface edge The picked coordinates are shown at the bottom of the Pick panel Pick Panel Picking an Edge Face or Block When Region button is selected in the Pick panel then one can select any region in the Physical Window Click and drag with the Left Mouse Button from one end point of an edge of the mesh to the other endpoint of the edge Figure 80 and Figure 81 The edge will turn blue as you do this Figure 82 and Figure 83 If the mouse is dragged instead to the opposite corner of a face of the mesh then that face will be selected and highlighted in
418. o translate in the y direction mz z offset to translate in the z direction v x offset y offsetz offset to translate by a vector rx theta to rotate about the x axis ry theta to rotate about the y axis rz theta to rotate about the z axis raxis angle x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn axis of rotation rxy to reflect about the x y plane ryz to reflect about the y z plane rzx to reflect about the z x plane tf origin x axis y axis where each of the arguments consist of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s i j label of a labeled point from a surface ftf st origin 1st x axis Ist y axis 2nd origin 2nd x axis 2nd y axis where each of the arguments consist of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 439 sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s i j label of a labeled point from a surface inv invert the present transformation Remarks The frame of reference for the cylinder part can be changed from the default The default is where the pole in the cylindrical coordinate system aligns with the z axis of the global Cartesian coordinate syst
419. ock boundary interface in the picture and pick by nodes Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 391 master boundary A gt TR NI em TIRE i S RE m YASS ES a N HITNO I HTT SANA BLT NT HT Vr So m as CN ems mn VA Figure 341 before application of bb Figure 342 after application of bb Alternatively you can specify the mapping from the slave to the master side of the interface with the map option There are 8 ways the corners can be mapped from the slave to the master To determine the proper mapping first label the four corners of both the master and slave as shown below depending on the type of face 4 3 4 3 4 3 3 5 FA N HN ha N 4 ha N gt J SR STI I face J face K face Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 392 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The following rules determine the mapping identifier 1 means map slave corners 1 2 3 4 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 2 means map slave corners 1 4 3 2 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 3 means map slave corners 2 3 4 1 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 4 means map slave corners 2 1 4 3 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 5 means m
420. offset vector for last end point Idr1 release the x translation constraint at first end point Ids1 release the y translation constraint at first end point Idt1 release the z translation constraint at first end point Irri release the rotation constraint about the x axis at first end point Irs1 release the rotation constraint about the y axis at first end point Irt1 release the rotation constraint about the z axis at first end point Idr2 release the x translation constraint at last end point Ids2 release the y translation constraint at last end point Idt2 release the z translation constraint at last end point Irr2 release the rotation constraint about the x axis at last end point Irs2 release the rotation constraint about the y axis at last end point 426 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Irt2 release the rotation constraint about the z axis at last end point Idr3 release the x translation constraint at intermediate point Ids3 release the y translation constraint at intermediate point Idt3 release the z translation constraint at intermediate point Irr3 release the rotation constraint about the x axis at intermediate points Irs3 release the rotation constraint about the y axis at intermediate points Irt3 release the rotation constraint about the z axis at intermediate points theta 0 orientation angle for the cross section w
421. ojection onto a surface curve or a surface edge Figure 74 The surface curve or surface edge must be picked first You can select Pick Nede F5 MEN these geometrical objects either by lasso or by label At this point the bottom of the pick panel will show the Figure 74 Pick Panel subject of the projection Then click the Projection ria praw pefined surfaces button Be careful not the Project button and select the point by clicking the Left Mouse Button in the desired location on the screen The results of the Pick by Projection operation are x y z coordinates of the point which is positioned on the aforementi oned TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Surfaces Sur fa ce y curve or surface edge Once selected the x y z Figure 75 Point picked by Projection on visible Surface coordinates y Z buffer P A Coordinates can be entered into a dialog box by pressing F7 or F9 151 6E 04 when the cursor is over the dialog box This method is not appropriate to use with folded surfaces or surfaces with large curvature The Pick by Projection operation can be used in Wire Hide or Fill modes Figure 76 Point picked by Z buffer Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 126 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Pick Panel Pick a Point by Z buffer A point can be picked by Z Buffer on a visible surface shell face or brick face in the Hide or Fill mode Figur
422. ojects them to the required surfaces Next TrueGrid interpolates the edges attaches then to the required curves and then projects them to the required surfaces Thereafter TrueGrid interpolates the faces and projects them to the required surfaces Finally TrueGrid interpolates the interior nodes For a complete description of the command hierarchy see the Geometry section of the Generation chapter Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 4l Multiple Block Structured Parts TrueGrid includes many generalizations and extensions of the basic ideas discussed above The most important is the ability to generate a single part by combining many structured block meshes A block in such a part will normally share nodes with other blocks One way to set up such a part is to generate each block separately and then merge the nodes to connect the blocks If this is to be done it is important that the nodes in the blocks that are to be merged have nearly the same coordinates This duplicate effort makes mesh generation more complicated than it needs to be A better way to set up a multi block part is to generate the blocks together as a part having common nodes from the start A multiple block part requires some planning First imagine the part as embedded in a large block of clay You chisel away some rectangular blocks with the de command thus revealing a very coarse approximat
423. olume of the mesh between six faces The order of the interpolations and their interdependencies are discussed in the Introduction and in the section describing the command hierarchy This multi dimensional interpolation is a modification of the tensor product of linear interpolation In the 1D case node are interpolated along a line between two end points so as to satisfy the relative spacing rule In the 2D case a modified bi linear method interpolates interior nodes from the four boundary edges of the face of a mesh In the 3D case a modified tri linear method interpolates the The default relative spacing rule is for nodes to be equally spaced You can set the relative spacing rule with res drs as das or nds Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 241 interior nodes from the six boundary faces of a three dimensional rectangular region of the mesh The following is an exact description of the interpolation method for the interior of a two dimensional region In the following i j k will represent computational space coordinates see the Introduction x y z will represent physical space coordinates and X will represent the vector of all three physical space coordinates X x y z Normally we will think of this vector X as depending on the computational coordinates X X 1 j k Consider a face where the i index ranges from i to i the j index ranges from j
424. om a set ofnodesS o o 458 nseti add remove nodes to from a set of nodes 458 nsetc attach a comment to anode se o oo oo oooooooommmmoo 460 fsetc PACE Sel COMMENT ia a 460 esetc element set Comments ss vos v aea Ee Noa S orbe ri red 460 nsetinfo report the node set names and number of nodes 460 25 Material Commands ta tt s aan ORs tA A EE MR OD NOE REN E 461 mate part default material number for each region 461 mt material number for a region oooooooocoocoooroooo 461 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 17 IV Index mti mtv por pori SC assign material number material number assigned to a specified volume 466 to specify the region with porosity for REFLEQS 469 to specify the region with porosity for REFLEQS 470 to define the ale smoothing constraints for LS DYNA3D 470 IA AAA AIDA A ASIA E RE ADA 471 18 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual I Introduction Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 19 1 What is TrueGrid TrueGrid is a powerful interactive and batch mesh generator It can create meshes of unsurpassed quality more quickly and easily than by any other method With thi
425. ommand Material 3 is assigned by the mate command to the whole part The mti command specifies material for 3 regions 396 397 398 gradually 394 shows materials displayed in various colors in the Fill Mode The simplified command file follows c Definition of the structured block part shells block 15 9 13 21 25 1 3 5 1 5 9 13 Oy 2 59 AL 56 0c uo Lo A dei 2 3 0 4 57 2 2 35 c Deletion of 2 regions c Assignment of the default material of the part c material number 3 mate 3 c Assignment of the material number 4 to the region 1 mti 1 4 c Assignment of the material number 5 to the region 4 mti 4 5 C Assignment of the material number 6 to the region 2 3 mti 2 3 6 merge dam disp c Display of all materials Hide mod Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 462 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual TrueGrid display TrueGrid view 7 2 LIL UK SS OL QR COO Figure 393 All Materials Hide Mode Figure 394 All Materials Fill Mode dam tvv c Display of all materials Fill mode dm 3 c Display of material number 3 dm 4 c Display of material number 4 dm 5 c Display of material number 5 dm 6 c Display of material number 6 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 463 TrueGrid display TrueGrid display
426. ommand to identify those faces surfaces which are to be part of the bulk fluid node calculation Use the orpt command to orient the faces as desired Use the co command with the bf option to display the bulk fluid faces in the merge phase Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 368 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual bfi bulk fluid by index progression bfi progression id_ load amplitude a b where id_ bfd bulk fluid identification number load load curve number amplitude multiplier of the load curve a exponent a b exponent b Remarks See the bf command for remarks cv boundary convection ev region load_curve amplitude load_curve amplitude exponent where load_curve first load curve number or zero amplitude amplitude factor for the first load curve load_curve second load curve number or zero amplitude amplitude factor for the second load curve and exponent exponent Remarks First use the orpt command to specify the surface orientation that is how to orient the normal vector A zero load curve number means that the condition is constant in time Ifa curve is specified which has not been defined a warning message will be issued cvi boundary convection cvi progression load curve amplitude load curve amplitude exponent where load curve first load curve number or zero amplitude amplitude factor for the first load curve Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Ap
427. omponent of offset vector for first end point z component of offset vector for first end point x component of offset vector for last end point y component of offset vector for last end point z component of offset vector for last end point release the x translation constraint at first end point release the y translation constraint at first end point release the z translation constraint at first end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at first end point release the rotation constraint about the y axis at first end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at first end point release the x translation constraint at last end point release the y translation constraint at last end point release the z translation constraint at last end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the y axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at last end point release the x translation constraint at intermediate point release the y translation constraint at intermediate point release the z translation constraint at intermediate point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at intermediate points release the rotation constraint about the y axis at intermediate Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 421 points Irt3 re
428. omputational and or partitions In the following examples Window block 135 7 8 9 c i index list 2345 c j index list j 3 4 6 c k index list 23456 c x coordinates A 2345 c y coordinates d 234 c z coordinates z b a r Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 51 selected partitions and intervals are colored red along the index bars Objects in the mesh will be highlighted Example 1 L 30 4 5 2 3 0 4 57 3 4 is depicted in Figure 20 The first index list defines 2 intervals in the 1 direction from 1 to 3 and from 4 to 5 The zero indicates the interval from 3 to 4 is to be skipped TrueGrid will use this set of two intervals in combination with the intervals in the j and k directions to form 3 dimensional regions The second index list defines two intervals in the j direction from 2 to 3 and from 4 to 5 The third index list defines one interval in the k direction Solid regions are highlighted in cyan Figure 20 4 selected regions volumes TrueGrid constructs a set of three dimensional regions from these index lists by selecting an interval from the first list to define the range in the i direction an interval from the second list to define the range in the j direction and an interval from the third list to define the range in the k direction It then produces all possible combinations of the intervals in the i j a
429. on 378 vrb prescribed radiation boundary w functional amplitudes 378 vrbi prescribed radiation boundary by progression 379 re radiation ene AA qa es aut Sce d Ne DEN 379 rei radiation enclosure by index progression 380 te constant nodal temperature 00 0 e ee eee 380 tei constant nodal temperature 00 0000 eee eee eee 381 temp part default constant nodal temperature 381 tepro variable nodal temperature profile o ooo 381 tm initial temperature condition 0 0 cece eee eee 382 tmi initial temperature condition by index progression 382 vtm initial temperature w functional temp 382 vtmi initial temperature by index progression w functional temp 382 vhg volumetric heat generation 0 0c eee ee eee eee 383 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 15 vhgi volumetric heat generation by index progression 383 vvhg volumetric heat generation w functional amplitude 383 15 Electric Condition Commgn s aad saya ete rea Ce peer eas 383 efl electric flux boundary condition ooooooooooooo o 383 efli electric flux boundary condition by index progression 384 mp constant magnetic potential cunas cad ph re xs 384 mpi constant magnetic potential 1 aks a 384 V electrostatic potent
430. on or green for off Moreover the dot will be white when the Mouse Pointer is in the neighborhood Geometrically a single highlighted dot selects a face two highlighted dots on different bars select an edge and three highlighted dots on different bars select a vertex To understand the affect of the defaults in this selection you need to understand the affect of selecting a segment of an index bar A segment is the part of an index bar which lies between two dots You toggle segments on or off by a click and drag action of the mouse Move the Mouse Pointer over the dot at one end of the segment the dot will turn white Depress the Left Mouse Button and keep it down as you drag the mouse along the index bar to another dot As you drag the mouse segments will change color to indicate that they are being turned on or off red for on or green for off Once you have selected the segments you want release the Left Mouse Button Remember that this is a toggling action So in order to deselect a segment repeat the click and drag action When you turn dots and segments on you are selecting the corresponding Regions in the computational and physical meshes You can select a block 3D prism by selecting segments in each of the i j and k index bars You can select faces by selecting segments in two of the bars and dots in one bar Edges are selected by choosing segments in one bar and dots in the other bars Vertices are selected by choosing dots in
431. on the length of a command line you type during an interactive TrueGrid session But batch input files have a maximum line length of 256 characters This is not a serious restriction because TrueGrid generally ignores line breaks Therefore you can spread a command over several lines or stack several commands in one line without doing anything special There are a few exceptions The title line comments and similar text end with the end of a line Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 62 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual A Fortran like expression ends with the end of the line unless the line s last character is amp In that case it continues to the next line When writing batch files it helps to use comments liberally TrueGrid will ignore anything in a line that follows a c or word that is a c or separated by spaces from any other character in the line It will also ignore any group of lines that are surrounded by and There are many commands with an arbitrarily long list of parameters A semi colon is used to signify the end of the list of parameters When you use the dialogues to select options and list parameters the insertion of the semi colon is done automatically When you execute the filled in dialogue you will notice that the command is printed in the text window with the semi colons inserted If you choose to type the commands into the text window or build a co
432. onal spaceship In TrueGrid the most important way to deform a simple mesh is with the sf or sfi commands This is done interactively with the PROJECT button Fora projection you specify a region of the mesh and a surface to project it onto For every node of the region in physical space TrueGrid will find its projection onto the surface i e the closest point on the surface That projection point will be the new location of the node in physical space See the discussion of the sf command for a more precise description But TrueGrid is not finished when it has moved the face of a block part Every other node of the part may have to be moved in order to preserve interpolation and spacing rules Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 31 ing parts before merg Ip Model of a fictional spacesh Figure 9 Inc All Rights Reserved ions t ific Applica 1ent Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Sc TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 32 Initial Block TrueGrid display Cylindrical Surfaces for Projection TrueGrid display i 10 Simple Part before Projecti mee a a Figure 11 Cylindrical Surfaces For example we specified that the upper face of the block in Figure 10 be projected to the upper cylinder in Figure 11 in order to get the curved upper face of Figure 13 After this surface projec tion TrueGrid
433. ong edges again because the interior nodes of a 3D block are interpolated based on the nodal distribution on its 6 bounding faces There are many ways that the interior of a face and the interior of a 3D block can be interpolated It is up to you to choose the appropriate nodal distribution along the edges and the appropriate interpolation The default nodal distribution along each edge is equal spacing The default interpolation for a face or 3D block is linear The type of interpolation may seem to be subtle when you have small curvature and equal spacing along edges But when things conditions are non linear in the mesh the type of interpolation can make a big difference in the quality of the mesh There are commands to distribute the nodes along an edge face or a 3D block But when such a nodal distribution is applied to a face or a 3D block it is only directly affecting the edges on that region and indirectly affecting the interior nodes through the interpolation of the nodes from the edges If an edge is assigned a nodal distribution and that edge is within the interior of a region that is interpolated the nodal distribution will be ignored This is because of the command hierarchy since faces and 3D blocks are interpolated after the edge nodes are calculated On the other hand if you apply an iterative smoothing method such as relax tme or unifm then the nodal distribution of the interior edge may only be slightly affected based on the num
434. ons in the i direction This feature is useful in generating structural elements embedded within the solid or shell region The local coordinate orientation can be selected in many ways or none at all The v option specifies a vector for the orientation That vector is defined by the coordinate system If the part is a cylinder the vector is in the form of a radial angular and z offset Depending on the coordinates ofthe beam the cylindrical vector will define a different orientation for each beam since the vector offset is made in cylindrical coordinates and then transformed to Cartesian coordinates Each beam element can have an additional third node used to determine the orientation of the cross section and local material coordinate system The neighboring beam elements can be used to select the orientation node The options i j or k will select the node of the corresponding neighboring beam element In each case only two of the options are appropriate TrueGrid draw element local rst axis The sd option is used to orient the beam normal to a surface The v option creates an orientation in a given vector direction In the latter two cases a new node is created for each beam when nodes are required to orient beams Use the orpt command when using the sd option To define the cross section use the bsd Figure 370 orientation of beam axes Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGr
435. or fluid flow by index progression 360 lb local nodal displacement and rotation constraints 360 Ibi local nodal boundary constraints by progression 360 mpc shared nodal multiple point constraints for a nodal set 361 namreg name a region for the TASCFLOW output file 362 namregi name regions for the TASCFLOW output file 363 nr non reflecting boundary oooooooooococo 363 nri non reflecting boundaries 2 0 cece eee eee 363 ol identifies a face of the mesh as an outlet for fluid flow 363 oli identifies faces of the mesh as an outlet for fluid flow 364 reg select a region for the REFLEQS boundary condition 364 regi select regions for the REFLEQS boundary condition 364 sfb locally constrain face nodes suivre EL we uhr 365 sfbi locally constrain face nodes by progression 366 SW assign nodes that may impact a stone wall 366 swi assign nodes that may impact a stone wall 367 14 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual syf assign faces to a numbered symmetry plane with failure 367 syfi assign faces to a numbered symmetry plane with failure 367 trp create tracer particles for Lsdyna oo ooooooooo o 368 14 Radiation and Temperature Commands 00 cece eee 368 bf bulk Huid eent
436. or just this situation You have selected a piece of the mesh that includes a volume and part of that volume has been deleted and the selected region contains or borders on a face that borders on a deleted region This coupling of the history and computational window is important when you have a complex problem with an error in your input The history window can be used to find the command s in error and to correct the error s The history window is you primary tool in debugging your mesh Selecting a Region with Click and Drag in the Computational Window A single vertex edge face or block can be selected from the picture of the computational mesh using a click and drag with the left mouse button To select a vertex move the mouse close to a vertex in the computational mesh and click the left mouse button The vertex in both the computational and physical window will be highlighted in red Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 105 2 1 2 3 4 NA Figure 45 Edge with click and drag Each time you depress the left mouse button it starts a new selection process by initializing the selection to the closest vertex To select a face of the mesh start the click and drag procedure at one corner of the face and drag to the opposite corner of the face I 2 3 By holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse to trace an edge of
437. orces pressures loads or other such conditions In most of them the arguments take the form region load_curve amplitude x y z or progression load_curve amplitude x y z The load curve is not appropriate for some commands and do not appear in the command The condition is applied to the given region or index progression or just to the nodes in it It is applied in the direction given by the vector x y z which might be in Cartesian cylindrical or spherical coordinates For some simulation codes like Dyna3d the magnitude of the load is the product of the amplitude and the current value of the load curve In this case the load curve is a time dependent function given by the load curve number load_curve In some other simulation codes such as Abaqus the load curve number is used to associate the load with a step see abaqstep and in other simulation codes like Nastran the load curve number actually identifies the load case arri modify pressure amplitudes and shock arrival time arri d_curve_ list options where option must be velo velocity toff time off set point x0 y0 z0 Shock shape sphere line x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn Shock shape infinite cylinder x0 y0 z0 point on line xn yn zn direction vector of line plane x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn Shock shape infinite plane x0 y0 z0 point in plane xn yn zn normal vector of plane laser distribution ft x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn x0 y0 z0 point on line xn yn zn direction vector of l
438. orm elements than relax center edge length esm 11122 unifm 0 16685584 5 5 4 200 0 0001 1 Notice the mesh lines pull away from the center This behavior is similar to the way relax behaves near a convex boundary center edge length Figure 283 5 Uniform smoothing relax Zu Mmm TrueGrid Manual Figure 284 Elliptic smoothing April 6 2006 5 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 30 0 11264142 5 253 00001 1 4 200 1 center vertex were carefully chosen so that the length of the The parameters controlling the nodal distribution from the center element is center edge length 270 This next example shows the interior of a 7 block spherical mesh The maximum angle in this mesh is 120 07 degrees parameters size 10 ninit 200 sd 1 sp 000 3 partmode i block size size size size size size size size size dei 12034 1 2 03 4 dei 1 2 0 3 4 12 0 3 4 dei 12034 1203 4 sfi 1 4 1 4 1 4 sd 1 bb 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 bb212223 1 bb 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 bb 322423 2 bb 3 3 2 4 3 3 3 bbB3323 43 3 bb 232243 4 bb132233 4 bb 1 2 3 2 3 3 5 bb 2 2 3 2 3 4 5 Figure 285 Inner faces of a spherical bb 213 32 3 6 bb 2 23 3 2 4 6 mesh bb 323433 7 bbB323334 7 bb 2333 43 8bb 233334 8 bb 122232 9 bb2
439. orted as polygon surfaces using the vpsd command Curve These are 3D curves created using the curd command or imported as IGES using the iges or igesfile command BB Master sides to block boundaries interfaces are created using the bb command within a part generated with the mbb command or imported using the getbb command Part These are parts generated using the block cylinder or blude command or imported using the readmesh command Action Show All Displays all objects of the selected type surfaces curves etc from the picture Show None Removes all objects of the selected type surfaces curves etc from the picture Show Only Removes all objects of the selected type surfaces curves etc from the picture except for the objects that are highlighted Remove Removes picked objects of the selected type surfaces curves etc from the picture Add Adds picked objects of the selected type regions only to the picture The functions available through the Display List panel are limited to objects that can be selected in the picture The exceptions to this are the Show All function and the selection of a region or a progression using the index bars These selection functions and more are also available through keyword commands The keyword commands have the added function of selecting a subset of objects to be added to the picture Also refer to dsd dsds dasd rsd rsds rasd surfaces dcd deds dacd red reds racd
440. ost cases it is unrealistic to expect a one to one correspondence between the surfaces on the geometry and the faces of a good mesh In some cases a face of the mesh may cover only a portion of a surface In other cases a face of the mesh may cross over multiple surfaces In the first case you move the vertices close to their final position using the pb command for example and project with the sf or sfi command In the second case combine the multiple surfaces into a set using the sds option of the sd command and then follow the procedure for the first case Projecting to a set of surfaces is distinct from projecting to the intersection of several surfaces Projecting to a set of surfaces is only one constraint Projecting to the intersection of two surfaces requires two projection commands to two different surfaces constituting two distinct constraints on the mesh It is critical to the design and creation of a quality hexahedron mesh that you have this type of flexibility This flexibility is the motivation behind most of the mesh generation commands and the Command Hierarchy In particular initialization commands such as the pb command always change the position of a portion of the mesh before the constraints projections to surfaces are calculated The order that initialization and constraint commands are issued is ignored when the mesh is calculated Initialization commands are executed first then the constraints are enforced You can ta
441. ou can type 3 5 rather than 0 6 Note the required use of the square brackets encasing the expression Parser and Fortran Interpreter There are several ways to enter a number 3 43e9 3 43e 09 34 Whenever a number is required you may use an equivalent Fortran like expression This feature is key to parameterizing the geometry and topology The expression must be enclosed in square brackets The syntax is the same as in the Fortran and other programming language An expression can contain numbers parameters starting with a intrinsic functions operations such as and parenthesis For example all of the following will yield the same result 1 2 1 2 0 1 0 2 0 asin 30 30 0 1 sqrt 2 isqEt 2 y 1 sqrt t2 2 1 5e i All evaluations are done as floating point and are truncated to integers were it is required The para command defines parameters which you can use in any Fortran expression For example para cd 0 05 defines a parameter cd whose value is to be 0 05 The parameter cd can subsequently appear in any Fortran like expression but must be preceded by a For example 20 cd will have the value 1 0 As soon as you define a parameter you can use it The following expression defines four parameters para cd 0 05 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 175 te cd 2 14159 180 0 0 05 ra 5 0 ra
442. oundary condition reg region face type where the face can be n for the north face S for the south face e for the east face wW for the west face l for the low face or h for the high face and the type can be w for wall p for fixed pressure m for constant mass inflow w momentum d for constant mass inflow w o momentum or s for symmetry regi select regions for the REFLEQS boundary condition regi progression face type where the face can be n for the north face S for the south face e for the east face wW for the west face l for the low face or h for the high face and the type can be w for wall 364 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual p for fixed pressure m for constant mass inflow w momentum d for constant mass inflow w o momentum or s for symmetry sfb locally constrain face nodes sfb region type flow_direction option_list where type can be mesh or surface flow_direction can be none if the constraints requires no flow direction i if the flow direction corresponds to the i direction j if the flow direction corresponds to the j direction k if the flow direction corresponds to the k direction or coor x y z to supply the flow vector option_list for none must be one of t for move only in the normal direction or n for move only in the tangent plane option list for i j K or c can be any of dx for x displacement dy
443. ously deactivated 201 decmd deactivate a mesh command ooocoocccccoc 297 undo deactivate the last active mesh command 298 9 Select Regions For Display ia pale epee acer A Rate eds 298 arg add a region to the display 00 0 c cece ee eee 300 argi add a progression to the display o oooooooo o 300 darg display all regions Li a osse ac Ce Qu C SEN ES RR GR Ue 301 darged display all edBes s cient Ep te Bnet ake eg As 302 rg display a Festo uus ure x recede SR IG RECETA ERN 303 rgi display a progression 24 quu 3 4 ES CORAM 303 rrg remove a region from display o oooo oooomomoo o o 303 rrgi remove a progression from display oo ooooooo o 304 strghl hirehlfiehtTegtotl aua enr dee ated wah d ahi ees aided 304 strghli highlight index progression llle 304 clrghl clear highlighted selection it 305 Io Labels inthe Pict te uS cu oe eu ET UPC EN TRUSTEES 305 labels specify type of label to be displayed 305 11 Displacements Velocities and Accelerations 00sec eee eee eee 306 fd fixed displacement VE a 306 fdi fixed displacement by index progression o oo oooo o 307 fdc cylindrical fixed displacement 02 0 0 momo 308 fdci cylindrical fixed displacement 02 0 0 como 308 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 12 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fds sphe
444. out the y axis at intermediate points release the rotation constraint about the z axis at intermediate points Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 433 theta 0 orientation angle for the cross section warpage nl n2 two nodes used to determine warpage in the beam geom option method of determining curvature where option can be 1 for center of curvature 2 for tangent of centroid arc 3 for bend radius 4 for arc angle Remarks See ibm above Example This example shows some of the difficulties in generating rebar with 1D slide lines through the concrete It is complicated by a butterfly topology for the surrounding concrete Here are the key points 1 The i beams on the j faces include the edges of those faces Do not create similar i beams along the k faces because they will be merged The double beams along the butterfly seams will continue to exist and remain undetected The info command can be used to determine the total number of beam elements However the graphics will be of little use in detecting duplicate beams as seen in 380 2 Choose different materials for each of the beam sets so they can be viewed independently The different beam commands are color coded in 378 After you are certain that you have what you want then go back and combine the beam materials if you wish 3 Carefully count the number of sliding interfaces needed for this constru
445. ow This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics aad add an annotation to the picture in the physical window aad annotation_ Remarks See the ad command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 78 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual caption change or toggle caption caption cap comment or caption off or caption on Remarks By default a caption is displayed at the top of the picture You can specify the caption with the caption command If you do not specify a caption but the problem has a title then the title will be displayed see the title command as a caption If there is no title or caption then there will be no caption Below the caption is a description of the type of picture This description will appear whenever the caption appears If you do not want the caption and picture description to appear turn off their display with caption off You can reverse the effect of caption off by issuing a caption on command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics daad display all annotations in the physical picture daad no argument Remarks See the ad command This feature only works when the H W button is off inactive OpenGl hardware graphics dad display a single annotation in the physical picture dad
446. p 1 TrueGrid display SN VA YS 17 TrueGrid display T T ES A E E A ETT T A CLT TTT TT Ty LIT NEN LABS 7 amy RIA y Ht E DEUS t Figure 149 Step 4 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 168 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Projecting Mesh Faces onto a Single Surface and Subsequent Movement of the Mesh The mesh face yellow is selected in the Computational Window and surface 2 black is picked by label shown in Figure 150 The mesh face is projected onto surface 2 by pressing the Project button Figure 151 The edge of the mesh is selected blue and curve 1 is picked by label black The edge is attached to the curve by pressing the Attach button Figure 121 The vertex of the mesh red is selected The vertex is moved along the surface 2 Figure 123 using the Front View option of the Move Pts panel TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Surfaces TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Surfaces Figure 150 Step 1 Pick face amp surface Figure 151 Step 2 Click Project Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 169 TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Curves TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Curves 146Figure 152 Step 3 Pick edge and curve Figure 153 Step 4 Click Attach TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined Curves TrueGrid DISPLAY Defined C
447. p_node_ x y z mass options where mp_node_ is the node number which is created XYZ are the coordinates of the point mass mass is the assigned mass and options can be ine increment for the increment in the node number under replication dx for no nodal displacement in the x direction dy for no nodal displacement in the y direction dz for no nodal displacement in the z direction rx for no nodal rotations about the x axis ry for no nodal rotations about the y axis YZ for no nodal rotations about the z axis mdx for no mass displacement in the x direction mdy for no mass displacement in the y direction mdz for no mass displacement in the z direction mrx for no mass rotation about the x axis mry for no mass rotation about the y axis mrz for no mass rotation about the z axis ixx mom to specify the moment of inertia about the x axis iyy mom to specify the moment of inertia about the y axis izz mom to specify the moment of inertia about the z axis pdamp alpha for the proportional damping factor ABAQUS and or cdamp raction for the fraction of critical damping ABAQUS Remarks This new node can be attached to the mesh by creating a spring using the spring command in the Part or Merge Phase or by creating a beam in the Merge Phase using the bm command This new node can also be attached to the rest of the mesh in the Merge Phase by merging it to a neighboring node see t tp stp bptol and ptol This is dist
448. part phase The ibm and ibmi commands create beams along i lines of the mesh the jbm and jbmi along j lines and the kbm and kbmi along k lines This is a way to embed beam elements within a shell or brick structure Alternatively the material of the parent shell of brick part can be set to 0 so that the part can be generated as usual but so that the shell or brick elements will not be saved The nodes that are used in any of these beam commands will be saved along with the beam elements The second method of beam element generation uses the bm part These beams are strung along a 3D curve or interpolated along a line segment The bm command is only available in the merge phase Beam properties are defined using bsd and bind Values defining the cross section properties including thicknesses are not affected by part transformations In particular the xsca ysca zsca and csca commands do not scale the thicknesses of beams and shells ibm generate beams in the i direction ibm region _in_j _in_k material orientation cross_section option where _in_j is the number of columns of beam elements in the j direction _in_k is the number of columns of beam elements in the k direction material is the material number orientation is the option of orientation of the cross section axis j second axis orientation in the j direction k second axis orientation in the k direction sd surface_ second axis orientation in the normal to the surface V xn y
449. parts for a topology Such elegant solutions can lead to a slight increase in complexity but justified by the profound increase in productivity You can specify the topology of a single part with the block and cylinder commands In each of these commands you specify i j and k index lists The number of nodes or elements assigned initially to each of the blocks in either the block or cylinder command can be refined at any time Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 197 afterwards using the mseq command Blocks can be split into two anytime using the insprt command Then the de and dei commands can carve out holes in the part forming exactly the block topology that you need The rest of the information needed to fully describe the shape of the mesh after the topology has been specified is the model geometry You begin to specify the geometry of a part with the coordinate lists in the block and cylinder commands Then the pb pbs mb mbi q tr tri ilin ilini cur cure curs and edge commands are used to modify this shape Edges faces and interior nodes are automatically interpolated Interpolation commands such as lin lini splint tf tfi relax relaxi esm unifm unifmi tme and tmei can override this default interpolation In practice one uses these commands to generate a higher quality mesh You can constraint parts of the mesh by projecting a region o
450. perator redefines a face set to be only those faces which are found to be both in the original set and among the selected faces Selected faces can be added by using the union operator This causes any selected faces to be included in a set if it is not already in that set The minus operator removes all faces in a set which are among the selected faces Faces in face sets are identified by an element number and an order number of a face in the element Nodes in the face are ordered by the right hand rule The vector in is always oriented outward from the element Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 455 Example TrueGrid display face set ststl cylinder ES o A oya ES 4 30 15 0 15 30 135 7 9 fset 3 1 1 3 5 5 ststl merge labels faceset ststl Figure 388 face set by fset Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 456 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fseti add remove faces to from a set of faces fseti progression operator set_name where set name is the name of the face set operator can be for initial assignment AND for intersection with face set OR for union with the face set for removal from the face set Remar ks TrueGrid draw face set umvp The initial assignment creates a face set If the face set with the same name already existed then it is deleted and recreated The intersect opera
451. physical or the computational mesh Both meshes are displayed and the TrueGrid highlighting tool allows the user to select regions in the computational mesh and see the Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 22 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual corresponding regions in the physical mesh highlighted Figure 3 Mesh of L Bracket The easier it is to make modifications to the mesh the faster you can complete it One way that TrueGrid makes modifications easy is with extensive parameterization capabilities Surfaces curves mesh density and mesh topology can be defined by using parameters Fortran like algebraic expressions functions and conditional statements Surfaces and curves can be referenced symbolically Modifying the mesh then becomes a matter of modifying relatively few parameters For more complex and accurate meshes the XYZ team programmed TrueGrid to provide access to an extensive set of predefined surfaces plus CAD CAM NURBS surfaces imported via IGES formatted files In addition there are several ways for the user to define their own surfaces TrueGrid s flexible geometry concept lets the user combine these surfaces in any way The surfaces do not have to meet smoothly they can overlap or not meet at all Using a sophisticated projection method TrueGrid will match the mesh to the surfaces 3 Availability Getting Information on TrueGrid You can get informat
452. pl3 a list of defined surfaces a cylinder in the x direction to be transformed a cylinder in the y direction to be transformed a cylinder in the z direction to be transformed a plane through 3 points iplane plane defined by an implicit function The second method of specifying surfaces is to specify a surface sequence type followed by the appropriate parameters ppx ppy ppz cnsp cncy pon for parallel planes normal in the x direction for parallel planes normal in the y direction for parallel planes normal in the z direction for concentric spheres for concentric cylinders for similar planes offset normally 280 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual pox for similar planes offset in the x direction poy for similar planes offset in the y direction poz for similar planes offset in the z direction where the format for surface parameters depends on the surface type as follows ppx x x where x1 x2 are the x coordinates of the planes PPy y y2 where y y2 are the y coordinates of the planes ppzz Z where z z2 are the z coordinates of the planes CNSP x yo Zo Y 12 where x y z is the center of the spheres and r r are their radii n6y Xo Yo Zo Xn ias where the axis of the cylinders passes through the point x V Z parallel to the vector x y z and r r are their radii pon x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn offset_1
453. plications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 221 pb 4 2 4 2 xy 245 0 5 pb 12 12 xy 2 5 0 5 Sti 17 isd sfi 2 3 2 1 sd 5 sfi 1 2 2 1 sd2 sfi 3 4 2 1 sd 3 sfi 1 1 sd 4 Two 3D curves are carefully constructed to form the interior shape that improves the quality curd 1 csp3 00 750 1 959 4 538 474 1 727 4 668 788 2352 4 923 962 093 4 90537 curd 2 csp3 00 E a 750 1 959 4 538 ISR 474 1 727 4 668 n NN 788 352 4 925 L n 24962 093 4 90557 ve curs 2 1221 EEEE EER SIZZLA curs 3 3 2 2 EE Ly SS FEE Attaching a mesh edge to a 3D curve or a surface E edge is considered an initialization not a constraint except for the curf command where the edge is Improved quality using 3D curves frozen to the curve There are good reasons for this It would be difficult and contrived to intersect two 3D curves In almost all non trivial cases 3D curves do not intersect The intersection of a 3D curve and a surface has similar complications since a 3D curve almost never lies on a surface In particular when two edges with a common vertex are attached to different 3D curves be sure to initialize the common vertex to the intersection of the curves curd 1 csp3 00 1 curd 2 csp3 00 block 1 11 1 curs sole do curs 2 pb 1
454. plications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 369 load_curve second load curve number or zero amplitude amplitude factor for the second load curve and exponent exponent Remarks See the remarks on ev page 369 vev boundary convection with functional amplitudes vev region load_curve amplitude load_curve amplitude exponent where load curve is the first load curve number or zero amplitude is the amplitude expression for the first load curve load curve is the second load curve number or zero amplitude is the amplitude expression for the second load curve and exponent is the exponent expression Remarks Each expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions The values of these variables are the averages of the corresponding coordinates and indices of the nodes that define the polygon See the remarks on cv vcvi boundary convection with functional amplitudes vevi progression load curve amplitude load curve amplitude exponent where load curve is the first load curve number or zero amplitude is the amplitude expression for the first load curve load curve is the second load curve number or zero amplitude is the amplitude expression for the second load curve and exponent is the exponent expression Remarks Each expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters
455. plications You will be asked to send a company name a check sum and a machine ID number presented to you by the installation or registration program In response XYZ Scientific Applications will return an appropriate authorization code with a new check sum When this is entered the machine will be authorized and the TrueGrid License Manager will be re started It may be necessary to set the TGHOME environment variable so that TrueGrid executable program called tg will know where the authorization file tgauth and the data files are located This license manager must be on one machine in a network Then TrueGrid can be run from any machine on the network When installing TrueGrid on a machine that is not running the license manager simply copy the tgauth file from the licensed machine into the TrueGrid installation Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 25 directory on this new machine Installation on UNIX You will probably need to be root to make this installation Change directories to the directory for TrueGrid Execute the setup program on the CD ROM that is designed for the machine on which you are running by specifying the full name of the executable For example if the CD ROM is mounted on cdrom and you are installing on an SGI workstation then execute cdrom tg23 sgi exe If you have been instructed to download an executable from our web pag
456. pose a node is initially located somewhere off of the surface A projection of that node onto the surface will be a point on the surface The line connecting the original node with its projection onto the surface is orthogonal to the tangent plane of the surface at the point of projection It is possible that there are many points of projection In that case TrueGrid will select the one closest to the initial position of the node In some cases it is considered an error if there is more than one such point with the shortest distance For example an error occurs when a node is initialized to be at the center of a sphere and projected onto the sphere This notion of projection onto a surface must be improved for three important cases Surfaces may have boundaries they may not be smooth and they could even be discontinuous For example a NURBS surface will have boundaries A 2 dimensional polygonal line rotated about an axis will not be smooth where the polygonal line segments meet It is possible to define complex surfaces by combining several surfaces These surfaces may not meet perfectly or they may overlap In this case they form a surface which is not continuous In all three of these cases TrueGrid defines the point of projection to be a point on the surface with the shortest distance to the projected node In addition to finding the point of projection onto a surface TrueGrid must determine the tangent plane at that point of projection T
457. pression where fortran_expression is an algebraic expression Remarks This command evaluates a FORTRAN like expression and assign the result to the y coordinate for each node in the specified region see the dom command See the discussion of x on the preceding pages Z assign z coordinates by evaluating a function z fortran_expression where fortran_expression is an algebraic expression Remarks Evaluates a FORTRAN like expression and assign the result to the z coordinate for each node in the specified region see the dom command See the discussion of x on the preceding pages tl assign a temporary mesh variable by evaluating a function tl fortran_expression where fortran_expression is an algebraic expression Remarks Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 291 Evaluates a FORTRAN like expression and assigns the result to a temporary variable for each node in the specified region see the dom command t2 assign a temporary mesh variable by evaluating a function t2 fortran expression where fortran expression is an algebraic expression Remarks Evaluates a FORTRAN like expression and assigns the result to a temporary variable for each node in the specified region see the dom command t3 assign a temporary mesh variable by evaluating a function t3 fortran expression where fortran expression is an algebraic expression Rem
458. r Fill graphics 4 With the left mouse button in the physical window click and drag The displacement vector and cross hairs will warp to the mouse position The cross hairs are located directly on top of the object in the picture You cannot see this because there are no direct visual clues which indicate the position perpendicular to the screen There is an indirect clue Notice that a portion of the cross hairs are colored blue The blue indicates that these portions of the cross hairs are under the objects in the picture 5 While holding the mouse button down move the mouse 6 When the displacement vector and cross hairs of the selected vector or node of the mesh is in position let go of the mouse button Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 153 Interactive Move by Constraint in One or Two Coordinates Figure 116 Move in x direction before Figure 117 Move in x direction after 1 Select a region progression or node of the mesh 2 Click on_X Y Z XY YZ or XZ in the Move Pts Panel 3 With the left mouse button in the physical window click and drag The white skeleton of the mesh selection and the displacement vector will warp to the mouse position 4 While holding the mouse button down move the mouse 5 When the skeleton of the selected region progression or node of the mesh is in position let go of the mouse button
459. r Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where Mofo Jd is a vector in Cartesian coordinates giving the direction of the velocities Remarks At each node in the region the velocity will have a direction given by the direction vector fx fy JZ Example A mesh is defined and projected onto the cylinders in cylindrical coordinates Null load curve is referenced 0 Velocity in Cartesian coordinates is assigned by regions 2 1 1 2 13 2and1 1 2 2 13 2 The simplified command file follows TrueGrid display boundary velocity mesh definition fv 2 1 121320 1 0 0 1 c fixed velocity prescribed to region 2112 132 c null load curve O c magnitude 1 c direction 0 0 1 fv 2213203100 1 c fixed velocity prescribed e to region 1122 132 c null load curve O c magnitude 1 c direction 0 0 1 Figure 315 fixed velocity prescribed Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 313 co fv 0 c display of fixed velocity c for load curve O fvi prescribed velocities fvi progression load curve amplitude options f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where o sh is a vector in Ca
460. r control command will put TrueGrid in the Control Phase Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 99 3 1 2 3 4 5 and k 1 2 3 The last twelve numbers entered represent the physical coordinates of the vertices defined by these reduced indices This command has put you in Part Phase The Physical Computational and Environment Windows will appear In the computational window the lower index bar contains 4 dots corresponding to the four values in the 1 index list of the block command above The vertical index bar contains 5 dots corresponding to the five values in the j index list of the block command above The upper index bar will contain 3 dots corresponding to the three values in the k index list of the block command above Click on the Both and Draw button in order to see both the physical and computational views of the mesh Now move the Mouse Pointer near the index bars in the Computational Window You will see that as you move the mouse across one of the index bars the highlighted slicing planes follow the Mouse Pointer in both the Physical and Computational windows If you do not want to see this continuous highlighting of slicing planes toggle the feature with Control P Now click and drag the Mouse Pointer see page 98 to select the middle segment of the lower index bar the middle two segments of the vertical index bar and the first segment of the upper
461. r orthogonal mesh near the boundaries It does not try to produce equal elements This is the best method for producing an orthogonal boundary layer for fluids relax 11 1421 100 00001 1 The relax command produces a smooth mesh around the sharp corner and many of the angles are better than the tfi However it converges to the concave part of the boundary and produces nearly equal elements The nodal distribution on the boundary is ignored on the interior Figure 271 Tme over 3 blocks Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 261 Figure 272 esm over 3 blocks unifm 11 1421 100 00001 1 The uniform smoothing has many of the same characteristics of the relax smoothing with the important exception that it is not affected by curvature on the boundary That is it does not wander away from convex boundaries and it does not get drawn towards concave boundaries esmp 3113210 4 esm 11142 1 100 ID 3 001 1 3 6 The esm command produces a mesh with properties like relax except that you can control the nodal distribution on the interior edges of the mesh using the esmp command In this example a source was added to the elliptic differential equations being solved to force the mesh lines to move away from the sharp concave corner Figure 273 Unifm over 3 blocks Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scie
462. ransition is actually a generalization of the one way transition In the two way transition the ratio of elements can be 3 1 or 4 2 along both edges ofthe interface This can only happen with brick elements block 1 7 1 7 1 7 010101 bb1122221 block 1 13 1 13 1 2 12 01011 1 166 2 trbb 1112211 The transitions are always found in the part with the slave side of the interface The roles of the lower and higher density parts can be switched from the example above so that the master side has the higher density mesh block 1 13 1 13 1 13 01010 bb1122221 block 1 5 1 7 1 6 010112 trbb 11122 11 The two way transition may appear to be symmetric from the outside but the interior is anything but symmetric If the first layer of elements are peeled away from the transition layer you can see the non symmetric nature of the transitions The direction of this non symmetric topology on the transition region can be switched so that the rows are in the opposing direction This is done using the sw option Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 402 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The transition topology can be a mixture of these two topologies in an attempt to make it more symmetric Use the alt option for this feature You can see this by peeling away the first layer of elements in the transition region
463. ratic face counts A table of merged nodes is always written after the tp or stp commands are executed MERGED NODES SUMMARY Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 447 12 nodes merged between parts 1 and 2 16 nodes merged between parts 2 and 2 12 nodes merged between parts 1 and 3 16 nodes merged between parts 3 and 3 216 nodes merged between parts 4 and 4 30 nodes merged between parts 7 and 7 88 nodes merged between parts 8 and 8 390 nodes were deleted by tolerancing Up through 4000 parts can be merged under general tolerancing i e no use of the ptol or bptol commands 1000 parts can be merged under special tolerancing ptol and bptol The following is a common error to avoid Suppose you create three parts that meet as shown in 383 and 384 Then define a sliding interface between parts 1 and 2 and also between parts 1 and 3 No nodes will be merged between parts 1 and 2 and between parts 1 and 3 However nodes can be merged between parts 2 and 3 Sometimes you need to look closely in the graphics or carefully check the Merged Nodes Summary to detect this error To fix this error if indeed it is an error use a dummy sliding interface between parts 2 and 3 to force no merging between those parts Alternatively use the bptol command with a negative number to avoid merging between those parts You
464. ration Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 321 dis initial displacement in a region dis region option v v v where an option can be sid set id r for rotational conditions where v v v is the velocity vector Remarks An initial displacement is assigned to all nodes in the specified region Some simulation codes require that initial displacements be group togther and that is the purpose for the set id This command can also be used to set initial nodal rotational displacements using the r option disi initial displacement by index progression disi progression option v v v where an option can be sid set id r forrotational conditions where v V v is the velocity vector Remarks For details see dis above fvv variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities fvv region load curve ft amp expr x expr y expr z expr where load curve 7 is a load curve number or zero amp expr is the FORTRAN expression for the amplitude X expr is the FORTRAN expression for the x component y expr is the FORTRAN expression for the y component Z expr is the FORTRAN expression for the z component Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 322 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks This command assigns velocities allowing for the amplitude factor and the Cartesian vector components to be calculated using a FORTRA
465. rbulence energy nyh for stagnation enthalpy nvrx for x direction composite radiation flux Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 376 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks nvry for y direction composite radiation flux nvrz for z direction composite radiation flux narho for fluid density nap for pressure nat for fluid temperature or len for mixing length scale This command is to be used in conjunction with the REFLEQS output format It enables you to define the source terms in the transport conservation equations which are solved by the analysis package setsori set REFLEQS source terms by index progression setsori progression var name coefficient value where var name can be nvu for i velocity component nvv for j velocity component nvw for k velocity component nvpp for pressure correction nvk1 for kinetic energy of turbulence nvk2 for kinetic energy of turbulence nvdl for dissipation of turbulence energy nvd2 for dissipation of turbulence energy nvh for stagnation enthalpy nvrx for x direction composite radiation flux nvry for y direction composite radiation flux nvrz for z direction composite radiation flux narho for fluid density nap for pressure nat for fluid temperature len for mixing length scale Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 377 rb prescribed radiation bound
466. re set name is the name of the element set operator can be for initial assignment AND for intersection with element set OR for union with the element set for removal from the element set Remarks The initial assignment creates an element set If the element set with the same name already existed then it is deleted and recreated The intersect operator redefines an element set to be only those elements which are found to be both in the original set and among the selected elements Selected elements can be added by using the union operator This causes any selected elements to be included in a set if it is not already in that set The minus operator removes all elements in a set which are among the selected elements An element set can have bricks shells and beams in one set Some simulation codes may require that a set can have only one element type Check with the specific simulation code If an edge of the mesh is selected then the shells or bricks with nodes along this edge will be selected for set inclusion If a vertex is selected than any beam shell or brick element with a node at that vertex will be included in the element set Example The element set e so is created from the elements oftheregion2 1 1 3 2 2 The elements from regions 2 2 1 4 3 2and3 3 1 4 2 2are added to the element set eso The element set eso is displayed in the hide mode Figure 387 block 13579 12 3 4 13 5 LS 5 7 9 1234 LoS 75
467. re merged into a single node Merge commands allow you to define how close is close All tolerances are in absolute distances There are commandis for specifying tolerances for the general merging of all nodes over all parts or just nodes on the exterior faces ofthe mesh There are commands for specifying the tolerances for the special merging of nodes between parts or within a part These special tolerances override the general ones If no tolerance commands are specified then no merging is done However the Merge Phase must be entered in order to build the node map which is used to generate the output Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 446 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Invocation of a tolerance command t tp st stp within the Merge Phase causes an immediate merging of nodes These commands can also be invoked within any phases when the Merge Phase is entered those tolerance commands are immediately executed or re executed as the case may be The merge process is always performed on the nodes in their original prior to any merging state Merging is not cumulative If you leave the Merge Phase and reenter it all merging is recalculated with what ever new parts that have been added This lets you interactively experiment with merging and tolerances Setting a tolerance to a negative value is an easy way to restore the nodes to their original states Graphical displays of the mesh in the Merge Phase
468. re selected in an index progression using a minus sign For example lini 1 3 1 1 2 is equivalent to Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 48 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual lin 111312 Multiple faces can be selected with one index progression Index progressions can be complex and a systematic way to understand them is to first consider the index progression without the minus signs For example lini 1 3 1 3 0 4 7 1 2 is easily understood by first considering the two blocks selected if the minus signs are ignored Then each minus sign selects the corresponding face s in one or both blocks When a face of a block is selected using a minus sign the block is not selected The above example is equivalent to lin 1 3 2 lin 1 4 7 2 lin 3 35 lin 3 4 Be 42 lin 1 4 3 T 2 Edges of blocks are selected by using minus signs for all indices in two directions and no minus signs in the third Also multiple indices in the two directions with minus signs must be separated with zeros For example lini 1 0 3 2 2 4 0 6 8 selects 4 k edges and is equivalent to lin 1 2 2 24 lin 1 2 6 2 8 lin 32232 4 lin 3 2 6 3 2 8 Multiple vertices can be selected by using the minus sign for all indices in all directions separating the indices with zeros For example lini 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 selects all 8 vertices of a block Again it should b
469. reeze nodes along a 3D curve 229 cure distribute nodes along an entire 3D curve 230 curs independently distribute edge nodes along a 3D curve 230 edge distribute nodes along an edge of a Surface 231 A ADEE DONATION A E d 234 esm 2D elliptic smoothing A A 235 esmp Add source terms for elliptic smoothing 238 hyr Interpolate multiple regions as one region 238 lin Linear interpolation 1 react tS aer Aa olen Gard ei 239 lini Linear interpolation by index progression 247 relax Equipotential tela O ee em Ro ces 247 relaxi Equipotential relaxation 0 ce eee eee eee eee 250 splint Interpolate edges along cubic splines oo o o 251 tf Transfinite interpolation llle 252 tfi Transfinite interpolation by index progression 258 tme Thomas Middlecoff relaxation 00 0000 eee eee 258 tmei Thomas Middlecoff relaxation by index progression 263 neu Orthogonal boundary smoothing 0005 263 neui Orthogonal boundary smoothing by index progression 267 unifm Uniform smoothing 45 4444 ath casa A A eR ES 267 unifmi Uniform smoothing e s Vas en m Forti V rae MR fr ie 271 Sc Projection os E Ata A slate pat em obo akin vio SU d aa 272 sf project a region onto a surface 0 0 0 cece eee ee eee 273 sfi project regions onto a surface by index progression
470. region 215266 active 16 sf region 116566 dl Figure 298 Selecting scope of commands history window and start a new one Only one history window is allowed at a time If Show All Commands is selected then all of the commands will be listed in the history window The List button will create a window with a list of objects used in the scope of the commands found in the history window One can choose Surface Curve Edge and Block Boundary These lists are maintained as new commands are added Surface active progression 2 3 1304 6 ia active progression 2 3 6 130 active progression 12 12 05 6 active region 121226 active 8 pb region 151256 active 9 mb region 231236 active 10 mb region 241246 active 12 sf region 115166 active 14 sf region 215 2 66 active 16 sf region 1165 66 al Figure 299 List dependencies Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 296 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual actcmd activate a mesh command previously deactivated actemd command sequence ft Remarks This command re activates a mesh command within the scope of the presently generated part It 1s automatically issued when the history window is used to activate a command When a part is generated the meshing commands are saved in command tables Each new meshing command ca
471. rey background and are labeled HELP and EXTT Left clicking your mouse on the EXIT button does the same as typing an end command on the command line TrueGrid terminates Upon ending TrueGrid displays the message normal termination in the window initially used to invoke TrueGrid This message means that all files were properly closed and that resources used by the graphical user interface were properly freed When you select an entry from the main menu if the HELP button is off you will be selecting a submenu which replaces the main menu The submenu contains a list of all the commands within the selected category of the main menu The first rectangle of the submenu is highlighted in light red and is the name of the command category which you chose from the main menu The last two rectangular areas are the HELP button and a MAIN MENU button The latter of these will return you to the main menu When you return to the main menu TrueGrid will automatically position the mouse over the category which you had previously chosen When you are in a submenu and left click to select a command with the help button off TrueGrid will create a dialogue box for that command This window lets you specify any of the command s Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 75 options or arguments as discussed later in this chapter There are two ways to dismiss a dialogue bo
472. rical fixed displacement 0 0 00 e eee ee eee 309 fdsi spherical fixed displacement a6 essa ay eea ea ve 310 frb prescribed nodal rotation 00 cece eee eee 311 frbi prescribed nodal rotation by index progression 312 fv prescribed velocities ci Ral tds 313 fvi prescribed veloolti Sa sc iur e eto Eee Lt Itza 314 fvc cylindrical prescribed velocities o oooooomooo 314 fvci cylindrical prescribed velocities ooooooooooomo 315 fvs spherical prescribed velocities ooooooomom o 315 fvsi spherical prescribed velocities by index progression 316 bv prescribed boundary surface velocities for NEKTON 316 bvi prescribed boundary surface velocities for NEKTON 316 acc prescribed boundary acceleration oooooooooooo o o 317 acci prescribed boundary acceleration ooooooooomoo o o 318 accc cylindrical prescribed boundary acceleration 319 accci cylindrical prescribed boundary acceleration 319 accs spherical prescribed boundary acceleration 320 accsi spherical prescribed boundary acceleration 321 dis initial displacement in a region 0 eee eee eee 227 disi initial displacement by index progression 322 fvv variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities 322 fvvi variable prescribed nodal boundary velocities 324 fvvc cylindrica
473. rid automatically switches from normal to scroll mode in order to print text output When you enter a command into the text window the cursor will move to the far left part of the command line until TrueGrid has finished executing your command Then it will return a prompt and put the cursor just after the prompt You can issue multiple commands on one line if you like Most commands need only be separated by a space but you also can separate them by semicolons There is no practical limit to the length of a line the maximum length of a line is set by the length of the text buffer which is about 80 000 characters You can even backspace across lines However you should remember that when TrueGrid finds an error in one command on a line it ignores all following commands that are on the same line The last line of text always remains stationary during scrolling You can grab any text and put it in the command line Press the Left Mouse Button down while over the first character of the text string you want to grab While holding the mouse button down drag the mouse to the position of the last character of your text string When you release the button the text is saved in a buffer Now move the Mouse Pointer to the command line Click the Middle Mouse Button to enter the text into the command line The characters between the beginning and ending positions will be put on the command line You cannot grab prompts TrueGrid will ignore them If yo
474. rientation cross section option where ini is the number of columns of beam elements in the i direction H ink is the number of columns of beam elements in the k direction material is the material number orientation is the option of orientation of the cross section axis Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 425 i k sd surface_ v xn yn zn none second axis orientation in the i direction second axis orientation in the k direction second axis orientation in the normal to the surface second axis orientation by the vector cross section is the cross section definition number assigned with bsd option can be reverse si sid_ vold volume lump inertia the order of the nodes is the reverse of the default Sliding Interface Number volume of Discrete Beam lumped inertia cablcid system local coordinate system id number defined by the Isys cabarea area caboff offset csarea area sharea area cable area cable offset cross section area shear area of cross section inertia iss itt irr cross section moments of inertia thickness thickness roffl x x component of offset vector for first end point soffl y y component of offset vector for first end point toffl z z component of offset vector for first end point roff2 x x component of offset vector for last end point soff2 y y component of offset vector for last end point toff2 z z component of
475. rivatives after Clear All Prepend M Insert Mode Insert Append Delete from to Figure 169 Spline Point List dialogue inserted to the next location in the interactive form Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 184 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual TrueGrid Draw TrueGrid Draw Figure 170 Step 1 Figure 171 Step 2 TrueGrid Draw TrueGrid Draw Figure 172 Step 3 Figure 173 Step 4 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 185 Controlling the End Derivatives of a Spline gt confirm selection accept quit Option to Specify Derivatives After all of control points have been selected a 3D cubic spline still has 6 degrees of freedom M which are usually consumed by requiring that the second order end derivatives be set to zero Insert after Clear A11 This is t
476. rk on active 12 s the left on or off for that item The active 16 sf Act Deact column indicates if a command is active or inactive The CMDY is the internal reference number v ofthe command The first command of a part is the part command that started the part It does not appear in this window The smallest sequence Figure 295 Selecting items in the history window number to appear in the window is 2 weap CMD refers to the command name The Description item is a short phrase 2Stve Indices A a i9046 about the command The eris AP ter Sores E Region Progression item identifies the stive sae a E part of the mesh affected by the Eve 1 NO lc er command and this is known as the stive ie ee tena ee Ae scope of the command Arguments of the commands can be shown Since this list of items per command can be v long a scroll bar is provided to view a E Figure 296 Choosing full or reduced indices The Indices menu makes it possible to toggle between Full Indices and Pm Reduced Indices This applies to commands which require a region Or active progression 2 3 1 3 0 4 6 active gt i 6 130 an index progression active Sort J 2 056 active active B pb 6 DADO LEE AS active 9 mb region 231236 The Sor
477. rojection surface References Gordon William J and Theil Linda C Transfinite Mappings and Their Application to Grid Generation in Numerical Grid Generation ed Joe F Thompson North Holland 171 1982 Thompson Joe F Warsi Z U A and Mastin C Wayne Numerical Grid Generation Foundations and Applications North Holland 310 1985 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 257 tfi Transfinite interpolation by index progression tfi progression Remarks tfi and tf are related the usual way that a command for progressions is related to a command for regions You could replace one tfi command with a number of tf commands by breaking the progression into a number of regions and applying tf separately to each of the regions When several faces or volumes are specified in one index progression then each face or volume is interpolated independently of the others See the discussion of tf on the preceding pages tme Thomas Middlecoff relaxation tme region iterations min change weight where iterations is the maximum number of iterations to use min change is an absolute error tolerance there will be no more iterations if in the last iteration no coordinate was moved by more than min change in any zone weight is a the interpolation weight factor use 1 0 if you don t need this feature Remarks Thomas Middlecoff relaxation improves the mesh by solving
478. rotation 6 When the skeleton or displacement vector ofthe selected region progression or node ofthe mesh is in position let go of the mouse button Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 151 Interactive Move by Screen Plane Figure 113 Screen Plane move before Figure 112 Screen Plane move after 1 Select a region progression or node of the mesh 2 Click on Screen Plane in the Move Pts Panel 3 Rotate the picture so that the desired move of the selected region progression or node of the mesh will be parallel to the screen 4 With the left mouse button in the physical window click and drag The white skeleton of the mesh selection and the displacement vector will warp to the mouse position 5 While holding the mouse button down move the mouse 6 When the skeleton of the selected region progression or node of the mesh is in position let go of the mouse button Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 152 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Interactive Move by Front View O ETUIELLLI HARE EEE OTTEN Sp AR Figure 114 Front View w cross hairs Figure 115 Front View move 1 Select a vertex part phase or a node merge phase of the mesh 2 Click on Front View in the Move Pts Panel 3 Draw the picture in Hide o
479. rpolation lin region Remarks There is no need to specify linear interpolation on a simple edge face or solid region that is on any of the smallest regions that you can specify That is because linear interpolation is the default interpolation method Normally you will want to use this command on a region which consists of several simple regions This command is essentially a command to ignore certain partitions between regions You must take care to select the correct type of interpolation for your task You may need to specify linear interpolation along the edges of a multiple facial region before doing a linear interpolation on the whole face You may want to interpolate faces of a solid region before doing its interior This interpolation within the part s coordinate system Thus interpolation is done in Cartesian coordinates for a block part and cylindrical coordinates for a cylinder part For the cylinder part the interpolated mesh lines will be curved rather unless the angular coordinates of the boundaries happen to be the same When you specify an edge of the mesh to be linearly interpolated the nodes in the interior of the edge will be distributed to obey the rule specified by the res drs as das or nds command For example Examples block 1 6 16 1 6 1 1 8 16 1 6 0 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 239 Figure 250 Two independent bloc
480. rpolations of faces lin Apply default modified bi linear interpolation of faces 9 Project faces to specified surfaces sf ms ssf spp 10 Perform transfinite interpolation of specified faces tf 11 Apply equipotential relaxation of specified faces relax and esm AAD tn tU Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 198 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 12 Apply Thomas Middlecoff elliptic solver for specified faces tme and unifm 13 Re interpolate and project edges and faces affected by 11 12 and 13 above 14 Apply specified tri linear interpolation of solid regions lin 15 Apply default modified tri linear interpolation of solid regions 16 Perform transfinite interpolation for specified solid regions tf 17 Apply equipotential relaxation for specified solid regions relax 18 Apply Thomas Middlecoff elliptic solver for specified solid regions tme 19 Apply uniform smoothing elliptic solver for specified solid regions unifm 20 Evaluate expressions x y z tl t2 t3 21 Apply block boundary interface master side bb de delete a region of the part de region Remarks Typically one first defines multiple regions with a block command and then deletes a few of them with de or dei When you delete regions the 2D and 3D elements within the specified regions become undefined Condition and properties are not applied to these regions The elements in these
481. rs for graphics 05ell pr 0 3 sigy 2 0e8 05ell pr 0 3 sigy 2 0e8 05ell pr 0 3 sigy 2 0e8 ID slide lines diferent material rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar rebar 2 rebar sid 3 5 rebar sid 6 8 rebar sid 9 1 rebar sid 12 4 5 7 8 rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid rebar sid Figure 378 Part Topology c Avoiding merging between rebars sid 53 dummy if smrgrb ne 1 then sid 54 dummy endi sid 55 dummy c Beam cross section definition bsd 1 C sd 1 sd 2 c On block 1 2 c Bu 0 dei sthi 0 01 tthi SOT s 222 9 A 29 58 1 3 13 1571 215 2j Inner and outer cylinders of the column cy 0 cy 0 e part with both concrete solid and rebar beam 0 0 25 00 2 elements 3 59 nb dome 3250 9 dp 35 wb 3955 230 2239 lS old wl 235 35 235 tterfly the corners to get a good mesh 13 0 4 6 3 0 4 6 c Project to the two cylinders sfi sfi 1 67 l 2 y cuu 6 sd 1 5 sd 2 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 435 c Beams in the i direction ibmi 1 4 2 5 3 4 1 3 2 j si 11
482. rtesian coordinates giving the direction of the velocities Remarks This is the same as fv except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression fvc cylindrical prescribed velocities fvc region load curve amplitude options p 0z where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where p 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the velocity The angle is in degrees Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 314 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks This is the same as fv except that the direction is in cylindrical coordinates fvci cylindrical prescribed velocities fvci progression load curve amplitude options p 0z where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where p 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the velocity The angle is in degrees Remarks This is the same as fvc except that it applies to all nodes in an index progression This is the same as fv except that it applies to an index progression and uses cyl
483. rtition is specified both as an 1 j ork index value and as a plane in the physical space Cylindrical Coordinate Systems The cylinder part is just like the block part except for its local coordinate system For the cylinder part the three physical coordinate lists correspond to the radial angular and axial coordinates respectively Although these coordinates are conventionally called r 0 and z TrueGrid documentation calls them x y and z the same as for block parts for brevity For any part phase command defining a cylinder part TrueGrid interprets all coordinate parameters in terms of cylindrical coordinates In the cylindrical part TrueGrid carries out all interpolations in cylindrical coordinates Mesh Density Parameterization The block cylinder blude insprt meshscal and mseq commands are the only commands that control the number of nodes in each block of the part The block blude and cylinder commands initiate a part and place TrueGrid into the part phase The insprt and mseq commands can only be issued in the part phase after issuing the block blude or cylinder command because they essentially modify the preceding the block blude and cylinder commands by changing the topology and the mesh density respectively The insprt and mseq commands are exceptional part phase commands All other part phase commands use indirect references to the indices in the block cylinder or blude commands know as reduced indices
484. ry point in the mesh has six coordinates three indices and three physical coordinates We will only be interested in indices with integer values although one can extend the notion of a computational mesh to all reals for a theoretical discussion Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 30 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Making Parts and Merging them into a Model A typically mesh will be complicated enough that it is easier to build by first making a number of parts and then putting these parts together Each part begins as a rectangular set of nodes called a block see the commands block cylinder and blude You can then move see the commands pb mb mbi tr and tri and deform see the commands sf sfi cur curs cure curf and edge this simple block structure into the shape of the part you need Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 and Figure 13 There are function that control the interpolation see the commands res drs as das lin lini tf tfi relax relaxi tme tmei unifm and unifmi of interior nodes Some functions affect the mesh in both physical and computational space e g deleting regions of the mesh see the commands de and dei or making copies see the commands Irep grep pslv and pplv Once you have made all the parts you can join them by merging see the commands merge t tp and stp coincident nodes Figure 9 and Figure 8 Figure 8 Completed model of ficti
485. ry window is to debug the mesh Most users make mistakes occasionally by requiring a portion of the mesh to be in two or more places at the same time Sometimes this can be difficult to detect This history table can make the detection quite easy There are several features in the history window that aid in this debugging of a mesh Click on the problem region and issue the history command click on the History button in the environment window or type the F3 function key Then deactivate or reactivate commands one at a time until you discover the problem There is an art to this and you cannot be effective unless you have a good understanding of the Command Hierarchy The history window contains previously issued meshing commands listed in the order that they were issued As you issue commands they are added to the history window If you first select a region in the mesh within the computational window then the history window will only contain those commands whose scope includes the region you have selected This window serves many purposes making it easy to review the commands issued thus far in the development of the part Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 293 A selected command is shown with a red box around it and this can be done in two ways Click the left mouse button on the command or click the Next or Previous button to get to the neighboring command It is e
486. s This definition is equivalent to saying a vertex is a corner of a block These are the handles on the mesh and can be described as control nodes of the mesh A few commands require the reduced indices of a vertex For example the q command assigns the coordinates of one vertex to another q target target target source source source The vertex with the i j and k reduced indices target target target are assigned the same coordinates of the vertex with the i j and k reduced indices source source source For example block 1 4 ALO 53 O LZ 0 4 q1212 9 1 1 2 will move the node at reduced indices 1 2 1 to the same position held by the node with reduced indices 2 1 2 Based on the block command that precedes the q command substitutions can be made for the reduced indices It can then be said that the node with the full indices 1 3 1 is moved to the same coordinates held by the node with full indices 4 1 5 Many commands require you to specify a region by providing its minimum and maximum reduced indices in all three directions For example the lin command uses the boundary coordinates of a region to interpolate the interior lin i minimum Jnuinimum Eos A maximum Imaximun tia This notation can be used to select a block face edge or single vertex If the linear interpolation command below was issued after the block command above then it would cause a block interpolation of the entire part
487. s projections and smoothing functions are performed All operations are performed in Cartesian coordinates This command is recorded in both the text window and the tsave session file when the mouse is used to move or attach regions see Move Pts or Attach Example block 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 370 tr 311421 v 2 2 0 rz 30 After tr v 2 2 0 tri transform regions of the mesh tri progression trans where a trans is a transform which is formed left to right from the following mx x_offset my y offset mzz offset Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 214 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual v x offset y offset z offset rx theta ry theta rz theta raxis angle x Yo Zo X Yn Zn rxy ryz rzx tf origin x axis y axis where each argument consists of a coordinate type followed by coordinate info rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s ij label of a labeled point from a surface ftf st origin Ist x axis Ist y axis 2nd origin 2nd x axis 2nd y axis where each argument consists of a coordinate type followed by coordinate info rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s i j label of a labeled point from a surfac
488. s in all three directions in the form imin Jmin K k In Figure 9 and Figure 15 the lower left corner of the front face is the reduced index region 1 1 1 2 1 2 The right half of the block is the region 2 1 1 3 43 A reduced index region has non negative integers TrueGrid has a special interpretation of a reduced index of 0 0 means the extreme value of an index For example in Figure 14 and Figure 15 the lower front edge has fixed reduced indices j 1 and k 1 so it could be represented either as 1 1 13 1 1 oras 0 1101 1 Notice that TrueGrid has a powerful connection between the graphical selection of a region and its specification with reduced indices Having highlighted a particular region you can print out the corresponding reduced indices by hitting the F1 function key If you have clicked on a command from the menus so that a dialogue box is showing if the command requires a region selection then hitting the F1 Function key will cause the graphical selection of a region to be entered into the dialogue box An advanced user will typically type the name of a command into the text window highlight the region which he or she wishes to act upon hit the F1 Function key and then type the rest of the command min Lmax Jmax max Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 36 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 6 How TrueGrid Works You mesh an object in the way an artist molds a block of clay The raw mater
489. s on the master side The nodes on both sides remain distinct A merge command Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 396 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual in the merge phase such as the stp command is needed to merge each pair of nodes Any small tolerance will cause these node pairs to merge Conditions and restrictions on the use of this command 1 The master and slave side of the block boundary interface must be from two different parts 2 The master side comes from a part that is generated first 3 The interface region must not have any holes 4 The coordinates of the corner nodes of the master side m1 m2 m3 m4 and of the slave master boundary side s1 s2 s3 s4 will be used to determine the LO N best mapping There are 8 possible relative DIS TX positions of master and slave based on 4 SSFP rotations and 2 symmetries Initial coordinates 4 SY 2 of the slave determine the best mapping For all 8 positions the distance from the master corners to the slave corners are calculated d1 d2 d3 d4 The position with the smallest sum of distances between corners is used for the mapping If there is no obvious choice the best selection is made and a warning message is issued Figure 349 before application of trbb Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 397 Alternatively you can specify the mapping from the
490. s sin cos tan asin atan and atan2 are in degrees Operands for and and the arguments for mod sqrt exp log log10 asin and acos are verified before the function is invoked An expression is limited to 240 operators operands function calls and parentheses To add a comment use a dollar sign followed by a space TrueGrid will treat the rest of the line as a comment To extend an equation across several lines use the ampersand character amp as the last character of the line To put several equations in one line use semicolons A semicolon terminates an equation and begins a new one as if each equation were entered on its own line If there is no semicolon or ampersand TrueGrid assumes that each line contains exactly one equation Examples x x 1 0 S translate the part in the x direction tl x x y y tl S swap the x and y coordinates Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 290 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual x i 1 y j j z k k S each coordinate is its squared index tl sqrt x x y y S radial polar coordinate t2 atan2 x y angular polar coordinate t2 21t2 0 1 k S increasing the polar angle x tl cos t2 S convert back to Cartesian y tl sin t2 S ditto The result of this fourth example is to put a twist into the mesh as the index k increases y assign y coordinates by evaluating a function y fortran ex
491. s tool you can generate meshes for finite difference and finite element simulation codes that model the behavior of fluids and structures However it is more than a mesh generator it can generate complete input files for many simulation codes TrueGrid is fundamentally a parametric mesh generator This means that you can make a change to a parameter and rerun the commands that form a mesh to get a new mesh reflecting the change This is a non trivial feature that affects the way you build the mesh The Graphical User Interface has been designed so that you can issue commands without parametric considerations Underlying this simplified use of the commands is a parametric engine waiting for you to discover once you have become familiar with the basic capabilities The session file the default name is tsave is automatically generated each time you run TrueGrid to record every command needed to reproduce your mesh This is why you always have the option to run a command file when you start TrueGrid This is also why there is a keyword command for everything you do in TrueGrid This is perhaps a subtle distinction but when a new feature is added to TrueGrid it is formed as a parametric keyword driven command Then the Graphical User Interface is added to make it easier to use The Graphical User Interface is just a shell around TrueGrid and can be bypassed by using the nogui option on the execute line TrueGrid generates multi block stru
492. scribe the context in which the command is normally used and other commands used in association with this command It may describe side effects It may describe other similar commands In many cases it includes a description of where to find the command in the menus Algorithm When present this section describes the algorithms with which TrueGrid implements the command Examples When present the Examples section will give an example of the usage of the command usually showing how it is used with other commands Occasionally there may be a complete illustrated example of the construction of a simple model in which this command plays a critical role The exact text for these examples are in Courier font The keyword commands are also bolded Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 56 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 8 Running TrueGrid This section describes in general how you run TrueGrid After reading it you will have a good understanding of the general sequence of actions you and TrueGrid will perform in order to generate your meshes Execution Environment Before running TrueGrid you or your system administrator should set up the TrueGrid execution environment Setting up this environment primarily involves installing the TrueGrid executable and support files for the graphical user interface and optionally setting some environment variables including the path to tg exe See
493. se actions are equivalent to the commands in this section When a precise movement is required use the commands below To activate the mouse select either Rotate Move Zoom or Frame in the Environment window This selection is done with the left mouse button Then move the mouse into the picture physical or computational window With the middle left button if there are only two mouse buttons mouse button pressed move the mouse across the picture When the Rotate is selected a wire frame of the object in the picture will track the mouse movement When the picture is zoomed in then the absolute rotation is scaled down so that the rotate continues to track the mouse In order to override this scaling effect of mouse rotation hold down the shift key while rotating When the mouse button is released the full picture is redrawn depending on the type of graphics selected Wire Hide or Fill Movetranslates the picture Hold the middle or left mouse button down and slide the mouse across the screen The object in the picture will track the mouse Perspective can distort this a little When Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 88 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual the mouse button is released the full picture is redrawn depending on the type of graphics selected Wire Hide or Fill The Zoom selection reacts only to the vertical motion of the mouse Hold the middle or left mouse button down an
494. se are the most important documents which contain instructions on the use of TrueGrid and a reference for the functionality of each command They are available in PDF format and hard copy TrueGrid Examples Manual This manual has numerous examples from the most basic using only one or two commands to full models There are also sections of command input extracted from larger models to be instructive on certain topics Several full models with annotations are included All examples have color graphics This is available in PDF format and hard copy TrueGrid Tutorial The documentation is intended to aid a beginning TrueGrid user in self paced training course It only teaches enough of TrueGrid to build simple meshes Approximately 6 to 10 hours are needed to work through this course This is available in PDF format and in hard copy Introductory TrueGrid Training Manual This is a set of view graphs used in the introductory training for TrueGrid usually held once a month at the main office for XYZ Scientific Applications Inc This course can be made available at your facility The view graphs are available in PDF format Advanced TrueGrid Training Manual This is a set of view graphs and examples used in the advanced TrueGrid training course held occasionally at the main office for XYZ Scientific Applications Inc This course can be made available at your facility The view graphs are available in PDF format A CD is available with
495. se the perspective will make it appear as though your eye had gotten closer or farther away from the object In most cases the zoom is preferred xscl scale x coordinate xsel factor scale the x coordinates This command is not cumulative Coordinates are scaled after translations and rotations and before perspective and zooming This can cause distortion because the perspective will make it appear as though you eye had gotten closer or further away from the object In most cases the zoom is preferred This feature can be very useful when the range of the x coordinates are much smaller then the range of coordinates in the other directions yscl scale y coordinate yscl factor Remarks Scale the y coordinates This is not cumulative Coordinates are scaled after translations and rotations and before perspective and zooming This can cause distortion because the perspective will make it appear as though you eye had gotten closer or further away from the object In most cases the zoom is preferred This feature can be very useful when the range of the y coordinates are much smaller then the range of coordinates in the other directions zscl scale z coordinate zscl factor Remarks Scale the z coordinates This is not cumulative Coordinates are scaled after translations and Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 93 rotations and before perspective and zooming This
496. selected based on there proximity to the plane The nodes must be selected using the syf or syfi command syfi assign faces to a numbered symmetry plane with failure syfi progression symmetry_plane_ failure Remarks Set the properties of a symmetry plane with failure using the plane command Nodes are not automatically selected based on there proximity to the plane The nodes must be selected using the syf or syfi command Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 367 trp create tracer particles for Lsdyna trp tracking list_options where tracking can be fixed or free and an option_list may consist of one of the following time start_time point x0 y0 z0 or Inpt x y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 _tracers 14 Radiation and Temperature Commands These commands let you set various boundary conditions related to radiation and temperature See also the radiation and temperature commands in the merge phase Some of these boundary conditions are directional They may refer to the outward normal direction at a surface This normal direction is oriented by a right hand rule based on the node numbering You usually will want to specify the directions with the orpt command bf bulk fluid bf region id_ load amplitude a b where id 8 bfd bulk fluid identification number load load curve number amplitude multiplier of the load curve a exponent a b exponent b Remarks Use this c
497. should also consider extending both interfaces 1 and 2 across to parts 3 and 2 respectively because they may come in contact This is an ambiguous situation since there are equally plausible situations where parts 2 and 3 should be merged together sid 1 sv sid 2 sv block T 31 31 35 L2 12 ub 22 Sia lp Ls s11 7 2772 block 1 3 GEMENS 2x1 3 3 23 2 Sca Sees m block 1 3 1 3 1 3 12 24 39 5 2 Sud geL ra wi merge stp 2 Figure 383 Before stp Figure 384 After stp For other commands affecting how nodes are merged see the Merging Parts section in the chapter Global Commands Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 448 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual fn tied node sets with failure fn region failure_strain Remarks For each node in a region of 2 D shell elements this command makes a duplicate node tied to the original node with failure Thus these nodes can break apart during the simulation allowing the shell elements to break apart This command imposes the constraint called tied node sets with failure It is used in DYNA3D and LSDYNA Each failure node which is part of more than one 2D shell element will produce a tied node set with failure A new node will be added for every 2D shell element that meets the original failure except for the first 2D shell element Fn generates more nodes at the tim
498. sian coordinates giving the direction Example The mesh is defined by the structured block mesh Linearly interpolated loads are prescribed to the nodes ofthe region4 1 4 4 4 4 Figure331 The direction oftheloadsis 5 3 0 The first node amplitude is 1000 and the last node amplitude is 6000 The command file follows mesh definition TrueGrid display forces 2 713E 03 11 41444405 3 0 1000 6000 c linearly interpolated loads L C are assigned to the nodes Ee o i a FHHHERH c with direction 5 3 0 LI T T TT TJ c first node amplitude 1000 LIT T 1 1 1 1 c last node amplitude 6000 LII TT TTI i eios PEE co fc 0 AEE HH c display of concentrated HHHH c loads for the null load ie La ce curve Figure 331 concentrated nodal loads by 11 mdep momentum deposition mdep region x momentum y momentum z momentum time where x momentum x direction momentum y momentum y direction momentum Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 343 z momentum z direction momentum time deposition time Remarks This feature is used by dynamics codes like DYNA3D to simulate depositing momentum at specific elements at appropriate times Each element in the specified region is assigned a momentum to be deposited at the selected time during the simulation Example The mesh is defined by the structured block mesh A region is deleted Momentum deposition
499. side If the master interface part and the slave interface part are both in the same local coordinate systems there is no need for a transformation Many slave sides can be mapped onto one master interface This usually means that each slave side trbb command will include a transformation One part may use the same interface for several faces of the mesh with different transformations This is one way to create a section of a periodic mesh The normal operator is a special transformation which is valid only in the slave side on a block boundary interface It will offset each node of the slave side in the normal direction from the master side Use the inttr command to control the position of the transition elements Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 403 inttr trbb interpolation parameter inttr factor Remarks Transition block boundary interface interpolation parameter can be specified for all subsequent parts The default is 0 5 This controls the relative size of the transition elements within a transition block defined with the trbb command Its value must be between 0 and 1 Figure 361 inttr set to 3 Figure 362 inttr set to 7 dbb display a block boundary in the picture dbb interface_number where interface_number is the block boundary interface number rbb remove a block boundary from the picture rbb interface_number w
500. side of the interface master or slave is moved with this command the other side is also moved with the same command A problem occurs if the automatic association between the master and slave side of this bb interface is not the desired association see the bb command then one of the bb commands usually the slave side should be deactivated and the corners of the regions initialized so that their proper association can be easily determined automatically Then re issue the bb command do not re activate the previous one Example curd 1 csp3 00 0 4 1 54 2 5 295 0 1 4 53 block 1 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 pbs 1 2 2 1 3 3 x 1 161 The tsave will show the following command substituted for the pbs command pb 1 2 2 1 3 3 x 0 5360755 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 212 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual cooref selects feature in the pbs command cooref option where option can be symbolic the pbs command is written to the tsave session file absolute the pb command is written to the tsave session file Remarks The absolute is the default To facilitate the parametric features the default method is to save the coordinates not the label of the point This is because many surfaces and curves will have a different set of points if anything is changed in the parametric environment In most cases the original coordinates will still serve its purpose In t
501. sition between parts 389 395 ISIaDd 1 as 401 Mutiloa eae RA 401 non symmetric 402 Shells seas oe wee ota a os 400 Transition regions 395 Translate 72 149 ID QUEYO era efus Ve etes 155 DY CONSTE 154 coordinates 210 front VIEW eren ere Gard vx 153 picture ous seated east 88 114 polygon surface 155 EPIO ede aaa RU 209 screen planes is dias 152 WEITER qq T 217 TDD Co ea gal tate SEES RES 198 395 441 attaching 10 s erem 161 hierarchy AN 198 208 initial coordinates 398 IIO Sod argh ode me aca 20 island ou dust AE 401 Merging A Wes eget 397 non symmetric 402 pardmeter 2 es 404 DB ioi tose scala uate qd uto qe 403 TER E uds eau I rede CE s 31 198 214 example 4 ood scia wesc ea rac as 216 A orm Sot c RR be Rod 86 Trial Hense c ees eoe RR ens 24 Triangle a eec ed EAE IU Coss rs 20 shell element estais 164 Triple vertex smoothed ura iria 235 TOD bets A NA ar ed A Laced 368 TrueGrid Execution Environment 57 overview of windows 72 Pe 4 33 Rus aul S ow re hse ERE 59 Truncation Pare cl rho cente go 175 Ts Sd Option Leve te Ree 280 Ts Sf option 0000 273 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 506 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Ts Sfi option ooooomoooo o 276 PSAVE dune p Ets 34 149 155 157
502. slave to the master side of the interface with the map option There are 8 ways the corners can be mapped from the slave to the master To determine the proper mapping first label the four corners of both the master and slave as shown below depending on the type of face 4 3 4 3 4 3 N N Q gt J EC STI I face J face K face The following rules determine the mapping identifier means map slave corners 1 2 3 4 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 2 means map slave corners 1 4 3 2 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 3 means map slave corners 2 3 4 1 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 4 means map slave corners 2 1 4 3 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 5 means map slave corners 3 4 1 2 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 6 means map slave corners 3 2 1 4 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 7 means map slave corners 4 1 2 3 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively 8 means map slave corners 4 3 2 1 to master corners 1 2 3 4 respectively This method of choosing the proper mapping has the advantage that you do not need to take additional steps to initialize the four corners of the slave side to insure the proper mapping 5 The number of elements on the master and slave sides of the boundary must be related The relation between the number of element fa
503. splacements A mesh is defined in Cartesian coordinates Null load curve is referenced 0 Displacement in Cartesian coordinates is assigned by index progression The simplified command file follows block 1 5 1 5 1 Ab 26 58 205 215703 c mesh definition fdi 2 1 0 1110 c fixed displacement c definition c null load curve 0 C C C is used amplitude direction L9 Figure 312 Fixed displacement Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 307 merge co fd 0 c display of fixed c displacement fde cylindrical fixed displacement fdc region load curve amplitude options p 0z where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting time for Lsdyna death time specify ending time for Lsdyna where p 0 z is a vector in cylindrical coordinates giving the direction of the displacement The angle is in degrees Remarks This is the same as fd except that the direction is in cylindrical coordinates fdci cylindrical fixed displacement fdci progression load curve amplitude options p 0z where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor and where options can be any of exclude exclude normal directions for Lsdyna birth time specify starting
504. ssuing this res command with a ratio of 1 0 The distances between adjacent nodes have a constant ratio that is they form a geometric progression The distances 6 between nodes i and i 1 obey the relation 9 0 ratio 1 Figure 291 Nodal distribution with 1 control parameter TrueGrid uses this rule to assign coordinates to all edges of the mesh within the specified region and in the specified direction For example Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 283 res 1 1 1222 12 spaces the nodes geometrically along the four edges of the region in the i direction More precisely it affects the edges whose region specifications are LA ct loe ct 2 012 34 Wye E 23 2 and 3 2 2 2 2 2 You can position nodes of several consecutive edges as if they were one edge The geometric zoning will be consistent across the several regions ignoring the interior partitions For example if the j edge 1 1 1 1 4 1 in reduced indices has 7 interior nodes where the first node is located at 0 0 0 and the last node is located at 0 255 0 then the command res l l Lt L 4 15 3 5 will produce the following sequence of y coordinates for the 7 interior nodes 128 192 224 240 248 252 and 254 Each distance between two consecutive nodes will be half of the previous distance in the sequence drs relative spacing of nodes of an edge from both ends
505. st to the mouse first press the Pick button in the Environment Window Then click on the Region button Now click the Left Mouse Button in the Physical Window The nearest vertex to the mouse will be highlighted in red and the corresponding computational vertex will also be highlighted Click the Left Mouse Button again to choose another vertex The same thing can be accomplished by hitting the F5 key when the mouse is close to the vertex In the following pictures the block partitions are shown in heavy lines This is done for emphasis These heavier lines do not actually appear as such on the monitor The part used in this example has Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 128 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual two blocks in each direction It was created with the command block 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 The mouse and a mesh are shown in Figure 77 The closest vertex to the mouse is highlighted in Figure 78 This method highlights vertices as opposed to nodes Vertices lie at the intersection of 3 partitions TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 77 Before Clicking Left Mouse Button Figure 78 After Clicking Left Mouse Button Pick Panel Picking Partial Coordinates In some situations you may wish to only use one or two of the coordinates picked by Label Projection Z Buffer 2 Region or Node For example you may wish t
506. stage the elements look like triangles wedges or tetrahedrons but they still have a full set of nodes 4 in the case of shells 8 in the case of bricks some of which are coincident Only after entering the merge phase and issuing a merge command like the stp command do the coincident nodes become one node This attach function produces a pb command in the text window and the session file tsave Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 164 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Projecting a Mesh Region to a Surface Delete Attach F f Figure 142 Project Button To project a region or index progression of the mesh onto a surface select a single or composite surface and click on the Project button Projection imposes constraints The mesh region or index progression can still be moved but only along the surface of projection In other words once a section of the mesh has been projected onto a surface it will stay on that surface If you are not satisfied with the results ofthe projection either move the mesh region along the surface or click on the Undo button In the case that two different faces of the mesh are projected to two different surfaces and the two faces share an edge that common edge will be placed onto the 3D curve forming the intersection of the two surfaces In the case that three different faces of the mesh are projected to three different surfaces and the thr
507. suse putre tad dn 200 IDEO E tee Got ea fer 20 63 Ms 2 us crias Ges 203 204 A SOAs RR ri eae eS 31 45 part and Lin a eee sd 239 selection 98 107 structure 00 96 127 Udo ee ep e een 171 298 Update us is eco ee acra nes 207 Block Boundary attaching to 157 161 HILOS ss A ate at we esie n 20 e ES oped eta epee 127 IMS s aus odiate gi 0 Pease de 34 A A 440 SPIE qos edu s Con tee ad oe 200 MTO Mur 63 IDSeQ oed e wr RE Rol UR 203 Paribas EN COSI A 31 Widor tastit a tenues thas 171 Bm ITO 2395 dur dec Bre dote e ed t 20 101 0 9 Peat ss E ids ge dd esta 385 pai aco hate ahaa ta RR 417 Bold Synta nity aaeyetae eae dene 56 A hea oe ae t belg 111 Both button aca eee ee e hoy ta 100 111 Boundaries 00005 39 234 CONCAVE rea ue Veras 235 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 475 CONVEX one che cote v 235 BB art GA te Sub Ado 141 curvature 00005 262 both oet 100 111 interpolation 234 Cent coca o poer amid e dS 112 orthogonality 264 COMP A A 111 Boundary conditions IN 141 O tome site anus 351 delete sata tt ee tat tad 104 ME emai cages 353 GW auezuiere De RENS 100 112 convection deus dece aos 369 370 BGC iria Danae 141 convection thermal load 371 Exec Quit LA 105 GUTTE eese ees 374 375 fill eeu i 108 fluid flow 374 375
508. t edge distribute nodes along an edge of a surface edge region edge where edge is the label of a surface edge Remarks Region must be an edge of the mesh and edge must be a surface edge identifier s e The number s is the surface number and the number e is the edge number of that surface To view the edge identifiers of the surfaces in the picture issue the labels sdedge command or click on the Labels and Surf Edge buttons in the Environment Window You may wish to remove all of the interior lines used to display the surfaces This is done with the sdint off command The edge command works like the cur command on a 3D curve This is a disadvantage in many situations because there may be many contiguous edges of the mesh that need to be attached to one surface edge If one edge command is issued for the lot then all of the intermediate vertices of this sequence of simple mesh edges will loose their independence If this is not desired then an edge command is needed for each independent simple edge of the mesh Sometimes it is better to create a 3D curve from this edge of Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 231 the surface so that the curs command can be used instead Also see the cur command The easiest way to issue the edge command is by using the Attach button in the environment window If an insprt command is issued which creates a new partition splitting th
509. t shells quadratic shells and quadratic bricks are Bricks Curve identified and referred to in commands by a unique Q Bricks Curve Point positive number or in some cases several numbers separated by periods Any of these objects that are Figure 61 Labels Panel visible in the physical window can be labeled These objects and more can also be labeled using the labels command through the menu system or by issuing the labels command in the text window This does not include 2D objects such as 2D curves and load curves since they are displayed in a separate 2D Curves window and are controlled with a different set of commands A labeled object can be selected by clicking on the Label button in the Pick panel and clicking on the label in the physical window Do not confuse the Label button in the Pick panel with the Labels panel There are many reasons to pick a label in the picture A labeled object can be selected for a command by clicking on the label and pressing the F8 key This enters the label into a command in one of two ways If a dialogue box is present and the mouse is not located in the text window then the label will be entered into the dialogue box Be sure that the correct field in the dialogue box is active with a solid green curser Otherwise the label will be printed into the text window Ifa surface point or curve point is selected by its label
510. t material number for a region assigns a material number to a region overriding any previous material specifications mt region material_ Remarks A material number need not correspond to a defined material model To set up a correspondence between a material number and a material model you must first select an output option and then use one of the material definition commands to specify a material model and associate it with a material number a positive integer Although you may use a material number before associating it with a material model you cannot specify a material model until after choosing an output option Use the global mate command to set the global default material number Use the local mate command to set the default material number for an entire part This overrides the global material number Another related material command is mtv The specified material number applies to all 2D shell and 3D solid elements within the region You can selectively view different materials within a single part during the Merge Phase Use the m am rm dam and dms commands Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 461 mti assign material number mti progression material_number where progression index progression the material is assigned to material_number number of the assigned material Remarks See the mt command Example The mesh is defined by the block c
511. t mouse button pressed circle the beams of interest Be sure to save the set of beams Set Editing Options Remove Toggle Clear Selection Options Nodes Faces Nodes Required to Select Shells 2 eel Q Shells Bricks Q Bricks Polygons Figure 95 Sets Window Beams Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 137 How to Create a Shell Element Set Open Set Select Pick and Sets in the Environment Window Then in the Sets Window select the Shells option 92v s Figure 96 Check the number of nodes needed inthe set Editing options selection process or select the Mid option If you IEEE remove Toggle choose 1 2 3 or 4 then a shell element will be election selected only if that number of its nodes are found NES within the lasso region If you choose the Mid option DNE then only those shell elements with midpoints in the EVE cea Rede ieecr lasso region will be selected 1 2 s 4 EM Q Shells j i Move the mouse to the Physical Window Draw a curve em m around the shells you want to select while holding the eee Left Mouse Button Figure 97 Release the Left Mouse RM Button and the curve is automatically closed by a s
512. t node dyl constrain spring in the y direction at the first node dzl constrain spring in the z direction at the first node rx1 constrain spring about the x axis at the first node ryl constrain spring about the y axis at the first node rzl constrain spring about the z axis at the first node vAijk vertex of the part as the second node pm2 pointmass_ point mass as the second node pminc2 increment increment the second point mass number when making part replications dx2 constrain spring in the x direction at the second node dy2 constrain spring in the y direction at the second node dz2 constrain spring in the z direction at the second node rx2 constrain spring about the x axis at the second node ry2 constrain spring about the y axis at the second node rz2 constrain spring about the z axis at the second node sddn spd_ material properties sminc increment increment the SPD number when making part replications amp scale_factor scale factor for the material properties orop flag orientation option where flag can be 0 for spring damper acts along the axis 1 for deflection rotations are measured and force moments applied along the following vector 2 for deflection rotations are measured and force moments applied along the projection of the spring damper onto the plane with the following normal prflg flag print flag where flag can be 0 for forces are printed in DEFORC file 1 for forces are not printed in DEFORC file ofsi offs
513. t submenu can be used to active 100 mi een 832946 active 12 sf region 115166 change the order of the commands _ active 14 sf region 2152 6 6 active 16 sf region 116566 found in the history window Only one choice can be made at a time The check mark indicates the one presently in effect by Sequence means that the commands are order by their sequence Figure 297 Selecting the order of the commands Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 295 number i e the order they are issued If the by Command Hierarchy is selected then the commands are ordered the way they are executed The Show All Only menu controls which commands are selected for the history window Show Related Commands Only is the default It means that only commands that apply to or whose scope include the highlighted regions will be placed in the window This applies only at the time the window is created If you wish to change the scope of the window to a new region select the new region and then select the Show Related Commands Only option Alternatively kill the active progression 2 3 13 0 46 active progression 2 3 1 6 130 active progression 1 2 12056 active Show All Only active P active 9 mb active 10 mb region 241246 active 12 sf region 115166 active 14 sf
514. t the x axis ry init for rotation about the y axis or rz init for rotation about the z axis where init is 0 to initialize to no constraint or 1 to constrain Remarks Use this command to set constraints on nodes that cannot be set using the b or bi commands because they are restricted to the global coordinate system Care is needed not to over specify the constraints on a node No warnings are given if a node is over constrained Use the Isys command to define the local coordinate system Ibi local nodal boundary constraints by progression Ibi progression system options where system is the name of a local coordinate system defined by Isys and options is a list of any of the following Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 360 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual dx init for x displacement dy init for y displacement dz init for z displacement rx init for rotation about the x axis ry init for rotation about the y axis or rz init for rotation about the z axis where init is 0 to initialize to no constraint or 1 to constrain Remarks Use this command to set constraints on nodes that cannot be set using the b or bi commands because they are restricted to the global coordinate system Care is needed not to over specify the constraints on a node No warnings are given if a node is over constrained Use the Isys command to define the local coordinate system Example block 1 10 1 1
515. t to have 20 nodes in the i direction 20 in the j direction and 300 in the k direction for a total of 120 000 nodes The reduced indices in i are 1 2 and 3 and represent 1 coordinates indices 1 10 and 20 In j the reduced indices are 1 and 2 for j coordinates 1 and 20 In k the reduced indices are 1 2 3 and 4 for k coordinates 1 100 200 and 300 The rest of the command defines the corresponding nodes in physical space Figure 13 Completed Part a Block with Upper and Lower Faces Projected to Cylin ders Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 35 Block with Faces PROJECTED onto Cylinders Block with Faces PROJECTED onto Cylinders TrueGrid display reduced indices TrueGrid display reduced indices Figure 14 Completed Part a Block with Figure 15 Finely Meshed Part a Block with Two Faces Projected to Cylinders Showing Two Faces Projected to Cylinders Showing Values of Reduced Indices in i j and k Values of Reduced Indices in i j and k directions directions You do not have to determine the reduced indices when you select a region or regions using TrueGrid s Graphical User Interface GUI You choose the regions graphically using the mouse and let the GUI interpret your graphical selections in terms of reduced indices which it passes on to the TrueGrid commands You can specify a region by giving the minimum and maximum values of its reduced indice
516. tant among all the attachments For example a vertex is attached to a point on a surface Then the same vertex is attached to a different point on the surface Since attachments are not permanent not a constraint an object of the mesh will end up in the last place it is put This is so intuitive that is seems not worth saying except that it will be contrasted with the projection to surfaces The order in which commands are executed internal to TrueGrid is known as the command hierarchy The rules of the command hierarchy are important in understanding projections to surfaces The last place a mesh object is placed becomes the starting point for the projection to a surface Attachments can be made before or after a projection to a surface In this example the mesh shown above is projected to the surface Then the vertex in the lower right corner is attached to a different point on the surface Figure 127 After projection Figure 128 3 attachment These attachments create the pb command in the text window and the session file tsave If the result of an attachment is not satisfactory use the Undo button and try another object for attachment See also pb pbs curs edge patch cur cure curf bb Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 158 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Attaching an Edge of the Mesh to a Curve You can shape any edge of the mesh by attachi
517. tc and esets commands attaches a comment to a node set which is required for ALE3D The nsetinfo command reports the node set names and number of nodes The name of the set can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters long Each name of the set must be unique In some of the set commands the logical or Boolean set operators AND and OR are used to create new sets from existing sets The AND operator between two sets means to take their intersection This should not be confused with the common usage of and which might be interpreted to mean the addition of two sets The OR operator does this function The following is an easy way to remember these definitions An element is in set A and set B if it is in their intersection the AND operator An element is in set A or set B if it is in their union the OR operator delset delete a set delset type set_name where type can be node face element where set_name is the name of the set Remarks If a set was constructed but is no longer needed then it is best to delete it with this command This can be important if an output file is going to be written which automatically writes all sets When deleted the set will not be written to the output file and it will not be using memory Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 453 eset add remove elements to from a set of elements eset region operator set_name whe
518. th the sds surface type then the multiple surfaces are interpreted in the or sense that you want the region to be projected to the nearest of the surfaces This command is applied to the nodes that form the vertices edges and faces of a region in that order The initial or interpolated coordinates of each node are used to project it onto the specified surface Projection Algorithm The simplest case is when a node is required to be on one surface The initial or interpolated coordinates of the node is used to locate the point on the surface which is closest to it We call this point the projection onto the surface Note that if our projection point is an interior point of the surface and if the surface is smooth then our projection is the classical definition of a normal projection The tangent plane at this point is the plan that intersects the surface at this point of projection with the same normal as the surface of projection Surface 1 p Surface 1 L LI L1 ae Vij Wee Tangent Extension of Surface IP mem E IP Initial Point P Projected Point IP Initial Point P Projected Point Figure 286 Projection onto Smooth Surface Figure 287 Projection onto Smooth Surface The sds surface type is not directly available in sf but you can use it indirectly Define a numbered surface by sd sds and then use the surface in sf sf region sd Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scien
519. that is how to choose the outward normal vector te constant nodal temperature te region temperature where temperature is the constant temperature Remarks Use the temp to set the majority of the part to a constant nodal temperature Use this command to set the exceptional regions Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 380 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual tei constant nodal temperature tei progression temperature where temperature is the constant temperature Remarks Use the temp to set the majority of the part to a constant nodal temperature Use this command to set the exceptional regions temp part default constant nodal temperature temp temperature where temperature is the constant nodal temperature Remarks This command works with the te and tei commands You can set the constant temperature to that which is needed for the majority of the part Then use the te or tei command to change the constant temperature for the exceptional regions tepro variable nodal temperature profile tepro region load_curve_ scale expr base_expr where load curve it is the load curve number or zero scale expr is a FORTRAN expression for the scale and base expr is a FORTRAN expression for the base temperature Remarks Both the base temperature and load curve scaling factor can be functions of the x y and z coordinates of the node and the i j and k indices of the node This comman
520. the Installation Instructions for TrueGrid for a complete description Install_UNIX txt or Install_UNIX pdf for UNIX operating systems Install_WIN txt or Install_WIN pdf for WINDOWS operating systems Install_LINUX txt or Install LINUX pdf for the REDHAT LINUX operating systems Install_OSX txt or Install_OSX pdf for APPLE OSX operating systems Two Modes and Two Input Channels Once you have set up the execution environment you are ready to run TrueGrid On UNIX LINUX and OS x systems type tg in any window to run TrueGrid There are several ways to run TrueGrid in a WINDOWS system on a PC 1 click on START PROGRAMS the XYZ program group and TrueGrid ii click on the TG shortcut on the desktop you must set up the shortcut iii type tg in a Command Prompt Window iv click on a TrueGrid command input file ending with tg The last option requires that you set a flag in TGControls so that the system knows to run TrueGrid with files ending with tg TrueGrid can be run in two modes with and without the Graphical User Interface The Graphical User Interface GUI has menus graphical displays of the mesh a text window and mouse control of the picture The GUI is active by default One can deactivate the GUI by issuing the g nogui option on the execute line when running TrueGrid from a window The prompts for commands will Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGri
521. the bb and the T related trbb command A block cL boundary interface can be formed y from a vertex edge or face of the mesh This is a way to glue two parts together or form periodic o e UJ UJ Figure 134 Lass Figure 135 Attach mesh to boundaries of the mesh BB block 1 11 21 1 11 1 1 23010 ph211211y 5 splint 1 1 1 3 1 1 i 11 2 00110 bb 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 mx 375 rz 45 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 161 Attaching a Mesh Edge to a Point Picked by Z Buffer TrueGrid display TrueGrid display Figure 136 Before Attach Figure 137 After Attach Figure 136 and Figure 137 show an attachment of an edge of the mesh blue to the visible point on the surface The mesh edge was previously selected in the Computational Window and the surface point was picked by Z buffer in the Physical Window Only the x coordinate was checked in the Pick panel so only the x coordinates of the edge were re assigned This attach produces a pb command in the text window and the session file tsave Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 162 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Attaching a Vertex to a Point Picked by Projection While in the Pick panel select a single surface or a single curve While this single surface or single curve is highlighted click on
522. the examples TrueGrid Output Manual This manual has all of of the commands and options to define the material models and analysis options specific to each output format supported by TrueGrid This is available in PDF format TrueGrid License Manager Manual This manual describes the operations of the license manager used by TrueGrid It is intended for system administrators It is available in PDF format RELEASENOTES Every minor release of TrueGrid does not warrant a new version of the manuals Instead the improvements are listed in these files which accompany the new version of TrueGrid This is available in text and PDF format Install_UNIX These are the installation instructions for TrueGrid for UNIX operating systems It is available in text and PDF format Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 V Install_WIN These are the installation instructions for TrueGrid for WINDOWS operating systems It is available in text and PDF format Install LINUX These are the installation instructions for TrueGrid for REDHAT LINUX operating systems It is available in text and PDF format Install_OSX These are the installation instructions for TrueGrid for APPLE s PowerPC running the MAC TIGER OSX operating systems It is available in text and PDF format License The varies licensing agreements for TrueGrid are available in text and PD
523. the flow direction corresponds to the j direction k if the flow direction corresponds to the k direction or coor x yz to supply the flow vector option list for none must be one of t for move only in the normal direction or n for move only in the tangent plane option list for i j k or c can be any of dx for x displacement dy for y displacement dz for z displacement rx for rotation about the x axis ry for rotation about the y axis rz for rotation about the z axis followed by a value of 0 to initialize to no constraint or 1 to constrain Remarks See sfb above sw assign nodes that may impact a stone wall sw region stone_wall_ Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 366 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks Set the properties of a stone wall using the plane command Nodes are not automatically selected based on there proximity to the plane The nodes must be selected using the sw or swi command swi assign nodes that may impact a stone wall swi progression stone_wall_ Remarks Set the properties of a stone wall using the plane command Nodes are not automatically selected based on there proximity to the plane The nodes must be selected using the sw or swi command syf assign faces to a numbered symmetry plane with failure syf region symmetry_plane_ failure Remarks Set the properties of a symmetry plane with failure using the plane command Nodes are not automatically
524. the name of the saved session file from tsave to some other name after you complete you TrueGrid session Initiation tg s mysave o mysim Global Properties The TrueGrid graphical user interface is initialized and the Text Menu window is displayed You are now in the Control Phase Use the OUTPUT main menu to select the output option such as DYNA3D as the simulation code for which an input file will be generated Set the time step and other analysis options by using the ANAL YSIS menu and DYNAOPTS Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 64 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual dialogue Set material and element properties for each numbered material using the MATERIAL menu and DYNAMATS dialogue Set the default initial velocity by using the VEL ACC menu and VELOCITY dialogue Set the properties on a numbered contact surface using the INTERFACE menu and SID dialogue Define a numbered load curve using the 2D CURVE menu and LCD dialogue Geometry Mesh Change to the Merge Phase to inspect the geometry to be generated by using the MERGING menu and MERGE dialogue The Text Menu Physical and Environment windows are displayed Import an IGES file by using the CAD menu and IGES dialogue Also surfaces can be formed by using the SURFACE menu and SD dialogue Curves can be formed using the 3D CURVES menu and CURD dialogue The easiest and most versatile 3D curve is a spline Use the 3D CU
525. the physical and computational windows will be re drawn after the mesh is re generated Each time the undo button in the environment window is clicked this undo command is automatically issued 9 Select Regions For Display These commands let you select only some of the regions of a part to be displayed Such selective viewing can be very useful for a complicated part with many regions For example you can look inside of a complicated part This can be done by peeling away the top layer of the mesh Only the reduced index faces and edges of the mesh are displayed in the graphics so by peeling away the top layer you can expose the next layer of reduced index faces and edges This makes it possible to view the skeleton of the mesh These commands select regions that already exist they cannot add or delete regions from the mesh Only those regions which have not been deleted can be displayed When a region is selected for interactive mouse movement the entire region outline is animated Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 298 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual even if only part of the region was selected by these commands to be displayed The default is to display all regions of a part These commands are available only in the Part Phase When a selection is made by one of these commands both the physical and computational graphics windows will be redrawn to reflect the new regions to be disp
526. the point s coordinate s can be entered into a command in two different ways by pressing the F7 key If a dialogue box is present and the mouse is not located in the text window then the coordinate s of the point will be entered into the dialogue box Be sure that the correct field s in the dialogue box are active with the green curser and with the first entry having a solid green curser Otherwise the coordinate s will be printed into the text window Note that you can choose all or a subset of the coordinates to be printed by checking the coordinates in the Pick panel If a region or progression of the mesh is selected Part phase only and a surface is selected by its label then clicking on the Project button not to be confused with the Projection button in the Pick panel will project the mesh object to the surface by issuing the sf or sfi command In a similar fashion and clicking on any labeled surface point curve point curve or surface edge and clicking on the Attach button will move the selected mesh object to that labeled object by automatically issuing the appropriate move or initialization command Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 115 A surface surface edge or curve can be selected for Projection in the Pick panel not to be confused with the Project button Labeled surface or curve points can be selected and their coordinates will be automat
527. the restore command is that the picture is not returned to the default position The rotations of the picture are preserved One use of this command is to frame in onto a subset of objects in the picture First remove all the objects except those to be framed Then center the picture Finally return all of the other objects to the picture The Cent button in the environment window performs the same function 6 Computational Window TrueGrid has two types of mesh objects that can be selected using the mouse These selected portions of the mesh can be used for various reasons The two types are Regions and Index Progressions Please note that the ability to make these types of selections in the mesh are available only in the part phase because the block structure of the part or its topology is only known while in the part phase A Region is described by six numbers the minimum and maximum values for each of the three reduced indices reduced indices are described in the introduction Thus a region can be anything that is rectangular in computational space a vertex of the mesh an edge of the mesh a face of the mesh or a prism shaped volume or block in the mesh An Index Progression can be any part of the mesh that you can select with the mouse in the Computational Window An index progression might describe one region or many regions For example all six faces of a cube can be described by one index progression Copyright 1992 20
528. the rotation constraint about the y axis at first end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at first end point release the x translation constraint at last end point release the y translation constraint at last end point release the z translation constraint at last end point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the y axis at last end point release the rotation constraint about the z axis at last end point release the x translation constraint at intermediate point release the y translation constraint at intermediate point release the z translation constraint at intermediate point release the rotation constraint about the x axis at intermediate points release the rotation constraint about the y axis at intermediate points release the rotation constraint about the z axis at intermediate points orientation angle for the cross section two nodes used to determine warpage in the beam method of determining curvature where option can be 1 for center of curvature 2 for tangent of centroid arc 3 for bend radius 4 for arc angle 430 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual Remarks See ibm above Example The region 1 1 2 3 2 2 of a cylinder part is turned into beams in the j direction 4 circles and k direction 18 segments by the jbmi and kbm commands resp
529. theta rz theta raxis angle x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn rxy ryz YZx tf origin x axis y axis where each of the arguments consist of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s ij label of a labeled point from a surface ftf st origin Ist x axis 1st y axis 2nd origin 2nd x axis 2nd y axis where each of the arguments consist of a coordinate type followed by coordinate information rtxyz Cartesian coordinates cy rho theta z cylindrical coordinates sp rho theta phi spherical coordinates pt c i label of a labeled point from a 3D curve pt s ij label of a labeled point from a surface inv invert the present transformation esca scale factor xsca scale factor ysca scale factor zsca scale factor normal delta offset the slave in the normal direction from the master Remarks A face of a solid or an edge of a shell can be saved using the bb command to form the geometry of a face of a solid or an edge of a shell in a subsequent part with differing mesh density using the trbb command This subsequent face or edge referred to as the slave will be glued to the first face or edge referred to as the master by using the same identification number in the use of the bb and trbb commands The nodes on the slave side are forced to have matching coordinates with the corresponding node
530. they were issued All nodal interpolations are done in the coordinate system of the part For a cylinder part the x y and z coordinates are interpreted as r 0 and z coordinates respectively Many of these commands use the coordinate positions on the boundary nodes to interpolate the interior nodes This is done for 1D 2D and 3D regions of the mesh 1D An edge of the mesh is considered a 1D region Its boundaries are the two end vertices The lin and lini commands are the only commands in this section that can be applied to an edge Since this is the default interpolation automatically used between adjacent vertices one would only use this command if the edge spanned multiple regions The interior nodes are all of the nodes between the two end vertices including any intermediate vertices Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 234 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 2D A face of the mesh is a 2D region Its boundary nodes are the edge nodes around the perimeter of the face None of the perimeter nodes are modified Only the interior nodes are interpolated The position of the interior nodes are a function of the position of the boundary nodes 3D A volume is an example of a 3D region of the mesh The boundary nodes are those that form the faces surrounding the volume None of these boundary nodes are modified Only the interior nodes are interpolated The position of the interior nodes are a funct
531. this option then TrueGrid will recetve commands interactively Session Rerun File TrueGrid always saves your work by writing commands to a file If you invoke the option s rerun_f then TrueGrid uses the file name that you provide to save all commands needed to reproduce the mesh This file will also contain any error or warning messages Otherwise TrueGrid will use the file named tsave After your TrueGrid session you can rename the file and submit it as a command input file for another session You can modify the mesh by modifying this file and rerunning it as a batch file As a safety precaution if there already exists a file by the name tsave it will be renamed tsave If there already exists a file named tsave it will be renamed tsave You have two chances to rename or permanently save what is found in the session file before it is deleted Mesh Output File Use the o output_file to name the file generated by TrueGrid as the input for the simulation code specified by you during your TrueGrid session This file contains a description of the mesh and all other parameters you have specified formatted specifically for that simulation code If you do not invoke this option then TrueGrid names the file trugrdo This file is written only when 1 an output option such as nastran has been issued 11 the merge phase has been entered 111 the write command has been issued It is assumed by this that other com
532. tial da Pee 382 initial vtm ts A 382 Ma oS 382 prescribed ft db 373 prescribed Esa iaa done 373 prescribed vft 4 2 sad tees 373 prescribed vfti aa 374 profile tepro any ses v eres 381 Template RO de 277 Temporary variables 43 TepfOt epa bss 381 JT Grmitiati b A AA 62 Tetrahedron cs ina 20 eletient ss 4h Ved Lake Pea a 164 Text dialogue BOX iocus 4 174 Text window 77 108 149 155 156 mesh selection ile ora 97 modes iS 77 Text Menu window 12 TES e ad O S nf fole ya 31 42 198 252 ir erc 21 bol audet RT ae Na ER 439 POLAK a qu sey ape obo a 249 Jc ERE EE 213 TEES gnus Qe a doe DR C 31 198 258 example uso e rs 260 INSP uid iud AS 200 tela ac eit ae aeris een 249 transfinite interpolation 252 Tg executable edits cox caus Mele eG 69 70 Tg exe executable 3 22 eo ed Denko ad 71 TO AU Leta ee erre Lt iar Bee ees 27 TGControls 58 60 71 Tod executable arc 69 TGDISPLAY 00 nara id 61 JGBONT orena ECC C ES Gre as 60 TGHOMNE taberna das ee 25 26 Tgimage ps postscript Sca dene Deere ed 83 Postscript file it soe x Mea 83 TMV A Suc a RU E 87 Tox executable co matre ce 69 70 TH osea d taceat Nace RI pA 413 TOT arate Ea EE Mun tren dane 413 416 O i Aosta Rasa ane ee eens 413 416 Thickness Beams yd siege aun 417 shells 624 Asse tonto SA 415 417 shells variable 414 415 Sh ec 417 SSE cedi e e ite ban ead 417 TIL eme E IAS ME Cre
533. tics Commands A ry A eae oe naan 437 mea choose a way to measure mesh quality 437 meai choose a way to measure mesh quality 438 2l Parts Commands cua dose ar Hace hed KT Wk kA PEGS eed sida 439 cycorsy frame of reference for cylinder part oo oooooooo 439 endpart complete the part and add it to the data base 440 savepart save all part data in a parts database o o oooooo o 441 22 Replication Of Parts s ba dA ee eda tois IR d e Ute vx ALS ee ARA AA 441 lrep local replication of a path 45 2 s ro we ota eek Pie Res 442 grep global replication OF a park 2c ero Ie Reese oca 445 23 Merging f Parts ouis 5e eg ea AP die ee ay te ya Id AM 446 fn tied node sets with failure coo ii oer ue rr Ea Ree 449 fni tied node sets with failure on Fe epi Coco o 451 245 Output Commands ciscus E EE RR ENDE RN d eS RENE 451 epb element print block 2222 es d oce te dederas vd atea 451 npb nodal print block o ces IUE A Eee es 451 supblk select regions to be combined in the block structured output 451 Vac O rrr PT 453 delset delete det s eo ex EE EA RI A ERST I REO EIAS 453 eset add remove elements to from a set of elements 454 eseti add remove elements to from a set of elements 455 fset add remove faces to from a set of faces o o oooo o 455 fseti add remove faces to from a set of faces o ooooo o 457 nset add remove nodes to fr
534. tific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 274 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual But there are many situations where the projection cannot be normal The surface may not be smooth a common example is the surface made by rotating a polygonal line about an axis This is not smooth at its knot points A vertex s projection also may not be normal when the closest point of the surface is an edge of the surface There are situations where it is not possible to define the projection of a point onto a surface For example there is no well defined way to project the center of a sphere onto the sphere In such situations TrueGrid will print a warning message and do nothing In other cases a vertex or edge may be projected to the intersection of two surfaces Figure 288 A node is moved to the intersection of two surfaces using a Newton iterative method In each iteration the node is moved toward the intersection of the surfaces This is done by finding the point of projection to each of the two surfaces The two tangent planes are intersected with the plane that passes through the original position of the node and the two points of projection The intersection of these three planes is the approximate point of intersection of the two surfaces After moving the node toward this approximate point of intersection the process is repeated In the special case when two tangent planes are nearly tangent to each other an alternative method is used
535. time offset is vU 0 The amplitude of the laser shock is damped according to table defined by the dist command The table in dist command describes a multiplier of shock amplitude varying by xn yni perpendicular distance from the laser beam The command file follows X0 y0 z0 laser beam block 1 1 2151 21 05 2 27 2 25 c mesh definition led 10 11 1 c load curve 1 definition pr 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 10000 c pressure is assigned c to region 11 11 22 c by load curve 1 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 337 c with amplitude 10000 arri 1 velo 1 e6 laser 14 5 5 10 0 laser shock for load curve 1 with velocity 1 e6 with distribution 1 and point 4 5 5 c direction vector 1 0 0 dist 1 table 051220 c distribution 1 given by table 051220 O AALA A merge co pr 1 c display pressure for load curve 1 csf cross section forces for DYNA3D csf region cross_section_ before_or_after where before_or_after is 0 or 1 respectively fa fixed nodal rotations fa region 0 0 0 fai fixed nodal rotations fai progression 0 0 0 Remarks This is the same as fa except that 1t applies to an index progression fe concentrated nodal loads fc region load curve amplitude f f f where load curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor Copyright
536. tion display display has the usual meaning in the X Window System used by UNIX LINUX and OS x it chooses the display This option adheres to the X standard and passes this data to the windowing system In some cases you might have to quote the disp ay argument to protect it from the shell For example one might type tg display mercury 0 0 where mercury is the machine name that owns the display monitor You may have to run xhost for permissions Y ou also can specify the display with the TGDISPLAY environment variable There is no equivalent feature for a PC running WINDOWS Mesh Generation The TrueGrid mesh generation process is divided into three phases Control Part and Merge You issue commands to enter and exit these phases In the Control Phase some of the tasks that you can perform are define surfaces and curves read surface and curve data from a CAD CAM IGES file select the simulation code for which an input file is to be generated set simulation code specific options and element and material properties define global part replications and transformations and set global loads and conditions You can then issue a command to initialize a new part thereby exiting the Control Phase and entering the Part Phase In this phase you construct the mesh for a part by performing geometric and topological operations You can use the surfaces and curves defined or acquired in the Control Phase and you can also define and use add
537. to a surface then the edge nodes will be smoothly lifted off of the 3D curve so that the end of the edge can lie on the surface For example Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 224 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual LIT TT T Edge attached to curve Edge end also projected block 1 6 11 1 11 1 sd 1 cy 0 4 00 0 curd 1 csp3 00 6 1 curs 211221 sfi 1 2 1 sd 1 OY pa Se pa p hi aa rn Oo pa pa In most cases it is not very useful to attach an edge of the mesh and project it to the intersection of two surfaces The exception is when the two surfaces are nearly tangent In this case the intersection may take a long time and it may fail This is because the super convergent Newton method for intersecting two surfaces cannot be employed in this case since it would cause a division by zero Ifthe edge is attached to a 3D curve that is very close to the intersection of these two surfaces then the method for intersecting nearly tangent surfaces will converge in a reasonable period of time In severe cases use the curf command so that the edge is forced to remain on the 3D curve and the intersection of the two surfaces is skipped For example sd 1 csps 2 2 1100 0 O 1 0 0O 1 0O O 1 0 0 1 0001000 O 1 1 0 sd 2 csps 2 2 1100 0 O0 1 0 O 1 00100 999 0 0166 200 998 1 0234 2 1 0 block
538. to tad 439 TEC eura at teda REV pma 213 TED cette epe ary a recta te d 215 Rxz o PERPE PER 439 Rs de eee d endete 88 91 151 oon PEIPER 111 IX y suse reset duck 92 A 439 rotate picture 113 NINE eh exci d eet etree Axe dia 213 nas rao NAAA Eee 215 Ryz e ee ace aiken ied 213 Mt s Soke okies Ne eh 215 Tos cue tend close A dnd 88 91 Doth inam Ue ato cia 111 ji UP 92 Ee dusactate Sock fe ndto dee Pe anisa rat 439 rotate picture uoce Se eg 113 ILES aola indue irte es es 213 VE as 215 Rzx EE a iaa 439 a ind 213 A A ter ESI 215 Save SO AA co A a EUM acu 133 tsave fil A ades 34 Save As Button ooooo o 133 Save button nd a 182 SaVepabi d sd oui e Ver bafi ra 441 DU tud hoi rau tte te reds 470 Scale cu crate pareat ei ac 92 Scope Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 500 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual command 293 History ao a 296 Screen Plane button 150 Scroll arrows es depo aa 76 Scroll mode of text window 77 AA Geen heds 76 178 in dialogue window 173 Point List 45er voe reds 187 DO ass eed s alesse 37 142 273 280 441 A a 419 blends awed een 179 A due MSIPETESSS 179 composite surface 180 erilesu ooo rca e eme EE E 179 display surface numbers 305 EXAMEN 65 function eec ve resto mae 264 WP ce oua aec utyon e t teod m ae 415 MO dorada eR Xx ORIS
539. tor mass_flo mass flow inlet interfac interface outflow axis jt assign a node to a numbered joint jt joint_ local_node_ options where Joint_ is the number of a joint defined by jd page 895 local_node_ is the joint s local node number and options is a list of any of the following options nijk pxyzmaterial_ cy rho theta z material_ s rho theta phi material_ inc increment minc incrment llinc increment gline increment v x offset y offset z offset Remarks assign a vertex of the mesh to be a joint node create a new rigid body node in Cartesian coordinates and use it as a joint node where the material number is that of a rigid material create a new rigid body node in cylindrical coordinates and use it as a joint node where the material number is that of a rigid material create a new rigid body node in spherical coordinates and use it as a joint node where the material number is that of a rigid material increment joint number for each duplicate part increment material number for each duplicate part joint local node number local replication increment joint local node number global replication increment move the newly created joint node First define the joint with the jd command page 895 A warning message will result if the joint is not defined before it 1s referenced by this command Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 357
540. tor redefines a face set to be only those faces which are found to be both in the original set and among the selected faces Selected faces can be added by using the union operator This causes any selected faces to be included in a set if it is not already in that set The minus operator removes all faces in a set which are among the selected faces Example mE Figure 389 face set umvp by fseti The face set umvp is initialized by the index progression 3 upper face in 389 Then it is extended by union with faces resulting from the index progression 5 front face in 389 The left bottom corner of the upper face represented by the index progression 3 1 3 1 3 is subtracted from the face set umvp TrueGrid display face set umvp cylinder 1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 2 3 4 30 15 0 15 30 1 3 5 7 9 fseti 3 umvp fseti 5 or umvp fseti 3 1 3 1 3 umvp merge Figure 390 labeled face set umvp nset add remove nodes to from a set of Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 457 nodes nset region operator set_name where set_name is the name of the node set where operator can be for initial assignment AND for intersection with node set OR for union with the node set to append the selected nodes to the node set 2 for removal from the node set Remarks The initial assignment creates a node set If the node set with the sa
541. traight line segment between endpoints Theenclosed Figure 96 Sets Window Shells TrueGrid display TrueGrid Draw Figure 97 Selection Curve by 2 Nodes Figure 98 Shell Set is Marked area turns white and the selected shells are identified by crosses Figure 98 The selection is based on visible nodes so you can achieve various effects by setting different Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 138 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual display modes Wire Hide Fill You can modify the active shell set by adding removing and toggling shells Add Remove Toggle options For example if you have a complex model first restrict the parts and or materials to those containing the elements of interest Then draw the picture in hide or fill Choose to select with 3 or 4 nodes If you use 1 or 2 nodes you may be selecting shells that may not be visible This may be useful in some cases Then you may have to remove some elements Use the 1 node selection mode and draw the picture in wire mode Click on the Remove button Then circle a single node from a shell element you want removed Be sure that this node is not connected to elements you wish to keep There are many variations to this technique which you will develop as the need arises After editing you can save the active set by typing its name and hitting the Save button How to Create a Surface
542. tton id eae tet 142 elements cc ree E 4rd 203 Add TEPON pee sy ice a MER EE 199 Add button dues Pent e tr ers 134 Address ne xit eiu M aet aid tb 24 After button Point list 181 Algebraic Methods 23 43 207 252 259 285 Algorithm of interpolation 241 OF selection sa ss ce oa nad 50 Am I oor sacs ei hum aca reist a n nas 461 AMD PG cerned at benedi ahs 70 And element set sinde Vedas 454 face Sel A ces esa A 455 node set des Misia ed ib 458 AT i e ANA Nt A 94 109 151 Anisotropic mate al usos e pd 414 Annotations A tte ote ge Deere 78 au Ss Paton Sea Mets tt tei aut 78 daad erica tes erie Para RR 79 cr MOERORE 80 Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 473 dads Seeking ana BAS 80 E Nt CEA 82 raad tia iPad ee edi ea Neo dies 83 TAC oe toe eoe ae ae dE 84 ANSYS boundary conditions 371 VA epe ix eL im Dd 371 Pug cT 21 Power P esr as Cd 70 PRES COO uad Aisne ute soap aaa 143 300 ATOT yuh dg Site pb ae da nece 143 300 ATTI os OE 332 Arrow AG iod ese ets da E 78 Arrow button in text in window 77 ATOW KEYS 20 iaa een pure ida 76 AS ets Booking E 31 285 CUL ac Ghats E a E ote acad 228 edge projection 276 ESI Qus de Dead Neid 236 L3 8 teure ob eitis iut Race 239 o 264625 ete tote iba ey 248 ber 252 bor c 239 Asin Expressions 28
543. u grab across distinct lines a new line feed will be issued in the command line To reissue a number of commands grab from one prompt to another one All the commands between the two prompts will be reissued one at a time Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 77 4 Graphics Commands ad define a numbered annotation ad annotation_ option where option can be cap message specifies a caption mark places a cross at the specified coordinates arrow draws a circle circle radius draws an arrow line 6 draws a solid line segment dline draws a dashed line segment Remarks Annotations are all 2D they are attached to the screen For example if the picture is rotated the annotations will not be rotated with the objects These annotations are used in conjunction with postscript to create pictures with annotations for documents such as this manual Once the annotations are correct then issue the postscript command and draw These annotations were not intended to be very easy to use You may have to experiment by reissuing the command several times until you get what you want Each annotation has a positive integer identifier Coordinates range from 0 to 1 with the origin at the lower left corner of the screen Use pad to position it The default position is the center of the picture There are several types of captions This is only for the physical wind
544. ueGrid Manual April 6 2006 195 III Part Commands Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 196 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 1 Geometry and Topology The topology of the mesh refers to the way a geometry is decomposed into blocks There are many ways to do this for even the simplest of geometries For example you can use a single block to form the shape of a sphere but the result would be very poor because there would be elements that have very large and very small angles The better approach is to use 7 blocks to form what is referred to as a three dimensional butterfly topology This produces the best angles in the elements Obviously the choice in topology is critical to producing a good mesh Single block topology Multiple block topology In a multi block topology you can build each block as a separate part Then you must take care that the blocks meet This would not be taking advantage of the full capabilities of TrueGrid and you will be inefficient Alternatively you can build multi block parts Then many of the steps you took to make sure the blocks matched at the interfaces will not be needed For example the multi block mesh of the sphere above was created with one part With experience you will learn when to use a single part with multiple blocks and when to break a geometry into multiple parts Some power users of TrueGrid will try to use the least number of
545. ueGrid Manual April 6 2006 437 The orthogonal option measures three angles at all 8 corners of a brick element It then graphs the deviation from 90 degrees Each shell element is measured at each of the four corners Degenerate or collapsed edges are treated as though the angles with the edge are all zero resulting in a 90 deviation Jacobian measures the shape of each element by sampling the Jacobian matrix of the map from the unit cube to the brick element at 27 Gauss points In order to graph this data the Jacobian matrix is reduced to a single number by first determining the eigenvalues of the matrix The eigenvalue whose modulus is found between the other two is used to scale the Jacobian matrix The matrix is divided by the cube of this modulus The determinant of the resulting matrix is graphed This is done to keep TrueGrid unitless Shell elements are given thickness to make this measurement The stiffn options measures the stiffness or condition number of the Jacobian at 27 Gauss points Shell elements are given thickness to make this measurement The smallest option determines the smallest dimension of an element as the measurement A brick element has 12 edges 12 diagonals along the faces and 4 interior diagonals A shell element has 4 edges and 2 diagonals The warp option measures the angle between the normals at opposing nodes of each face The aspect ratio is defined as the ratio of the largest diagonal to the smallest d
546. umbers of a transformations defined by the last lct command for the current part Remarks Each transformation identified in the list of local transformations is applied to a duplicate of the current part The original part does not get added to the model by default However a sequence number of 0 in the Irep transformation list means to include the original part without a transformation Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 442 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual By default all replicates of the part will have the same material number But you can have the material numbers change by a constant for each local replicate of the part The material number of a replicate will be computed as original material number local material increment sequence number of replicate The Imi command sets the local material increment Similarly you may increment sliding interface numbers with a local sliding interface increment set by the Isii command and you may increment joint numbers with a joint command increment set by the ine option of the jt command Up to 300 transformations can be listed in the lrep command If the grep command is also used the result is a product of the two lists of transformations For example suppose the let command has 3 transformations Let 3 rz 90 z 180 rz 270 Irep 0 1 2 3 This produces 4 copies ofthe part including the original untransformed part Now also suppos
547. unning the AIX UNIX operating system Tg uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Tgx does not use the OpenGL library and is compliant with the X Windows system Both of these programs are 32 bit programs Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits of accuracy if you use the accuracy command APPLE UNIX Workstation There are two versions of TrueGrid tg and tgx for the APPLE Power PC running the OSX UNIX operating system Tg uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Tgx does not use the OpenGL library and is compliant with the X Windows system Both of these programs are 32 bit programs Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits of accuracy if you use the accuracy command INTEL or AMD PC Running LINUX There are two 32 bit versions of TrueGrid tg and tgx for the LINUX workstations Tg uses OpenGL to perform rendering and event management Tgx does not use the OpenGL library and is compliant with the X Windows system Both of these programs are 32 bit programs Both the address space and most of the floating point calculations are done in 32 bits Under the best conditions you will be limited to about 40 000 000 nodes and about 5 digits of accur
548. ured mesh to intersections or Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 20 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual other combinations of surfaces and curves see the sf pb mb and curs commands Some of the tools for generating high quality meshes include multi linear interpolation see the lin command transfinite interpolation see the tf command and elliptic smoothing see the relax unifrm tme and esm commands Diagnostic tools make it easy for you to measure the quality of your mesh see the mea command Then you can make local or global changes to the mesh to improve the quality if desired TrueGrid features a graphical user interface that lets you generate your mesh by pointing and clicking Prompts dialogue boxes and an on line help package help you create your mesh You learn how to use the tool by using it You can view the mesh as you build it The arbitrary undo and redo facility lets you easily experiment with modifications to the mesh These interactive features are designed to give you the fast feedback you need to speed up the mesh generation process To know the commands mentioned above is to know the core commands in TrueGrid to generate a mesh You can easily learn to use the other commands in TrueGrid as the need arises TrueGrid is currently available on many Unix workstations such as SUN IBM RS 6000 series HP 9000 700 series COMPAQ DEC and SGI workstations It is a
549. urve cure region curve where curve is the number of a 3D curve Remarks cure performs two functions in one command First it places the first and last vertices of the edge at the endpoints of the specified 3D curve Then it distributes the remaining nodes of the edge along the 3D curve just like the cur command with the exception that a closed curve is not a special case The edge of the mesh will cover the entire 3D curve Example block 1 6 11 1 3 1 5 12 0 5 0 curd 1 csp3 00 5 75 01 25 55 0 2 05 75 0 55 cure 12 13 21 1 i c NM Part amp Curve before attachment Cure attachment curs independently distribute edge nodes along a 3D curve curs region curve where curve is the number of a 3D curve Remarks Curs has the same effect as issuing the cur command for each simple region along an edge of the Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 230 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual mesh The initial position of the vertices along the edge will determine their position along the 3D curve Each of these nodes will be independently moved to the closest point on the 3D curve Then the nodes between the vertices will be evenly distributed along the curve Example block 1 6 11 1 3 1 5 12 0 5 0 curd 1 csp3 00 5 75 01 25 55 0 2 05 75 0 555 curs 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 lx dl Part amp Curve before attachment Curs attachmen
550. urves Figure 154 Step 5 Pick vertex Figure 155 Step 6 Move vertex on surface Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 170 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual The Undo Feature do History Resume Figure 156 Undo Button Press the Undo button in the Environment Window to deactivate the most recent active mesh command This is a function only found in the part phase and does not undo all commands For example no database commands such as surface 3D curve material or sliding interface definitions are undone Also no graphics commands can be undone with this function The insprt and the mseq mesh commands cannot be undone with this function Each time you click on the Undo button another mesh command is undone until all the active commands for the present part are deactivated You cannot undo the command block cylinder blude that started the part If you wish to undo the entire part type the abort command These function prints an undo command into the session file tsave The History Button Undo o Resume Figure 157 History Button Press the History button to view a table of active inactive and deactivated mesh commands of the present part This command is only available in the part phase You can use this to undo an undo by reactivating a deactivated command This can also be used to deactivate a command other than the most recent active mesh
551. uses the mesh to be re initialized so that the entire mesh can be re generated This re generation is automatic and is accomplished by executing all of the commands in the command tables in their proper order i e according to the command hierarchy The command tables can be viewed using the history table It is possible to deactivate a command from the command tables using the decmd command This will also cause the mesh to be re generated A command that was deactivated with the decmd commands can be re activated with the actemd command Use the history table to determine the command sequence number This sequence number is the argument to the actemd command Both the physical and computational graphics can only be re drawn after the mesh is re generated As usual the part is not actually re generated until a graphics command is issued decmd deactivate a mesh command decmd command sequence ft Remarks This command deactivates a mesh command within the scope of the presently generated part It is automatically issued when the history window is used to deactivate a command When a part is generated the meshing commands are saved in a command table Each new meshing command causes the mesh to be re initialized so that the entire mesh can be re generated This re generation is automatic and is accomplished by executing all of the commands in the command tables in their proper order The command tables can be viewed with the history table It is
552. ut file which exhibits the difficulty that you are having Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 29 5 TrueGrid Basic Concepts This section will discuss some of the concepts and notations which permeate TrueGrid Two Kinds of Mesh Figure 6 Physical mesh of the Block with spline interpolated edges with 8 SubBlacks Figure 7 Computational mesh of the Block In TrueGrid there are two representations of a mesh physical and computational Figure 6 and Figure 7 The physical mesh lies in the physical space where you want to model something while the computational mesh lies in an abstract space with only integer valued points There is a correspondence between every node in the computational mesh and the corners of the blocks usually referred to as vertices or control points of the mesh You move the physical mesh to fit the real object you are modeling In contrast the computational mesh does not move The computational mesh serves as a convenient way of identifying regions of the mesh which are to be the object of varies functions Object in the physical space have three coordinates named x y and z Objects in the computational space have three coordinates or indices named i j and k From a mathematical perspective a mesh is a vector function that maps a three dimensional region the computational mesh to a three dimensional region the physical mesh Eve
553. ut string such as a number a list of numbers or a file name These strings are to be entered from the keyboard Appearance Each line where you provide an input string begins with a greyish colored prompt often in the form stuff is needed here Sometimes a detailed description ofthe input requirements appears in white text above this line Each input string is also marked by a hollow or solid green rectangle A hollow green rectangle represents a place where a cursor could be and the solid rectangle indicates the current position of the cursor Usage The solid green cursor indicates the position where keyboard data will be entered You can make Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 174 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual any line s hollow green rectangle turn to a solid rectangle by clicking anywhere on that line The Enter key must be used to complete the data for the a line and to advance to the next line When you have completed a line with the keyboard Enter key the green rectangle will turn red You will not be allowed to EXEC or EXEC QUIT if there is a green rectangle at the end of a line Usually the context will make it clear what kind of data is needed When in doubt look up the relevant command use the HELP button in the menus the help command or this manual In all cases where a number is required an equivalent Fortran like expression will do just as well For example y
554. utes ev 143 301 Darged iue Mrd dn De o eA 143 302 Das i exemit ee 31 286 CUE as caute da e DER MNT 228 edge projection 276 ESI Lorie t iuste eb A cade 236 example iu cies wake As 221 260 Dil ES EY 239 teldX IN 248 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 480 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual TME Se eor FE ees 259 Dasd 6 3 2000s uk uu nal Re ERI 142 example vods oda ona duo 118 Data files su see tad ewes Fa iru 25 b sce cae te wees a ea 143 404 IDB US mara da dte ad agence aed 143 405 A A uere 142 A ace nis ak aca ee es 142 Dende rr 31 34 42 156 198 199 example dsd sachs 65 Deactivate oooooo o o 43 293 Deactivated command 171 in history table 294 DCD 15s Lusia ates red de lea ridus 22 Debug mesh 72 105 127 171 292 293 DECS uba da 21 24 workstation s a ate dea 69 Decmd tata cake 171 294 297 acted arvo 3 e reves areas 297 WO ic ice onto usa vip Pedes 298 DSIeB5 sr ono oput ute V P 290 Del vom 31 34 104 105 156 198 199 Delete BUTTON des a EN 104 Character s u ode hee Re E ines 178 index progression 156 progression 4 24 s cue RE eg 199 PETION a Lv eye Eee en 156 199 248 region amp relax 234 region and tme 259 regions andunifm 268 a ETE 453 PORE our og outs ata Sareea 178 Delete button 66 156 182 O A fed he S eg 453 De
555. ve number amplitude amplitude constant Remarks See the remarks on fl vfl prescribed boundary flux with functional amplitude vfl region load curve ft amplitude where load curve t a load curve number amplitude amplitude expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions See the remarks on fl vfli prescribed boundary flux with functional amplitude vfli progression load curve ft amplitude where load curve 8 a load curve number amplitude amplitude expression Remarks The expression can be any valid FORTRAN like expression with x y z 1 j and k and valid parameters in the expressions See the remarks on fl Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 372 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual ft prescribed temperature ft region load_curve_ temperature where load_curve_ a load curve number temperature temperature constant Remarks This specifies a time dependent temperature boundary condition on the region It is assumed that the temperature used by the appropriate simulation code will be the product of the temperature and the amplitude of the load curve at the appropriate time in the simulation fti prescribed temperature by progression fti progression load_curve_ temperature where load_curve_ a load curve number temperature temperature constant Remarks This specifies a time depe
556. vers the commands that are used to initially generate the mesh and impose constraints loads and conditions The Geometry Commands chapter discusses how you can use TrueGrid to generate and manipulate the geometry of your part s prior to attachment or projection The Assembly Commands chapter describes the means of combining different parts into a complete model verifying it and creating a formatted output file The Global Commands chapter describes commands which can be used in all phases of a model s development Notice that these first 3 chapters roughly correspond to the three phases in TrueGrid and then the Global chapter contains commands common to all three phases The Output chapter contains the keyword commands used to control the output format Detailed information about the material models and analysis options can be found in the TrueGrid Output Manual f MAS MAT i ya Figure 5 Mesh of a Chain If you know the name of a command and want information on it the index is the quickest way to find it If you are looking for a particular capability you can either look for an appropriate keyword in the index or else try the table of contents The manual s table of contents is an excellent place to look for a capability since it includes with every command name a brief description of what the command is used for Getting Help For help call 925 373 0628 or email at info truegrid com If possible please include an inp
557. w position of a partition by specifying a reduced index and direction left right and the number of elements from that partition We use the terminology left of a partition to mean that the partition will be located at a smaller index than the given partition You must of course specify whether the new partition should be an 1 j or k partition It is perfectly valid to grow the mesh with this command That is you may specify a number of nodes to the right of a maximum index partition or a number of nodes to the left of a minimum index partition When a partition is added between existing partitions the new vertices remain in the same position as the old vertices When a partition is added to the left of the first partition or to the right of the last then the new vertices are initialized to the same location as the corresponding vertices on the first or last partition respectively So the new regions appear to be collapsed to the old regions All of the commands issued up to the point of the insertion are adjusted appropriately In fact there is only one subtle difference between the mesh before and after the insertion of an internal partition When blocks are split new degrees of freedom are introduced Default interpolation only applies to a single block Therefore if only default interpolation applies to the blocks that are split then these blocks will be different The original mesh is obtained by issuing lini tfi if the default has
558. wire frame outline of the region is highlighted and shown being rotated as the mouse is moved around the axis of rotation Moves the region in a plane parallel to the viewing plane This parallel plane will pass through the selected vertex or node or if a region or progression was Selected through the original center of mass This option is not available for any object except a vertex while creating a cylinder part This is used primarily for a single vertex in the Part Phase or a single node in the Merge Phase and when the displayed picture is in Hide or Fill graphics mode If it is used with a region or progression the function will be the same as in Screen Plane When a vertex or node is selected the tip of the displacement vector will be moved along what ever is visible in the picture When there is nothing in the picture beneath the mouse then the point drops to an arbitrary back plane This option is not available for any object except a vertex while creating a cylinder part Choosing any of these causes the region to be moved only in the local x y or z directions respectively In the cylinder part X means the radial coordinate and Y means the angular coordinate Choosing any of these causes the region to be move in one of the local coordinate planes In the cylinder part X means the radial coordinate and Y means the angular coordinate 150 Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved April 6
559. x without invoking the function of the dialogue window You can left click your mouse on the EXIT button of this box and then confirm with a yes Or you can type Control Q with the mouse anywhere within the dialogue box window When you are in a submenu and middle click on a command with the HELP button off TrueGrid will create a dialogue box as appropriate unless the command has no arguments in which case TrueGrid will execute the command immediately Left clicking on a command will always result in a dialogue box In either the main menu or a submenu you can get help simply by left clicking your mouse on the HELP button and then left clicking again on a command button Pressing the HELP button will toggle it on and off While the HELP button is on pressing any button other than EXIT or MAIN MENU will create a help window for that button When the main menu is active the help window will contain a list of all the commands in the selected category The command names are highlighted in yellow and every command name is followed by a brief description of the command and its options When a submenu is active the help MATERIAL properties and assignment window will contain a alas description of the selected command in black lettering on a white background along with a full description of the command s syntax in white lettering on a black background TrueGrid will destroy the help window when you toggle the HELP button off or when
560. xperiment with this method When a face is specified there can be no holes in the interior of the face This method uses the boundary edge nodes as the boundary condition The coordinates within the interior of the face are treated as a first guess to the solution to the elliptic partial differential equations referenced above Projection to surfaces are preserved as the mesh is smoothed Any controlled zoning on the interior using the res drs as das or nds command will be lost due to the relaxation When a volume is specified there can be no holes in the interior of the volume due to deletions This method uses the boundary face nodes as the boundary condition The coordinates within the interior of the volume are treated as the initial guess to the solution to the elliptic partial differential equations referenced above When a volume is relaxed using this method the six bounding faces are not automatically relaxed References P D Thomas and J F Middlecoff Direct Control of the Grid Point Distribution in Meshes Generated by Elliptic Equations 4144 Journal Volume 18 Number 6 June 1980 pages 652 656 Examples In the following examples the various methods of interpolation and smoothing are compared One edge is smooth while the opposite edge has a corner Most interpolations have difficulty with extreme concave or extreme convex boundaries Esm can be tailored to avoid this problem Some of the methods lin and tfi are pure
561. y ndli to the faces of the index progression by the null load curve with amplitude 2800 QOQ0000 merge co fc 0 c display concentrated nodal loads for the null curve c the loads are not merged yet use stp Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 347 pr pressure load pr region load_curve amplitude where load_curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor Remarks Pressure is a scalar quantity applied to a face of an element A positive pressure acts on a face in the direction opposite the positive normal of the face All faces within the specified region are assigned the same pressure condition When a load curve accompanies the condition the pressure becomes time dependent Ifthe load curve number is zero no load curve is specified and the pressure load is considered a constant TrueGrid will by default select a positive normal direction for the face of an element The positive normal direction can be specified using the orpt command pri pressure load by index progression pri progression load_curve amplitude where load_curve is a load curve number or zero amplitude is an amplitude factor Remarks This is the same as pr except that it applies to an index progression Example A part is defined in Cartesian coordinates and the mesh is manipulated The direction of the normals is defined by the orpt command The pr
562. ysical and Environment windows Computational Window Text Menu Window merge gt MERGING DIAGNOSTIC GRAPHICS ANIMATE EXPLODE MATERIAL INTERFACE SPRING MASS ELEMENT PARTS REPLICATE DIS VEL ACC FORCE BOUNDARY RADIATION ELECTRIC OUTPUT 2D CURVE 3D CURVE SURFACE CAD SETS MISC HELP EXIT Physical Window TrueGrid display i PE OE EN Environment Window IE clin M EE Display List Figure 28 Complete Screen Copyright 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved 74 April 6 2006 TrueGrid Manual 3 The Text Menu Window The menus and text window save the same purpose the selection of functions They are combined to save space on the screen merged MERGING DIAGNOSTIC GRAPHICS a ANIMATE EXPLODE MATERIAL INTERFACE SPRING MASS ELEMENT PARTS REPLICATE DIS VEL ACC FORCE BOUNDARY RADIATION ELECTRIC OUTPUT 2D CURVE 3D CURVE SURFACE CAD SETS MISC Figure 29 Text Menu Window Menu Window The main menu for TrueGrid normally resides at the bottom of the Text Menu Window Figure 29 Each menu item is a category of commands except for the last two These last two menu items have a g
563. z direction composite radiation flux narho for fluid density nap for pressure nat for fluid temperature or len for mixing length scale arr name can be one of the holding array names vi va vb vc vd ve vf and vu Copyright O 1992 2006 by XYZ Scientific Applications Inc All Rights Reserved TrueGrid Manual April 6 2006 375 inizonei initial conditions for the REFLEQS option by progression inizonei progression var_name arr_name where var_name can be nvu for i velocity component nvv for j velocity component nvw for k velocity component nvpp for pressure correction nvk1 for kinetic energy of turbulence nvk2 for kinetic energy of turbulence nvdl for dissipation of turbulence energy nvd2 for dissipation of turbulence energy nvh for stagnation enthalpy nvrx for x direction composite radiation flux nvry for y direction composite radiation flux nvrz for z direction composite radiation flux narho for fluid density nap for pressure nat for fluid temperature len for mixing length scale arr_name can be one of the holding array names vi va vb ve vd ve vf and vu setsor set REFLEQS source terms setsor region var_name coefficient value where var_name can be nvu fori velocity component nvv forj velocity component nvw for k velocity component nvpp for pressure correction nyki for kinetic energy of turbulence nvk2 for kinetic energy of turbulence nvdl for dissipation of turbulence energy nvd2 for dissipation of tu

TrueGrid ® User`s Manual, Volume 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

TrueGrid &reg; User`s Manual, Volume 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

TrueGrid ® User`s Manual, Volume 1